HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4108Cc - Southeast Water Reclamation Plant Contract #4 - Bid 12425 - 03_25_19934',e �so (t�
4109
o n i n u e---G� on
ba+ck 4 - 6
1621
►� UbeIM, 41c�-cc
ha��
�, ��;j jqq3
Resolution No. 4108C
March 25, 1993
Item #11
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by
and between the City of Lubbock and BRB Contractors, Inc., for SE Water
Reclamation Plant Improvements, Contract #4, attached herewith, which shall
be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of
this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully
covied herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this
ATTEST.:
Betty o ns , ty ecre ary
APPROVED JCS TO CONTENT:
is or ilnkn, Purchasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Ddrrald G. Vandiver, -First Assis
City Attorney
DGV:js/MMCONTR.RES
D2-Agsada/Hay 17. 1993
w
w
LUBBOCK TEXAS
CONTRACT NO. 4
PLANTS 2 & 3 IMPROVEMENTS,
LABORATORY IMPROVEMENTS,
co
AND
DEMOLITION OF PLANT 1
BID # 12425
VOLUME 2 OF 2
v
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS
for
TITLE: CONTRACT 4 - PLANTS Z i 3 IMPROVEMENTS,
LABORATORY IMPROVEMENTS AND
DEMOLITION OF PLANT 1
BID NIX+IBER: 12425
PROJECT NUMBER: 2133.553103-9776
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: Purchasing Departm t
-1-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subiect Panes
VOLUME 1
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1
01015
- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Project Requirements
1
8
01070
Abbreviations
1 :
3
01300
Submittals
1 :
10
01400
Quality Control
1 :
2
01500
Temporary Facilities
1 :
5
01610
General Equipment Stipulations
1 :
7
01620
Equipment Schedule
1 :
3
01630
Pipeline Schedule
1 :
4
01640
Valve and Flow Element Schedule
1 :
2
r
DIVISION 2
- SITEWORK
02050
Demolition and Modifications
1 :
7
02200
Earthwork
1 :
15
t`
02250
Trench Protective Systems
1 :
2
02480
Landscaping
1 :
2
02525
Drives and Sidewalks
1 :
7
02605
Sewer Manholes
1 :
5
02612
Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe
1 :
13
02619
Concrete Culvert Pipe
1 :
3
02628
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe
1 :
2
02675
Disinfection
1 :
3
02702
Sewer Pipe Installation and Testing
1 :
4
02704
Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing
1 :
3
02832
Chain Link Fencing
1 :
3
DIVISION 3
- CONCRETE
03300
Cast -in -Place Concrete
1
19
03410
Prestressed Concrete Wall Panels
1
6
03600
Grout
1
3
DIVISION 4
- MASONRY
04200
Building Masonry
1
11
�^
DIVISION 5
05550
- METALS
Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors
1
2
05990
Structural and Miscellaneous Metals
1
14
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06090
Carpentry
1 : 2
06190
Prefabricated Wood Roof Support System
1 : 4
06600
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fabrications
1 : 2
06620
Plastic Sheet Liner
1 : 6
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
�. (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT 110. 4 )
(17578 ) TC-1
F
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Subiect Pages
DIVISION 7
- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07160
Bituminous Dampproofing
1 : 1
07240
Exterior Finish System
1 : 5
07320
Mission Roofing Tile
1 : 1
.,
07531
Single -Ply Roofing, Mechanically Fastened
1 : 6
07540
Elastomeric Deck Coverings
1 : 2
07600
Sheet Metal
1 : 3
07900
Caulking
1 : 3
DIVISION 8
- DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110
Steel Frames
1 :
3
08112
Stainles Steel Doors
1 :
4
08200
Wood Doors
1 :
1
08330
Rolling Stainless Steel Door
1 :
3
08410
Aluminum Entrances and Assemblies
1 :
4
08700
Finish Hardware
1 :
4
08800
Glass and Glazing
1 :
3
DIVISION 9
- FINISHES
*..
09250
Gypsum Wallboard
1 :
5
j
09310
Ceramic Tile
1 :
4
1
09510
Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
1
: 3
09660
Resilient Floor Coverings
1
: 3
r"
09680
Carpet
1
: 2
09820
Cementitious Coating
1
: 2
09850
Elastomeric Solventless Polyurethane Liner
1
: 4
09900
Painting
1
: 15
09950
Vinyl Wall Covering
1
: 3
DIVISION 10
10300
- SPECIALTIES
Louvers
1
: 1
10990
Miscellaneous Specialties
1
: 2
VOLUME 2
`
DIVISION 11
- EQUIPMENT
11140
Vertical Diffusion Vane Pumps
1
: 12
11160
Progressing Cavity Pumps
1
: 9
11185
Submersible Sump Pumps
1
: 5
11370
Bio-Tower Filter Rotary Distributors
1
: 3
11430
Clarifying Equipment
1
: 16
11570
Diffused Aeration Equipment
1
: 16
11652
Odor Control Dampers and Shutoff Valves
1
: 3
r
11950
Laboratory Equipment
1
: 3
DIVISION 12
- FURNISHINGS
12625
Laboratory Furniture
1
: 8
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 ) TC-2
1
F
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Subiect
Pages
r
DIVISION 13
- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
`
13221
Bio-Tower Filter Media
1
: 10
13400
Instrumentation
1
: 17
1
13500
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
1
: 7
System
13520
Computer System Software
1
: 3
r"
13530
Remote Terminal Units
1
: 5
13540
Communications Equipment
1
: 1
DIVISION 14
14630
- CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Traveling Bridge Crane
1
: 8
DIVISION 15
- MECHANICAL
15060
Miscellaneous Piping
1
: 21
15061
Cast Iron Pipe
1
: 12
15062
Steel Pipe
1
: 16
15065
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe
1
: 7
15100
Miscellaneous Valves
1
: 16
15101
Butterfly Valves
1
: 11
r
15102
Eccentric Plug Valves
1
: 7
15104
Resilient -Seated Gate Valves
1
: 4
15112
Sluice Gates
1
: 7
15114
Slide Gates
1
: 7
r-
15130
Pressure Gauges
1
: 4
15140
Pipe Supports
1
: 7
15400
Plumbing
1
: 5
r►
15500
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
1
: 17
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 Electrical
1 : 22
16150 Adjustable Frequency Drives
1 : 12
16200 Communication System
1 : 6
16310 Secondary Integral Unit Substations -
1 : 6
Liquid -Filled
16395 Medium -Voltage Motor Control Equipment
1 : 7
16480 600 Volt Class Motor Control Centers
1 : 7
r
FIGURES
Number
Title
Following Page
1-02200
Embedments for Conduits
02200-15
1-02605
Details of Standard Manholes
02605-5
2-02605
Details of Standard Manholes
02605-5
(LUBBOCK.
TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
NO. 4 )
fr`
f
(17578
) TC-3
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Number Title Following Page
1-02612 Maximum Joint Opening for Deflected Rubber 02612-13
and Steel Joints - Prestressed Concrete
ti Cylinder Pipe
-
1-11430
Anchor Bolt Detail at Center Support
11430-16
2-11430
Rotating Weir
11430-16
►"'
1-11570
Dissolved Oxygen Measurements
11570-16
2-11570
Sample Plotting of Oxygen Transfer Data
11570-16
3-11570
Aeration Manifold and Air Distributor
11570-16
Supports
1- 13400
Instrument Calibration Report
13400-17
1-15062
Dimensions for Steel Pipe Fittings
15062-16
1-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Steel Pipe,
15130-4
2 Inch and Smaller
2-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Steel Pipe,
15130-4
`
2-1/2 Inch and Larger
3-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Ductile Iron
15130-4
Pipe, 6 Inch and Smaller
4-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Ductile Iron
15130-4
Pipe, 8 Inch and Larger
5-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Rigid Copper
15130-4
Tubing
6-15130
Gauge Installation Details - PVC Pipe
15130-4
7-15130
Gauge Installation Details - FRP Pipe,
15130-4
4 Inch and Smaller
8-15130
Gauge Installation Details - FRP Pipe,
15130-4
6 Inch and Larger
9-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Inline Flow-
15130-4
Thru Diaphragm Seal
fl
10-15130
Gauge Installation Details - Gauge Isolator
15130-4
r"
1-15140
Pipe Hangers
15140-7
2-15140(a)
Hangers and Supports
15140-7
2-15140(b)
Hangers and Supports
15140-7
1-16050
600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting
16050-17
Cable (THHN-THWN)
2-16050
600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power
16050-17
Cable (XHHW)
3-16050
600 Volt, Single Pair Shielded
16050-17
11
Instrument Cable
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO.
4 )
(17578
) TC-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Number
Title
Following Paste
4-16050
600 Volt, Single Triad Shielded
16050-17
Instrument Cable
5-16050
600 Volt, Multiple Pair and/or Triad
16050-17
Shielded Instrument Cable
6-16050
600 Volt, Multiconductor, No. 14
16050-17
AWG Control Cable (THHN-THWN)
7-16050
600 Volt, Multiconductor, No. 12
16050-17
AWG Control Cable (THHN-THWN)
8-16050
8,000 Volt, Single Conductor Power Cable
16050-17
(EPR)
9-16050
15,000 Volt, Single Conductor Power Cable
16050-17
(EPR)
10-16050
Cable Test Data Form
16050-17
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 ) TC-5
F
Secti
on 11140 - VERTICAL DIFFUSION VANE PUMPS
1. SCOPE. This section covers the following vertical diffusion vane
pumping units:
No. Units
Unit
Designation
Service
Location
5
IP-2201,
-2202, -2203, -2204,
Primary Effluent and
Bio-Tower Filter Influent/
-2205
Recirculation
Recirculation Pumping
Station
3
EP-4001,
-4002, -4003
Effluent
Effluent Pumping Station
2
EP-4004,
-4005
Effluent
Effluent Pumping Station
1
NP-4001
Nonpotable Water
Effluent Pumping Station
Each pumping unit shall be complete with a pump, pump barrel, electric
motor, pedestal, subbase, anchor bolts, and all other appurtenances
specified or required for proper operation.
Each pumping unit shall be located outdoors. Each pumping unit shall
have above floor discharge. Pumping units IP-2201 through -2205 shall
be enclosed line shaft and oil lubricated. Pumping units EP-4001
through -4005 and NP-4001 shall be open line shaft water lubricated.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
2.01. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
all vertical diffusion vane pumps shall conform to the applicable
requirements of ANSI/AWWA E101 and the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipu-
lations shall apply to all.equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Power Supply. Power supply to IP-2201, -2202, -2203, -2204,
-2205; NP-4001 will be 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase. Power supply to
EP-4001, 4002, 4003, 4004, 4005 will be 4160 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
2.04. Anchor Bolts. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
galvanized and shall comply with the anchor bolts and expansion anchors
section.
Anchor bolts should be accurately located and centered in pipe sleeves
having an inside diameter approximately 2-1/2 times the bolt diameter
and a length approximately 8 times the bolt diameter. A square anchor
plate with thickness of approximately 1/2 the bolt diameter and side
dimensions 4 times the bolt diameter shall be welded to the bottom of
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -1-
each sleeve, with the anchor bolt extended through the plate and welded
thereto.
2.05. Shop Painting. All iron and steel parts which will be in contact
with pumped liquid or submerged after installation, including inside of.
pump column and all exterior surfaces below the subbaseplate, shall be
shop cleaned by blasting in accordance with the coating manufacturer's
recommendations and painted with an epoxy coating system. The coating
shall have a dry film thickness of at least 10 mils and shall consist of
a prime (first) coat and one or more finish coats. At least one quart
of the ,finish coat material shall be furnished with each pump for field
touchup.
All other surfaces shall be shop painted in accordance with the General
Equipment Stipulations.
2.06. Snare Parts. Two sets of the following spare parts shall be
furnished for each model of pump: wearing rings, seals, bearings, and
all other parts recommended by the manufacturer.
Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in accordance with the General
Equipment Stipulations, with labels indicating the contents of each
package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner as directed.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The pumping units shall be installed as indica-
ted on the drawings at the Bio-Tower Filter Influent/Recirculation
Pumping Station and Effluent Pumping Station No. 2.
Pumping units IP-2201 through -2205 will operate in parallel to pump
primary effluent and recirculation water to the rotary distributors of
the bio-tower filters, one pumping unit will serve as a standby. An
electrically actuated butterfly valve shall be provided in the discharge
line of each unit. Recirculation water .will be withdrawn from the bio-
tower filter effluent pipes and will combine with primary effluent prior
to the pumping units wetwell. The recirculation water flow rate from
each bio-tower will be metered with two transit time ultrasonic flow
meters. Modulating butterfly valves will be used to control the rate of
recirculation water flowing into the wetwell.
Pumping units EP-4001 through -4005 will operate in parallel to pump
water to the Lubbock Land Application Site. An air/vacuum relief valve,
tilting disc check valve, and electrically actuated butterfly valve
shall be provided in the discharge line of each unit.
Pumping unit NP-4001 will operate to pump water into the plant non -
potable water system. An air/vacuum relief valve, butterfly type
control valve with electric actuator, and tilting disc check valve shall
be provided in the discharge line of the unit.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified,
pumping units shall be designed for the following operating conditions
when operating at maximum speed.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -2-
.L
Unit designation
IP-2201, -2202, -
EP-4004, -4005
EP-4001, -4002,
EP-4001
2203, -2204, -2205
-4003
Number of units
5
2
3
1
Rated total
head, ft
39
80
90
225
Capacity at
rated head, gpm
3,020
5,000
10,280
350
Minimum capacity
at indicated
gpm/ft.
2,400144
4,000/90
81000/100
280:'30
Maximum shutoff
head, ft
60
130
150
280
Normal operating
head, range, ft
30-44
70-110
70-110
218-232
Maximum
(nominal) pump
operating speed
at rated head,
rpm
1,200
1,200
900
1,800
Submergence
above floor of
vetvell
Maximum, ft
10
13
13
20
Mini=umt ft
7
6
6
8
Minimum NPSS
available at
suction flange,
feet (at rated
head)
35
34
34
34
Maximum bhp
required at the
motor for any
point in the
operating head
range
39
127
292
26.6
Minimum pump
efficiency at
rated head,
percent
80
80
80
76
Nominal size of
pump discharge,
inches
20
20
30
6
Maximum length
of any component
or subassembly,
feet
5
5
5
5
Vertical
distance from
vetvell floor to
centerline of
above floor
discharge, ft
23
26.5
26.5
26.0
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -3-
Unit designation
IP-2201; -2202, -
Ep-4004, -4005
EP-4001, -4002,
SP-4001
Z203, -2204, -2205
-4003
Maximum vertical
distance from
centerline of
above floor
discharge to
bottom of
subbase, ft
2
3.0
3.0
2.5
Minimum shop
1.5 times shutoff head.
as pressure on
bowl assembly
Pump setting
As indicated on drawings.
For design and rating purposes, the water to be pumped shall be assumed
to have a temperature of 85 F.
Performance of each pump shall be stable and free from damaging cavita-
tion, vibration, and noise in the operating head range. The performance
of each pump having an enclosed impeller shall be based on a radial
running clearance between the bawl wearing ring and impeller of not less
than 6 mils, or 0.5 mil per inch of wearing ring diameter, whichever is
greater. The performance of each pump having a semi -open impeller shall
be based on a radial running clearance between the bawl and the impeller
of not less than 15 mils.
Each pumping unit shall be designed so that maximum reverse rotation due
to reverse flow at rated feet of head will not cause damage to any
component.
5. MATERIALS.
Pump Bowls Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30.
Impellers Bronze, ASTM B584.
Impeller Wearing Rings Martensitic stainless steel,
Brinell 200-250.
Bowl Wearing Rings Martensitic stainless.steel,
Bowl Assembly Shaft
Bowl Bearings
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -4
Brinell 300+.
Martensitic stainless steel,
AISI Type 410 or 416.
Bronze, ASTM B584, water
lubricated, except suction case
(bowl) bearing shall be
permanently packed with water-
resistant grease.
Line Shaft (open line shaft) Martensitic stainless steel,
AISI Type 410 or 416.
Line Shaft (enclosed line shaft) Carbon steel.
Shaft Couplings (enclosed Carbon steel.
line shaft)
Shaft Couplings (open line shaft) Martensitic stainless steel.
Line Shaft Enclosing Tube Steel pipe, extra strong;
(enclosed line shaft) ASTM A53, Grade A.
Open Line Shaft Bearings Goodrich "Cutless Rubber", water
lubricated.
Enclosed Line Shaft Bearings Bronze, ASTM B584, oil
lubricated.
Line Shaft Bearing Retainer
Stuffing Box Housing
Stuffing Box Bearing (EP-4001,
-4002, -4003, -4004, -4005 and
NP-4001)
Stuffing Box Bearing IP-2001,
-2002, -2003, -2004, -2005
Stuffing Box Hardware (open line
shaft)
Lantern Ring (open line shaft)
Stuffing Box Packing (open line
shaft)
Water Slinger
Pump Column
(12 inch and smaller)
Pump Column (larger than 12
inches)
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -5
Bronze, ASTM B584; ductile iron;
or carbon steel if integral with
column.
Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30.
Bronze, ASTM B584, grease
lubricated.
Bronze, ASTM B584,
oil lubricated.
Corrosion -resistant metal.
Bronze or glass -filled teflon
for 2-1/2 inch OD and smaller
shaft; bronze only for shafts
larger than 2-1/2 inches.
Braided, graphited or teflon
impregnated Kevlar.
Rubber or bronze.
ASTM A53, Grade A standard
weight steel pipe with threaded
couplings.
AWWA C200 steel pipe at least
3/8 inch thick with flanged
couplings.
Pedestal and Subbase Cast iron or fabricated steel.
Epoxy Coating
Prime (First Coat) Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard Epoxy", Tnemec
020-1255 Pota-Pox Primer", or
Valspar "78-D-7 Tank Lining
Epoxy".
Finish Coat Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard Epoxy", Tnemec
"20-2000 Pota-Pox", or Valspar
"78-W-3 Tank Lining Epoxy".
Thread Lubricant
Pipe Threads Teflon paste type thread sealer,
suitable for potable water
service.
Line Shaft Coupling Threads
6. PUMP CONSTRUCTION.
Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane
"Thred Gard Nickel", Never-Seez
"Pure Nickel Special", or
Permatex "Nickel Anti -Seize".
6.01. Pedestal. Each pump pedestal shall be designed to support the
drive unit and the entire pump assembly. Suitable openings shall be
provided for access to the stuffing box and other accessories. A regis-
tered connection or dowels shall be provided between the motor and the
pedestal. A suitable stuffing box leakage collector with a 1/2 inch
tapped drain opening shall be provided. Each pocket shall have a drain
connection.
On above floor discharge pumping units, a 1/2 inch NPT tapped and
plugged pressure gauge connection shall be provided on the horizontal
center line of the pump discharge outlet. The connection size and
configuration shall conform to Figures 53 and 54 of the Hydraulic
Institute Standards.
The pump discharge outlet shall be integral with the pedestal and shall
terminate in a flanged connection with diameter and drilling conforming
to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125.
6.02. Subbase. A rigid subbase shall be provided to support each
pedestal. The subbase shall have rounded corners; abutting surfaces
between subbase and pedestal shall be machined to provide uniform
bearing.
Each subbase shall have a center opening large enough to permit with-
drawal of the entire pump assembly.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ? 11140
(17578 ) -6-
A
r .
r
L
6.03. Line Shaft Stuffing Box. The line shaft stuffing box of oil
lubricated units (Pumping Units IP-2201 thru -2005) shall be provided
with 0-ring seals or packing and shall be tapped for an oil line
connection.
The stuffing box housing of enclosed line shaft units shall have means
for placing the line shaft enclosing tube in tension and shall maintain
pressuretight joints.
6.04. Line Shaft Stuffing Box. The line shaft stuffing box housing of
Pumping Units EP-4001 thru -4005 shall contain a bronze bearing, a
grease line to the bearing terminating in a lantern ring or annular
port, at least four rings of packing, and a split gland. The gland
halves shall be interlocked at assembly and held in position at all
operating pressures by at least two bolts or studs.
6.05. Line Shaft Stuffing Box. The line shaft stuffing box housing of
Pumping Unit NP-4001 shall contain a bronze bearing, a bypass water
passage to the bearing terminating in a lantern ring or annular port for
relieving pressure on the stuffing box, at least four rings of packing,
and a lantern ring opposite a grease passage for lubricating the
packing. The gland halves shall be interlocked at assembly and held in
position at all operating pressures by at least two bolts or studs. The
bypass line shall contain a throttling valve for adjusting; the amount of
leakage at the gland.
The line shaft stuffing box of Pumping Units No. EP-4001 thru -4005, and
NP-4001, shall be grease sealed and shall have two grease filled lantern
rings or annular ports.
6.06. Impellers and Bowls. Impellers shall be accurately machined and
balanced and securely locked on the pump shaft.
Impellers for Pumping Unit NP-4001 shall be enclosed or semi -open type.
r
Impellers
for all other pumping units shall be enclosed.type.
!
Bowls and
impellers for pumps having enclosed impellers shall be
equipped
with wearing rings. Wearing rings shall
be designed to
maintain
pump efficiency. Wearing rings shall be
securely locked in
place so
that they will not move or loosen during
any condition of
operation
or handling, including reverse rotation
of the pump.
6.07. Pump Column. Column sections shall be of such design and con-
struction that accurate alignment will be obtained when the column is
assembled.
The length of the pump column shall be sufficient to locate the suction
inlet above the wetwell floor a distance of not less than 1/2 times the
bell diameter nor more than 3/4 times the bell diameter, or as indicated
on the drawings.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -7
t'
6.08. Bearing Retainers. Open line shaft bearings shall be mounted in
streamlined spiders supported by the column assembly. Rubber bearings
shall be positively held in place by means of shoulders, retainer rings,
or other mechanical methods.
6.09.- Suction Bowl Inlet. Each pump shall be equipped with a flared
suction bowl inlet.
6.10. Shafting. All shafting shall conform to the requirements of
Sections A4 and A5 of the governing standard. Shaft diameter shall be
not less than the minimum permitted for the applicable driver nameplate
horsepower rating.
An adjusting nut shall be provided at the top of the motor for raising
or lowering the shafting to properly center the impellers in the bowls.
6.11. Shaft Couplings. Shaft couplings shall transmit the maximum
combination of torque and thrust and maintain alignment between adjacent
shaft sections. During assembly, anti -seize thread lubricant shall be
applied to male threads of all threaded connections.
6.12. Line Shaft Enclosing Tube. The entire length of the line shaft
below the pedestal shall be enclosed. The enclosing tube sections shall
be internally threaded for fastening to and supporting each line shaft
bearing. The design of the threaded connections shall establish and
maintain bearing alignment.
6.13. Solenoid Oiler. A solenoid sight feed oiler having at least one
quart capacity shall be provided on units IP-2201 thru IP-2205. The
solenoid shall have Class B molded coil, with windings fully epoxy
encapsulated for moist conditions and continuous operation in 40 C
ambient, and shall be rated 120 volts, single phase. The coil shall
have a NEMA Type 1 case for conduit. The oiler shall be connected
across the terminals of the pump motor.
The solenoid oiler shall have a thermostatically controlled 120 volt
external heat tape. The heater electrical circuit shall be continuously
energized. The heat tape and reservoir shall be covered with insulation
with a weatherproof exterior. Convenient means for checking oil level
shall be provided.
7. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall
be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive
vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment.
The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance
at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the vibration
displacement (peak -to -peak), as measured at any point on the machine,
shall not exceed the following limits.
Nominal Rotative Sneed
1,800 rpm
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
Maximum Displacement
3 mils
11140
-8-
1,200 rpm 4 mils
900 rpm 5 mils
At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical
speed of a unit or components thereof shall be less than 0.8 or more
than 1.3.
S. DRIVE UNITS.
8.01. Electric Motors 480 Volt. Each motor for IP-2201, -2202, -2203,
-2204, -2205; NP-4001 shall comply to the General Equipment Stipulations
except as specified herein. Each motor shall be totally enclosed fan
cooled (T.E.F.C.) vertical, hollow shaft, squirrel -cage induction type.
The motor shall be rated for continuous duty at 400 C ambient, 460 volt,
3 phase, 60 Hz.
Each motor shall be of the energy efficient type in accordance with NEHA
MG 1-12.55.
Routine tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.51 shall be performed on
the assembled motor.
The motors shall be supplied with space heaters, sized to prevent
condensation on the motor core and windings. Space heaters shall be
isolated and located to prevent heat damage to motor components and
adjacent painted surfaces. Space heaters shall be suitable for 120 volt
t ac single phase power.
Terminal boxes shall be provided with sufficient space for motor leads
and accessories. Terminal boxes shall have terminals and conduit hubs
sized for the cables and conduit indicated on the drawings.
Bearings shall be effectively protected from contamination and dirt.
Grease lubricated bearings shall be provided with relief facilities
positively preventing overgreasing. Oil lubricated bearings shall be
provided with clearly marked level reference for both running and rest
conditions. Motor bearings shall be antifriction type with an AFBMA Lio
Life Rating of 40,000 hours. Motors shall have nameplates engraved with
bearing and lubricant identity.
If the motor is not shop tested with the pump, certified motor effi-
ciency data shall be furnished to the pump supplier based on tests
conducted on the motor or on an identical motor.
8.02. Electric Motors 4160 Volt. Each motor for EP-4001, -4002, -4003,
r -4004, -4005 shall be a vertical, hollow shaft, T.E.F.C. induction
motor. The motor shall be rated 4000 volts, 3 phase, 60 Ez. The motor
shall be insulated with Class F insulation and designed for Class B
temperature rise with a 1.15 service factor rating. Motor efficiency
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
ti (17578 ) -9-
shall not be less than 0.93 at
accordance with IEEE Std. 112.
1-20.47.2 shall be performed on
full load as determined by test in
Routine tests in accordance with NEMA MG
the assembled motor.
Motor shaft bearings shall be oil lubricated, antifriction type. Thrust
bearings shall be plate or antifriction type and capable of extended
operation at any upward and downward thrust loads imposed by the driven
equipment throughout the operating range, including starting and stop-
ping conditions. Antifriction bearings shall be designed and fabricated
in accordance with AFBMA standards to have a minimum L10 life rating of
40,000 hours when operated under rated load conditions. Hand reset
bearing temperature relays with two normally open contacts rated 3A at
120 volt ac wired to a terminal box shall be furnished. The contacts
shall close upon high bearing temperature.
The motors shall be supplied with space heaters sized to prevent conden-
sation on the motor core and windings. Space heaters shall be isolated
and located to prevent heat damage to motor components and adjacent
painted surfaces. Space heaters shall be suitable for 120 ac, single
phase power supply and supplied with an electrical disconnect.
The motor shall be supplied with six 10-ohm resistance type stator
winding temperature detectors embedded in the winding slots or at
equally spaced locations of highest expected winding temperature and
wired and connected as indicated on the drawings.
Vibration detection relays shall be provided for motor bearings. The
relays shall have a normally open contact that closed upon high vibra-
tion. Relays shall be adjustable from 0.5 to 10 mils displacement.
Solid-state circuiting within the relay shall provide necessary time
delay to prevent nuisance tripping on startup and transient vibration.
Relays shall be rated for 120 volt ac single phase power and have a 120
volt ac reset coil. Relay contacts shall be rated 3A at 120 volts ac.
Relays shall be Robert Shaw "366-A8". Relay contacts shall be wired to
terminal strips within the low -voltage terminal box on the motor as
indicated on the drawings.
Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided. The size of the
capacitors shall be as recommended by the motor manufacturer. Power
factor capacitors shall be wired as indicated on the drawings.
Terminal boxes shall be provided with sufficient space for motor leads,
space heater leads, winding RTDs, bearing RTDs, and vibration sensors.
The high voltage terminal box shall have sufficient space for stress
cones and bending radius of 15 kV shielded cable. Terminal boxes shall
have terminals and conduit hubs sized for the conduit and cables
indicated on the drawings.
The pump supplier shall be responsible for and coordinate with the motor
manufacturer and control equipment manufacturers to ensure a complete
and properly functioning system over the full operating range.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -10-
6
8.03. Stabilizer. Hollow shaft motors shall be provided with stabi-
lizer (steady) bushings at the lower end of each motor. Bushings shall
be of the same size and tolerance as the drive couplings and shall give
the motor the same mechanical characteristics as a solid shaft motor.
9. SHOP TESTS. Each pump shall be tested at the.factory for capacity,
power requirement, and efficiency at minimum head, rated head, shutoff
head or point of discontinuity, and at as many other points as necessary
for accurate performance curve plotting. All tests and test reports
shall be made in conformity with the requirements and recommendations of
the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
Five certified copies of a report covering each test shall be prepared
by the pump manufacturer and delivered to the Engineer not less than
10 days prior to the shipment of the equipment from the factory. The
report shall include data and test information as stipulated in the
Hydraulic Institute Standards; copies of the testing log originals; test
reading to curve conversion equations; and calculated field performance
curves, based on shop tests, and corrected for head losses in all
portions of the pump column and for shaft bearing losses not included in
the shop tests. The curves shall include pump total head, driver input
and output horsepower, pump efficiency, rpm, and shop test NPSE avail-
able, plotted against capacity. The curves shall be easily read and
plotted to scales consistent with performance requirements. All test
points shall be clearly shown. When the pump is not tested at the rated
speed, performance charts shall include both the test and the calculated
speed curves.
10. FIELD TESTS.
10.01. Field Operation Tests. After initial startup under the super-
vision of a qualified representative of the pump manufacturer, a
preliminary running -in period will be provided for the Contractor to
make field tests and necessary adjustments. The Owner will then operate
the pumps for a period of 14 consecutive calendar days.
At the end of the specified period of operation, the pump will be
accepted if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the pump has operated
satisfactorily without excessive power input, wear, lubrication, or
undue attention required for this operation, and if all rotating parts
operate without excessive vibration or noise at any operating head,
including shutoff.
11. INSTALLATION. Each pump shall be aligned and connected to the
discharge piping. The subbase shall then be grouted in place using
nonshrinking grout. Grouting shall be as specified in the grout
section. A concrete base shall be provided as required. Attention is
directed to the requirements of the steel and cast iron pipe section
concerning flanged connections to pumps.
Shimming between machined surfaces will not be permitted.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
l (17578 ) -11-
12. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation
drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering mate-
rials used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of the
equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submit-
tals section. The data and specifications for each pumping unit shall _
include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Pumps
Name of manufacturer.
Type and model.
Design rotative speed.
Number of stages.
Type of bowl bearings.
Type of line shaft bearings.
Size of shafting.
Size of pump column. _
Size of discharge outlet.
Diameter of pump barrel. -i
OD of pump bowls.
Weight.
Complete performance curves showing capacity versus head,
NPSH required, pump efficiency, and bhp plotted to
scales consistent with performance requirements.
Data on shop painting.
Motors
Manufacturer, model, type and enclosure. .-
Bearing type and lubrication.
Horsepower rating and service factor.
Temperature rise and insulation rating.
Full load rotative speed, rpm.
Net weight.
Efficiency at full, 3/4. and 1/2 load.
Efficiency at specified operating condition. !'
Full load current.
Locked rotor current.
Overall dimensions and base details.
Power factor at no load and at full load.
Motor winding temperature switch data.
Complete Pumpine Unit
Max overall dimensions.
Total weight.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11140
(17578 ) -12-
Section 11160 - PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS
1. SCOPE. This section covers eight constant speed and three variable
speed (adjustable frequency) progressing cavity type pumping units as
follows:
No. of Pump
Units Designation
1 SP-2101
Service
Primary Scum
3 WP-2101, -2102, Primary Sludge
-2103
1 SP-2401 Secondary Scum
Location
Primary Sludge
Pumping Station
Primary Sludge
Pumping Station
Secondary Sludge
Pumping Station
3 WP-2401, -2402, Waste Secondary Secondary Sludge
-2403 Sludge Pumping Station
3 WP-3301, -3302, Waste Secondary Secondary Sludge
-3303 Sludge Pumping Station
Each pumping unit shall be furnished complete with an electric gear
motor drive, coupling, and coupling guard. Each pump and drive unit
shall be mounted on a common baseplate, as indicated on the drawings,
and shall be provided with anchor bolts and all other appurtenances
specified or otherwise required for proper operation.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with drawings, specifications. engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer. Hydraulic considerations and
definition of terms shall be as set forth in the Hydraulic Institute
Standards.
2.01. Acceptable Products. The progressing cavity pumps furnished
under this section shall be Robbins and Myers - Moyno "Series 2000" or
Netzsch "Nemo NE Series The products of other manufacturers will not
be acceptable.
2.02. General Equipment �Stinulations. The General Equipment Stipu-
lations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Power Supply. Power supply to equipment will be 480 volts,
60 Hz, 3 phase.
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SDMP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11160
(17578 ) -1
2.04. Anchor Bolts. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be gal-
vanized and shall comply with the anchor bolts and expansion anchors
section.
Anchor bolts shall be accurately located and centered in pipe sleeves
having an inside diameter approximately 2-1/2 times the bolt diameter
and a length approximately 8 times the bolt diameter. A square anchor
plate with thickness of approximately 112 the bolt diameter and side
dimensions 4 times the bolt diameter shall be welded to the bottom of
each sleeve, with the anchor bolt extended through the plate and welded
thereto.
2.05. Spare Parts. Each -model of pump shall be provided with three
sets of spare parts consisting of bearings, stator, rotor, and
connecting rod assembly. The connecting rod assembly shall be equipped
with universal joints and seals.
Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in accordance with the General
Equipment Stipulations, with labels indicating the contents of each
package. Spare parts shall be delivered to: the Owner as directed.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Pumping units SP-2101 and WP-2101, -2102,
-2103 shall be installed in the Primary Sludge Pumping Station at Plant
No. 2. These pumps shall transfer scum and primary sludge, respec-
tively, to Anaerobic Digesters No. 8 and No. 9 at a solids concentration
of approximately 4 percent. One waste pump shall serve as a standby.
The pumps shall operate on a timer. The scum pump will be manually
actuated.
Pumping units SP-2401 and WP-2401, -2042, -2403 shall be installed in
the Secondary Sludge Pumping Station at Plant No. 2. These pumps shall
transfer scum and waste secondary sludge at a solids concentration of
approximately 4 percent, respectively, to Anaerobic Digesters No. 8
and No. 9. One waste pump shall serve as a standby. The pumps shall
operate on a timer. The scum pump will be ,manually actuated.
s
Pumping units WP-3301, -3302, and -3303 shall be installed in the
Secondary Sludge Pumping Station located in the Aeration Basin piping
gallery at Plant No. 3. These pumps shall transfer waste activated
sludge at a solids concentration of approximately 0.5 percent to the
gravity belt thickeners in the Solids Handling Building. One pump shall
serve as a standby. The speed of each pumping unit shall be controlled
by an adjustable frequency drive.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11160
(17578 ) -2-
r n cn t"
4 ryryd3 1"to
OD90]
0 � I
x7dH
O C
41 E CA
x
H
En
a+
y�
x
N
O
.� .. x .�
N
Ch
w N
O
Unit Designation
UP-3301, -3302,
SP-2101
SP-2401
HP-2101, -2102,
WP-2401, -2402,
-3303
-2103
-2403
Type of Drive
AFD
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Robbins i Myers - Moyno
(Model No.)
1 F036
1 E022
1 E022
1 E022
1 E022
Netzsch (Model No.)
1 RE70A
1 RE60A
1 RE60A
1 RE60A
1 NE60A
Number of stages
1
1
1
1
1
Rated Differential
35
35
35
35
35
Pressure, psi
Capacity at Rated Dif-
110
40
30
40
30
fential Pressure, Spa
Maximum Differential
60
60
60
60
60
Pressure, psi
Minimum Capacity at
95
30
20
30
20
Maximus Differential
Pressure and Maximus Pump
Speed, gpm
Normal Operating
30-35
30-35
30-35
30-35
30-35
Differential Pressure
Range, psi
Minimss Net Positive
44
35
24
45
32
Suction Head Available at
Pump Shaft Centerline at
Rated Head, ft absolute
Maximum Pump Speed, rpm
350
250
200
250
200
Minim m Motor Nameplate
10
5
5
5
5
Rating, hp
Nominal Size of Connwr-
bons, inches
Suction
6
6
6
6
6
Discharge
6
6
6
6
6
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Pumping units shall be
designed for the operating conditions indicated on the previous table
and requirements at rated speed unless otherwise noted.
5. PUMP MATERIALS.
Body and Supports Cast iron, ASTM A48.
Rotor Tool steel, ceramic coated,
Brinell 550+.
Stator Buna-N synthetic rubber,
Shore A Durometer 65
plus or minus 5,
enclosed in a steel pipe
sleeve.
Drive Shaft Tool steel.
Connecting Rod and Tool steel.
Universal Joints
Bearings Antifriction, grease
lubricated.
Flexible Coupling ATR, Inc., 'Atra-flex"
flexible coupling.
Stuffing Box Hardware Corrosion -resistant metal.
Lantern Ring Glass -filled teflon.
Packing Braided, graphited or
teflon impregnated
Kevlar.
Base Cast iron fabricated
steel.
6. PUMP CONSTRUCTION.
6.01. Suction and Bearing Housings. The suction housing and bearing
housing shall be of heavy cast construction and shall be rigidly sup-
ported by saddle type cradles or integrally cast support pads. A
cleanout opening with bolted removable cover and a tapped and plugged
drain connection shall be provided in the suction housing. An access
opening shall be provided for stuffing box maintenance., A pocket with
tapped drain connection shall be provided for collecting and draining
the stuffing box leakage to the nearest bellup or floor drain. Suitable
fittings shall be provided for properly adding bearing lubricant. The
bearing housing shall be adequately sealed to prevent contamination of
the bearings and to retain lubricant.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11160
(17578 ) -4-
v
t
f:
Each pump shall be arranged for side suction and end discharge as
indicated on the drawings. Suction and discharge connections shall be
t•- flanged. Flanges shall be flat faced, with ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125
t diameter and drilling. Supports shall be arranged to clamp the pump
rigidly in final alignment.
6.02. Drive Shaft. Each drive shaft shall be of solid or hollow design
and shall be fully machined or ground to size and polished. Portions of
the shaft passing through the stuffing box shall be hard chrome plated
or shall be provided with a replaceable hardened or chrome plated shaft
sleeve. The drive shaft shall be of ample size to transmit the maximum
applied power at the maximum specified differential pressure and to
carry all applied radial loads without excessive deflection.
6.03. Connecting Rod Assembly. Each connecting rod assembly shall
consist of a solid connecting rod with a gear type universal joint at
each end. The assembly shall be of sufficient size to transmit the
maximum applied power at maximum specified differential pressure.. The
assembly shall be of sufficient length to ensure that the maximum
angularity through each universal joint does not exceed 1-1/2 degrees.
Each universal joint shall be factory lubricated and sealed to prevent
contamination of the joint by the pumped liquid under all operating
conditions.
The use of a connecting rod assembly utilizing a flexing shaft, pin type
joint, or Hooke's type universal joints will not be acceptable..
6.04. Bearings. At least two antifriction bearings shall be provided.
The inboard bearing shall carry radial loads. The out -board bearing
shall carry both radial and thrust loads. Each bearing shall have an
AFBMA Llo Life Rating of 100,000 hours at the maximum differential
pressure. Shaft speed shall not exceed the bearing manufacturer's
limitations.
6.05. Stuffing Box. The stuffing box shall contain a split lantern
ring, at least five packing rings, and a split gland at the! outboard
end. The gland halves shall be interlocked during assembly and held in
position at all pressures by at least two bolts or studs. Each stuffing
box shall have a seal water connection at the normal lantern ring posi-
tion.
6.06. Base. Each pump and drive unit shall be mounted on a common
base. The base shall be of neat design with rounded corners. All
exposed seams and contact surfaces of steel plates and shapes shall be
continuously welded and ground smooth. When a drip lip is provided,
pipe tapped openings shall be provided to ensure positive drainage from
the base to the nearest bellup or floor drain. At least one drain
opening shall be provided for each 4 square feet of base.
Openings shall be provided in the
top of the base to facilitate
grouting. An opening
shall also
be provided, if necessary, for .
s
electrical conduit to
the drive unit.
•R
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
)
i
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS &
EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4
)
11160
t
(17578
)
-5-
6.07. Flexible Coupling. The pump coupling shall have a horsepower
rating 1.25 times the motor nameplate horsepower when the misalignment
is within the manufacturer's tolerance limit. Coupling design shall
permit removal of the pump rotating element without disconnecting the
piping, moving the drive unit, or axial movement of the coupling halves
on the shaft.
7. ACCESSORIES.
7.01. Gauges. A gauge shall be provided in the suction and discharge
piping of each pump. A combination pressure/vacuum gauge shall be
provided in the suction piping, and a pressure gauge shall be provided
in the discharge piping. Each gauge shall be isolated from the pumped
liquid. Gauges and isolators are covered in the pressure gauges
section.
7.02. Pressure Switches. A pressure switch shall be provided in the
discharge piping of each pump. The switch shall be designed to stop the
pump upon development of excessive discharge pressure. Switches shall
be Mercoid "DRW-33-2L•, range 7, rated 5-150 psig, safe to 200 psig
surge, with a 120 volt, 10 ampere, hand reset contact set to open when
pressure rises to 65 psi. Each switch shall be assembled with liquid
fill. An in -line flow through diaphragm seal shall be provided for each
pressure switch. Ends shall be flanged, threaded, or welding type as
required by the piping system in which the unit is Installed.. Flanges
shall be flat -faced with ANSI B16.5, Class 150 diameter and drilling.
Threaded ends shall conform to ANSIIASME B1.20.1 NPT. Each diaphragm
seal shall be provided with a removable stainless steel diaphragm and
shall be tapped for the switch connection. The pressure switch shall be
installed in accordance with gauge installation details in the pressure
gauges section.
8. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall
be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive
vibration-shall,be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The
mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance at
normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the vibration dis-
placement (peak -to -peak) as measured at any point on the machine shall
not exceed 5.0 mils.
At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical
speed of a unit or components thereof shall be less than 0.8 or more
than 1.3.
9. DRIVE UNITS. Each pump shall be driven by an electric motor gear
drive unit connected to the pump through a flexible coupling.
9.01. Electric Motors. Each motor shall comply with the General
Equipment Stipulations except as specified herein. Each motor shall be
horizontal squirrel -cage induction type. The motor shall be rated for
continuous duty at 40 C ambient, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11160
(17578 ) -6-
Each motor shall be of .the ef'likgp ffi8idit-'type,
in accordance with NEMA
MG 1-12.55.
�-
t
Routine tests in accordance with
NEMA MG 1-12.51
shall be performed on
`
the assembled motor.
r"
Terminal boxes shall be provided
with sufficient
space for motor leads
!'.
and accessories. Terminal boxes
shall have terminals and conduit hubs
sized for the cables and conduit
indicated on the
drawings.
Bearings shall be effectively protected from contamination and dirt.
Grease lubricated bearings shall be provided with relief facilities
f� positively preventing overgreasing. Oil lubricated bearings shall
t have idle and running oil level indication. Motor bearings shall be
- antifriction type with an AFBMA Llo Life Rating of 40,000 hours. Motors
shall have nameplates engraved with bearing and lubricant identity.
F Motors for WP-3301, WP-3302, and WP-3303 shall be specifically selected
a for service with the adjustable frequency drives. Motors shall be
derated, as required, to compensate for harmonic heating effects and
r reduced self -cooling capability at low speed operations.
Motors for WP-3301, WP-3302, WP-3303 shall be furnished with at least
one thermostat per phase to provide three normally closed contacts wired
E. in series, with the end leads brought out to a separate terminal box for
wiring in conduit.
r
Motors shall be provided with suitable lifting eyes or lugs.
rz Certified motor efficiency data shall be furnished to the pump supplier
based on tests conducted on the motor or on an identical motor.
9.02. Adiustable Sneed Drives. Pumps WP-3301, WP-3302, WP-3303 shall
be furnished with an adjustable frequency type motor speed controller.
Adjustable frequency drive systems shall conform to the specifica-
tions in Section 16150. The pump supplier shall coordinate the motors
and pumps with the adjustable frequency controllers furnished. The pump
l supplier shall furnish the adjustable frequency drive in accordance with
t the AFD section.
The pump supplier shall assume the responsibility of coordinating the
pump and drive components to assure that a complete and properly
operating system is furnished. Particular attention shall be directed
toward the drive torque requirements. All equipment shall be derated
as recommended by the drive and motor manufacturers for reduced speed
operation with adjustable frequency controllers in addition to any
derating requirements specified elsewhere.
10. INSTALLATION. Each pumping unit shall be leveled, plumbed, aligned
and wedged into position to fit connecting piping. Installation proce-
dures shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer and as required
herein. Grouting shall be as specified in the grout section.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
11160
-7-
The pump base shall be grouted after initial fitting and alignment but
before final bolting of connecting piping. After final alignment and
bolting, pump connections shall be tested for applied piping stresses by
loosening the flange bolts. If any movement or opening of the joints is
observed, piping shall be adjusted to ensure that piping stresses are
not transmitted to the pump flanges.
11. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete assembly, foundation, and installa-
tion drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering
materials used, drive unit, parts, devices, and other accessories
forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals section. The data and specifications for
each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the followings
Pumps
Motors
Manufacturer.
Type and model.
Rpm at rated condition.
Size of suction flange. -_
Size of discharge flange.
Maximum bhp requirement at maximum differential pressure
condition.
Complete performance curves (for adjustable speed units, at
maximum and minimum speeds).
Net weight of pump and baseplate.
Base and anchor bolt details. --
Manufacturer, model, type and enclosure.
Bearing type and lubrication.
Horsepower rating and service factor.
Temperature rise and insulation rating. `
Full load rotative speed, rpm.
Net weight.
Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load.
Efficiency at specified operating condition.
Full load current.
Locked rotor current. r
Overall dimensions and base details.
Power factor at no load and at full load.
Motor winding temperature switch data.
Adiustable Speed Drives
All items as listed in Section 16150 paragraph.10. DRAWINGS
AND DATA.
Wiring diagrams for each adjustable speed drive unit shall be furnished
as part of the shop drawings.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11160
(17578 ) -8
t"
Gear
Reducers
Name of manufacturer.
Type and model.
Input horsepower rating.
Efficiency.
r:
Gear ratio.
Net weight.
L
r
(LUBBOCK,
TEXAS )
k
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
NO. 4 ) 11160
(17578
) -9-
Section 11185 - SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
1. SCOPE. This section covers one vertical, submersible, nonclog
centrifugal pumping unit and controls in the following location:
Sump Pump Assembly Location
F
SU-2101 Primary Sludge Pumping
Station
The pumping unit shall be complete with a close -coupled, submersible
electric motor and all other appurtenances specified or otherwise
required for proper operation.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer. Hydraulic considerations and
definition of terms shall be as set forth in the Hydraulic Institute
Standards.
2.01. Acceptable Products. Pumping units shall be Aurora 0510 Series",
Weil "Series 1400, 1410, or 16001, Goulds G&L 'GL 887 Series"; or Epno-
Cornell "1600 and 1650 Series".
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Power Supply. Power supply to equipment will be 480 volts,
60 Hz, 3 phase.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The pumping unit will be used to remove seal
water, pump leakage, washdown, rainwater, and other miscellaneous
liquids collected on the floor.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The pumping unit shall be
designed for the following operating conditions and requirements:
Unit designation SU-2101
Number of units duplex
Rated total head, feet 24
Capacity at rated head, gpm 50
Operating head range, feet 19-29
Max (nominal) pump operating 1,800
speed at rated head, rpm
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
F" (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11185
! (17578 ) -1-
I -
Min motor hp rating 3/4
Depth of sump below top of floor 6'-8"
slab, feet
Min discharge outlet size, inches 1-1/2-
Kin test sphere diameter, inches 3/8
Min hydrostatic test pressure, 1.5 x shutoff head plus
psi suction pressure
For design and rating purposes, the liquid to be pumped shall be assumed
to have a temperature of 85 F.
Pump performance shall be stable and free from cavitation and noise
throughout the specified operating head range at minimum suction
submergences.
The pumping unit shall be designed so that reverse rotation at rated
head will not cause damage to any component.
5. MATERIALS.
Stator Housing and Impeller
Casing
Impeller
Shaft
All Wetted Assembly Fasteners
Mechanical Seal
Strainer
6. PUMP CONSTRUCTION.
Cast iron, ASTM A48.
Cast iron or bronze.
Stainless steel.
Stainless steel.
Single type, water lubricated,
with carbon and ceramic rings.
Cast iron or perforated
stainless steel.
6.01. Impeller Casing. The impeller casing shall have well-rounded
water passages and smooth internal surfaces free from cracks, porosity,
blow holes, or other irregularities. The discharge connection shall be
suitable for connecting to a flexible hose
6.02. Impeller. The impeller shall be a semiopen or enclosed one-piece
casting with not more than two nonclog passages. The interior water
passages shall have uniform sections and smooth surfaces and shall be
free from cracks and porosity. The impeller shall be dynamically
balanced and threaded or keyed to the shaft and locked in place by means
of a self-locking bolt or nut.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11185
(17578 ) -2-
k
b
F
Balance vanes shall be provided on the impeller back shroud. Running
clearances between the vanes and adjacent housing surfaces shall prevent
an accumulation of debris and reduce pump discharge pressure at the
mechanical seal.
6.03. Sealing of Mating Surfaces. All mating surfaces of major com-
ponents shall be machined and fitted with 0-rings where watertight seal-
ing is required. Sealing shall be accomplished by 0-ring contact on
four surfaces and 0-ring compression in two planes, without reliance on
a specific fastener torque or tension to obtain a watertight joint. The
use of elliptical 0-rings, gaskets, or seals requiring a specific
fastener torque value to obtain and maintain gasket or seal compression
and watertightness will not be acceptable. The use of secondary sealing
compounds, gasket cement, grease, or other devices to obtain watertight
joints will not be acceptable.
7. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall
be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive
vibration shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. The
mass of the unit and its distribution shall.be such that resonance at
normal operating speeds is avoided.
At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical
speed of a unit or components thereof shall be less than 0.8 or more
than 1.3.
8. ELECTRIC MOTORS. Each pump shall be driven by an air-cooled,
totally submersible electric motor furnished by the pump manufacturer.
Each motor shall be rated 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase, and shall have a
nameplate rating which exceeds the maximum horsepower required by the
pump. The stator housing shall be an air or oil -filled watertight
casing. Motor insulation shall be moisture resistant, Class F, 155 C.
Each motor shall be capable of continuous operation in air (unsubmerged)
for at least 15 minutes under pump full load conditions without
exceeding the temperature rise limitations for the motor insulation
system.
The pump motor cable shall contain a grounding conductor and shall be
suitable for submersible pump applications; this shall be indicated by a
code or legend permanently embossed on the cable. Cable sizing shall
conform to NEC specifications for pump motors. Cable shall be of
adequate size to allow motor voltage conversion without replacing the
cable. The cable entry water seal design shall be such that a specific
fastener torque is not required to ensure a watertight and submersible
seal.
9. CONTROLS. Each sump pump shall be provided with two mercury float
switches with contacts located inside sealed double -walled plastic
floats. The floats shall be supported from the discharge piping. The
motor shall be controlled by the float switch setting. Each float
switch shall have a heavy-duty three -wire grounding neoprene cord. All
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
11185
-3-
cords shall be of sufficient length to reach a junction'box 6 feet above
the floor.
Each sump pump unit shall be adjusted to operate between the following
sump depths:
Lead pump start, inches 12
Lag pump start, inches
36
Pump stop, inches 6
Motor starters and all other controls not specified herein will be
provided under the electrical section.
10. INSTALLATION. The pumping unit shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. The sump shall be thoroughly
cleaned prior to installation of the pump. Controls shall be adjusted
to start and stop each pump at the sump depths specified. The pumps
shall not be used during the construction phase to dispose of water or
drainage which contains construction debris or other abrasive materials.
11. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Detailed specifications and data covering
materials used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming apart of,
the equipment furnished shall be submitted in accordance with the sub-
mittals section. The specifications and data for each unit shall
include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following:
Pumps
Name of manufacturer.
Type and model.
Rotative speed.
Size of discharge outlet.
Net weight of pump and motor.
Complete performance curves showing capacity versus head.
Data on shop painting.
Motors
Name of manufacturer.
Type and model.
Type of bearings and lubrication.
Rated size of motor, hp.
Temperature rating.
Full load rotative speed.
Efficiency at full load and rated pump condition.
Full load current.
Locked rotor current.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS EXPANSION) -
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11185
(17578 ) -4-
Controls
Name of manufacturer.
Type and model.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11185
(17578 ) -5-
I
Section 11370 - BIO-TOWER FILTER ROTARY DISTRIBUTORS
1. SCOPE. This section covers rotating distributors TF-2301 and -2302
for the two Bio-Tower Filters.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating
condition in full conformity with detail drawings, specifications,
l engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
j� 2.01. Acceptable Products. The bio-tower filter rotary distributors
l shall be of the hydraulically driven, design, and shall be as manufac-
tured by Eimco, Envirex, FMC, or Walker Process.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions ,shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Bolts and Anchor Bolts. All field assembly bolts and anchor
bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel Type 304 in conformity
with ASTM A153 and A385. Anchor bolts shall comply with the anchor
bolts and expansion anchors section.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The rotary distributor arms will be mounted at
the top of each bio-tower filter. The bio-tower filter rotary distri-
butor arms will be exposed to the atmosphere.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS., Each rotating distributor
shall be designed for flows ranging from 1,600 gpm to 5,560 gpm. The
�• head required for operation of the rotating sewage distributors as
measured from the top of media to water level in the center column shall
not exceed 48 inches. Flow will be circulated at an adequate rate for
distributor operation and no dosing tank will be required.
4.01. Center Column Assembly. Each center column assembly shall
consist of a stationary base assembly and a rotating assembly. The
stationary base assembly shall be provided with inlet and mechanism
anchorage facilities, main bearing assembly, and a suitable mechanical
y seal. The rotating assembly shall be supported on or hung from the main
bearing and shall be provided with distributor arm connections, anchor-
age facilities for arm supports, and steady bearings.
The center column assembly shall be supported by a cast -in -place
concrete pier not less than 5'-0" x 5'-0• in plan with a 24-inch
diameter opening for the influent supply. The concrete pier shall be
constructed as indicated on the drawings for a 20'-0' filter media
depth. The center column assembly shall be anchored directly to the
concrete pier.
Bearings shall be as nearly frictionless as possible and the rotating
assembly shall start freely with minimum flow under all conditions of
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
r (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11370
I (17578 ) -1-
a
wind and temperature. Bearing shall be self-lubricating and shall not
require attention more frequently than 6 month intervals.
The mechanical seal shall be suitable for taking the head developed at
maximum flow. _.
4.02. Distributor Arms. Each rotating distributor shall be provided
with the required number of (a) primary and secondary arms of steel pipe
or welded steel plate construction or (b) two -compartment arms of welded
steel plate construction. Each distributor arm shall extend to the
outer periphery of the biofilter and shall be fabricated in suitable
lengths provided with flanged connection facilities.
The metal thickness of the arms shall not be less than 1/4 inch at any
point. _
Distribution arms shall be supported from the center column and tied
together by steel rods or cables. A turnbuckle or other acceptable
means of adjustment and tightening shall be provided in each supporting
member.
The outer end of each distribution shall be equipped with a watertight, --
full area, quick -opening gate for flushing out the arm. Orifices in the
distributor arms shall be field adjustable. The outer extremity of each
distribution arm shall be tapped and plugged for field adjusting the _
rotating speed of the distributor by the installation of additional
orifices.
Each arm shall have a minimum clearance of inches between the bottom
of the arm and the top of the media.
Suitable facilities shall be provided so that flow from the endward
nozzles can be 'easily and completely stopped or deflected toward the
center of the filter, to prevent ice buildup on the exterior wall during
periods of cold weather.
Reaction nozzles, spreaders, and deflector plates shall be made'of non -
corroding materials, with ports and passages of adequate size to prevent
clogging, and shall be spaced and staggered to provide uniform flow
distribution over the entire bed area, except for necessary overlap at
higher heads.
4.03. Noncorroding Parts. All rings, seals, bearings (except balls and
races), bushings, nozzles, and other noncorroding part, shall be made of
stainless steel. Another material that has been used successfully for
this service, may be used upon acceptance by the Engineer.
4.04. Galvanizing. All iron and steel parts, including cables, cable
hangers and clamps, rods, turnbuckles, flange and anchor bolts, and
other interior and exterior surfaces on distribution arms and center
column assembly (both stationary and rotating sections), except castings
having a thickness of at least 3/8 inch at all points, shall be hot -dip
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 } 11`370
(17578 ) -2-
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123, and A385. With the exception
of pregalvanized cables which may be used, galvanizing shall be done
after all fabrication is completed including welding, threading,
drilling, and punching so that all surfaces, except machined surfaces,
are protected with zinc.
5. DISTRIBUTION TESTS. After each rotary distributor has operated for
a total of not less than 240 hours and the installation has been
inspected by a representative of the manufacturer and has been adjusted
to his satisfaction, a "pan test" shall be run on each distributor to
check the distribution of flow on the bed.
Each distributor shall perform in such a manner that approximately
uniform distribution will be obtained for each unit area of the exposed
media as hereinafter described. The test shall be run at a 5,560 gpm
rate of flow and shall conform to the following test procedure.
The size, type and location of pans to be used shall be submitted to the
Engineer prior to the test. The pans shall be set flush with the top of
the media and shall extend from the distributor's pedestal. to the wall
of the biofilter.
The test period for the distributor shall include a minimum of three
revolutions. The test shall not be conducted when wind velocity exceeds
10 miles per hour. The rate of distribution for any unit area shall not
vary from the mean rate of distribution by more than plus or minus 10
per cent.
If the distributor fails to meet the specified requirements, the manu-
facturer shall modify the distributor until the specified requirements
are met.
All testing equipment and labor to perform the tests, regardless of
number, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense, and the
testing shall be done at the time agreed by the Engineer.
6. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation
drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering
materials used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of
the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the
submittals section.
F(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
r•• (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11370
(17578 ) -3-
FE
Section 11430 - CLARIFYING EQUIPMENT
1. SCOPE. This section covers clarifying equipment for primary
clarifiers, SC-2101, SC-2102, SC-3101, and SC-3102 and two secondary
clarifiers, SC-2401 and SC-2402. Secondary clarifiers SC-3301 and
SC-3302 shall be rapid sludge removal, siphon -type clarifiers.
Each mechanism shall be as specified herein and shall be designed for
installation in the existing circular basin having the dimensions
indicated on the drawings.
An allowance is also included•in the Bid Form (Allowance A) for
renovation of the existing Plant No. 3 sludge collectors SC-3101, -3102,
-3301, and -3302 as described in the Instructions to Bidders section.
The four clarifiers at Plant No. 2 shall be completely removed and
replaced with new units as specified herein.
1.01. Alternate Allowance For Renovation to Existing Equipment. Under
this alternate, modifications to each primary clarifier, SC-3101 and -
3102, shall include replacement of the control panel, replacement of
handrail and supports with new aluminum guardrail, renovation of the
t structural steel center cage and rake arm assembly, replacement of the
t scraper blades, renovation of the drive unit, and renovation of the scum
skimming arms and scum beach.
Modifications to each secondary clarifier, SC-3301 and -3302, shall
include replacement of the control panel, renovation of the structural
steel center cage and rake arm assembly, renovation of the drive unit,
replacement of individual sludge withdrawal pipes with Cew and larger
piping (minimum diameter of 6 inches), and the addition of conventional
dual scum skimming arms and rotating weir and collection box with
appropriate additional structural members to the bridge.
Primary and secondary clarifier renovation should result inan end
product with the same warranty as new equipment, and should last twenty
(20) years.
The existing primary (SC-3101 and -3102) and secondary (SC-3301 and -
3302) clarifier equipment are manufactured by Eimco. Replacement parts
that are required shall be suitable and compatible for the existing
equipment.
Costs shall be included in the Base Bid for one site visit by an
experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufac-
turer of the existing equipment to inspect each unit to determine the
exact scope of work required to renovate the existing equipment. The
authorized representative shall furnish a detailed and itemized scope of
work for each individual clarifier with corresponding line item costs
within 10 calendar days following review of each unit. The scope of
work and recommended materials shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The
alternate allowance in the bid will be adjusted by change order once the
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
r (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
i (17578 ) -1-
exact scope of work has been determined and accepted by Owner and
Engineer.
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Equipment furnished and installed under this
section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper
operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications,
engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
Equipment shall be furnished and installed complete with all concrete
foundations, piers, and supports; all mechanical equipment required for
proper operation, including complete.drive units; all. -electrical equip-
ment required for proper operation, including complete controls; all
steel, iron, and other metal construction indicated on the drawings; and
any additional materials or construction required by the manufacturer's
design.
Prior to manufacture of the equipment, each existing clarifier basin
shall be accurately measured.
2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.02. Drive Units. Supplementing the requirements of the General
Equipment Stipulations, gearing having an input shaft speed of 100 rpm
or less will not be required to bear an AGMA nameplate. All large,
slowly rotating gearing shall be designed on the basis of torque loads
using conservative values for wear and beam strength.
All gear reducer and motor bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated.
All gears shall run in oil or shall have a positive means of constant
lubrication. Seals shall be provided to prevent oil leakage around
shafts. Roller chain shall be self-lubricating type with oil -
impregnated, sintered steel bushings or 0-ring type chain with lubricant
factory installed in the pin -bushing contact areas and sealed in place
by means of elastomeric 0-rings on each pin between the roller link
plate and pin link plate. Drive units shall be designed so that all
parts are protected from the weather. Lubrication systems shall be pro-
tected against contamination and shall be designed so that the lubri-
cants cannot contaminate the water being treated. Each lubrication
system shall be provided with an external, visual method of checking
lubricant level, without removing parts or fittings.
Lubrication shall be accomplished by means of oil fill and drain plugs
or grease fittings which shall be convenient and accessible. Lubri-
cation shall be accomplished without removing parts or dismantling
equipment. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from
the operating platform, and shall allow for convenient collection of oil
in containers, from the platform, without removing the unit from its
normal installed position.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -2
I
i
2.03. Piping and Valves. Sludge piping is covered in the cast iron
pipe section. Miscellaneous piping and miscellaneous valves are covered
in the miscellaneous piping and miscellaneous valves sections, respec-
tively.
2.04. Structural Design. The ratio of unbraced length to least radius
of gyration (slenderness ratio) shall not exceed 100 for any compression
member and shall not exceed 200 for any tension member (for angles about
the Z-Z axis). The ratio of span length to depth for supporting beams
and trusses shall not exceed 20 for simple span, nor 10 for cantilever
span. In addition, all structural members and connections shall be de-
signed so that the unit stresses will not exceed AISC allowable stresses
by more than 1/3 when subject to loading of the maximum (breakdown)
torque of the drive motor.
r 2.05. Dolts and Anchor Bolts. All field assembly bolts and anchor
bolts, nuts, and washers in submerged locations shall be stainless
steel. Bolts in other locations shall be hot -dip galvanized in con-
formity with ASTM A153 and A385. Anchor bolts shall comply with the
anchor bolts and expansion anchors section and Figure 1-11430.
2.06. Fabrication. All welded joints which will be fully or partially
submerged shall be sealed watertight with continuous welds. Faying
surfaces of bolted joints shall be shop painted.
2.07. Edge Grinding. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of
ferrous metals which will be submerged in operation shall be ground to a
radius as required to ensure satisfactory paint adherence.
2.08. Surface Preparation. All welds shall be thoroughly cleaned and
ground smooth in preparation for painting. All iron and steel surfaces,
except motors and speed reducers, shall be solvent cleaned in accordance
with SSPC-SP1 before shop primer is applied. A certificate shall be
provided from the manufacturer to certify that the metal is free of
chlorides.
2.09. Shop Painting. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors and
speed reducers, shall be given a shop coat of the manufacturer's
standard rust -inhibitive primer. The requirements for field painting
are covered in the painting section.
2.10. Power Supply. Power supply to the equipment will be 480 volts,
60 Hz, 3 phase.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS.
3.01. Primary Clarifiers. The primary clarifier equipment will be used
to collect settled sludge by a raking action to a sludge hopper. The
sludge will be pumped to Anaerobic Digesters No. 8 and No. 9.
Conventional scum skimming equipment will be used to collect scum on the
surface of the basins, between the center well and the odor control
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
11430
-3-
hood. The scum will be pumped with the primary sludge to Anaerobic
Digesters No. 8 and No. 9.
The primary clarifiers shall include an odor control hood with integral
scum baffle. The odor control hood is specified in another section.
The equipment shall be designed for a temperature range of 10 to 100
degrees F. Icing and snow on equipment is a frequent occurrence during
the winter.
3.02. Secondary Clarifiers. The secondary clarifier equipment SC-2401
and SC-2402 will be used to collect settled trickling filter sludge by a
raking action to a sludge hopper. The sludge will be pumped to
Anaerobic Digesters No. 8 and No. 9.
Conventional scum skimming equipment for SC-2401 and SC-2402 will be
used to collect scum on the surface of the basins, between the center
well and the scum baffle wall. The scum will be pumped with the sludge
to Anaerobic Digesters No. 8 and No. 9.
The secondary clarifier equipment SC-3301 and SC-3302 will be used to
collect settled activated sludge with rapid sludge removal equipment.
The activated sludge will be pumped to the gravity belt thickeners or
returned upstream of the aeration basin.
Scum skimming equipment for SC-3301 and SC-3302 will be used to collect
scum on the surface of secondary clarifier basins between the center
well and the scum baffle wall. The scum will be pumped with the waste
sludge to the gravity belt thickeners.
The equipment shall be designed for a temperature range of 10 to 100
degrees F. Icing and snow on equipment is a frequent occurrence during
the winter.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Clarifier equipment SC-2101,
SC-2102, SC-3101, SC-3102, SC-2401, and SC-2402 shall be designed to
accomplish clarification by sedimentation and collection and removal of
excess sludge. The equipment shall be limited to Walker Process 'RSP
Collector', EIMCO "C3 Clarifier", General Filter "CCPS Circular
Collector', FMC "Circuline Collector", or Envirex "Circular Sludge
Collector", Hi -Tech, or Wes -Tech "Model 3554". Products of other
manufacturers will not be acceptable.
The equipment shall be furnished complete with all components and
accessories necessary for an operating installation and shall include
combination center column and influent pipe, center mechanism, drive
units, scum 'skimmer, beach box, rotating scraper assemblies, access
walkway, and control equipment.
Clarifier equipment SC-3301 and SC-3302 shall be designed to accomplish
clarification by sedimentation in an outer sedimentation zone, and
collection and rapid removal of sludge. Secondary clarifier equipment
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -4
shall be limited to Walker Process "SWP Sightwell Collector", Eimco "C3S
Clarifier", General Filter "CCRPS Clarifier", FMC "Model RBG-SU", Hi -
Tech, or Wes -Tech "Model 3553". Products of other manufacturers will
not be acceptable.
The equipment shall be furnished complete with all components and acces-
sories necessary for an operating installation and shall include center
pier, combination center column and influent pipe, rapid sludge removal
system, center mechanism, drive units, scum skimmers, access walkway,
rotating weir, and control equipment.
4.01. Basin Dimensions. The equipment shall be designed to operate in
existing basins having the following approximate dimensions:
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary
Clarifiers Clarifiers Clarifiers Clarifiers
Unit Designation SC-2101, -2102 SC-24019 -2402 SC-3101, -3102 SC-3301, -3302
Inside diameter, 85'-0" 85'-0" 95'-0" 115'-0"
ft (1)
Sidawall water 9'-8" 9'-11' 8'-0" 9'-8"
depth (1)
Total cidewall 11'-3" 11'-8" 99-5" 149- l'
depth (1)
Water depth at 13'-3" 139-1" 11'-ll" 10'-6"
center pier (1)
Minimum diameter 30" 30' 30" 36"
of influent pipe
(1) Contractor to verify dimensions prior to ordering equipment.
The equipment shall be designed for installation in a basin having a
radial slope to the center of approximately 1 to 12 for SC-2101,
-2102, -2401, -2402, -3101, and -3102. The radial slope to the center
of basin for SC-3301, -3302 is approximately 1/4 to 12.
4.02. Design Reouirements. The equipment shall be designed for the
following requirements:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -5-.
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary
Clarifiers Clarifiers Clarifiers Clarifiers "
Unit Designation SC-2101, -2102 SC-2401, -2402 SC-3101, -3102 SC-3301, -3302
Design flow per 3.5 3.5 5.0 5.0
basin, mgd
Peak flow per 8.0 8.0 9.0 9.0
basin, mgd
Overflow rate,
gpd/of
At design flow 616 616 705 481
At peak flow 1,410 1,410 1,270 967
Return sludge
withdrawal, each
basin
Min, mgd --- --- --- ---
Average, mgd --- --- --- 1.35
Max, mgd --- --- --- 1.90
Collector
components
Min rated 17,000 17,000 19,000 29,000'
torque, foot-
pounds
Approximate tip 9 9 10 10.5
speed, fpm
Min ball race 38 38 41 51
diameter,
inches
Influent well
baffle
Min. diameter, 10 10 10 24
ft
Min depth, ft. 4 4 _ 4 6
The total head loss through the center column to the center well shall
not exceed 4 inches of water at the peak flow rate.
The collector arm trusses, torque cage, and drive mechanism shall be
designed to withstand the specified minimum rated torque. In addition
to the specified torque, structural members and connections shall be de-
signed to withstand a nonoperating vertical live load of 500 pounds at
the outer end of either truss arm. The 500 pound load is for structural
design only, and is not a condition which must be met during operation
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -6-
F
F
F
F
F.",
The rated torque of all components of the collector drive unit shall
equal or exceed the torque equivalent to the nameplate horsepower of the
drive motor.
The torque shall be measured from the center line of the equipment. All
parts of each mechanism shall be designed to withstand the maximum
(breakdown) torque of the motor without damage to any component except
the motor. Loading to develop the torque shall be considered as uniform
loads applied simultaneously at panel points on both arms.
5. CENTER SUPPORT. Each mechanism shall be supported by a steel
combination center pier and influent diffuser. The center pier shall be
proper height to permit level installation of the access walkway and to
support the turntable above the water level. The diameter of the center
pier shall be as large as practicable consistent with the design of the
basin influent. The center pier shall be designed to support all loads
imposed thereon, including torque and eccentric loads from the rotating
mechanism, and all loads from the access walkway, flocculating well
wall, and mixing equipment. The thickness of the cylindrical steel
center pier shall be not less than 1/2 inch. Openings provided in the
center pier shall be suitably reinforced. The anchor bolt connection at
the base of the center support shall be adequately designed, to resist
all loadings that may be applied, including the maximum torque that may
be applied to the drive mechanism. The center pier shall be plumbed and
leveled using removable shims and wedges. The use of leveling nuts on
the anchor bolts will not be permitted. All details of the connection
shall be indicatedonthe submittal drawings.
A watertight connection shall be provided between the center pier and
the bottom of the basin. The center pier for SC-3301 and SC-3302 shall
be sized to contain the sludge discharge pipe. Connections between the
center pier, sludge discharge piping, and sludge collection well shall
be effectively sealed.
An influent well which will diffuse the influent into the basins without
disturbance shall be provided on primary clarifiers (SC-2101, -2102,
-3101, -3102) and secondary clarifiers (SC-2401,-2402). The influent
well baffle shall be fabricated from suitably reinforced steel plate not
less than 3/16 inch thick, and shall be suspended from the walkway or
the center cage. Baffled scum outlets shall be provided. The baffle
wall and supports shall be designed to withstand a wind load of 33 psf
on the projected area when the basin is dewatered.
6. CLARIFIER MECHANISM. Sludge collecting equipment, shall conform to
the following requirements.
6.01. Center }Mechanism. The center mechanism shall consist of the
drive unit, gearing, and supporting structure for the sludge collecting
equipment. The equipment shall have a cast iron, ductile iron, or steel
turntable with annular bearing raceways near the outer circumference.
The turntable shall rotate on alloy steel balls. Ball racer: shall be
hardened to at least Rockwell C60 or provided with renewable hard steel
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
11430
-7
liner strips. The balls shall run in an oil bath and shall be protected
by a felt seal and dust shield. A cast iron, ductile iron, or steel
ring gear shall be provided on each turntable. Ring gears shall be cast
integrally with the turntable or bolted in place. The center mechanism
shall be designed so that the balls can be replaced without removing the
access walkway. A valved oil bath drain shall be easily accessible from
the center platform. The drain shall terminate in a turned down elbow
and shall be suitable to support a container to receive waste oil.
6.02. Drive Unit. Each drive unit shall be constant speed, and shall
be anchored to the turntable base. Each drive unit shall consist of a
worm gear reduction unit connected by a roller chain -or V-belt drive'to
a speed reducer and motor combination. Drive units having a pinion
mounted directly on the motor shaft will not be acceptable.
The motor shall.be standard NEMA B design, totally enclosed, fan -cooled,
rated 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase conforming to the General Equipment
Stipulations.
Each motor shall be of the energy efficient.type in accordance with NEMA
MG 1.12.55.
Routine tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.51 shall be performed on
the assembled motor.
Terminal boxes shall be provided with sufficient space for motor leads
and accessories. Terminal boxes shall have terminals and conduit hubs
sized for the cables and conduit indicated on the drawings.
Bearings shall be effectively protected from contamination and dirt.
Grease lubricated bearings shall be provided with relief facilities
positively preventing overgreasing. Oil lubricated bearings shall be
provided with clearly marked level reference for both running and rest
conditions. Motor bearings shall be antifriction type with an AFBMA Lio
Life Rating of 40,000 hours. Motors shall have nameplates engraved with
bearing and lubricant identity.
6.03. Overload Mechanism. The drive for the rotating scraper assem-
blies shall be equipped with an indicating torque overload mechanism
with a weatherproof, cast iron or stainless steel housing and two
independently adjustable, electrically isolated contacts. The "Alarm"
contact shall open to operate specified alarm devices when the load
reaches approximately 100 percent of the rated torque of the drive unit.
The "Stop" contact shall close to unlatch a relay to stop the motor at
approximately 110 percent of rated torque. The overload mechanism shall
be factory adjusted. Torque indication and alarms shall be mechanically
or electrically actuated. Torque overload shall be actuated by
mechanical methods.
6.04. Rotating Scraper Assemblies. The mechanism shall be provided
with two rotating scraper arms. The rotating arms shall be attached to
and supported by a central cage of adequate strength and rigidity to
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -8
I
I
supportandrotate the scraper arms under maximum load conditions with
an adequate factor of safety, and shall be reinforced at top and bottom
for proper distribution of loads to supports. Scraper arms shall be
fabricated from structural steel members using triangular or box truss
construction. Longitudinal members of the triangular trusses shall be
fabricated from bent plates not less than 3/8 inch thick. Longitudinal
members of box trusses shall be fabricated of steel not less than
3/8 inch thick. Trussed arms shall be designed so tie rods will not be
required.
Blades shall be provided on the rotating arms to move settled sludge to
the central sludge collection hopper. Blades shall be spaced on each
arm so settled sludge is collected over the full area of the basin by
each arm. Blades shall be vertically adjustable .or adjustable edges
shall be provided.
The scraper arms shall conform to the slope of the bottom of the basin.
The clearance between the basin floor and the blades shall not exceed
1-1/2 inches at any point.
6.05. Sludge Removal Assemblies. Sludge removal assemblies for
r secondary clarifiers (SC-3301 and SC-3302) shall be mounted on each
tI collector arm and shall consist of a series of withdrawal pipes to
individual withdrawal ports. Sludge withdrawal pipes (minimum diameter
of 6 inches) shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D1785,
f with solvent welded fittings conforming to ASTM D2466, and shall be
f rigidly clamped in place with stainless steel clamps.
The sludge withdrawal pipes shall be connected to a sight well. A seal
shall be provided between rotating and stationary parts and shall be
designed for long life and easy replacement.
Individual sludge withdrawal pipes shall be connected to individual flow
control units at the center of the basin. The flow control units shall
be adjustable and shall be designed so adjustment will not be necessary
throughout the range of return sludge withdrawal rates indicated in the
l Performance and Design Requirements paragraph.
F
6.06. Scum Skimmers. Primary clarifiers (SC-2101, SC-2102, SC-3101,
and SC-3102) and secondary clarifiers (SC-2401 and SC-2402) shall be
equipped with baffles and devices to collect floating scum and flush it
into a trough for removal. Skimming equipment shall be designed to
operate with the circumferential odor control hood with integral scum
baffle for the primary clarifiers and with the circumferential scum
baffle for the secondary clarifiers as indicated on the drawings and
shall consist of skimmer and wiper assembly, scum trough with approach
ramp, and discharge pipe.
Each clarifier as listed above shall be equipped with one skimming arm.
Each skimmer shall collect scum the full distance between the center
well and the scum baffle. The skimming arm shall form an angle of at
least 2 degrees with the center line of the rake arm, and the entire
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
11430
-9-
weight of the arm shall be supported by the rotating machine. Designs
which rely on the scum baffle for support will not be acceptable.
The wiper blade shall be at least 6 inches wide, extending approximately
3 inches above and 3 inches below the water level. The wiper shall have
adjustable neoprene edges and shall rake scum up the approach ramp of
the scum trough and automatically discharge it into the trough. The
wiper assembly shall be supported at the outer end in its travel over
the scum trough. The approach ramp shall be long enough for efficient
removal of scum and shall extend 12 inches minimum below the top of the
weir. The ramp crest shall be at least one inch above the top of the
weir. The scum baffle, normally extending 2 inches above the top of the
weir as indicated on the drawings, shall be increased to 8 inches above
the top of the weir at the scum ramp and for a distance of at least
12 inches beyond each end of the ramp. In addition, the scum baffle
shall be increased 10 inches in depth at the scum ramp for a distance of
12 feet prior to the leading edge of the ramp to 8 feet beyond the
trailing edge of the ramp.
The scum trough shall be provided with a cam operated valve which will
flush the trough with basin water at each pass of the skimmer. Valve
opening and duration shall be adjustable.
Scum from SC-2101, -2102, -2401, and -2402 shall discharge by gravity
flow into a scum manhole located near the basin perimeter. The
discharge pipe from the scum trough shall be the size and arrangement
indicated on the drawings.
6.07. Rotating Weir Scum Skimmers. Secondary clarifiers (SC-3301 and
SC-3302) shall be equipped with baffles and devices to collect floating
scum and discharge it into a rotating weir for removal. The.skimming
system shall consist of a skimmer assembly, a rotating weir assembly,
and additional devices specified and required for proper operation.
Skimming equipment shall operate with the circumferential scum baffle
indicated on the drawings. The entire skimmer assembly shall be
supported by the scraper arms. Designs which rely on the scum baffle
for support will not be acceptable. The entire rotating weir shall be
supported from the walkway. The skimmer assembly shall be furnished
with a pivot support that allows the skimmer to pass under the rotating
weir without interfering with the operation of the weir. The weir
dipping cycle shall begin as the skimmer approaches the weir, by
rotating the weir to receive scum and flushing water from the basin, and
shall be completed by returning the weir to the closed position as the
skimmer passes. The rotating weir shall discharge scum by gravity flow
into an existing sludge drawoff box located near the basins.
Each basin (SC-3301 and SC-3302) shall be equipped with two skimming
arm. Each skimmer shall collect floating scum the full distance between
the scum baffle and the center well and within the outer portion of the
center well. The skimmer assembly shall consist of a skimmer blade,
blade support, support pivot bearing, wiper, and return mechanism. The
skimmer blade shall be 1/4 inch thick fiberglass reinforced plastic,
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -10
F
F
F
F
F
1-1/2 inch thick untreated southern pine or fir, or other suitable
corrosion -resistant materials. The 'skimmer blade sections shall not
exceed 10 feet in length and shall be approximately 12 inches high with
4 inches extending above the maximum water elevation in the basin. The
skimmer blades shall be sealed between sections, and shall have"adequate
supports attached to the scraper arms. The support pivot bearing shall
be suitable for underwater service, and shall be of the water lubricated
or self-lubricating type not requiring additional lubrication. A wiper
shall be provided at the perimeter of the skimmer to collect scum
between the end of the skimmer and the scum baffle. The wiper shall be
neoprene or other suitable, flexible, corrosion -resistant material. A
positive return mechanism shall be provided to rotate the skimmer blade
assembly to the vertical position after it passes under the rotating
weir. The return mechanism shall be actuated by a counterweight, float
or spring;.cable and weight mechanisms will not be acceptable. The
skimmer assembly shall be provided with additional supports or stops as
required to prevent damage to the equipment when the basin is dewatered
or when the scraper assembly is operated in a dry basin.
The rotating weir assemblies, RW-3301 and RW-3302, shall consist of a
steel pipe with weir openings, support bearings, and an actuating system
to control the dipping cycle. The steel pipe shall have a nominal
diameter of not less than 14 inches, a wall thickness of not less than
0.25 inch, and shall operate between the scum baffle and the floccula-
tion well. - The steel pipe shall be level to within 0.125 inch and shall
not deflect more than 0.125 inch under any conditions. .The _steel pipe
shall have weir openings cut in the top as indicated on Figure 2-11430
bound at the end of this section. Cut edges of the openings shall be
ground smooth. The rotating weir shall be closed at one end by a
0.25 inch steel plate and shall fit into a pipe collar at the launder
wall. The pipe collar at the open end of the rotating weir shall be
provided with a watertight packing box type seal. Seal materials shall
be suitable for submerged or partially submerged service in a sewage
basin. The seal shall be effective in all operating positions of the
rotating weir. Support bearings for the rotating weir shall be attached
to the walkway and shall be.spaced not more than 10 feet apart.
Bearings shall be suitable for continuous service partially submerged in
a sewage basin and shall be kept adequately lubricated when the
equipment is operated with the basin dry. Bearing supports shall be
adjustable to provide alignment and leveling of the rotating weir and
shall prevent nonessential movement of the rotating weir due to, but not
limited to, hydrostatic uplift forces or the weight of the weir. A
means of preventing movement in the steel pipe weir parallel to the axis
of the weir shall be provided. - The seal and bearings shall be
replaceable without removing the weir, and shall not bind or impede the
smooth action of the weir.
The rotating weir shall be operated by a drive system consisting of a.
heavy-duty, reversing. electric motor, valve type operator driving a
worm gear actuator. The motor shall be 460 volts, 3 phase and shall be
totally enclosed. The operator shall include a floor -mounted support, a
bottom exit output shaft, an integral motor, gearing, adjustable torque
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
11430
-11
protection each direction, torque capacity required to operate the weir,
an operating handwheel interlocked with the motor, a position indicator,
position limit switches, capacity for two consecutive full open -and -
close operations under any climatic conditions, and shall be self-
locking. Limits of weir rotation shall be controlled by four position
limit switches in the electrical operator, each individually and
infinitely adjustable over a range from the weir in the closed position
to a depth corresponding to 1.O inch below the bottom of the V-notch
basin effluent weir. Each switch shall include three isolated
reversible or double -throw contacts rated 6 amperes at 120 volts ac. A
mechanical position indicator shall be provided and shall indicate weir
elevation relative to the elevation of the bottom of the basin V-notch
weirs. The scale shall be graduated in inches and tenths of inches in
both directions from zero which shall be marked "BOTTOM OF V-NOTCH".
Scale calibrations shall extend to, and shall indicate, the "CLOSED"
position and the maximum lower elevation "BELOW V-NOTCH".
All components of the weir drive system shall be suitable for use in a
sewage basin by the use of either corrosion -resistant materials or
totally weatherproof sealed housings." The drive system shall be a
standard design of Auma, E-I-M, Limitorque, or Rotork.
Replaceable wearing surfaces shall be provided at all contact points
between the weir assembly and skimmer assembly to make contact as the
skimmer passes under the weir assembly. The rotating weir shall be
aligned so the skimmer blades make simultaneous contact at the wearing
surfaces along the entire length of the rotating weir assembly.
I.t has been called to the attention of the Engineer that US Patent
3,627,132 dated December 14, 1971, covers a scum -skimming method and
apparatus using a ducking skimmer. .Examples of prior art involving
ducking skimmers have also been identified.
7. WALKWAY AND SUPPORT BEAMS OR TRUSSES. Beams or trusses spanning
across the basin and supported on the basin walls and the center column
shall be provided to support the basin mechanism and the basin walkway.
Each turntable top shall have a platform above the center pier for
convenient access to the center drive mechanism. A platform shall also
be provided for convenient access to each mixing unit. The platforms
shall be wide enough to provide a clear space of at least 2 feet on all
sides of the equipment. -
The platform.shall be connected to the basin wall by a walkway at least
36 inches wide extending from the platform to the wall in the arrange-
ment indicated on the drawings. The anchor bolt connection at the
clarifier wall shall be adequately designed to resist loadings that may
be applied. For secondary clarifiers (SC-3301 and SC-3302) clearance of
30 inches in width shall be maintained on the basin walkway at the weir
operator, and the walkway shall be widened sufficiently to allow a clear
space of at least 2 feet on all sides of the weir operator. The walkway
shall be floored with 1-1/2 inch 'aluminum grating, and shall be
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -12
r
F
F
F
i
r
diagonally braced against lateral movement. A kickplate at least
4 inches high shall be provided around the entire walkway. The walkway
shall be'designed and constructed so deflection will not exceed 1/360 of
the span length considering all dead loads plus a live load of 50 pounds
per square foot and a horizontal wind load of 33 pounds per square foot.
In addition, beam and truss depth limitations set forth in the Struc-
tural Design paragraph shall apply to all walkway beams and trusses
which support rotating weirs or other equipment. For other walkways,
the ratio of span length to depth of beam shall not exceed 24 for simple
spans nor 12 for cantilever spans. Slide plates shall be provided at
the wall supports.
A steel stair with aluminum grating treads shall be provided at the
basin wall end of each walkway.
Three -rail railings 3'-6" high shall be provided along each side of each
beam supported walkway and stair, and around the center and mixing unit
platforms. Railings shall be aluminum as specified in the structural
and miscellaneous metals section. The walkway truss system may serve as
railings, provided it meets all requirements for guard rails, otherwise,
railings shall be mounted on each side. A rectangular aluminum mounting
plate for electrical equipment shall be provided on the center platform
railing on the walkway railing near each mixer and near the rotating
weir operator. Stainless steel bolts and hardware shall be used to
install the mounting plates.
Walkways shall be provided with the necessary brackets for supporting
the electrical conduits indicated on the drawings.
S. CONTROL EQUIPMENT. Control equipment not required to be on the
basin equipment shall be supported on the aluminum mounting plates
attached to the handrails. Stainless steel bolts and fasteners shall be
used to mount the equipment.
8.01. Sludge Collector Control Eouipment. Control equipment for each.
sludge collector shall include a thermal -magnetic circuit breaker type
combination motor starter, three externally reset thermal overloads, a
120 volt control power transformer, an 'Off -On" three -pole maintained
selector switch, an externally reset latch relay for torque overload, a
dpdt alarm relay, a red 'run" indicating light, a green *off" indicating
light and a red alarm lamp. The alarm lamp shall be vaportight with
3/4 inch bottom hub, red globe, guard, and 60 watt bulb. Other items
shall be in a stainless steel NEMA Type 4 enclosure with a 3/4 inch top
hub for the alarm lamp. The starter shall have spdt spare auxiliary
contacts. The control transformer shall have one secondary lead fused,
the other grounded, and capacity for all simultaneous controls and
alarms. Push buttons and selector switches shall be heavy-duty and
weatherproof.
8.02. Rotating Weir Controls. Two heavy-duty, weatherproof limit
switches shall be provided to sense approach and passing of the skimming
arm for automatic operation of the rotating weir. Continuous screw
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
11430
-13-
adjustments shall be provided to set the positions at which the switches
operate. One switch shall cause the weir operator to rotate the weir to
the lower position and shall be infinitely adjustable over a 3 foot
range measured as the peripheral distance between the skimmer and the
rotating weir. The second switch shall cause the weir operator to raise
the weir as the skimming arm passes under the weir and shall be adjust-
able between arm positions one foot before and one foot after the weir.
Control equipment for each rotating weir operator shall include a
thermal -magnetic circuit breaker type combination reversing motor
starter, at least NEMA Size 1, with three externally reset overloads,
a counter with auxiliary devices required for specified operation, a
time delay relay, and a 120 volt control power transformer. These
components shall be factory assembled and wired in the motor operator
enclosure or in a stainless steel NEMA Type 4 enclosure on the handrail.
"Hand -Off -Auto" and `Weir Position Limit -- Low-Med-High" selector
switches and "Lower -Stop -Raise" momentary push buttons of heavy-duty,
weatherproof type shall extend through the enclosure door. The lowering
limit selector switch shall select among three differently adjusted
position limit switches in the motor operator to stop the "Lower"
starter at preset weir opening levels. The starter shall be at least
NEMA Size 1. The control transformer shall have one secondary lead
fused, the other grounded, and capacity for all simultaneous controls.
In "Auto" control selection, the counter shall lower and raise the weir
once for each set count of passes of the skimming arm. The count before
an output contact operation shall be easily set and indicated for any
number from 1 through at least 50. The counting system shall be reset
to zero automatically after an output operation on set count, but shall
not reset or cause an output operation on loss of power. The counting
output contact shall close to start and seal in the "Lower" starter,
then open to allow further weir operation. A pneumatic time delay with
1 to 10 minute adjustable "Off" delay shall start timing on each start
of weir cycle. If the skimming arm should stop on the first limit
switch or before operating the second switch to raise the weir, the
delay relay shall disconnect the "Lower" starter and operate the "Raise"
starter. Automatic controls shall be fail-safe and immune to voltage
outages to maintain the weir closed, except during operation. In "Hand"
control selection, the weir starter shall seal in each direction for
full travel to the operator limit switch settings unless the "Stop"
button is pushed. If the weir is not raised by push button, the time
delay relay shall raise the weir as in "Auto" selection.
9. INSTALLATION. Weir plates shall be adjusted after installation to
provide uniform overflow rate at all points.
The blades on each scraper shall be adjusted to the contour of the basin
floor.
To ensure that each sludge collecting mechanism is functioning properly,
it shall be run at least 4 hours before flow is admitted to the basin.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -14
Anti -seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to the threaded
portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly.
10. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation
drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering
material used, power drive assemblies, and accessories forming a part of
the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the
submittals section. Drawings shall indicate all dimensions and member
sizes, and shall bear the seal of a registered professional engineer.
Data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be
limited to, the following:
Sludge Collecting Equipment
Torque rating.
Arm tip speed.
Maximum (breakdown) torque.
Shop painting.
Structural drawings.
Size, make, and type of electric motor.
Electrical control equipment.
Type, specifications, details, input and output speeds, exact.
gear ratios, and service factor (24 hour continuous service)
of gear reducers.
Description of overload device.
Wiring diagram and electrical schematic.
Scum Skimming Equipment
Size, make, type, and details of weir operator.
Electrical control equipment.
Wiring diagrams and electrical schematic.
Motors
Manufacturer, model, type and enclosure.
Bearing type and lubrication.
Horsepower rating and service factor.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -15-
Temperature rise and insulation rating.
Full load rotative speed, rpm.
Net weight.
Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load.
Efficiency at specified operating condition.
Full load current.
Locked rotor current.
Overall dimensions and base details.
Power factor at no load and at full load.
Motor winding temperature switch data.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11430
(17578 ) -16-
A,
1
V doss plate
,is required by f
equip. iurnlShed Grout
rs�
C
� Square plate
W 1
A
C
D
E
L
!s' I �y'{
3`
4'' IP'
/Z'{ �%�
6'
Sol IS'
2' { 4i'
7' 1
%f { 170
ZZ114;�
a'
fe I >9'
vi r
9'
/' 1 ?I`
TYPE 8
NOTES
eo/fd shall be ermbeddad auiif,Cjent/y
tO transfer Meer load to Founda#,o^
and reinforcing steel.
for installation .n p0ors, Cor►s�derot�on
shall be rren to Clearance$ between
edges of plates and Concrete Faces.
Sol f3 less than J t' shall not be
used For structural anchor bolts.
ANCHOR SOLT DETAIL AT CENTER SUPPORT
SUCK i VEATCN Ftcua� L-11430
ENGINEERS •ARCMITECTS
KANSAS CITY. •ISM RI
42' - 4" FROM LAUNDER WALL TO FLOC. WELL
• / 4 5' 4" 4: 1'-6' 3' 2' Q' t _ 6' Z' 3'
PIPE COLLAR
14" PIPE
2
V SECONDARY SCUM
ELEVATION
MACHINE EDGES
c
m
m
N
1
J
JA
T
W
0
SECTION I
REMOVE TOP OF PIPE Al
LOCATION INDICATED
14" PIPE
2' 112*1 2' - 6" 11211 2' - 6"
SCUM BAFFLE 2'-0" DEEP
10'-0' EACH WIRY FROM
ROTATING WEIR
21- 0" 2'- O'
6"(TYP1:
W�IIi
SECTION 2
r
Section 11570 - DIFFUSED AERATION EQUIPMENT
1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing and installing a ceramic
disc. fine bubble diffused aeration system in the three existing
aeration basins at Plant No. 3 as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
The equipment shall be furnished and installed complete with all ceramic
disc, fine bubble air diffusers, supports, anchor bolts, air piping,
pipe anchors, and any additional materials or construction required by
the manufacturer's design.
The diffused aeration equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for
supplying all air piping in the aeration basins from the butterfly valve
at each drop pipe, including the drop pipes, manifolds, and laterals,
and all accessories and appurtenances which are supplied or required for
proper installation and operation. Air piping, flowmeters, and valves
beyond the limits indicated on the drawings will be supplied by others.
Air supply to the diffused aeration equipment will be provided by
r centrifugal blowers.
I 2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.01.01. Workmanship and Materials. All equipment shall be guaranteed
against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection,
defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other
failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.
All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance
with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practices. Indivi-
dual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that
repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field.
Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall
not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as
required by tests.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabri-
cated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All
structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads.
Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or
I in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least
t. 1/4 inch thick.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -1-
2.01.02. Anchor Bolts. The manufacturer shall furnish suitable anchor
bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts shall comply with the
anchor bolts and expansion anchors section, unless otherwise specified.
All assembly and anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless
steel.
2.01.03. Preparation for Shipment. All equipment shall be suitably
packaged to facilitate handling and protect against damage during tran-
sit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise
completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and
storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements
and shall be kept dry at all times.
2.01.04. Storage. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall
immediately be stored and protected until installed in the Work.
Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or
other deleterious effects of storage when installed in the Work.
2.01.05. Installation and Operation. Qualified field representatives
shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer as required to perform
all manufacturer's field servicescalled for in the specifications.
Manufacturer's field representatives shall observe, instruct, guide, and
direct erection or installation procedures, or perform an installation
check, as required. The field representative shall revisit the site as
often as necessary to attain satisfactory installation.
All equipment installed shall be placed into successful operation
according to the written instructions of the manufacturer or the
instructions of the manufacturer's field respresentative. All required
adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activity shall
be provided.
2.02. Coordination. All equipment provided in this section shall be
furnished by or through a single manufacturer who shall coordinate the
design of the diffused aeration system.
2.03. Valves. Valves required in connection with the air distribution
piping are covered under the miscellaneous valves section.
2.04. Alterations. Any alterations to the structure, piping, supports,
anchors, accessories, or appurtenances indicated on the drawings that
are required for installation and operation of the diffused aeration
equipment, regardless of type or manufacturer, shall be made by and at
the sole expense of the Contractor. All costs in connection with any
modifications shall be considered as included in the bid and contract
based thereon. All changes and modifications shall be acceptable to the
Engineer.
2.05. Spare Parts and Special Tools. The manufacturer shall furnish
two complete sets of all special tools required for the assembly,
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -2-
is
disassembly, adjustment, and maintenance of all components of the
diffused aeration equipment. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged
in accordance with the General Equipment Stipulations and shall be
delivered to the Owner as directed.
Item Quantity
Spare diffuser elements, including 5I of the number of
retainers, gaskets, and other units in one basin
€. accessories
Sections of diffuser lateral piping, 5
including holders, lengths equal to
the longest sections installed
Pipe supports with all accessories One percent of each
type and size installed
Expansion or slip joints with One percent of each
accessories type and size installed
3. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.
3.01. Acceptable Manufacturers. The fine bubble diffused aeration
equipment shall be ceramic disk type diffusers as specified herein and
shall be manufactured by Water Pollution Control Corporation of
Milwaukee, Wisconsin or Parkson Corporation of Ft. Lauderdale, Florida,
or Aercor Corporation of Worcester, Massachusetts. The products of
other manufacturers will not be acceptable.
The capability of the ceramic disc, fine bubble aeration equipment to
meet the specified oxygen transfer.rates shall be determined by field
performance tests. The performance tests shall be conducted as
stipulated herein.
3.02. Conditions of Service. All diffused aeration equipment shall be
designed to operate satisfactorily in the environment presented by the
plant design. The equipment will be used in a step feed activated
sludge process designed to achieve nitrification in the summer in 3
existing aeration basins at Plant No. 3.
The diffused aeration equipment will be used to aerate and completely
mix settled primary wastewater and activated sludge. The aeration basin
follows bar screens, grit basins, and primary clarifiers.
Sludge pumping facilities will allow variable recirculation rates of
return activated sludge to the aeration basins.
The diffused aeration equipment shall be suitable for in -place cleaning
using HC1 gas. In -place cleaning equipment will not be installed at
this time.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -3-
There are three existing basins in which ceramic disc diffusers shall be
installed. All basins are rectangular and have return activated sludge
recycled to the aeration basin influent piping ahead of the basins.
Ambient air temperatures at the site are expected to range from 10 F to
100 F.
3.03. Performance Criteria. The following criteria are based on the
assumption that the influent flow and loading to the aeration basins is
split equally to each basin.
Standard oxygen transfer rate
in clear water at 20C and one
atmosphere, lb Oy/hr
Nitrification Carbonaceous
Summer, Max Mo. Winter, Max Mo.
Average day Peak day Average dal Peak day
Total 3,762 4,-675 1,884 2,299
Basins No. 1, 2, 1,254 1,558 628 766
& 3 each
3.04. Design Criteria. The following criteria shall be used in
designing the equipment to meet the performance requirements.
The ceramic disc, fine bubble diffused aeration equipment shall be
designed to provide full floor uniform coverage. Each aeration system
in each basin shall have sufficient mixing capacity to thoroughly mix
the entire contents and to keep all biological solids in suspension.
The diffused aeration equip-ment shall meet the standard oxygen transfer
rates specified herein based on the following criteria:
Standard air available, scfm
Total 20,100 (Nitrification)
Basins No. 1, 2, & 3 each 6,700
Mixing requirements per basin, scfm 2,723
Physical Dimensions of Basins, L x W x SWD
Basins No. 1, 2, & 3, each 220' x 55' x 15'
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -4-
r-
Number of Size of Drop
Drop Pipes Pipes, in.
Basins No. 1, 2, & 3, each 28 4
Approximate diffuser depth, ft 14.0
Pressure available at top 6.67
of drop pipes, psig
Max pressure loss across clean
0.60
diffusers, including the control
orifice at maximum available
air flow rates specified, psig
The following is the maximum flowrate of air
per diffuser which will be
allowed. This is based on all grids being similar. The final number
will depend on certified factory testing and
final layout drawings, but
shall not be more than 1 percent of the number shown.
Maximum Flowrate
Manufacturer
per diffuser, scfm
Water Pollution Control Corporation_
2.8
Parkson Corporation
2.8
Aercor Corporation
2.8
The standard oxygen transfer rates as specified herein are estimated
based on the following criteria:
Design flow to each basin, mgd
Basins 1, 2, & 3, each
3.33
Total return activated sludge flow,
3.8
max, mgd
Aeration basin data
Number of basins
3
Number of passes per basin
2
Flow regime
Step Feed
Pass length, ft
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -5
Activated Sludge
220
Pass width, ft
Basins 1, 2, & 3, each
27.5
Sidewall depth
—
Basin 1, 2, & 3
16' - 11"
Design water depth, ft
15'
Basin wall elevation, ft
Basins 1, 2, & 3
3134.50
Basin floor elevation, ft
3117.58
Design water elevation, ft
3132.58
Total volume, mil gal
—
Basins 1, 2, & 3, each
1.358
Approximate diffuser submergence, ft
14.0
Temperature range of mixed liquor (T), °C
15-28
Average temperature of mixed liquor (T), °C 20
Plant elevation, ft
3130.00
Theoretical oxygen saturation at sea
10.4
level and 35 percent of assumed diffuser
..
submergence at 20 C, mg/1
Theoretical ambient oxygen saturation
9.4
at 35 percent of assumed diffuser
submergence at 20 C, mg/1
Min basin oxygen concentration (C), at
2
maximum month oxygen uptake rate, mg/1
Alpha correction factor (a)
0.6
Beta correction factor CB)
0.9
Oxygen uptake rate at summer peak cond.,
50.3 J'
mg/l/hr
4. DIFFUSED AERATION EQUIPMENT. The diffused
aeration equipment shall
consist of all drop pipes, air piping, diffuser
assemblies, pipe
supports, moisture blowoff assemblies, and all
accessories indicated on
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -6-
r
the drawings, specified or required for proper installation and func-
tioning of the diffused air system.
4.01. Aeration System Materials.
Pipe
Drop Pipes
Air Distribution
Headers
Diffuser Laterals
Fittings, Expansion Joints,
and End Caps
Supports, Clamps, and
and Anchors
Diffuser Assembly
Schedule 10 stainless steel and
Schedule 40 PVC, ultraviolet
resistant
Schedule 40 PVC, ultraviolet
resistant
ASTM D3034, SDR 33.5 PVC,
ultraviolet resistant.
Ultraviolet resistant PVC
compression type with neoprene
seals; thickness class to be
the same as the pipe.
ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless
steel with minimum 2 inch
vertical infinite adjustment.
9-inch aluminum oxide disc
diffuser, UPVC holder, EDPM,
polyisoprene, or neoprene
washers and gaskets suitable
for air temperatures to 200 F
and HC1 gas and concentrated
HC1 acid. Gaskets shall be of
a hardness recommended by the
manufacturer.
Moisture Blowoff Assembly ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 PVC
pipe and fittings, solvent
welded, with PVC ball valves as
specified in the Miscellaneous
Valves Section.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers IFI-104, Grade 303, 304, or
305 stainless steel.
Miscellaneous Metals ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless
steel.
4.02. Diffuser Assemblies. Each diffuser assembly shall consist of a
porous ceramic disc diffuser element, a flow control orifice, a diffuser
holder, gaskets, disc, and retainers as required to attach the diffuser
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -7-
to the holder. Systems utilizing ceramic dome diffusers or membrane
diffusers will not be acceptable.
A full peripheral type screw on retaining device with gasket shall be
furnished to securely hold and seal the ceramic diffuser element to the
element holder. The diffuser assembly and retaining device shall,be
designed to prevent air escape at the diffuser element -sealing gasket
interface. A method to vary the applied sealing force between the
sealing gasket and ceramic diffuser element shall be provided. Sealing
method or retaining device shall generate a minimum of 50 pounds per
inch of circumference of the sealing gasket to provide a long term
positive seal.and prevent air escape escape except through -the active
area of the diffuser element. Diffuser designs utilizing a hold down
bolt or similar restraining device that penetrates through a void in the
diffuser element shall not be acceptable. A full peripheral type screw
on retaining system shall be furnished to insure that a long term
effective seal is provided.
Ceramic diffuser elements shall be composed of crystalline fused alumina
(aluminum oxide) with a suitable ceramic bonding material. The indivi-
dual alumina grains shall be thoroughly joined together with the bonding
material to form a strong, uniformly porous and otherwise homogenous
structure..
Diffusers shall be substantially free from any material soluble in
sewage containing household or industrial wastes of any character and
from any loose, unbonded material which may affect their normal and
proper operation. All diffusers shall be free of cracks, soft spots,
chipping, spalling, or other structural defects. All diffusers shall
be uniform throughout their entire structure and free from holes and
impervious materials which may cause unequal air distribution. The
diffuser elements shall provide a constant and uniform distribution of
the emergent diffused air bubbles across their entire active section.
Ceramic diffuser elements shall have a diameter of 9 inches.
The diffuser holder shall be PVC and shall be solvent welded to the
distribution lateral piping in the factory. Each diffuser holder shall
include a control orifice sized to equally distribute the air flow
throughout the basins over a range of 25 to 100 percent of the specified
air available. The diffuser element shall be attached to the holder
using UPVC retainer rings. Gaskets shall be designed to provide a
continuous seal between the diffuser element and the holder or retaining
ring. Gaskets or washers shall be provided to seal around all
fasteners. All gasket material shall be chemically resistant to HC1 gas
and concentrated liquid HC1 acid.
The Contractor, along with the representatives of the manufacturer,
shall demonstrate in the field in each partially filled basin the effec-
tiveness of the seals provided at any, air flow rate. Any evidence of
air leaking around gaskets or washers shall be corrected, and method of
correction shall be satisfactory to the Engineer.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -8-
f_
F
4.03. Diffused Aeration Piping. The diffuser manufacturer shall
provide stainless steel drop pipes beginning at the butterfly valve
of each drop pipe, as indicated on the drawings. The diffused aeration
piping shall begin at the end of the drop pipes approximately 10 feet
below the top of the aeration basin walls. This piping shall 'include
the entire air distribution system,, including all air distribution
headers and diffuser laterals. Piping shall be fabricated in sections
not to exceed 25 feet and shall be assembled with solvent welded or
expansion couplings designed to provide an airtight connection.
The grid piping shall be sized by the manufacturer to evenly distribute
the flow to all diffusers with a minimum pressure drop. The minimum
size piping shall be 4 inch diameter.
All subsurface connections, yokes, baseplates, supports, and fasteners
shall be free from protusions, sharp angles, or excessively long bolts
which might catch rags or strings.
4.04. Expansion or Slip Joints. Expansion or slip joints shall be fur-
nished to allow for expansion and contraction of the diffused aeration
piping. The joints shall be located between each support where the
piping is longitudinally fixed. The joints shall provide for full move-
ment of the piping over a temperature range of 32F to 125F, without air
leakage.
4.05. Pipe Supports. Pipe supports shall be fabricated as specified
herein and detailed on Figure 3-11570 at the end of this section.
They shall be provided complete with all bases, anchor bolts and nuts,
plates, rods, and other accessories required for proper installation.
All diffusers shall be leveled to within + 1/8 inch of a common hori-
zontal plane after installation. All anchor bolts used with pipe
supports shall be 3/8 inch diameter stainless steel. The support
system shall be designed to resist the buoyant force at each support.
One support for each section of piping shall include an integral device
for rotational adjustment during installation. All adjusting devices
and mechanisms shall provide locking to secure the piping in position
after final adjustment and alignment.
Worm gear clamps for holding pipes will not be acceptable. Pipe sup-
ports which require loosening anchor bolts for vertical adjustment will
not be acceptable.
All supports shall include a mechanism to provide for a -minimum t 2
inches vertical and t 1/2 inch lateral adjustment for alignment of the
piping. Supports shall be spaced on maximum 7.5 feet centers.
4.05.01. Guide Su��orts. Guide supports shall consist of a self-
limiting hold down and sliding mechanism. This hold down and sliding
mechanism shall provide a 1-1/2 inch wide contoured bearing surface
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17576
}
& EXPANSION)
11570
-9-
with chamfered leading edges to minimize binding of the air distribu-
tion header, The sliding mechanism shall provide minimum resistance
to movement of the air distribution header under full buoyant uplift
load. Mechanism shall provide 1/8" clearance around header and be self-
limiting if the mechanism is overtightened. A°maximum horizontal thrust
of 20 pounds or less shall initiate"movement of the header relative to
the mechanism under full buoyant uplift load.
4.05.02. Fixed SuADorts. Fixed supports shall consist of a hold down
mechanism and self-limiting clamp device. The hold down mechanism and
clamp shall provide a 1-112 inch wide contoured bearing surface for the
air distribution header. The clamping device:shall positively grip the
air distribution header when tight and be self-limiting to prevent over-
stressing the header if the clamp is overtightened.
4.06. Pickling. After fabrication, all stainless steel assemblies and
parts shall be completely immersed for a minimum of 15 minutes in a
pickling solution of 6 percent nitric acid and 3 percent hydrofluoric
acid at 140 F. Parts shall be free from iron particles or other foreign
material. A complete neutralizing operation by immersion in a contin-
uous fresh water bath, shall be required after the pickling operation.
The manufacturer shall certify that all stainless steel assemblies and
parts have been pickled as specified herein.
4.07. Moisture Blow -Off Assemblies. Two moisture blow -off assemblies
shall be provided for each grid to drain the entire submerged aeration "
piping.. All components of the piping shall be PVC and shall be
supported along the aeration wall. The purge piping and valves shall be
at least one inch diameter. The assembly shall include a sump or drop
pipe for the collection of moisture, purge piping extending to near the
top of the,basin wall, and a blowoff.valve, as indicated on the
drawings.
4.08. Cleanouts. A cleanout with a threaded or other easily removable
end cap shall be provided at the ends of each diffuser lateral.
4.09. Diffusers Pressure Monitoring System This system consists of a
portable diffuser pressure monitoring panel and connection boxes at each
drop pipe.
The monitoring equipment shall be installed in a UV inhibitive fiber-
glass reinforced plastic enclosure mounted on a portable hand cart.
The wheels on the cart shall be sized to roll easily on the walkway.
Flexible piping stored on:the,cart shall be provided for connection to
the piping in the connection boxes. A rotameter shall be provided in
the bubbler piping. Differential pressure gauges shall be provided for
monitoring the pressure across the diffuser orifice and across the
diffuser.element. A calibration: curve shall be provided which gives the
relationship between the differential pressure across the orifice and
the air flow rate.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -10-
A_;1
An in -place HC1 gas diffuser cleaning system as patented by Water
Pollution Control Corporation, or a muriatic acid cleaning system as
manufactured by Aercor, may be added by the City in the future. To
facilitate this future addition, an adjustable differential pressure
switch and a five -wire electrical junction box at each drop leg shall be
included in the pressure monitoring panel for the future HC1gassystem.
This equipment shall be used in conjunction with the future automatic
gas shutoff system in the event the air flow rate to the diffusers drops
below 1 scfm per diffuser.
A fiberglass reinforced plastic connection box shall be provided at each
drop leg for the pressure monitoring panel. The resin used in fabrica-
tion of each box shall contain an ultraviolet inhibitor. A stainless
steel latch and a continuous stainless steel piano hinge shall be
provided on each connection box door, and a continuous weathertight
gasket shall be provided around the door. Aluminum channels or angles
k. shall be used to fabricate a stanchion for supporting the connection
boxes on the wye wall in a manner which provides easy access to the
piping and valves. Each connection box shall be provided with adequate
space and provisions for future installation of the HCl tubing, pressure
gauges, and other appurtenances.
A ball valve shall be provided in each of the three pipes terminating in
each connection box. The pipes shall extend from the box to the aera-
tion grid and shall be enclosed in a 4 inch diameter PVC carrier pipe.
One pipe shall be connected to the aeration grid header pipe, another to
a typical diffuser holder, and the third shall be a bubbler pipe used to
determine the diffuser submergence.
A plugged one inch diameter piping connection point shall be provided at
each diffuser grid near the bottom of each drop pipe for the addition of
the HC1 gas in the future.
5. FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS. Prior to equipment acceptance, field
performance tests shall be conducted on the aeration equipment to demon-
strate that the equipment meets specified oxygen transfer and air flow rate requirements. Performance tests shall be conducted on the aeration
equipment in Basin 1. Testing shall be conducted in Aeration Basin l as
soon as practical after the installation of the equipment and prior to
completion of the work in the other basins. The work in no more than
one quadrant of Basin No. 2 and Basin No. 3 shall be completed prior to
conducting the test and submitting the test report.
Personnel in charge of the tests shall be competent authorized represen-
tatives of the equipment manufacturers who are familiar with operation
of the equipment furnished and who have previous satisfactory experience
in conducting tests of the type specified. Qualified personnel shall
perform the tests, record the data, make the required calculations, and
prepare a report on the results; five copies of the report shall be
submitted to the Engineer. Representatives of the Engineer will observe
the tests and collect a copy of the recorded data. The information
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
' (17578 ) -11-
collected will be used as a basis for determining acceptability of the
manufacturer's results. In case of conflict, interpretations and calcu-
lations made by the Engineer will govern.
Water required for testing shall be furnished by the Owner through the
use of on -site fire hydrants. The Contractor will be allowed to use the
permanent blowers, air supply piping, and flow meters installed for this
project, provided they have been completed to allow satisfactory opera-
tion.
The Contractor shall provide other support facilities which shall
include, but not.be limited to, power, equipment, chemical storage
tanks, mixing equipment, chemicals for dissolved oxygen determinations
by the modified Winkler method, chemicals for KLa determinations. by the
nonsteady state sulfite method, DO probes, scales, and such other
equipment and facilities as may be necessary.,
At least two weeks prior to the proposed testing date, the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer of the testing date, and shall submit a report
from the equipment manufacturer detailing the proposed performance
testing procedures and analyses for review and acceptance by the
Engineer.
Testing shall be performed between 8:00 a.m. and.5:00 p.m. and shall
begin on Monday or Tuesday. If.more than one day of testing is
required, the testing shall be done on consecutive days. No testing
shall be performed on holidays or weekends.
The Engineer's initial observation of aeration equipment tests shall be
at the Owner's expense. All costs of subsequent visits by the Engineer
to.witness or observe additional tests necessary because of failure of
the initial tests or inability to conduct the initial tests will be
deducted from monies due the Contractor.
5.01. Data Required. The data to be determined shall include, but not
be limited to, the air flow rate in scfm, air supply pressure and
temperature, the rate of change of the dissolved oxygen concentration,
the liquid temperatures, ambient barometric.pressure and temperature
readings, and additional data as necessary to determine compliance with
the specifications.
5.02. Test Procedures. Testsshall be performed in clean water when
the water temperature is between 15 C and 25 C. Clean water from the
City's potable water system may be used with the Owner's permission.
The use of plant effluent will not be acceptable. A minimum of three
tests shall be conducted at the conditions required to meet the peak
summer SOTR specified under performance requirements, and at least two
additional tests shall be performed at approximately 60 and 80 percent
of the maximum air flow rate to plot the specified performance curves.
The three performance tests shall be performed first. No conditioning
runs shall be allowed.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -12-
F
F
The measurement of air flow rate shall be made with the permanent flow
metering equipment installed in the basin supply header. The Contrac-
tor shall supply to the Engineer for review and acceptance a copy of the
equation and calibration curves to be used with the flowmetering equip-
ment.
In each test, sodium sulfite shall be added to the water to deplete the
oxygen concentration to zero, and the equipment shall then be operated
to reaerate the water until oxygen saturation is reached. Dissolved
oxygen concentrations shall be monitored continuously during the oxygen
depletion and reaeration periods. Dissolved oxygen readings shall be
taken over the entire range from 0 to 100 percent of the measured
saturation concentration. Data shall be recorded that shows oxygen
depletion. The data shall also show that all test points remained at
zero dissolved oxygen for at least one minute. The test shall be
considered invalid if zero dissolved oxygen is not reached for at least
one minute at all test points simultaneously. Dissolved oxygen concen-
trations and time shall be recorded at equal time increments to provide
at least 15 data points between 10 and 90 percent of the measured
saturation concentration. The temperature -of the test liquid shall be
recorded before and after each test run. Cobalt ion concentration of
the test water will be measured, after completion of tests, by an
independent testing laboratory and the test paid for by the Owner.
Points of dissolved oxygen measurement shall be as shown on Figure
1-11570.
Dissolved oxygen concentration measurements shall be made with direct
reading instruments which have been standardized against a. laboratory
determination of dissolved oxygen by the modified Winkler method as
described in the latest edition of "Standard Methods for Examination of
Water and Wastewater", with appropriate modification for interfering
substances. When direct reading instruments are used, one shall be
provided for each point shown on Figure 1-11570. Each instrument shall
have a probe cord of adequate length.
A 10 percent, by weight, solution of sodium sulfite (Na2SO3) shall be
prepared in sufficient quantity to deplete the dissolved oxygen concen-
tration in the basin to zero and maintain the zero condition for one
minute. Stoichiometrically, about 75 pounds of 96 percent pure sodium
sulfite will be required per million gallons to deplete the oxygen
concentration one milligram per liter. About 150 percent of the stoi-
chiometric concentration is required to achieve and maintain zero
conditions for one minute. Technical grade sodium sulfite, free of
catalyst, shall be used.
A 10 percent, by weight, solution of cobalt chloride (CoC12.6H20) shall
also be prepared for the initial series of tests. About 34 pounds of
cobalt chloride will be required per million gallons to obtain a cobalt
ion concentration of one milligram per liter. For test purposes, the
cobalt ion concentration shall be 0.5 mg/l or less.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
11570
-13-
For the initial series, the cobalt chloride solution shall be introduced
into the basin with the aeration equipment operating. After a minimum
of 15 minutes of operation, addition of the sodium sulfite solution
shall be started slowly. The entire quantity of sodium sulfite solution
shall be added to the tank within a period of approximately five minutes
in a manner achieving uniform dispersion throughout the basin.
After the first tests have been completed, another batch of sodium
sulfite shall be prepared and the procedure repeated. No additional
cobalt chloride solution should be required after the first series.
Should additional chemicals be required, they shall be provided at no
additional cost to the Owner. No more than ten (10) tests shall be made
with the same test water.
5.03. Data Analysis. The dissolved oxygen deficit from saturation
(C,-Ct) for each measurement shall be calculated and plotted on semilog
paper versus time (t), where Ct is the measured oxygen concentration at
any time (t) and C, is the measured oxygen saturation value. A line of
best fit shall be drawn utilizing regression analysis on all points. A
sample data plot is shown on Figure 2-11570. All plots shall be submit-
ted as part of the test report.
The overall oxygen transfer coefficient (KLa)T for each point of
measurement specified shall be computed by determining the slope of the
line of the best fit by using the following equation:
In [(C,-Cl)/(C,-C2)1
(KLa)T a (hr-1)
t2-tl
where: T - water temperature, C
C, - Cl - initial (tl) dissolved oxygen deficit, mg/1
C, - C2 - final (t2) dissolved oxygen deficit, mg/1
t2 - tl - time span, hr.
C, measured oxygen saturation value at test site r.
barometric pressure and liquid temperature T,
mg/1
The oxygen transfer rate constant for each measurement point shall be
corrected to 20 C by the following formula: _.
(KLa)20 — (KLa)T(1.024)(20-T) (hr-') -_
The individual values of (KLa)20 for each condition shall be averaged
and at least two-thirds of the individual (K,a)20 values shall be within
10 percent of the average value. If not, additional tests shall be
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570 `
(17578 ) -14- �-
I
conducted until two-thirds of the (KLa)20 values are within l0 percent
of the average of all (KLa)20 values.
The standard. oxygen transfer rate by the aeration system shall be calcu-
lated by using the average value of (KLa)20 in the following equation:
Standard Oxygen Transfer Rate - 8.34 (KLa)20VBC,(std)(lb/hr)
where: VB - Aeration basin volume in million gallons.
C,(std) - The measured Ca value obtained during the
performance testing corrected to standard
conditions (20 C and sea level and shall
be determined by:
C,(20)
C,(std) - (C,-C,(a)) + 9.09 (mg/1)
C,(a)
where: C,(a) - Theoretical surface oxygen saturation value
at test site barometric pressure and liquid
temperature T, (mg/1).
C,(20) - Theoretical surface oxygen saturation value
at test site barometric pressure and 20 C
liquid temperature, (mg/1).
C, - Measured oxygen saturation value at test site
conditions, (mg/1).
The standard oxygen transfer rates, as determined by the field perform-
ance test, shall not be less than the appropriate values specified under
Performance and Design Requirements for the new aeration equipment.
The air flow rates used in the field performance tests shall not exceed
the values specified under Performance and Design Requirements.
5.04. Performance Curves. The equipment manufacturer shall conduct
additional tests and furnish performance curves showing the relationship
between oxygen transfer in pounds of oxygen per hour and air flow rate
in scfm. Curves showing the total pressure loss across the control
orifice and diffuser element in inches of water versus scfm per diffuser
shall be plotted from data gathered during field performance testing.
5.05. Modifications. Aeration equipment which fails to satisfy the
performance requirements shall be modified or replaced as required.
Modifications shall be made, or additional equipment shall be furnished
and installed, as necessary to produce an installation which will
satisfy the performance requirements. Additional blowers will not be
an acceptable modification. The equipment shall be completely retested
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
t (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
t
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -15-
r
r
F
after modification. Modifications and additional equipment shall be
provided and retesting shall be performed, and all structural, piping,
or electrical modifications necessary to accommodate the modified
equipment shall be made, at no additional cost to the Owner.
5.06. Disposal of Waste Material. The Contractor shall be responsible
for disposal of all waste materials, including the water, after all
field testing. The method of disposal shall be acceptable to the
appropriate regulatory agencies. Oxygenated water used for test may be
pumped to a location acceptable to the Engineer.
6. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING. Testing for uniformity of material shall
be in accordance with Military Standard 105D, Table I, Inspection Level
II (Double Sampling Plan) to achieve a value of percent defective of
less than or equal to 1.5 percent, r
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete fabrication, assembly, foundation, and
installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data
covering material used, parts, devices, other accessories forming a part
of the equipment furnished, aeration test procedure detailing the
proposed performance testing and analysis, certified field test report,
and complete operations and maintenance information shall be submitted
in accordance with the submittals section.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11570
(17578 ) -16-
220'
BASIN NO. 3
BASIN NO. 2
DIFFUSER GRID, TYP.
BASIN NO. 1
27.5-
-* A,8 TYP.
w
POINT LOCATION
A 2'-0' OFF BOTTOM, MIDWAY BETWEEN HEADERS
B W-0' BELOW SURFACE, MIDWAY BETWEEN HEADERS
C BELOW DIFFUSER ASSEMBLY
D MID -DEPTH, MIDWAY BETWEEN HEADERS
E 2'-0' OFF BOTTOM, MIDWAY BETWEEN HEADERS
Dissolved Oxygen Measurements
Lubbock Texas
SEWRP Improvement & Expansion
By TRL Qe�as - s
E io�in�orenArel+iteet s
OATE4/22/91 Dallas. Texas
14"11*21�r1 LW"L�il
ibbock, Texas
provement & Expansion
EII"era-Architects
Ma•----
r
MEX NUT
(TOP ANO BOTTf
PLATE WASHER
1. NUT
7
s PLATE WASHER
CLAMPS
PLATE WASHER
!
HEX NUT
SUPPORT WE
STRUT (WfTH RALSED MANIFOLD)
ANCHOR BOLT
/ HEX NUT
FLAT WASHER
PLATE WISHER
MMAMFOLD SUPPORT
WITH STRUT
5/1r OUL R00
r
t,r
\— CULOE STRAP
i�
LOCATING PLATE
�• Ate. • •• • r�, '♦
AIR OWN -
GUIDE SUPPORT
ANCHOR BOLT
Dt wir
a WASHER
ICATING PLATE
SUPPORT USE
1/r am R00
- iUONG CLAMP
AIR DISTRMUTOIt
ANCHOR SUPPORT
Aeration Manifold and
Air Distributor Supports
Lubbock, Texas
SEWRP I rovement & Expansion
sY TRL 81=k & VilaCd1
DATE 4/22/91Me."I.I.IrT,etoxascl�itact!
FIGURE 3-11570
Section 11652 - ODOR CONTROL DAMPERS AND SHUTOFF VALVES
1. SCOPE. This section covers the air control dampers and shutoff
valves for the odor control systems.
2. GENERAL. Control dampers and shutoff valves furnished and installed
under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed
in proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifi-
cations, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
2.01. Coordination. The control dampers and shutoff valves shall be
coordinated with other components of the odor control systems as speci-
fied in the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe section.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
all materials and construction methods shall comply with the applicable
provisions of the following standards:
ASTM E84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials'.
PS-15-69 National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product
Standard, "Custom Contact Molded -Reinforced -
Polyester Chemical -Resistant Process Equipment".
2.04. Related Work. The following items of associated work and equip-
ment are specified under other sections:
Odor control pipe Fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
section.
2.05.: Surface Preparation. All surfaces shall be shop cleaned by sand-
blasting of all mill scale, rust, welding splatter, and contaminants
before protective coating is applied.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The control dampers and shutoff valves will be
installed in the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe as indicated on the
drawings. The gas flow through the control dampers and shutoff valves
will consist of air containing hydrogen sulfide concentrations up to 75
ppm and fully saturated with water vapor.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Each control damper and shut-
off valve shall be designed for the following conditions:
Air Temperature, F 0-120
f■
t (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11652
(17578 ) -1-
Design pressure,
inches water column
Max 10.00
Min -10.00
5. CONSTRUCTION. Odor control shutoff valves shall be furnished and
installed as indicated on the drawings. Each shutoff valve shall be of
the single blade butterfly type complete with channel type frame, close
fitted blade, full length axle, bearings, blade stops, and edge seals.
The shutoff valve shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic _
using a vinylester resin and shall have the -same inside dimensions as
the connecting piping. The axles shall be not less than three-quarter
of an inch in diameter and shall be continuous through the shutoff
valve.
Odor control shutoff valves shall be Swartwout 0912" or equal.
Odor control dampers shall be furnished and.installed as indicated on
the drawings. Each damper shall be round and of the multiple vane type,
complete with channel type frame, bearings, full .length axle, operating
lever and thrust washers. The frame shall be constructed of rolled or
fabricated channel with a minimum face-to-face dimension of 9 inches and
shall have the same inside dimensions as the connecting piping. The
frame flanges shall be sized and drilled to attach the connecting pipe "
flanges. All components of the dampers shall be constructed of Type 316
stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced plastic with vinylester resin.
Odor control dampers shall be Swartwout "Inlet Vane Damper 8510, or
equal.
6. OPERATORS. Control damper and shutoff valve operators shall be
furnished and installed as indicated herein. All required linkages and
accessories required for a complete installation shall be furnished.
6.01. Hand Operators. Heavy-duty corrosion -resistant operators shall
be furnished and installed on all control dampers and shutoff valves.
Each hand operator shall have a continuous slot locking quadrant
suitable for positioning the blade at any position.
7. INSTALLATION. The control dampers and shutoff valves shall be
positioned to fit in the connecting pipe. Unless otherwise necessary
for proper operation of the damper, the axles shall be installed in the
horizontal position.
The inside of the control dampers and shutoff valves shall be smooth,
clean, and free from blisters and dirt when installed.
After installation and pipe leakage testing, the control dampers in flow
regulation service shall be adjusted to provide the air quantities
indicated on the drawings. Three copies of the air balance report as
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11652
(17578 ) -2=
conducted under Section 15500, shall,be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
8. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete fabrication, assembly, and installation
drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering mate-
rials used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of the
equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submit-
tals section.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 11652
(17578 ) -3-
j
Section 11950 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
1. SCOPE. This section covers laboratory equipment and accessories to
be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings for complete
and properly operating systems.
Laboratory furniture and fixtures are covered in the laboratory furni-
ture section.
2. GENERAL.
2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.02. Power Supply. Power supply to the equipment shall be as
specified herein.
Starters and controls for the air compressor, vacuum and distribution
pump shall be provided under the electrical section.
3. SCHEDULE. The following items of equipment shall be provided.
i
Supplier or
Catalog
Quantity
Component Manufacturer
Number
1
Glasswasher, undercounter type
Labconco
15-352-801
16
6 cycle with distilled water
rinse system stainless steel
interior, general glassware
basket, for 120 volt, single
phase 60 Hz operation.
1
Water Still, (WS-1401) automatic
Barnstead
A1015 (still)
is
operation self -resetting low
Barnstead
G1000 (still
water cutoff, 19.0 liters per
floorstand)
hour, floor stand, 240 volt,
Barnstead
B3405 (tank)
single phase 60 Hz operation,
Barnstead
U1001 (tank
13,000 watts, complete with 25
stand)
gallon storage tank still level
control, air inlet filter, by-
pass return, automatic low water
cut-off controls for start -stop
of the water still and ultra-
violet lamp with two spare lamps.
3
Water Cartridge System Still,
Barnstead
D4741 (Still)
t
(WCS-1401, -1402, -1403) wall
Barnstead
D5025
mounted, automatic operation,
(Cartridge)
T"
pretreatment cartridge, two
mixed -bed ion exchange cart-
ridges, integral pressure
regulator, purity monitoring
system, recirculation/distri-
(LUBBOCK.
TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
4 ) 11950
(17578
) -1-
Supplier or Catalog
Quantity Component Manufacturer Number
bution pump, remote dispenser
and tubing, 2.0 liters per
hour min., 10 to 18 megohm-cm
Type I water, 120 volt, single
phase, 60 Hz operation.
1
Distribution Pump, for water
still, multistage, 316 stainless
steel, 5 gpm, 1/2 hp motor,
tubing, pump by-pass for
continuous operation, for
120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz
operation.
1
Still Filter, type 304 stain-
less steel housing, cellulose
filter with granular activated
carbon fill, 2 pounds spare
granular activated carbon,
2 GPM capacity.
1
Vacuum Pump, (VP-1401) Simplex
air cooled rotary vane, direct
drive; 15 scfm at 20 in. Hg;
1 hp minimum, 480 volt, 3 phase,
60 Hz motor; magnetic motor
starter; adjustable vacuum
switch rated 10 ampere 120 volt
set to start pump at 15 in.
Hg and stop pump at 20 in.
Hg with 30 gallon galvanized
horizontal vacuum tank.
1
Air Compressor, (AC-1401)
Simplex air cooled, rotary
vane, direct drive; 1.2 cfm
at 90 psig; 1/3 hp minimum
120 volt, single phase, 60
hz motor; adjustable pressure
switch rated 10 ampere 120
volt set to start compressor
at 70 psig and stop compressor
at 90 psig with 12-gallon ASME
coded receiver.
1
Air Dryer, (AD-1401) wall
mounted, air cooled, non -
cycling refrigerant type,
10 scfm at 350 F pressure
dew point, self-regulating
(LUBBOCK,
TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
4 ) 11950
(17578
) -2-
Cole-Parmer L-07007-40
Barnstead H-1111
Filtrine 4-TM
Busch OTMS-I-RC0021
Gast I 3HBB-11T
Hankison 8010
r
r
r
Supplier or Catalog
Ouantity Component Manufacturer Number
hot gas bypass valve, on -
off manual motor switch,
mechanical condensate
separator, afterfiler, auto-
matic condensate drain trap,
and bypass valve; 120 volt,
single phase, 60 hz.
1 Afterfilter, remove 100 percent Hankison
of solid particles one micron
and larger, media constructed
of layers of glass fibers,
bottom drain trap and shutoff
valve, one spare filter element,
20 scfm at 100 psig air flow
minimum, polycarbonate housing.
1 rain Trap, automatic float- Hankison
operated, polycarbonate bowl,
nominal capacity 0.3 gal/hr.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT 4 ) 11950
(17578 ) -3-
3101-1
507
Section 12625 - LABORATORY FURNITURE
1. SCOPE. This section covers laboratory furniture to be furnished and
installed in the laboratory. All water, gas, air, and vacuum service
fixtures; traps, strainers, overflows, plugs, and tailpieces; and all
electrical service fixtures shall be furnished with the laboratory
furniture
2. MATERIALS. Materials used in construction of the laboratory furni-
ture shall comply with the following requirements:
Sheet Steel
Prime grade, cold -rolled,
stretcher leveled furniture
stock.
rStainless Steel AISI Type 316.
Tempered Glass 1/4 inch thick, heat resistant;
L-O-F "Tuf-flex', Permaglas
"Safeglaze', or Pittsburgh
'Herculite'.
Top Material Epoxy Resin; Kewaunee
"Kemresin', or Duriron 'Durcon',
colored white.
Cove Base Specified in the Resilient Floor
Coverings section.
4 Tempered Glass Piping Corning "Pyrex' or Owens-
Illinois "Kimax Tempered Glass
Drainline".
9
3. FURNITURE CONSTRUCTION. All laboratory furniture shall be the
product of a manufacturer regularly producing high quality laboratory
111 furniture. Unless otherwise required, laboratory furniture shall be
steel. All parts shall be accurately die formed and assembled in jigs.
Units shall be square, rigid, and adequately reinforced. Welded joints
shall be notched and tightly fitted with exposed welds ground smooth.
All exposed surfaces shall be polished smooth before finishing.
When assembled, each cabinet shall be an integral unit which will fit
with congruity into the assembly of laboratory furniture, but which may
be readily relocated. Adjoining units shall be connected with concealed
,. fasteners. All units extending to the floor shall be equipped with
leveling threaded adjusters and provided with cove base molding. All
drawers and doors shall be interchangeable.
Metal gages used herein are minimum thicknesses and refer to US Standard
gage.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
r (17578 ) -1
I
3.01. Base Cabinets. Backs of base cabinets shall be removable from
inside to provide access to service piping and shall be provided with
flanged sides to ensure rigidity. Bottoms shall be welded on all sides
and shall have access holes with cover.plates over the leveling screws.
Cabinets shall be suitably reinforced at each bottom corner. Bodies of
cabinets shall be 18 gage steel and side panels shall be provided.
Sink cabinets shall have ventilating louvers. Sink supports shall have
threaded adjusting devices.
3.02. Knee -Space Units. Knee -space units shall be formed by spanning
the top material over the knee -space. Knee -space -units shall be _
provided with backs to -conceal service piping. --Backs shall be removable
from the front to provide access to service piping.
3.03. Tables. Table frames shall be 16 gage steel. Cross rails shall
be spaced not more than 24 inches apart and shall be securely welded to
aprons. Drawers shall be provided in each table. Legs shall be fabri-
cated from 2-1/2 inch square tubing, shall be provided with leveling --
adjusters, and shall have rounded -top open -bottom black molded rubber
shoes to conceal.the leveling adjusters.
3.04. Wall Cabinets. Wall cabinets shall be 18 gage steel. End panels
shall be one-piece construction, formed at the front and rear into
corner posts. Backs shall be securely welded to the end panels, top,
and bottom to prevent lateral racking. Bottoms shall be full width and
depth of cabinet and shall be securely welded to the side panels. Wall -
hung cabinets shall be provided with a double bottom. Tops shall be
securely welded to the end panels.
Tops shall be flanged downward at the front to accommodate sliding
doors.
3.05. Cases. Full height storage cases shall be 18 gage steel. End
panels shall be one-piece construction, formed at the front and rear
into corner posts. Backs shall be securely welded to end panels, top, and bottom to prevent.lateral racking. Bottoms shall be full width and
depth of the case and shall be securely welded to the side panels.
Access holes with cover plates shall be provided over the leveling
screws. Tops shall be securely welded to the,end panels.
3.06. Drawers. Drawer fronts shall be double wall construction. All
drawers shall be provided with rubber bumpers and with stops which
prevent accidental drawer removal. Drawers shall be easily removable
without use of tools. Each drawer shall be supported on ball bearing or
nylon rollers operating in removable and adjustable steel channels.
Drawers shall be 20 gage steel with drawer suspension channels of
16 gage steel.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
(17578 ) -2
r
F
3.07. Doors.- Solid panel doors shall be flush, double wall, sound -
deadened construction with internal stiffeners and shall be 20 gage
steel.
Glazed doors shall have 18 gage frames, mitered and welded at the
corners. Glass shall be mounted in rubber or plastic glazing channels.
Swing doors shall be fitted into casework openings with 1/16 inch clear-
ance between doors and frames. Swing door openings shall be provided
with rubber bumpers at top and bottom.
Silent low -friction glides shall be provided at the top and bottom of
each sliding door. Rubber bumper stops shall be provided at fully
opened and closed positions.
All doors shall operate easily and quietly and shall be easily
removable.
3.08. Shelves. Shelves shall be removable and shall be supported at
four points. Support brackets shall be adjustable in not to exceed
2 inch vertical increments. Ends and sides of shelves shall be formed
down at least 3/4 inch and returned 1/2 inch at front and back. All
shelf corners shall be smooth without sharp edges. Shelves 36 inches
+ long or longer shall be reinforced.
�^ 3.09. Table Tops. Table tops and splashbacks shall be at least one
r inch thick and shall be furnished in as large sections as practicable.
Tops for wall tables shall extend out from the wall face at. least
31 inches unless otherwise indicated or specified. All table tops shall
be field joined into continuous tops. Field joints shall be made with
an acid, alkali, and solvent resistant cement. Field joints shall be at
least as strong as the top material. Working surfaces shall be provided..
with a drip groove around the underside of exposed edges and shall have
a 1/4 inch radius along all exposed top edges and on all exposed
corners.
Table tops shall have a suitable opening for .each sink. Holes shall be
drilled as necessary for service fixtures.
r3.10. Fume Hood. The fume hood shall have a baffle with adjustable
slots, sash, and overhead light fixture with switch. The exterior of
the hood shall be steel and shall be the same style and construction as
the base cabinets. The hood lining, baffle, and adjustment strips shall
{ be stainless steel. Lining shall be attached with 18-8 stainless steel
fasteners. No metal other than.18-8 stainless steel shall be exposed on
the inside of the hood superstructure. A stainless steel collar for
attachment of exhaust ductwork shall be furnished. The working surface
shall be Duriron Company "Durcon" or Kewaunee "Kemresin". The super -
Poo structure shall be completely rigid. The adjustments on the baffle
shall work smoothly and easily. The fume hood shall be a balanced or
auxiliary air type.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
rr (17578 ) -3-.
t,
i,
The sash shall have a stainless steel frame and shall be glazed with
tempered glass set in rubber or plastic moldings. The sash shall be
counterbalanced to remain motionless at any setting and so that not more
than 5 pounds pressure is required to raise or lower it.
The light fixture shall consist of a two -tube fluorescent unit of the
longest practical length shielded from the interior of the hood by a
tempered glass panel.
3.10.01. Fume Hood Control System. The exhaust volume of each fume
hood shall be controlled by a linear fume hood control system to
maintain a constant average face velocity into the fume hood sash
opening. Separate systems shall be provided and installed for the fume
hood as specified herein and for a fume hood as furnished by the Owner.
The measured sash area shall proportionally control the hood's exhaust
airflow. Hood air flow shall be varied to maintain the face velocity
constant to a t10I tolerance over no less than a 5 to 1 change in the
sash open area (change in sash posi- tion). Sidewall air velocity
sensors shall not be acceptable.
A vertical sash sensor shall measure the height of each vertically
moving fume hood sash. The vertical sash sensor shall consist of a
precision 10 turn potentiometer mechanically coupled to a constant
tension spring reel. A stainless steel, vinyl coated cable shall be
attached to the spring reel.
A fume hood monitor shall receive the sash opening signals from the
vertical sash sensors. The monitor shall compute the total open sash
area and then output an exhaust airflow control signal to the variable
frequency drive unit. The face velocity and minimum exhaust flow level
of the fume hood shall be set at the fume hood monitor via trimpot
adjustments. Accurate adjustment of the face velocity shall be provided
at two different sash positions. An emergency exhaust capability shall
override the sash sensor and command maximum exhaust air flow. A push
to start, push to stop, pushbutton switch shall initiate this mode. A
"night energy waste alert" circuit employing a light level sensor shall
sense the combination of a darkened room and an open -fume hood sash.
Fume hood monitor shall include an energy use meter to indicate a
relative measure of hood air flow, visual indication for normal opera-
tion, visual and audible alarm for an unsafe flow condition, visual and
audible alarm for night energy waste alert and visual and audible alarm
to indicate emergency exhaust operation.
A pushbutton switch shall mute the audible alarm. The mute mode is
automatically reset when the alarm condition ceases.
A closed loop variable frequency drive located at the blower shall
linearly control the exhaust flow out of each fume hood by varying the
speed of the blower motors.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEnP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
(17578 ) -4-
e
The closed loop drive shall measure the motor speed through information
about the motor's phase currents and voltages. The measured motor speed
shall be used to provide closed loop speed control of the blower motor
for increased accuracy. Synchronism between drive frequency and motor
speed shall be maintained under all conditions.
Input power supply to the variable frequency drive unit will be 230
volt, single phase, 60 Hz. The drive output shall be designed to
provide rated operation with a 240 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz electrical
service to the centrifugal blowers as specified in Section 15500.
Stalled motor overload protection shall be included to reduce motor
current to 75Z or less of rated current after the motor has been stalled
for 10 seconds.
The drive shall not require any user adjustments except for a horsepower
selection jumper. This jumper shall adjust the drive's current rating
and limit based on the motor's horsepower.
r4 _.
System start-up including setting of fume hood face velocity and minimum
j' exhaust flow, calibration and training of plant personnel shall be
provided by the manufacturers authorized representative.
The fume hood control system shall be as manufactured by Phoenix
Controls Corporation °FHS-1001.
3.11. Filler Panels. Filler panels shall be 18 gage steel and shall
match adjacent furniture -
3.12. Finish. All steel used in laboratory furniture shall be.given a
corrosion -resistant finish after fabrication of component parts. Adhe-
sion of finish to the metal shall be implemented by multistage cleaning
and bonding treatment. Exposed surfaces shall be given as many filler
coats as required to provide a smooth and uniform surface for painting.
A prime coat shall then be applied and baked on. The highest quality
baked enamel shall be applied over the prime coat. The finished surface
shall have smooth, hard, satin luster and shall be highly resistant to
acids, alkalis, solvents, water, and abrasion. The color shall be
similar to Kewaunee Iris Blue.
3.13. Hardware. Hardware and trim shall be best quality for the
intended use. All hardware, including screws and bolts, shall be pro-
tected against corrosion by plating or painting. Drawer and door pulls
t, shall have adequate cross section to ensure against breakage under rough
usage, and shall all be the same style. Either die castings with satin
chrome finish or black semigloss plastic material molded over a solid
brass core extending through the entire pull will be acceptable.
Sliding door pulls shall be recessed.
Hinges shall be chromium plated steel, 2-1/2 inches high, five -knuckle
institutional heavy-duty type with brass pins.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) ;.
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
(17576 ) -5-
1
Door .catches shall be spring release type.
Sash pulleys shall be steel, cadmium plated, with heavy-duty oilite
bronze bearings. Sash weights shall be cast iron or lead..
3.14. Cove Base. Cove base molding shall be applied continuously
around bases of cabinets and storage cases after installation is
completed. Molded corners shall be installed on all interior and
exterior corners. Base moldings shall be attached with waterproof
cement.
4. SERVICE FIXTURES. Water, distilled water, air, vacuum, and gas
fixtures shall be designed for laboratory useandshall be brass
finished in polished heavy chrome. Fixtures mounted inside fume hoods
shall have a fume -resistant baked enamel finish. Each fixture shall be
supplied with a molded plastic index button which shall indicate the
service by lettering and color.
Water fixtures shall have renewable seats and washers. All distilled
water faucets shall be hot tin lined. Gooseneck spouts shall be heavy
seamless brass tubing finished in polished chrome. Aerators shall be
provided on all water faucets. Gas, air, and vacuum cocks shall be
laboratory ground key type, 3/8 inch IPS, provided with integral
serrated hose ends. Each cock shall be leakproof at 125 psi air pres-
sure. Each cock shall be lubricated with suitable sealing lubricant.
Traps shall be tempered glass. Sink drain fittings shall be Duriron
Company "Durcon" and shall be provided with plug, removable strainer
disc, and beehive overflow. The tailpiece of each drain fitting shall
be provided with a locknut and an adapter for connection to the drain
piping. ,
Electrical receptacles shall be 20 amp, duplex, three -wire, grounding
type; Hubbell "5362" for 120 volts and Hubbell "5462" for 240 volts.
Switches shall be 20 amp, 120/277 volts; single -pole Hubbell "1221",
two -pole Hubbell "1222", and three-way Hubbell "1223 Manual motor
starters shall have overload elements matching the motors served and
shall have standard switch mounting. Pilot lights shall be 120 volts ac
with red lens. Receptacles and switches shall be installed in flush -
mounted boxes or pedestal boxes as indicated on the drawings or
specified. All boxes shall be provided with satin finished 18-8 stain-
less steel plates and shall conform to.the National Electrical Code.
A watertight joint shall be made between each pedestal -mounted service
fixture and the table top to prevent leakage into the space below.
5. SINKS. Sinks shall be single -piece solid castings of epoxy resin
and shall be Duriron Company "Durcon' or Kewaunee "Kemresin". Sink
drainboards shall be made of material identical and continuous with
adjoining table tops. A watertight joint shall be made between each
sink and the drainboard (table top).
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
(17578 ) -6-
Cup sinks shall be "Durcon" or "Kemresin Tailpieces shall be integral
with cup sinks and shall be provided with an adapter for connection to
the drain piping. Each cup sink shall be provided with a flanged top
edge and strainer.
6. FIXTURE SCHEDULE. Except as otherwise noted, all fixtures are
designated by catalog numbers of Kewaunee Manufacturing Company. The
catalog numbers identify type and quality desired. Equivalent items by
other manufacturers may be furnished subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
The general arrangement and dimensions shall be as indicated on the
drawings. Items which are identified on the drawings by catalog number
are not repeated in the schedule below. Items to be furnished shall
include:
Component
Air, gas, or vacuum cock, deck mounted
Double air, gas or vacuum cock, deck mounted
Cold water faucet, deck mounted
Distilled water faucet, deck mounted
Hot and cold water faucet, deck mounted
Electrical pedestal
Catalog
Number
260
263
337-6V
368
340-V
As required
for each
service
7. INSTALLATION. Laboratory furniture, fixtures, and equipment shall
be installed by skilled workmen. All items shall be shipped, handled,
and installed by methods which will prevent damage of any kind. Each
unit of furniture shall be erected in proper position, and fixtures
shall be properly installed on the furniture.
Each unit of laboratory furniture shall be installed level and plumb.
Leveling adjusters shall be adjusted and locked in position. Cove base
shall not be installed until after laboratory furniture has been com-
pletely checked.
8. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Detailed drawings, specifications, descriptive
r data, and complete information concerning all laboratory furniture,
fixtures, materials, and appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance
with the submittals section.
The drawings shall show dimensions, installation details, and relation
to adjoining and related work where close fitting is required, and shall-
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
(17578 ) -7-
i
show reinforcement, anchorage, and other details required for proper
installation. The drawings shall also include plumbing roughing -in data
where necessary.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS }
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 12625
(17578 ) -8-
r
Section 13221 - BIO-TOWER FILTER MEDIA
1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing and installing plastic cross -
flow media in the two circular bio-tower filters.
Z. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The media shall be fabricated from rigid
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheets in a corrugated pattern and assembled
into modules that will provide a cross -flow type, biological oxidation
media.
Vertical flow media, random dump plastic media, or wood media will not
be acceptable.
The media shall be suitable for service with wastewater temperatures
from 35 F to 90 F. The media shall not clog at the anticipated approxi-
mate organic loadings. Anticipated operating conditions include:
Filter diameter, feet 62' - 4"
Filter media height, feet 20
Flow to each bio-tower, mgd
Minimum, with recycle 4.35
Peak 8.0
Maximum month organic loading, ppd
Total BOD, each bio-tower 6,450
Soluble BOD, each bio-tower 3,700
The media will be installed on a concrete beam system. Details of the
trickling filter and media supports are indicated on the drawings.
The media shall be completely self-supporting for the required media
height and shall not contribute any lateral load to the trickling filter
sidewalls.
2.01. Acceptable Products. The media shall be the Munters Corporation
"BIOdek", American Surfpac "X-Flo", or Brentwood. The products of other
manufacturers will not be acceptable.
3. MATERIALS. The media modules shall not deteriorate due to the
action of fungi, bacteria, or other types of microorganisms that may be
present in or on the media when it is in service, nor shall the media
deteriorate from reaction with chemicals, mild concentrations of acids,
alkalies, organic solvents, or other compounds at may be present in the
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -1-
wastewater. Samples of the trickling filter influent from the existing
wastewater treatment plant may be obtained.
All of the media shall be specifically compounded to be resistant to
ultraviolet light.
Modules shall be fabricated from corrugated sheets of uniform thickness
that are free from holes, air bubbles, foreign matter, undispersed raw
material, or other manufacturing defects that may affect their service-
ability. Edges of sheets shall be free of cuts and nicks.
The rigid PVC sheets shall conform to ASTM D1784:12335B and shall have
the following minimum material properties:
Property
ASTM Test
Method
Unit
Minimum
Value
Impact
Izod (or)
D256
ft-lb/in.
0.7
Gardner
D4226 (B)
in.-lb/mil
1.0
Tensile strength
D638ID882
psi
6,000
Flexural strength
D790
psi
9,500
Modulus of elasticity
D638/D882
psi
320,000
Heat distortion
D1637
degrees, F
155(1)
Sheet thickness after forming
---
in.
0.011
Flammability
D635
--
(2)
Specific gravity
D792
gm/cm3
1.4
Density
--
gm/cm3
140
50 psi minimum test load.
cz> Self -extinguishing burn time less than 5 seconds; extent of burn
less than 5 millimeters.
4. MEDIA.
4.01. Characteristics. The PVC sheets shall be molded into a
corrugated pattern. Ribs or bumps shall be incorporated into the sheet
to improve adherence of biological growths. The molded sheets shall be
assembled into modules in a cross -corrugated pattern with adjacent
sheets to provide continuous horizontal distribution of both air and
wastewater throughout the depth of the media. The corrugated channels
shall have an angle of 60 degrees from the horizontal.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 } 13221
(17578 ) -2-
The assembled media modules shall have the following characteristics:
Min specific surface area, 27
for clean media, sq ft/cu ft
Min void -to -volume ratio, 94
for clean media
Min number of contact mixing or 130
distribution points, per cu ft
Min number of openings of each 280
module
Min area of openings, sq in. 2.75
Nominal width of module, ft 2
Max height of module, ft 2
Nominal length of module, ft 4
Max width of any horizontal edge 0.125
surface per sheet, in.
Top and bottom edges of the modules shall be reinforced with a double -
folded edge or a flange. Flange.widths in total shall not extend over
more than 10 percent of the horizontal cross -sectional area. Contact
mixing points shall be uniform throughout the media. Contact mixing
points shall be the point where two rigid PVC sheets form a cross -
corrugated pattern, and an adhesive or heat weld holds the cross in
place.
A variation of plus or minus 1/4 inch on the height of individual
modules and including individual sheets is acceptable. The tolerance
applies to modules as installed before development of organic growths on
media.
r-- 4.02. Strength. The media shall be designed for the following minimum
j properties:
• The media shall be fabricated so that over the specified
i� temperature range, each module shall be capable of supporting
( a design load of 35 pounds per square foot per foot of media
height above the module as placed in the trickling filter.
i0 All modules shall have a minimum bearing capacity of 500
pounds per square foot.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
l (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221 -
(17578 ) -3-
•_ The modules comprising the top ,and bottom layers of the media
shall have a minimum bearing capacity of 1,OOO pounds per
square foot.
In addition, the media directly above the support system shall be
designed for the imposed concentrated loads due to the support spacing.
4.03. Media Testing. The Contractor shall propose the name and quali-
fications of an independent testing laboratory, which shall be routinely
engaged and fully qualified to conduct the media tests specified in this
paragraph. The laboratory shall be approved in writing by the Engineer
prior to the start of testing. All costs of testing shall be borne by
the media supplier unless otherwise specified.
PVC sheets and fabricated modules shall be tested to verify compliance
with the requirements set forth in this specification.
The Contractor shall submit test reports from an independent testing
laboratory showing that the materials furnished conform with the
specification requirements.
4.04. PVC Sheets. Representative samples of PVC sheets used in the
fabrication of media modules used in this project shall be tested to
confirm that the material meets the standards specified in the Materials
paragraph of this section.
Tests shall conform to the specified ASTM methods. At least three
sheets of each different thickness or strength of sheeting shall be
subjected to the specified tests, and no fewer than 15 sheets shall be
tested. Sheets to be tested shall be selected by the Engineer from the
actual sheets delivered to the fabrication site. For tensile strength .
and stiffness tests, samples of unformed sheet media shall be used. The
media supplier shall certify in writing that unformed sheet is from
lot(s) used in fabrication.
Failure of any one sheet to meet the specifications shall be grounds for
rejection of the entire shipment. In such an event, the Engineer may
request tests on additional sheets as necessary to determine the
acceptability of the lot. Such tests shall be performed at the expense
of the media supplier. Additional tests requested by the Engineer after
the specifications have been met shall be performed at the expense of
the Owner.
4.05. Fabricated Modules. The Contractor shall provide samples of the
media modules for module testing to the independent testing laboratory.
The Engineer reserves the right to witness all testing and requires five
working days notice prior to.test. In addition, at least four represen-
tative modules of each strength and thickness fabricated for this
project shall be selected by the Engineer and tested for strength and
deflection by an independent testing laboratory. At least four tests
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -4-
shall be performed upon media modules for each of the following condi-
tions in accordance with paragraph 4.02 of this specification section:
Condition Test Load
psf
Bottom 2 feet of media
On media supports 1,000
Media on media
18 to 16 foot layer 720
16 to 14 foot layer 640
14 to 12 foot layer 560
10 to 2 foot layer 500
Top 2 feet of media 1,000
Therefore, no fewer than 10 tests shall be performed.
The structural tests shall simulate service conditions and shall conform
to the following criteria:
a. The test sample shall consist of a stack of full size modules
at least two modules high. The arrangement of the stack
shall simulate the geometry as placed in the trickling filter
tower.
b. Tests on modules intended for the base layer shall be two
modules high (4 feet) and two modules wide (4 feet) and shall
be conducted on a base to simulate the media support system.
C. Media intended for other layers shall be two modules high
(4 feet) and two modules wide (4 feet) and shall be conducted
on a flat base support.
d. The test load shall be "short term" at a temperature of 75 F
plus or minus 2 F.
e. The design load shall be applied as follows:
(1) A preload, equal to 10 percent of the design load, shall
be applied for one hour to seat the modules prior to
incremental loading to establish a baseline flexural
condition.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -5-
(2) Deflection shall -be measured as the ratio of the change
in module stack height to the total height of the module
after the 10 percent preload has been applied for one
hour.
(3) The loading shall be increased at 10 percent of the
design load or 100 pound per square foot intervals,
whichever is smaller. Each loading shall be held for
5 minutes and the deflection recorded at the end of the
5 minute period.
(4) Incremental loading shall continue until recorded
deflections are 1 percent and, subsequently, 2 percent
or failure of the module. If the units do not fail, the
loading shall be maintained and the deflections measured
for three hours after the last load is applied.
Maximum allowable deflections shall be 2.0 percent at the design load.
If a module tested in any strength gradation exhibits a compressive
deflection at the module -to -module interface greater than 2.0 percent,
the Engineer may require the testing of as many additional modules as he
considers necessary to determine the structural suitability of the
media. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the tests indicate the media
is structurally unsuitable for its intended use, the media supplier
shall replace the media of that gradation with new media meeting the
specifications and passing the structural testing. All costs for the
initial testing modifications and the retesting of the modified media by
the testing laboratory shall be paid by the media supplier.
5. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.
5.01. Identification. Media modules, whether assembled onsite or
offsite, shall be tagged, color -coded, stamped, or otherwise labeled so
that the type and strength of the modules and their proper placement can
be readily determined.
5.02. Storage. If storage is required, assembled media modules shall
be stored on wooden pallets or on a flat, clean surface to prevent
damage to the module edges. Media shall be covered or stored under roof
for protection from ultraviolet deterioration. Media stored on wooden
pallets for delivery to the site shall be securely strapped to the
pallets. Corner protectors shall be provided under the straps. Any
modification of the specified shipping and delivery procedures shall be
through mutual agreement between the media manufacturer and the Contrac-
tor prior to shipment.
During shipment and storage, modules shall always be stacked on their
long face with the plastic sheets in a,vertical position. Modules shall
not be stacked more than four high, and modules in each layer shall be
set at right angles to those below. Weathered or otherwise damaged
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -6-
media are not acceptable and will be replaced at the discretion of the
Engineer.
6. MEDIA FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION. The PVC modules may be fabri-
cated either at the manufacturer's production plant or inside a ware-
house near the jobsite.
If warehouse fabrication is used, the media supplier shall pay for the
warehouse lease cost and furnish the materials, equipment, and personnel
necessary for production of the media.
All utilities -shall be arranged by the supplier. The fabrication and
structural integrity of the media modules shall be the sole responsibi-
lity of the media supplier, regardless of where fabricated.
The media specified in this section will be fabricated and, installed by
the Contractor under the supervision of the media manufacturer's field
representative. The media manufacturer's representative shall have at
least three years experience with the media manufacturer. Upon comple-
tion of installation, the Contractor shall -submit to the Owner, through
the Engineer, a written certification that the installation has been
completed in accordance with these specifications, the submitted layout
drawings, and the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall,
in general, install the media in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the following procedures:
a. Direct, continuous, onsite supervision shall be provided by
an installation specialist of the media supplier during
installation of the filter media.
b. The media shall be conveyed to the top of the filter walls
and transported to the working level inside the filter by
motorized mechanical conveyor or crane acceptable to the
Engineer. Wood slides will not be acceptable. Modules
damaged to the extent that their serviceability is impaired
and their ability. to be plugged is increased, as determined
by the Engineer, during loading, unloading, and handling are
not acceptable and shall be removed from the site. 'As an
alternate, unserviceable modules may be cut up and used as
fill pieces against the filter wall discarding the damaged
module section,'as directed by the Engineer. Repair proce-
dure for any module with "minor" damage that does not impair
serviceability shall be approved by the Engineer. The media
modules shall be transported by hand to the final placement
site. The following criteria shall be used by the Engineer
to determine acceptance of loose glue adherence contact
points on modules:
t
• Internally, less than or equal to 15 percent acceptable.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -7-
• At ends of modules, less'than or equal to 25 percent
acceptable.
C. The trickling filter media _shall be carefully cut, trimmed,
or otherwise formed.to fit the tank wall and concrete center
pier. Chain or band saws approved by the media manufacturer
and the Engineer shall be used to cut media pieces to mini-
mize splinting. _
d. Shaping and cutting of the media modules shall be performed
in the warehouse or on tarpaulins with wood support or a
similar working mat under the media modules to catch the PVC
fragments. The Contractor shall take the necessary precau-
tions to ensure that offcuts and foreign materials are kept
out of the placed media. Chips, broken pieces, dust, and
other debris shall be removed from the filter before new
layers of media are added, at the end of each day, or as
directed by the Engineer. Any cuttings falling into the _
media shall be immediately removed.
e. During installation of the media, special care shall be taken
to avoid damage to the modules, including that resulting from
workers walking on the edges. The Contractor shall install
sufficient plywood, pegboard, or other suitable temporary
planking to prevent damage to the media edges. Installed -.
media modules shall be covered with plywood walkways to
prevent damage during the installation of adjacent media.
f. The modules shall be placed in the filter to provide the
closest possible fit with adjacent modules without damaging
the media. The module packing arrangement shall be that
recommended by the media manufacturer. The arrangement shall
maximize the use of the full-size media modules.
Each module will be installed on its long face so that the
corrugated PVC sheets are in a vertical position.
g. The tolerances between the center distribution column, the
trickling filter wall and the media shall not exceed 2
inches. The minimum edge bearing support for any media
module shall be 2 inches.
h. Modules shall be color -coded so that the load bearing
capacity of each module is readily discernible.
7. WALKWAY. A 4 foot wide walkway shall be furnished and installed
from the ladder on the outside wall of the trickling filter to and
completely around the center pier and around the filter circumference.
The walkways shall be constructed from molded fiberglass grating at
least 1/2 inch thick and with openings no larger than 2 inches by 2
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -8-
inches. The bearing bars shall be at least 1/4 inch wide and the top
surface shall be slip -resistant. The grating shall have a maximum
glass -to -resin ratio of 35 percent by weight. The grating shall be
resistant to ultraviolet light and sewage. The grating shall be
Fibergrate Corporation or equal. Grating color shall be light green.
Walkway panels shall be minimum 4'-0" by 4'-0" and shall be intercon-
nected with stainless steel bands or clips if necessary to prevent
movement.
An alternate "pultruded" fiberglass "Duradek I-7000" grating manufac-
71: tured by AFC, Division of Morrison Molded Fiberglass Company, is
acceptable. The "pultruded" fiberglass shall be slip -resistant with a
minimum thickness of 1 inch.
8. SPARE MEDIA MODULES. The media supplier shall furnish an extra five
finished modules.
The spare media modules shall be suitable for top layer installation in
conformance with Characteristics and Strength paragraphs of this sec-
tion.
The media supplier shall provide adequate protection from damage of
modules for long-term storage.
9. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY. To ensure the long-term structural
integrity of the modular plastic media, the manufacturer of the
trickling filter media shall execute and submit to the Owner within 30
days of bid award a five-year manufacturer's warranty signed by the
manufacturer's president and notarized. The warranty shall commence on
the date of final media acceptance by the Engineer. The warranty shall
ensure that the media furnished is free of defects in workmanship and
materials and shall structurally perform in accordance with specifi-
cation requirements. The media manufacturer shall pay all labor and
material costs to remove any installed media that suffers structural or
ultraviolet light failure during the five-year period and install new
media which meets the specifications.
10. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete descriptive data for the trickling
p
filter media and installation instructions, recommendations, and layout
`
drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
rInformation
1
Media descriptive data per the Characteristics paragraph of
this section, including:
- Media specific surface area.
- Volumetric void ratio.
- Module dimensions, including material thickness.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
r (17578 ) -9-
t.
Method of forming corrugations in the material.
Method of joining the sheets of material to form the
media.
• Name and qualifications of independent testing laboratory, as
specified in the Media Testing paragraph of this section.
• Media test reports.
Manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and layout
drawings for installation of the filter media.
• Detailed module strength test procedures.
• Media manufacturer's certified report of correct installa-
tion, as specified in the Media Fabrication and Installation
paragraph of this section.
• Layout drawings for installation.of the filter media,
including:
Location and orientation of full-size media modules.
- Media support system.
- Fiberglass walkway.
- Other features.
- Five-year manufacturer's warranty.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 13221
(17578 ) -10-
I
r
Section 13400 INSTRUMENTATION
1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of
metering and control equipment which shall include the following
principal items:
1.01. Panels and Subassemblies.
One Bio-Tower Recirculation Valves Local Control Enclosure.
1.02. Metering and Control Systems. Principal components of the
metering and control systems shall be as indicated on the piping and
instrument diagram drawings and as listed on the instrument device
schedule drawings.
1.03. Miscellaneous.
One lot of test equipment, spare parts, and miscellaneous devices
as set forth herein.
Supplementing this section, the drawings indicate locations and arrange-
ment of panels and instruments, and provide functional diagrams and
schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment.
2. SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS. The entire system shall be: designed,
coordinated, and supplied by a qualified system supplier who is regu-
larly engaged in the business of designing and building instrument and
�^ control systems for water and wastewater projects. The Contractor's
pt intended instrumentation supplier shall meet the following,
qualifications:
The supplier shall have and shall maintain a qualified technical
staff and design office. The qualifications and experience of key
project personnel shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
The supplier shall have the physical plant and fabricating per-
sonnel to complete the work specified. Fabrication capabilities
or subcontractor fabrication arrangements shall be acceptable to
the Engineer.
The supplier shall have and shall maintain competent service
F11 personnel to service the equipment furnished. The geographic
location of service personnel for this specific project shall be
acceptable to the Engineer.
The supplier shall have successfully provided similar work for at
least 5 years.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -1-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
3. COORDINATION. Instrument and control systems shall be designed and
coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and materials
furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these specifica-
tions, under other contracts, and, where applicable, to related existing
equipment. All instruments and control devices shall be applied in full
conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instruc-
tions, and recommendations of the instrument or device manufacturer and
the related equipment manufacturer.
Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related
equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from supplying systems in
full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment.
Related equipment and materials may include, but will not -be limited to,
primary flow measuring devices, valve actuators, chemical feeders, ana-
lytical measuring devices, supervisory control equipment, telemetry,
conduit, cable, and piping as described in other specifications associ-
ated with this project.
i
Installation drawings shall be prepared for interconnecting wiring and
piping between the related equipment and the equipment furnished under
this section.
Coordination with other contractors and supervision of installation
shall be provided by the Contractor as required during construction.
4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. The instrumentation equipment shall be
installed by the Contractor or his subcontractors. The services of the
system supplier's technical representative shall be provided as neces-
sary to calibrate, test, and advise others of procedures for adjustment
and operation in accordance with the requirements of the quality control
section.
4.01. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall
conform to the requirements of the electrical section.
4.02. Field Pining. Field'piping materials and installation shall
conform to the requirements of.the miscellaneous piping section..
4.03. Field -Mounted Instruments. Instruments shall be mounted so that
they may be readily approached and easily serviced. Pressure and dif-
ferential pressure transmitters shall be mounted on 2 inch corrosion -
resistant pipe supports fabricated for floor or bracket mounting.
4.04. Field Calibration. A technical representative of the system
supplier shall calibrate each instrument and shall provide a written
calibration report for each instrument indicating the results and final
tuning adjustment settings. The adjustments of each calibrated instru-
ment shall be sealed or marked, insofar as practical, to discourage
tampering. Instrument calibration shall be accomplished prior to a
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -2-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
r
C
checkout of .the -operations of a system. A typical instrument cali-
bration report form is included at the end of this section.
4.05. Systems Check. A technical representative of the system supplier
shall participate in the checkout of metering and control systems. If
F interrelated devices furnished by other suppliers, such as valve actu-
ators, motor controls, chemical feeders, and primary measuring devices,
do not perform properly when placed in service, the technical repre-
sentative shall use suitable test equipment to introduce simulated
signals to verify or measure signals from those devices as may be
required to locate the source of trouble or malfunction. A written
report stating the results of such tests shall be furnished, if
requested by the Engineer, as necessary to assign responsibility for
corrective measures.
r" 4.06. Installation Test Equipment. Unless specified otherwise, all
test equipment necessary for calibration and checking of system com-
ponents shall be provided by the Contractor for the duration of the
testing work. Unless specified otherwise, test equipment will remain
the property of the Contractor and the system supplier.
4.07. Salvage of Existing Equipment. Existing materials and equipment
removed or replaced under this Contract shall be turned over to the
Owner, or shall be discarded as directed by the Owner.
Any mounting brackets, piping, or holes which remain after removal of
equipment shall be removed or repaired in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
S. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All equipment furnished under this section
shall be selected by the system supplier for its superior quality and
for its intended performance. All equipment, shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Equipment and mate-
rials used shall be subject to review and shall comply with the
following requirements.
5.01. Power and Instrument Signals. Unless specified otherwise,
electrical power supply to the instrumentation equipment will be
unregulated 120 volts ac at the locations noted on the one -line and
functional diagrams. All transmitted electronic analog instrument
signals shall be 4-20 mA dc, unless noted otherwise, and shall be linear
with the measured variable.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -3-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
r (092392 )
i. .
5.02. Control Performance. The coordinating supplier shall design the
control systems and shall be responsible for performance of the systems
within these specified limitations.
a. Rate of Flow Control.
Range Operable automatic control from
shutoff to maximum capacity of
control element. Stable auto-
matic control between 12 and
100 percent of full-scale flow.
Stability After controls have taken cor-
rective action, as a result of a
change in load or set point, the
control element shall remain
stable without hunting or
oscillating.
Sensitivity Controls shall be sensitive to,
and begin correcting for,
changes in controlled media or
set point of less than -'
1.0 percent of span.
Agreement Rate indicators and rate set
point indicators shall agree
within 2.0 percent of span.
5.03. Metering Accuracy. System metering accuracy, as compared to the ^
actual process value, shall be determined from the value read at the
principal readout device such as the recorder or totalizer. System
requirements shall not preclude any requirements specified herein for
individual devices.
For systems where the primary measuring device, transmitter, and —
receiver are furnished under this section, the accuracies shall be
within the following limits:
a. Pressure: 1.0 percent of measured span.
b. Level: 1.0 percent of measured span.
C. Temperatures 1.0 percent of measured span.
d. Position: 2.0 percent maximum travel. ._
e. Flow Rate:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400 —
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -4-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 ) _
i
F111
r
Magnetic or transit time ultrasonic metering; 1.5 percent of
full scale between 10 and 100 percent of scale.
Differential producing primary element type metering; 2.0 per-
cent of full scale between 15 and 100 percent of scale.
Doppler type ultrasonic metering; 3.0 percent of full scale
between 10 and 100 percent of scale.
Open channel type weir or flume metering; 4.0 percent of full
scale between 5 and 100 percent of scale.
For systems"where the primary flow measuring device is furnished by
others, the accuracies as compared to the flow -head curve of the primary
device shall be within the following limits:
Differential producing primary element type metering; 1.5 percent
of full scale between 15 and 100 percent of scale.
Open channel type weir or flume metering; 1.5 percent,of full
scale between 5 and 100 percent of scale.
5.04. Appurtenances. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers,
special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, and isolation
requirements shall be furnished and installed as required for proper
performance of the equipment.
5.05. Interchangeability and Appearance. Instruments utilized for the
same types of functions and services shall be of the same brand and
model line insofar as practicable. Similar components of new instru-
ments shall be from the same manufacturer to facilitate maintenance and
stocking of repair parts. Whenever practical, identical units shall be
furnished.
5.06. Programming Devices. A programming or system configuring device
shall be provided for systems which contain any equipment which requires
such a device for routine maintenance and troubleshooting. The program-
ming device shall be complete and in excellent condition and shall be
turned over to the Owner at completion of startup.
5.07. Device Tag Numbering System. All devices shall be provided with
permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with the
instrument device schedules and with the supplier's equipment drawings.
All field -mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless
steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack mounted devices
shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to
the device. Hand lettered labels or tape labels will not be acceptable.
r (LUBBOCK, TEXAS 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -5-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
5.08. Special Tools and -Accessories. Equipment requiring periodic
repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special
tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance.
Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be
furnished complete with those devices.
6. PANEL FABRICATION.
6.01. General Fabrication Requirements.
describe general fabrication requirements
consoles, enclosures, and subpanels:
The following paragraphs
for the instrument panels,
a. Wiring. All internal instrument and component device wiring
shall be as normally furnished by the manufacturer. With the
exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring
and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be
stranded copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a
moisture -resistant and flame-retardant covering rated for not
less then 90 C.
The power entrance to each panel shall be provided with a
surge device. Surge protectors shall be nominal 120 volts ac
with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 volts. Surge protec-
tors shall be a nonfaulting and noninterrupting design with a
response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds. Surge
protectors shall be Transtector "ACP-100 BW", Power Integrity
Corporation "ZTAS", or equal.
Power distribution on the line side of panel fuses shall.be
minimum 12 AWG. Secondary power distribution wiring and
wiring for control circuits shall be minimum 14 AWG. Annun-
ciator and indicating light circuits shall be minimum 16 AWG.
Electronic analog circuits shall be minimum 16 AWG twisted and
shielded pairs rated not less than 300 volts. Analog circuits
shall be separated from ac power circuits.. Wiring for ac
power distribution, do power distribution, and control
circuits shall have different colors and shall agree with the
color coding legend on the system supplier's panel wiring
diagrams.
Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for
12 AWG wire and shall be rated 30 amperes at not less than
300 volts. Terminal blocks shall be fabricated complete with
marking strip, covers, and pressure -connectors.. Terminals
shall be labeled to agree with identification shown on the
supplier's submittal drawings. A terminal shall be provided
for each conductor of external circuits, plus one ground for
each shielded cable. All wiring shall be grouped or cabled
and firmly supported to the panel. Not less than 8 inches of
clearance shall be provided between the terminal strips and
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -6-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 }
r
r
the base of vertical panels for conduit and wiring space. Not
!� less than 25 percent spare terminals shallbeindividually
fused, and all fuses or circuit breakers shall be clearly
t labeled and located for easy maintenance.
The panel fabricator shall provide such additional circuits as
may be indicated on the electrical schematic drawings.
b. Nameplates. Nameplates shall be provided on the face of the
panel or on the individual device as required. Panel name-
plates shall have approximate dimensions and legends as indi-
cated on the drawings, and shall be made of laminated phenolic
material having engraved letters approximately 3116 inch high
extending through the black face into the white layer. Name-
plates do not replace the requirement for device identifica-
tion tags as specified herein under the Device Tag Numbering
System paragraph.
C. Painting. Interior and exterior surfaces of all panels shall
be thoroughly cleaned and painted with rust -inhibitive primer.
The panel interior shall be painted white with the manufac-
turer's standard corrosion protection coating. All pits and
r
blemishes in the exterior surface shall be filled. Exterior
surfaces shall be smoothed and painted with two coats of the
manufacturer's standard corrosion protection coating with at
least 4 mils dry film thickness. Color shall.be light gray or
tan.
d. Factory Test. Panels shall be factory tested electrically by
the panel fabricator before shipment.
6.02. Wall-Mounted.Cabinets. Cabinets shall be NEMA Type 12 enclo-
sures, suitable for wall mounting, which containthe system components
indicated on the drawings. The enclosures shall be fabricated from USS
14 gage or heavier carbon steel and shall be equipped with full-size
�-•
gasketed doors with chromium plated or stainless steel three-point latch
and hinges.
7. METERING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS. Principal components of the metering
and control systems are indicated on the piping and instrument diagram
E
�-
drawings and on the instrument device schedule drawings.
8. MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTATION. The following test equipment, spare
parts,.and miscellaneous devices shall be provided:
a. Pressure switches, level switches, float switches, and miscel-
laneous devices as listed in the instrument device schedules,,
unless noted otherwise.
b. One electronic instrument calibrator.
�^ (LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
It (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -7-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
l
9. INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS. The following specifications
shall apply to the equipment items in the instrumentation and control
systems.
9.01. Panel Front -Mounted Devices.
9.01.01. Electronic Indicating Control Stations. Each control station
shall be of the 'Manual -Automatic' control type with balanceless,
bumpless transfer between control modes in either direction. Station
size shall be approximately 3 inches by 6 inches by 20 inches deep. All
circuitry shall be solid-state. The station manual output shall be
adjusted by means of "Raise -Lower' push buttons on the station face.
Station output shall be indicated on an electronic indicator. The
station shall have a set point which is indicated on the face and
adjusted by a thumbwheel or "Raise -Lower" push buttons on the face. The
station shall have a process variable indicator. The set point and
process variable scale shall be as indicated on the drawings or as
specified. The station shall have proportional plus reset control modes
or other control modes as indicated on the drawings. The station shall
be of the slide -out chassis type which can,be withdrawn to a service
position without disrupting operation. Proportional band shall be
adjustable from 0.04 to 50 repeats per minute. Stations shall be
suitable for direct or reverse control action. Control stations shall
be Fisher & Porter "Model 53 MC", Foxboro "Model 7601, or equal.
9.02. Panel Interior -Mounted Devices.
9.02.01. Electronic Sienal Booster/Isolators. Electronic signal
boosters and isolators shall have all solid-state circuitry and shall
have complete electrical isolation between the power supply, the input
signal, and the output signal. Accuracy shall be plus or minus
0.15 percent of span. Isolators shall be Acromag, Moore, R.I.S.,_or
equal.
9.03. Flow Instrumentation.
9.03.01. Differential Pressure Flow Transmitters. Transmitters shall
have all solid-state electronic circuitry and shall be of the two -wire
type which requires no direct power connection to the transmitter.
Process fluid shall be isolated from the sensing elements by stainless
steel, cobalt -nickel -chrome, or Hastelloy C diaphragms, and a silicone
oil fluid fill. Transmitters shall have no mechanical fulcrum points.
Transmitters shall have electronic span and zero adjustments and shall
have an adjustable damping feature. Transmitters shall have weather-
proof housings and shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from
0 to 175 F, with relative humidity of 0 to 100 percent. All parts shall
be -cadmium plated carbon steel, stainless steel, or other corrosion -
resistant materials. Transmitters shall have positive overrange
protection.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -8-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
Transmitters shall contain integral square root extractors of the signal
!- powered type. Accuracy of the transmitter and extractor combination
is shall be 0.35 percent of span, and the extractor shall have a stable
4 mA do output signal at no -flow conditions. Effect on accuracy from
static pressure changes shall be negligible. Transmitter output shall
be 4-20 mA do without need for external load adjustments. Transmitters
shall not be damaged by reverse polarity. Each transmitter shall be
provided with a carbon steel three -valve manifold and brackets for
mounting as required. Manifolds shall have test ports on the instrument
side of the valves and shall be Anderson -Greenwood 'MT4' or equal.
r.. Transmitters shall be factory calibrated to the required range.
Transmitters shall be Foxboro 'Model 823', Rosemount 'Model 1151DP111',
or equal.
9.03.02. Doppler Ultrasonic Flowmeters. Doppler ultrasonic flowmeters
shall have single flow -sensing transducers which mount externally on the
process piping and sense through the pipe wall. The sensor shall be
connected to the electronic transmitter with a special 20 foot long,
armored, plastic jacketed, waterproof interconnecting cable.
r The electronic transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA Type 4 watertight
enclosure, suitable for wall or pipestand mounting. The transmitter
shall contain a local electronic indicator with a nominal 6 inch scale
length engraved in units of flow as indicated on the drawings or
described elsewhere in these specifications.
The flowmeter shall be suitable for measuring flows within a range of
0-5 fps up to 0-30 fps and shall be electronically precalibrated against
a frequency standard to within 1.0 percent of span. The flowmeter shall
be suitable for use on pipe materials with wall thickness up to
314 inch. The flowmeter shall have a built-in frequency standard to
allow easy field calibration checks.
r
The flowmeter shall have a-4-20 mA do output with adjustable damping,
which is linearly proportional to the flow range as specified elsewhere.
The flowmeter shall be powered from 120 volts ac,,60 Hz, single phase.
Temperature changes and speed of sound changes in the process fluid
shall have a negligible effect on the indicated flow. The flowmeter
!
!
accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of span over a 10 to 1 range.
The signal converter shall contain an indication of signal strength.
The converter circuitry shall be Mil -Spec coated with an an.tifungus
compound and shall be suitable for operating over an ambient temperature
range of -10 to'+140 F. Lightning and RFI protection shall be standard
features.
t
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS 9 EXPANSION) -9-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
The flowmeter shall be suitable for measuring fluids which contain a,
minimum of 200 ppm of suspended particles, with an average particle.size
of not less than 200 microns.
The flowmeter shall contain a six -digit nonreset totalizer. The total-
izer "factor" shall be engraved on a nameplate near the totalizer.
The Doppler flowmeters shall be Polysonics "UFM" or "LCDT" or equal.
9.03.03. In -Line Tvue Ultrasonic Flowmeters. Flowmeters shall be of
the diagonal traversing transit time type. The flow tube assembly shall
consist of a completely obstructionless steel pipe with flanged ends.
Flange diameter and bolt drilling pattern shall comply with ANSI B16.5,
Class 150. Meters shall be suitable for the maximum working pressure
range of the adjacent piping. The flowmeter shall utilize a pair of
ultrasonic transducers designed to measure the sound velocity in both
directions with respect to the flow. The transducers shall be mounted
through special windows in the flow tube assembly and shall not sense
through the pipe wall.
Each flowmeter shall be flow lab calibrated, and copies of the cali-
bration data shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual
submittals.
The ultrasonic flow transmitter shall have all solid-state electronic
circuitry housed in a weatherproof NEMA Type 4 enclosure mounted near
the flow tube. The transmitter shall be suitable for an ambient
temperature range of +32 to +130 F, with a relative humidity of 10 to
100 percent. The electronic transmitter shall include interference -
rejecting circuitry to maintain a reliable signal in the presence of
bubbles, solids, and disturbances in the flowing stream. The electronic
transmitter circuitry shall be interchangeable between flowmeters and
shall allow for easy field range changes. Circuitry shall include
diagnostic indication through LEDs, to assist -in troubleshooting and
calibrating the transmitter. The transmitter output shall be an iso-
lated 4-20 mA do signal into 0 to 600 ohms, linear to the calibrated
flow range. Accuracy of the transmitted signal shall be plus or minus
1.0 percent of actual flow rate over a range of 10 to 1. Power supply
to the flowmeter will be 120 volts ac, 60 Hz, single phase.
The ultrasonic flowmeter shall have a weatherproof local electronic
indicator mounted on or near the flow transmitter. The indicator shall
have a nominal 4 inch scale engraved in engineering units of flow. The.
indicator accuracy shall be plus.or minus 1.0 percent of full scale.
The ultrasonic flowmeter.shall be Badger 0160"., Nusonics 084001, or
Sparling "560", or equal.
9.03.04. Thermal Dispersion Flowmeters. Each flowmeter shall utilize a
thermal dispersion type, explosionproof, stainless steel sensing element
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -10-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
F"
F
F
F
F
installed in the process piping. The element insertion length shall be
approximately one-half of the pipe.diameter, and all mounting acces-
sories shall be provided. The sensor shall have an isolation valve and
packing gland which allows insertion and removal while the process
pipeline is under pressure.
The electronic transmitter shall be remotely mounted within 30 feet of
the sensor. Interconnecting sensor cable shall be,provided. Power
supply to the transmitter will be 120 volts ac, 60 Ez. The unit shall
be housed in a NEMA Type 4 enclosure. The transmitter shall have a 4-
20 mA do analog output and a local indicator with a 3-1/2 digit LCD
display calibrated in engineering units of flow.
Accuracy of the flowmeter shall be 1.0 percent of full scale over a 10
to 1 operating range. The flowmeter shall be Fluid Components "Model
LT81A" or equal.
9.04. Pressure and Level Instrumentation.
9.04.01. Flange -Mounted Pressure Sensing Level Transmitters. - Level
transmitters shall be of the differential pressure sensing type which
connects to the process by means of a carbon steel flange suitable for
connection to a 3 inch ANSI B16.5, Class 150 flat face carbon steel
mounting flange. Each transmitter shall have a 112 inch NPT low pres-
sure connection for the process or atmospheric reference. Process fluid
shall be isolated from the sensing elements by a flush -mounted stainless
steel, cobalt -nickel -chrome, or Eastelloy C diaphragms, and a silicone
oil fluid fill. Transmitters shall have no mechanical fulcrum points. .
Transmitters shall be of the two -wire type which requires no direct
power connection. Transmitters shall have electronic span and zero
adjustments and shall have an adjustable damping feature. Transmitters.
shall have weatherproof housings and shall be suitable for operation at
temperatures from 0 to 175 F, with relative humidity of 10-100 percent.
All parts shall be zinc plated carbon steel, stainless steel, or other
corrosion -resistant materials. Transmitters shall have positive over
range protection and shall have an adjustable zero elevation or suppres-
sion as required by the application. Accuracy shall beplus or minus
0.25 percent of span, with repeatability of 0.1 percent. Transmitter .
output shall be 4-20 mA do without need for external load adjustments...
Transmitters shall be factory calibrated to the required range. Trans-
mitters shall be Fischer & Porter "Model 50 DPL", Foxboro "Model
827DF/8471, Rosemount "Model 1151LLT", or equal.
9.04.02. ultrasonic Level Transmitters. Each ultrasonic level trans-
mitter shall be an all -solid-state electronic unit consisting of a
sensor assembly, a signal converter/transmitter, and an interconnecting
cable. The sensor shall be encapsulated in a chemical and corrosion
resistant material such as kynar or CPVC, and shall be suitable for
operation over a temperature range of -20 to +150 F, with a relative
humidity of 10 to 100 percent. The sensor shall be an explosionproof
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS } 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -11-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 }
(092392 )
design suitable for use in all hazardous areas. Sensors which are
mounted in areas where freezing condensation is likely to occur shall be
provided with special heaters or transducer protection cones designed to
prevent sensor icing.
The supplier shall coordinate the sensor mounting requirements and shall
furnish drawings. complete with dimensions and elevations, to ensure a
proper and satisfactory installation. General installation requirements
are indicated on the drawings.
The ultrasonic level transmitter shall have automatic compensation for
changes in air temperature and density, by use of a fixed reference
reflector target. Other methods of speed -of -sound compensation will be
considered as an alternate if the manufacturer documents and guarantees
satisfactory performance for the specific application. The transmitter
shall have a four -digit LCD display scaled to read in engineering units.
Digit height shall be approximately 0.5 inch. The transmitter shall be
designed to ignore momentary level spikes or momentary loss -of -echo. A
loss -of -echo condition shall be indicated on the transmitter unit. The
transmitter output shall be an isolated 4-20 mA do signal linearly
proportional to the measured level range. Where specified, the output
shall be characterized to be proportional to the tank volume instead of
to the tank level. Accuracy of the transmitted signal shall be plus or
minus 1.0 percent of the level range.
An appropriate length of sensor -to -transmitter signal cable shall be
furnished. The sensor shall be capable of being located from 25 up to
200 feet away from the signal converter. The signal converter elec-
tronics shall be housed in a weatherproof NEHA Type 4 enclosure suitable
for wall or pipestand mounting and suitable for operating temperatures
of -15 to +125 F, with relative humidity of 10 to 100 percent. A ther-
mostatically controlled strip heater shall be provided in the signal
converter enclosure. The signal converter shall be powered from
120 volts ac, 60 Hz. The ultrasonic level transmitter shall be Inven-
tron 191100, Milltronics "Liquid Ranger", or equal.
9.04.03. Fixed -Mount Float Tyoe Level Switches. Switches shall be of
the floating ball type which utilizes a nominal 5 inch diameter stain-
less steel float ball which contains a mercury switch. The float shall
be supported by a flexible synthetic rubber hinge which is fastened to
an adjustable mounting bracket. The hinge shall also act as a housing
for the lead wires from the alarm switch. The lead wire shall be a
waterproof cable of sufficient length so that no splice or junction box
is required in the wetwell. Stainless steel mounting accessories shall
be furnished. The switch contacts shall be normally open or closed as
required for proper operation of the electrical circuit. Switches shall
be Consolidated Electric 49G" or equal.
9.04.04. Pressure Switches. Pressure switches for alarming high and
low digester gas pressure shall be teflon coated,diaphragm operated with
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -12-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
snap type, single -pole, double -throw contacts rated 6 amperes at
120 volts ac. Deadband shall not exceed 1.0 inch of water column.
Switches shall have explosionproof housing and the teflon coated
diaphragm must prevent process gases from migrating into the switch
contact area. Switches shall be provided complete with shutoff valves
and shall be mounted as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall be
Solan 07PS-XI-SS-T-1", S.O.R. "4BE-KB4-N4-C2A-TT", or equal.
9.04.05. Electrode/Conductance Relav Level Switch. Electrodes shall be
rigid AISI Type 316 stainless steel solid rod type with a PVC outer
sheath. PVC spacers shall be provided at each 4 foot interval of
r electrode length. Electrode holders shall be threaded mount type..
Electrode relays shall be dual -coil or solid-state relay type with
single -pole, double throw output contacts rated not less than 5 amperes
at 120 volts ac. The relay primary power shall be 120 volts ac, 60 Hz,
single phase. Intrinsically safe solid-state relays shall be utilized
whenever the electrodes are located in a hazardous or explosionproof
classified area.
Relays shall be housed in a NEMA Type 4 enclosure. Electrodes and
conductance relays shall be B/W Controls, Warrick Controls, or equal.
9.04.06. Flood Level Switches. The flood detecting level switches
shall be float actuated and shall be suitable for wall or sump mounting.
The switch float mechanism and housing shall be all stainless steel
construction and shall actuate when the water level rises not more than
4 inches above the bottom of the housing. The switch contacts shall be
hermetically sealed, rated for one ampere at 120 volts ac, and shall be
field changeable from normally open to normally closed or shall be
single pole, double throw.
9.04.07. Digester No. 9 Cover Position Indicator and Transmitter. A
gaugehead type of cover position indicator and transmitter shall be
provided for existing Digester No. 9 as indicated on the drawings. The
indicator shall be a Varec 12592 Series", and the transmitter shall be
Varec 08200 Series".
The transmitter shall be mounted on the indicator and shall provide a 4-
20 mA output signal which varies in direct proportion to the liquid
level. The 4-20 mA output signal shall correspond to 0-20 foot cover
height.
All required connections on the digester cover for the cable, enclosing
pipe, mounting brackets, and appurtenances.shall be provided.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) -13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -13-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092492 )
r
9.05. Analytical Instrumentation.
9.05.01. Dissolved Oxygen Analyzers. The dissolved oxygen probe shall
consist of two concentric, independently spring -loaded, metal electrode
rings insulated from each other. The electrode surfaces shall be con-
tinually polished by the rotary action of an insulated grindstone which
is driven by an°ac motor. The electrodes shall be enclosed by a chamber
which oscillates vertically and serves as a sample pump to supply fresh
wastewater to the electrodes. The probe shall _include an integral sig-
nal cable with a quick -disconnect plug. The transmitter shall be
enclosed in a NEMA Type 4X enclosure with stainless steel mounting
brackets for surface or pipe mounting. Power supply to the transmitter
will be 120 volts ac, 60 Hz, single phase. The transmitter shall have a
local indicator, with scale engraved 0 to 10 ppm, and shall have a
corresponding 4-20 mA do output signal capable of driving a 0 to 600 ohm
external load. The transmitter and probe shall be furnished with all
mounting hardware. The probe and transmitter shall be Great Lakes
Instruments "Model 5141" Zullig type probe and "Model 90" transmitter.
9.06. Miscellaneous Equipment.
9.06.01. Local Transmitter Indicators. Locally mounted transmitter
indicators shall be integrally mounted to the transmitter, or conduit
mounted near the transmitter. Indicators shall have not less than a
2 inch scale, with accuracy of plus or minus 2.0 percent. Indicator
scales shall be as indicated on the drawings or shall be 0 to 100 per-
cent if not otherwise indicated. Indicators shall have weatherproof
housings.
9.06.02. Instrument Calibrator. The calibrator shall be completely
portable and shall be capable of measuring and generating milliamperes
and volts. The calibrator shall be completely solid-state and shall
have one 4-1/2 digit display capable of indicating either calibrator
input or output. The display indication (output or input) shall be
switch selectable. The input display shall be bipolar complete with a
minus (-) sign.
Input ranges shall cover -50 to +50 volts and -50 to +50 mA dc. Output
ranges shall cover 0 to 11 volts and 0 to 22 mA dc. Input and output
accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.1 percent of full scale and shall be
traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. The
calibrator shall be capable of simulating a two -wire transmitter operat-
ing from an external supply voltage of 12 to 65 volts dc, or driving an
external load of 0 to 400 ohms at 20 mA do from the calibrator's inter-
nal 24 volt do supply. The calibrator shall have input-output isolation
and shall be protected against misconnection and overvoltage.
The calibrator shall be powered from a.snap-in battery pack capable of
operating the calibrator for 8 hours at 20 mA continuous output. The
calibrator shall be supplied with two battery packs, a separate battery
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -14-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092492 )
F
F
F
F
charger, a carrying case, an instruction manual, and test leads. The
calibrator shall be Transmatioa '1090' and specified module part numbers
or equal.
The calibrator shall be capable, with the addition of auxiliary modules,
of measuring pressure and differential pressure in inches of water or
psig. Accuracy of pressure measurement shall be 0.07 percent of full
scale and shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology. The pressure modules shall have overpressure relief which
protects module calibration and shall be compatible with nonconductive.
noncorrosive, instrument -grade clean air or clean inert gas. Pressure
ranges and modules shall be as specified in the following table:
Pressure Ran es
Single Scale Modules
0-100 psig
Dual Scale Modules
Module Part Numbers
Single Port
PS6100
0-5 psig, 0-100 in. of water PD1120
The calibrator shall be equipped with fittings for 1/8 inch NPT to
1/4 inch OD tubing, and a portable air supply pump (-2 to +200 psig).
The air supply pump shall be Transmation '1098P' or equal.
10. CUSTOMER TRAINING. The coordinating supplier shall provide a
qualified representative at the jobsite to train the Owner's personnel
in operating and maintaining the equipment. The training session shall
include a technical explanation of the equipment and an actual hands-on
demonstration. The training session shall consist of five full 8 hour
consecutive Owner working days, and the schedule shall be arranged and
coordinated with the Owner.
11. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete fabrication, assembly, and installa-
tion drawings; wiring and schematic diagrams; and details, specifica-
tions, and data covering the materials used and the parts, devices, and
accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished shall be submitted
in accordance with the submittals section. Submittal data shall be
grouped and submitted in three separate stages. Each stage submittal
shall be substantially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets
submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. Instru-
ment tag numbers indicated on the contract drawings shall be referenced
where applicable. Submittal data for multifunctional instruments shall
include complete descriptions of the intended functions and configur-
ations of the instruments.
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -15-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092492 )
11.01. First Stare Submittal. The first stage submittal shall include
the following items:
a. Product catalog cut sheets clearly marked to show the appli-
cable model number, optional features, and intended service of
the device.
b. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or
discrepancies between the supplier's proposed system and the
contract requirements.
11.02. Second Stage Submittal. Before any equipment is released for
shipment to the jobsite, the following data shall be submitted:
a. Complete panel fabrication drawings and details of panel
wiring, piping, and painting. Panel and subpanel drawings
shall include overall dimensions, metal thickness, door swing,
mounting details and front of panel arrangement to show gen-
eral appearance with spacing and mounting height of instru-
ments and control devices.
b. System wiring and installation drawings for all inter-
connecting wiring between components of the systems furnished —
and for all interconnecting wiring between the related equip-
ment and the equipment furnished under this section. All
interconnecting wiring shall be appropriate for the service
and shall result in a properly functioning system. Wiring
diagrams shall show complete circuits and indicate all
connections.
If panel terminal designations, interdevice connections,
device features and options, or other features are modified as
a result of the fabrication process or factory testing,
revised drawings shall be resubmitted prior to shipment of the
equipment to the jobsite.
At the supplier's option, and for projects with very few fabrication
drawings, the first stage and second stage submittals may be combined.
11.03. Third Stage Submittal. Complete system documentation, in the
form of operation and maintenance manuals, shall be provided. Manuals
shall include complete product instruction books for each item of equip-
ment furnished.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400 —
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -16-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range
of instrument, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the
instrument model number, calibrated range, and all other special fea-
tures. A complete set of wiring and interconnection drawings shall be
included with the manuals.
End of Section
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13400
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -17-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(092392 )
INSTRUMENT
NAME & SERVICE:
BRAND & MODEL NO.:
r
TAG OR LOOP NO.:
INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE:
INPUT
ACTUAL
OUTPUT
DESIRED
OUTPUT
I
I i
I
I
I
PROPORTIONAL BAND:
RESET:
POSITION OF SWITCHES, JUMPERS, ETC.
COMMENTS:
DATE OF CALIBRATION:
CALIBRATED BY:
elacu ra VEaccm
INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION
REPORT
FIGURE :-:3400
F
r
Section 13500 - SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installing of soft-
ware, input/output hardware and all devices, accessories and appur-
tenances required for proper operation and interface with the existing
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system. The existing
SCADA system was furnished by QEI, Inc. in 1992.
Systems and devices furnished hereunder shall include equipment
specified in the following sections:
Section 13520 COMPUTER SYSTEM SOFTWARE
Section 13530 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS
Section 13540 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Supplementing this section, the drawings indicate locations and arrange-
ments of equipment and provide block diagrams, one -line diagrams and
input/output lists regarding connection and interface with other
equipment.
2. SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS. Equipment and software furnished under
this section shall be designed, coordinated and supplied by a single
manufacturer or supplier, hereafter referred to as the System Supplier,
who is regularly engaged in the business of supplying microprocessor
based monitoring, control, and data acquisition systems.
The System Supplier shall be QEI, Inc. without -exception.
Alternate suppliers will not be acceptable.
3. COORDINATION. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed
and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and mate-
rials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these speci-
fications, under other contracts, and where applicable, to related
existing equipment. All equipment shall be designed and installed in
full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, and the related
equipment manufacturer.
Related equipment and materials can include, but will not be limited to,
instrumentation, valve operators, analytical measuring devices, conduit,
and cable as described in other specifications associated with this
project, or furnished under other contracts.
Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related
equipment shall not relieve the System Supplier from supplying systems
in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related
equipment.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13500
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -1-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
is
(17578 )
Coordination with other contractors and supervision of installation
shall be provided by the System Supplier as required during
construction.
4. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. The services of the System Supplier's
technical representative shall be provided as necessary to assist during
installation, to calibrate, test, and advise others of the procedures
for installation, adjustment and operation in accordance with the
requirements of the quality control section.
4.01. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be
in accordance with the electrical section.
4.02. Field Calibration. A technical representative of the System
Supplier shall calibrate each analog input and output and shall provide
a written calibration report for each point, indicating the results and
final tuning adjustment settings. The calibrated adjustments shall be
sealed or marked, insofar as practical, so that further adjusting by
unauthorized personnel is discouraged. Calibration shall be accom-
plished prior to field checkout of the operations of a system.
4.03. Systems Check. Factory -trained engineering and programming
personnel shall participate in the checkout of the systems. During the
startup period, these personnel shall thoroughly check all equipment,_
correct all deficiencies, and repeat the factory testing procedures
described herein. The System Supplier shall appoint a field services
manager to perform or supervise the performance of all system check-out
and startup activities. The field services manager shall be immediately
available to the Engineer and the Owner by phone or onsite for the
duration of this contract.
If interrelated devices furnished by other suppliers or under other
contracts, such as valve operators, motor controls, and instruments, do
not perform properly at the time of system checkout, the technical
representative shall use suitable test equipment to introduce simulated
signals to and/or measure signals from those devices as may be required
to locate the source of trouble or malfunction. A written report
regarding the results of such tests shall be furnished, if requested by
the Engineer, as necessary to resolve a question of responsibility for
corrective measures.
4.04. Installation Test Equipment. All necessary test equipment for
calibration and check of system components shall be provided by the
System Supplier. The System Supplier shall furnish calibration and
maintenance records for all test and calibration equipment used onsite
if requested by the Engineer.
5. GENERAL. The drawings and specifications parts that follow indicate
the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures
from the drawings or specifications are deemed necessary by the System
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13500
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -2-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17576 )
Supplier, details of such departures and the reasons shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review with or before the first stage submittal. No
such departures shall be made without prior written approval.
5.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
5,02, Standard Products. Systems furnished under this section shall be
1 essentially a standard product of the System Supplier. Where two or
j more units of the same type of equipment are required, they shall be the
product of the same manufacturer; however, all components of the systems
furnished hereunder need not be the products of one manufacturer unless
specified herein. New SCADA equipment shall be the same model and
series as the existing SCADA equipment wherever possible.
L This specification describes,the minimum requirements for hardware and
L software. Where the System Supplier's standard configuration includes
additional items of equipment or software features not specifically
described herein, they shall be furnished as a part of the system and
shall be warranted as specified herein.
Li
1
5.03. System Design. The design of the systems furnished hereunder
shall utilize concepts, techniques and features which provide maximum
reliability and ease of maintenance and repair. The systems shall
include board -level diagnostic aids such as light emitting diodes or
other indicators to aid in quick diagnosis and repair. Diagnostic
software shall be furnished to aid in troubleshooting on the system
level.
5.04. Factory Assembly. Equipment shall be shipped completely factory
assembled. except where the physical size, arrangement, or configuration
of the equipment, or shipping and handling limitations make the shipment
of completely assembled units impracticable.
5.05. Availability. The system availability, consisting of all local
and remote input/output equipment excluding failures of remote communi-
cations channels and communications equipment, shall be at least.
99.9 percent.
5.06. Expandability. The system shall allow easy future expansion.
Spare I/O points, as indicated on the drawings, shall be factory in-
stalled. If the system uses card racks, power supplies, and miscel-
laneous components which are modular, space shall be provided and
reserved with enclosures for planned future expansion. Any components
which are not modular shall be sized and provided with the! ultimate
planned expansion. Future expansion shall not require discarding or
replacing any initially installed components.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
) 13500
EXPANSION) -3-
Each remote terminal unit (RTU) shall have,space allocated for a11'I/O
points as described in Appendix l to Section 13520 of these specifica-
tions, plus a minimum of 15 percent spare for future expansion.
5.07. Power Supply. Unless otherwise specified, power supply to all
equipment will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase.
Equipment shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations of plus or
minus 10 percent without affecting operation of the unit. The System —'
Supplier shall provide voltage conditioning or filtering equipment if
necessary to meet the voltage variation and surge withstand requirements
specified herein.
All power supplies to obtain voltages required by the System Supplier's
equipment other than those provided above shall be an integral part of
the equipment furnished.. Internal power supplies shall be regulated,
current -limiting, and self -protected. -
All equipment furnished hereunder shall meet all surge withstand capa-
bility tests as defined in ANSI C37.90-1978, without damage to the
equipment.
5.08. Environmental Reouirements. All equipment furnished hereunder
shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in per-
formance throughout the environmental extremes specified herein. Equip-
ment shall be designed to prevent the generation of electromagnetic and
radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with FCC Rules
and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices.
Remote input/output hardware shall be suitable for an ambient tempera-
ture range of -10 to 50 C and a relative humidity of 0 to 95 percent
non -condensing.
J�
All input/output hardware shall meet or exceed, without false operation,
all requirements of NEMA ICS-1-109.60, Electrical Noise Tests.
6. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. System configuration services shall consist
of all programming and configuration of the RTUs being added under this
project and reprogramming or modification of the exiting SCADA system
data base as required to accommodate these new RTUs. All configuration
and programming services shall be provided by the System Supplier as
part of this Contract.
The Engineer and/or Owner will provide proposed report and graphic
display formats to the System Supplier after award of Contract.
General functional requirements are provided on the drawings and are
described in the specifications that define the scope of the System
Supplier's responsibility for configuring the system and provide certain
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13500
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -4-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
information needed to perform the configuration tasks. Information
provided herein and indicated on the drawings is general and functional
in nature and illustrates the general functional intent of the system.
All the information necessary to fully configure the system may not be
included herein or on the drawings. The System Supplier shall be
responsible for determining what additional information may be required
to complete the configuration tasks, and shall be responsible for
obtaining this information from the Engineer or the Owner. The graphics
and report formats shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner.
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete dimensional, assembly, and installation
r� drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams; and details, specifications and
data covering the materials used and the parts, devices and accessories
forming a part of the system furnished, shall be submitted in accordance
with the submittals section. Submittal data shall be grouped and sub-
mitted in three separate stages. Each stage submittal shall be substan-
tially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at
random intervals will not be accepted for review. Equipment tag numbers
or identifications indicated on the drawings shall be referenced where
applicable.
7.01. First Stage Submittal. The first stage submittal shall include
the following items:
a. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or
discrepancies between the Supplier's proposed system and the
contract requirements.
T
b. Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware items, clearly
marked to show the applicable model number, optional features,
and intended service of each device.
C. A brief, concise description of the system proposed, including
major hardware and software components, field services and
training.
d. A system configuration drawing in block diagram or schematic
format showing the principal items of equipment being fur-
nished and their interrelationship.
e. `Drawings showing floor space requirements for all equipment
items. Drawings shall include space requirements for door
swings and maintenance access.
f. Standard field termination drawings for all process input/
output equipment, showing typical terminations for each type
.of point available in the system.
7.02. Second Stage Submittal. Before any equipment is released for
shipment to the jobsite the following data shall be submitted.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13500
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -5-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
At the Supplier's option, the stage one and stage two submittals may be
combined. --
a. System wiring and installation drawings for all intercon-
necting wiring between components of the existing system and _
for interconnecting wiring between the related equipment and
the equipment furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams
shall show complete circuits and indicate all connections. If
panel terminal designations, interdevice connections, device -'
features and options, or other features are modified as a
result of the fabrication process or factory testing, revised
drawings shall be resubmitted prior to shipment of the equip-
ment to the jobsite.
b. Process input/output listings showing point names, numbers,
.and addresses.
7.03. Third Stage Submittal. Complete system documentation, in the
form of operation and maintenance manuals, shall be provided. Operation
and maintenance manuals shall include complete product instruction books
for each item of equipment furnished. Where instruction booklets cover
more than one specific model or range of device, product data sheets
shall be included which indicate the device model number and other
special features.
The System Supplier shall furnish complete documentation on all software
provided with the systems specified herein. Software documentation
shall consist of the following principal items:
a. One backup set of any integrated circuit or solid-state
memory -based plug-in firmware used.
b. Two complete backup copies of application software in exe-
cutable format provided on magnetic media compatible with the
system furnished.
C. Two complete copies of the system database on magnetic media
compatible with the system furnished, plus one printed copy.
d. Three sets of written as -built reference documentation for any
special software provided specifically.for this contract.
Compilers, assemblers, utility, and diagnostic programs that are
standard commercial products of third parties shall not be required to
be included in the magnetic media source code backup requirements.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13500
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -6-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) �.
(17578 )
F
8. SPARE PARTS. As a minimum, the following spare parts and consumable
items shall be provided:
One spare board of each type used in the remote terminal units,
plus two of each type of input/output board used.
All spare parts shall be furnished to the Owner before final acceptance
of the system. Spare parts shall be packaged to exclude dust and
moisture and shall be suitable for storage. Circuit boards and other
electronic parts shall be enclosed in anti -static material. Spare parts
packages shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, part
.- number or other identification, date of shipment, and approximate shelf
r:
life.
Spare parts and supplies shall not be consumed during installation, de-
bugging, startup or training operations and shall be available in the
quantities specified at the time of final acceptance. The System Sup-
plier shall provide replacement for all supplies partially or totally
consumed before final acceptance of the systems.
10. TESTING. The system shall be subject to field acceptance testing.
The System Supplier shall prepare a system test procedure to be approved
by the Owner and the Engineer which shall demonstrate conformance of the
system to the specifications. The test shall be performed by the System
Supplier and witnessed by the Owner and/or the Engineer.
The System Supplier shall notify the Engineer and the Owner in writing
at least 14 days prior to the proposed date for commencing the tests.
9.01. Field Acceptance Testing. After installation of the new RTUs and
after checkout by the System Supplier's personnel, a field acceptance
test shall be performed.
The field acceptance test shall include an operational demonstration of
r' at least 10 days during which the system shall run continuously without
loss of basic functions. During the operational demonstration, all
errors or abnormal occurrences shall be recorded by the System Sup-
plier's field representative. The log shall include a description of
the problem, its likely cause, and the action taken, if any, to recover
from the occurrence. Failure of any existing SCADA system equipment
shall not be considered as downtime, provided that, in the opinion of
the Engineer, the failure was not caused by deficiency in the new RTUs
t or new software modifications provided under this Contract. Repeated
failure of any hardware component or software module shall cause the
r acceptance test to be terminated and re -started.
End of Section
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13500
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -7-
..o (CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
r
T
Section 13520 - COMPUTER SYSTEM SOFTWARE
1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of customized application
software fully installed in the existing computer system.
It is the intent of this specification to have the System Supplier
furnish customized or specially written software as required to meet all
of the functional requirements specified herein.
Any custom applications software required shall be fully integrated into
the basic software and shall not require unique command.structures.
No attempt has been made in this specification to list all software,
l
list all characteristics of software required by the System Supplier to
meet the functional requirements specified herein, nor determine the
{°
location of the software modules within the system.
2. GENERAL. The existing SCADA system software was furnished by Q.E.I.
Inc. in 1992. The application programming.was or is being provided by
Q.E.I. Inc., including the graphic display layouts and report formats.
Minor modifications may or may not have been made to these! application
programs by the Owner at the time that program additions for this
contract will be performed. The System Supplier shall be responsible
for making all necessary modifications to the existing data base and
software as may be required to accommodate the addition of the new RTUs
and 1/0 installed under this Contract.
3. SOFTWARE ADDITIONS AND MODIFICATIONS. This section describes SCADA
control logic requirements for this project. Refer to the project P&ID
drawings as a supplement to this section.
The following algorithms are generic logic descriptions that may be
applicable in a number of control situations. These algorithms shall be
used as a guide for SCADA programming. The System Supplier shall verify
that the supplied SCADA equipment has sufficient processor capabilities
and user available memory to implement the required control logic
functions.
In addition to the specific control logic functions described in this
section, all AI, AO, DI, DO register and internal relay values scanned
by the SCADA system shall be accessible by the SCADA host via System
Supplier furnished data highway or leased telephone lines. In addition,
a status or health bit indicating the condition of the RTU shall be
available to the SCADA host.
3.01. Effluent Pump Control. Effluent pumps EP-4001 through EP-4005
located at the Effluent Pump Station will be controlled by a "smart"
RTU. The effluent pumps will be controlled by an ON -OFF -AUTO selector
switch located at the pumps. In the ON position, the pumps will run.
0"
Vt
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13520
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -1-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
r
f
Section 13530 - REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS
1. SCOPE. Remote terminal units (BTUs) shall be furnished and in-
stalled as specified herein. The RTUs shall match the existing BTUs
furnished by Q.E.I. under a previous contract. The System Supplier
shall furnish complete, fully operational RTUs meeting the communica-
tions, input/output, and functional requirements indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.
2. GENERAL. All equipment furnished under this section shall be
�- selected by the System Supplier for its suitability for its intended
purpose and operating conditions, and shall conform to the following
requirements. All RTUs shall be of the same basic design: control unit,
modem, input/output interface, and plug-in functional modules. All
functions and input/output requirements identified herein or indicated
on the drawings as "future" shall be fully functional at the time of RTU
installation.
2.01. Spare and Future Capacity. Each RTU shall include spare I/O
points and have provisions for future expansion in addition to any spare
or future points indicated on the drawings. Each RTU shall include at
least 15 percent spare I/O of each type installed, or two points of each
type, whichever is greater. Additionally, each RTU shall be capable of
supporting at least 25 percent additional I/O without modification to
the RTU processor or enclosure.
3. "SMART" RTU FUNCTIONS. Each RTU shall provide "Smart" functions to
allow stand-alone operations for closed loop control of remote
processes.
Local control algorithms shall provide RTU functions with or without
host station communications.
4. INPUT/OUTPUT HARDWARE. The drawings indicate the type and quantity
of input/output hardware required for each RTU. Any inputs or outputs
required for SCADA system associated purposes or other non -Owner
requirements will be in addition to those points indicated on the
drawings.
4.01. Digital Outputs. Digital control outputs shall be isolated from
the RTU's internal logic. A separate control output shall.be provided
for each control function (i.e., a control output for each START and
each STOP function). Groups of momentary control outputs shall have
adjustable timing ranges from 150 milliseconds to 1 second.
4.02. Analog Outputs. Analog control outputs shall be isolated from
the RTU's internal logic. Analog outputs shall be 4 to 20 mA do without
need for external load adjustments.
1X (LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
) 13530
& EXPANSION) -1-
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
The digital to analog converters shall have the following minimum
characteristics over the temperature and humidity ranges specified under r
environmental requirements:
• Full scale accuracy of t0.1 percent.
• Linearity of 0.05 percent.
• Resolution of 0.05 percent.
• Repeatability of 0.024 percent.
Each analog output signal shall remain at its last value in the event of
computer system or communications failure.
4.03. Digital Inputs. Digital inputs will be from dry contacts, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings. Power for the dry contacts shall
be supplied by the BTUs and shall not be less than 24 volts. All state
changes shall be reported regardless of whether they were the result of
commanded or uncommanded operations.
4.04. Analog Inputs. The analog inputs shall accept input signals from
instruments, valve position transmitters, analytical devices, and other
process instruments and devices as indicated on the drawings.
The analog to digital converters shall have the following minimum char-
acteristics over the temperature and humidity ranges specified under
environmental requirements:
• Input range of 4 to 20 mA dc.
• Full scale accuracy of t0.25 percent.
• Linearity of 0.05 percent.
• Resolution of 0.05 percent.
• Repeatability of 0.025 percent.
• Overrange of 20 percent.
RTU analog inputs shall provide a common mode noise rejection ratio of
at least 90 dB (dc to 60 Hz) and a normal mode noise rejection ratio of
at least 60 dB at 60 Hz). Input circuits shall be isolated to the
extent that 200 volts ac continuous may be applied to a single input
without damage or degradation to any circuitry.
The 24 volt do instrument loop power required for two -wire instrument
transmitters indicated on the drawings shall be furnished from power
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13530
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -2
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
supplies integral to the RTU for loops specified herein or indicated on
the drawings.
5. ENCLOSED FABRICATION. The following paragraphs describe general
fabrication requirements for RTUs.
5.01. Enclosures. Electrical panels and cabinets, except for those of
cast metal, shall be constructed from steel plate reinforced as required
to provide a true surface and adequate support for devices mounted
t thereon. Thickness of the steel plate shall conform to the requirements
of UL-50. Enclosures shall contain only those openings required for
,.. cabling and ventilation.
The cabinets shall be free from waves and other imperfections. Panel
fronts shall not be recessed at the base. Adjoining panel sections
shall be accurately shop fitted to assure satisfactory assembly in the
field.
Doors shall be essentially full height, having turned -back edges and
additional bracing to assure rigidity and prevent sagging. Positive
latches shall hold doors securely compressed at top, sides, and bottom
against rubber gaskets.
Each RTU enclosure shall be either a NEMA Type 12 indoor cabinet or a
NEMA Type 4 outdoor cabinet, as indicated, with all equipment and wiring
accessible from the front of the enclosure. Any other indoor electrical
enclosures required shall be NEMA Type 12, as a minimum. Any other
outdoor or below grade electrical enclosures required shall, as a
minimum, be NEMA Type 4.
Cabinets shall have hinged, lockable, front doors for access. Field
wire entry capability shall be from the bottom or top of the cabinet.
Each cabinet shall, wherever possible, be one of the System Supplier's
standard sizes; however, the height shall not exceed 90 inches for the
indoor and outdoor installations and 48 inches for the below grade
installations. All indoor cabinets shall be sized so that they can be
moved through a 36 inch wide doorway. All below grade cabinets shall be
sized so that they can be moved through a 30 inch circular manhole
opening.
Any ventilation openings in the enclosure shall be provided with dust
filters and insect screens. Any ventilating fans required by the System
Supplier's design shall be located at air inlets so that the enclosure
interior is pressurized.
Panels and cabinets shall be of adequate strength to support mounted
components during shipment and to support a concentrated load of 200
pounds on their top after erection.
We
k (LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13530
'- (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -3
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
e.
ng
5.02. :Shop Painting. All metallic surfaces subject to corrosion shall
be protected by suitable coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces which,
will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of
the equipment. The surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared in the shop.
All mill scale, rust, lubrications, and other coatings shall be removed.
Exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and
filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for .painting. All
surfaces shall be treated to resist rust and to form a bond between the
metal and the paint.
Enclosures shall be given one or more coats of rust -inhibiting primer
and two coats of high grade oil -resistant enamel, lacquer, or poly-
urethane finish both inside and out. Paint films which show sags,
checks, blisters, teardrops, or fat edges will.not be acceptable. Any
such defects shall be repaired by and at the expense of the System
Supplier.
The System Supplier shall include touchup paint with the equipment he is
furnishing. Touchup paint shall be of the same type and color as the
factory applied finish paint. One quart of finish color shall be fur-
nished for future touchup. Complete application instructions shall be
furnished. The paint and instructions shall be boxed or crated to
prevent damage, and shall be clearly labeled.
The exterior finish color of the RTU enclosure shall be light gray. The
interior finish color shall be flat white.
5.03. Wiring. Internal wiring in factory prewired RTU and other elec-
trical enclosures may be installed according to the System Supplier's
standard as to wire size, insulation, and method of termination except
that insulation for all wiring (including circuit board wiring, back
plane wiring, and power supply wiring) shall meet VW-1 flame test
requirements of UL-44. Identification of conductors may be done by
insulation color coding identified on the manufacturer's drawings or by
printed wiring sites.
Wiring from field termination blocks to individual input and output
points shall be factory installed. Digital and analog signal wiring
shall be segregated with the enclosure as much as practical.
5.04. Power Supplies. All RTU equipment shall be designed for con-
tinuous operation on a nominal 120 volt, single-phase power source.
Each RTU shall be provided with an internal battery and battery charger.
Each RTU battery shall be sized to fully supply power to the RTU and
related analog loops for at least 2 hours. The System Supplier shall
guarantee satisfactory operation when the equipment is continuously
energized at any voltage level from -15 percent to +12.5 percent of
nominal with ambient temperatures as specified., All RTUs shall tolerate
and ride through voltage dips, surges, and momentary transients
associated with normal power supplies.
r-
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13530,
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -4
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
Each internal RTU power supply shall be furnished complete with an On -
Off switch, indicating light, and input overcurrent protection.
In addition to the internal power supplies to power equipment within the
RTU enclosure, certain RTUs shall provide 24 volt do instrument loop
power for two -wire type transmitters as indicated on the drawings. The
24 volt do power supply shall be regulated to within +/-2.0 percent
(0.5 volt) of nominal with ambient temperatures as specified and shall
have a minimum capacity of 5 watts.
End of Section
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13530
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -5-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
71,
T
Section 13540 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of
equipment to expand, the data acquisition and control system
communications for the City of Lubbock, Texas, wastewater plant.
Equipment shall be provided for an communications to remote., BTUs
and the existing Wastewater Treatment SCADA system.
2. GENERAL. The drawings indicate physical locations for the principal
data acquisition and control system hardware. The System Supplier shall
design and arrange the communications network configuration to assure
satisfactory operation and to..maximize network efficiency. The System
Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the routing requirements
with the electrical contractor throughout the project.
The System Supplier shall provide all necessary equipment to transmit
and receive data via communication channels. This includes switch
devices, modems, and buffers.
End of Section
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS ) 13540
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -1-
(CONTRACT NO. 2 )
(17578 )
T
Section 14630 - TRAVELING BRIDGE CRANE
1. SCOPE. This section covers traveling bridge cranes, complete with
trolley and hoist, for the following locations:
Type of Operation*
Bridge Trolley Hoist
BC-2101 Primary Sludge MH MP E
Pumping Station
BC-2201 Bio-tower Filter ME MP E
Influent/Recircu-
lation Pumping
Station
BC-2401 Secondary Sludge MH MP E
Pumping Station
BC-4001 Effluent Pumping MH MP E
Station
* MH a Manual, Hand Geared Type
MP - Manual, Push Type
E s Electric
Runway beams and crane rails are covered in the structural and miscel-
laneous metals section.
2. GENERAL. Equipment and accessories furnished and installed under
this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in
proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifi-
cations, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
The bridge crane assembly shall consist of structural members fabricated
by the crane supplier and components (end trucks, wheels, bridge drive
mechanism, trolley, and hoist) manufactured by Lift -Tech International,
P&H, Robbins & Myers, or Wright. All components provided shall be the
products of a single manufacturer. For ease of identification, the
components are specified by reference to catalog names of Lift -Tech
International. Equivalent products of other manufacturers regularly
engaged in the production of equipment of this type may be furnished
subject to acceptance by the Engineer. All modifications necessary to
accommodate the equipment furnished shall be subject to review and
acceptance by the Engineer and shall be made at no additional cost to
the Owner.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -1
The bridge crane assembly shall be shop preassembled and run, then
matchmarked and disassembled for shipment and field erection.
2.01. General,Ectuipment Stipulations. _ The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to the equipment furnished under this section.
2.02. Power Supply. Power supply to the equipment will be 480 volts,
60 Hz, 3 phase.
2.03. Governing Standards. Equipment furnished under this section
shall comply with the applicable requirements of the following:
Occupational Safety and Health Standards of the U.S. Department of
Labor; Subpart N, Materials Handling and Storage.
Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) Specification
No. 74, "Specification for Top Running & Under Running Single
Girder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes".
ANSI MH27.1, "Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail
Systems".
ANSI/ASME HST-4M, "Performance Standard for Overhead Electrical
Wire Rope Hoists".
2.04. Painting. Shop painting shall be as specified in the General
Equipment Stipulations. Field painting is covered in the painting
section.
2.05. Labels. The bridge, trolley, and hoist shall each have a
conspicuous easy -to -read label showing manufacturer's name, crane serial
number, and rated capacity of equipment. The rated capacity of the
hoist shall also be shown on the load block.
3. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Each traveling bridge crane
shall be a shop -assembled unit with top running or underhung bridge as -�
specified and underhung trolley and hoist. The bridge crane assembly
shall be designed for the following conditions: _
TASLS 1-14630 ..
Unit Designation
BC-2101
BC-2201
BC-2401
BC-4001
Classification
ANSI Al
CMAA Al
ANSI Al
CMAA Al
Hoisting Capacity, pounds
4,000
6,000
4,000
6,000
Distance center -to -center of
runway beams, feet
10
40.92
10
27.92
Size of runway beams
C8 x 18.75
315x50
W12 x 65
C8 x 18.75
S153L50
W12 x 40
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -2
r
4
Unit Designation
BC-2101
BC-2201
BC-2401
BC-4001
Size of ASCE crane rails, lb par
---
40
---
40
yard
Approximate overall length of
54.00
91.17
49.75
65.17
runway beams, feet
Maximum available clearance beyond
12
9
12
9
centerline of runway beams, each
side, inches
Maximum available clearance above
---
---
---
top of runway beam or crane rail,
inches
Bottom of runway beam. El.
3126.58
---
3126.58
---
Top of crane rail, El.
---
3143.00
---
3140.00
Operating floor, El.
3110.00
3131.00±
3110.00
3127.5t
Distance of pendant control
48
48
48
48
station above operating floor,
inches
Required hook travel
Book at highest position, El.
3123.67
3140.64
3123.67
3138.00
Book at lowest position, El.
3110.00
3110.00
3110.00
3127.50
Crane speeds at rated capacity,
fpm
Bridge
NIL
NIL
N/A
N/A
Trolley
NIL
N/A
N/A
N/A
Hoist
15-20
15-20
15-20
15-20
4. BRIDGE. Each bridge shall be single girder type rigidly supported
by end trucks and shall be designed to run on the lower flange of the
runway beam for BC-2101 and BC-2401 and on the top of the crane rail for
BC-2201 and BC-4001. The bridge shall be constructed to accommodate an
underhung hoist trolley. The wearing surface of lower flanges on under -
hung cranes shall be either specially fabricated flanges or standard
flanges ground smooth.
Steel design and fabrication shall comply with applicable portions of
t the specifications of the American Institute of Steel Construction.
Loadings, impact allowances, and allowable stresses shall be in accord-
ance with the governing standards. Deflection of the main girder shall
r not exceed 1/800 of the span with the maximum hoist load at any point.
4.01. End Trucks. End trucks, each fabricated from structural steel
members, shall be designed to distribute the loading equally to each
wheel, shall be securely attached to the beam by welding or with fitted
bolts in reamed holes, and shall be provided with heavy gusset plates to
ensure adequate rigidity and squareness. Each truck shall have heavy
end plates to engage the stops on the runway beams or crane .rails. End
trucks shall have a wheelbase of approximately 1/7 the bridge span.
r� (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
` (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -3-.
The end trucks and wheels shall be designed to operate on the runway
beams or crane rails and shall clear the runway beam or standard ASCE
crane rail fittings, anchors, and splices.
4.02. Wheels. Bridge crane wheels shall be of the double flange type
for BC-2201 and BC-4001 and shall be of the single flange type for BC-
2101 and BC-2401. All wheels shall be made of rolled, forged, or cast
steel with machined universal crowned or tapered hardened treads,
designed to operate on the specified runway. Units BC-2201 and BC-4001
shall have one drive wheel in each end truck, and Units BC-2101 and
BC-2401 shall have one pair of drive wheels in each end truck. The
drive wheels in each truck shall have integrally cut spur gear teeth or
machine -cut gears pressed on hubs to serve as -drive wheels. The other
wheels shall be idlers. Axles may be either rotating or fixed type.
Wheel bearings shall be permanently shielded, lifetime -lubricated, anti -
friction type, adequate for radial and end thrust loading.
4.03. Bridge Drive Mechanism. Each bridge drive shall consist of a
cross shaft to drive one wheel or pair of wheels as specified, of each
end truck and a chain -operated drive wheel. The cross shaft shall be
designed to withstand torsional strain, and shall be supported by
brackets and self -aligning bearings at intervals sufficient to prevent
distortion of the shaft. Bearings shall be lifetime -lubricated, anti -
friction type.
The drive wheel shall be equipped with a swinging chain guide which will
permit rapid handling of the chain without fouling or gagging the wheel
and will also permit reasonable side pull on the chain. The operating
chain shall be heavily zinc plated and shall extend to approximately
3 feet above the floor. The location of drive chains for the bridges
shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
Gearing shall be helical, spur, or herringbone type, made from rolled or
cast steel, and shall have machine -cut teeth. All shafts shall be made
from alloy steel and shall be heat treated.
5. TROLLEY AND -HOIST. Each trolley and hoist shall be Lift -Tech "Shaw -
Box" or P&H "Beta Hevi-Lift Each hoist shall be of the cable winding
drum type, and each trolley shall be designed to run on the lower flange
of the crane bridge.
5.01. Trolley. The trolley frame shall be rigid; shall support the
hoist; and shall be as specified in paragraph 1, Scope.
Wheels shall be single flange type, made from rolled, forged, or cast
steel, with hardened treads. Trolley drive wheels shall have integ-
rally cut spur gear teeth or machine -cut gears pressed on hubs. Wheel
bearings shall be permanently shielded, lifetime -lubricated, anti -
friction type, adequate for radial and end thrust loading.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -4-
I
The trolley drive wheel shall be equipped with a swinging chain guide
which will permit rapid handling of the chain without fouling or gagging
the wheel and will also permit reasonable side pull on the chain. The
operating chain shall be heavily zinc plated.and shall extend to approx-
imately 3 feet above the floor.
5.02. Hoist. The hoist shall consist of a single -speed electric motor,
grooved winding drum, and gearing, all supported from the trolley.
Antifriction bearings shall be used throughout. The winding drum shall
have machined grooves designed to receive the full run of hoisting cable
without overwrapping. The ratio between the diameter of the drum and
the diameter of the hoisting cable shall be not less than 20 to 1. At
least two laps of cable shall remain on the drum when the lifting hook
is in the lowest position.
Hoist gearing shall be spur or helical type and shall be fully enclosed
in an oiltight housing. All bearings shall be antifriction type with
oil lubrication or lifetime grease packing.
The hoist shall be provided with mechanical and electrical load brakes
arranged so the load may be raised or lowered by electric power and
automatically sustained at any position of the hook when the power is
cut off. The mechanical load brake shall prevent acceleration of the
load when lowering and shall completely sustain the load when brought to
rest, independent of the electric brake. The electric brake shall be
released whenever current is flowing to the hoist motor and shall be
automatically activated when the current is shut off or interrupted.
The mechanical load brakes shall operate in oil in sealed enclosures.
The hoist shall be provided with adjustable limit switches to stop the
hoisting mechanism at the upper and lower limits of hook travel.
The lifting tackle shall consist of a lower block and hook, necessary
sheaves, and wire rope made especially for hoisting service. Rope shall
be as recommended by the rope manufacturer for use on the specified
drum. The lower block and hook shall be of the safety type with guarded
sheaves and slow opening, nonfracturing, forged steel hook. The hook
shall be supported on a ball or roller thrust bearing to permit easy
turning, and shall have a safety latch. The sheaves shall have anti -
friction or sleeve type bearings.
6. BUMPERS AND STOPS. Bumpers and stops shall be installed on the
bridge, trolley, runway beams, and crane rails and shall meet the
requirements of the governing standards. Bumpers and stops shall be
located so that no part of the bridge or trolley encroaches on clear-
ances specified or indicated on the drawings.
7. ELECTRICAL.
7.01. Motors. Motors shall be high -starting torque, squirrel -cage,
totally enclosed type, designed especially for hoist service and
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
14630
-5-
suitable for operation on the power supply specified. Motor size and
speed shall be adequate to start the full rated capacity load. .�
7.02. Controllers. Control of hoist motions shall all be from a single
pendant push-button station. Controllers shall be of the reversing,
magnetic contactor type with thermal overload protection, installed at
the motor,,and operated from the pendant station.
The pendant shall contain a separate push button for each of the follow-
ing motions: off, on, hoist up and down. The pendant shall be mounted
to move with the hoist trolley. Push buttons shall be of the mechanical
or electrical interlocking type to prevent possibility of damage to y
equipment should two or more buttons be depressed simultaneously. Push
buttons shall be provided with a spring return to neutral and shall
automatically return to the off position when pressure on the button is
released. A control power transformer with one secondary lead fused and
the other grounded shall be provided to reduce voltage at the push-
button station to a maximum of 120 volts. The pendant control cable
shall be heavy-duty type with extra -flexible stranding and neoprene
jacket. Support for the pendant station shall be provided by a stain-
less steel wire rope or chain equipped with a suitable strain -relief
clamp for the conductor cable. Each controller shall be suitable for
outdoor operation.
7.03. Power Feed System. A complete electric power feed system for the
crane assembly and runway shall be provided. The system shall consist
of insulated electrogalvanized conductors and insulated collector
assemblies with copper -graphite collector shoes, and shall be "Insul-8"
or "Duct -A -Bar". The current and voltage rating of the conductors and
collectors shall be not less than 90 amperes continuous duty,
135 amperes intermittent duty.
Stationary conductors shall be installed adjacent to the runway, with 1
supports and brackets as required. Cross conductors shall be supported
by angles across the top of the bridge. Collectors for hoist operation
shall be installed on the hoist trolley and wired to the hoist. Con-
ductors and collectors shall be installed in conformity with the recom
mendations and instructions of the manufacturer of the system furnished.
The feeder circuit for the crane assembly will be furnished and instal-
led under the electrical section, to the location indicated on the
drawings. A suitable surface -mounted junction box with all hanger
brackets and other accessories required for a complete installation
shall be furnished and installed under this section at the location
indicated, and the feeder circuit wired in.
7.04. Wiring. All wiring shall be installed in intermediate metal
conduit in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All insulated
wire shall be heat resisting and shall be insulated for 600 volts.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -6
8. ERECTION. Each crane, hoist, and trolley shall be erected by
workmen regularly engaged in crane erecting and acceptable to the crane
manufacturer. The orientation of installation of the hoist and trolley
on the crane bridge shall be as directed by the Engineer.
9. INSPECTION AND TESTING. After complete assembly and installation,
each crane shall be tested. A manufacturer's representative shall be
present during all field inspection and testing. The inspection and
r�- testing shall verify that each crane has been assembled properly and
�! that all required adjustments have been made.
9.01. Acceptance Testing. Each crane shall be subject to operational
and rated load testing.
Each crane shall raise, lower, hold in any position, and transport a
^" test load equal to 125 percent of the rated.capacity of the crane, with
no detrimental effects on the crane. All motions shall be executed
satisfactorily. The Contractor shall provide the test weights.
The following functions shall be tested:
Hoisting and lowering.
Trolley travel.
r Bridge travel.
Limit switches, locking and safety devices.
The trip setting of hoist limit switches shall be determined by tests
with an empty hook traveling in increasing speeds up to the: maximum
speed. The actuating mechanism of the limit switch shall be located to
trip the switch, under all conditions, in sufficient time to prevent
contact of the hook or hook block with any part of the trolley.
Hoisting and lowering tests will be conducted with 0, 50, 100, and
125 percent of the nominal or rated load.
The rated load test shall consist of the following operations:
The test load shall be lifted a sufficient distance to ensure that
the load is supported by the crane and held by the hoist brakes.
The test load shall be transported by means of the trolley for the
�► full length of the bridge.
The test load shall be transported by means of the bridge -for the
full length of the runway in one direction with the trolley as
�... close to the extreme right-hand end of the crane as practical and
in the other direction with the trolley as close to the extreme
left-hand end of the crane as practical.
The test load shall be lowered, stopped, and held with the brakes.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SDMP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -7-
1.'
Wiring shall be given an insulation.resistance test using a 500
volt megger.
Following completion of the tests, each crane shall be inspected by the
Contractor and the manufacturer's representative, in the presence of the
Engineer, for misalignment, breakage, and undue wear. All deficiencies,
shall be corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
9.02. Test Reports. Field inspection and testing of each crane shall
be documented by the crane manufacturer's representative through the
Contractor, noting the deficiencies and corrections and certifying that
each crane is acceptable for operation. Certification of the inspection
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
10. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete outline and.installation drawings.
together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used,
parts, devices, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment
furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
Drawings submitted shall include electrical connection diagrams and
schematics identifying all items requiring electrical control or power
in the operation of the traveling crane assembly, and complete details
and information on the power feed system.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 14630
(17578 ) -8-
,r
4:
Section 15060 — MISCELLANEOUS PIPING
1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing and installation of miscel-
laneous piping and piping accessories (except as otherwise indicated)
for all services. The following items are covered in other sections:
Cast (ductile) iron pipe
Concrete pipe
Fabricated steel pipe, 6 inch and larger, except aeration piping.
Pipe supports and anchors
Plumbing fixtures and accessories
Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe
FRP odor control piping
Miscellaneous piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all
fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other
necessary appurtenances.
2. MATERIALS.
Steel Pipe
The following types of steel pipe shall be provided. The
specific type of pipe material and wall thickness to be pro-
vided for each service listed herein shall conform to the
requirements of the applicable Service and Type Requirements
paragraph.
Nipples
Fittings
Cast Iron
Threaded
Flanged
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -1-
ASTM A53, seamless,(Type S), or
electric resistance welded,
(Type E), Grade A or B.
ASTM A106, Grade A or B.
ASTM A733, seamless, extra
strong (Schedule 80); •close"
nipples will be permitted only
by special authorization in each
case.
ANSI/ASME B16.4, Class 125.
ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125.
Malleable Iron
Forged Steel
Socket -
Welding
Threaded
Buttwelding
Unions
Malleable Iron
ANSI/ASME B16.3, Class 150, or
Fed Spec WW-P-521, Type II
(galvanized) for galvanized pipe
or Type I (black) for
ungalvanized pipe.
ANSI B16.11; Bonney, Crane,
Ladish, or Vogt.
Class 3000.
C1ass-2000 or Class 3000.
ANSI/ASME B16.9; standard weight
for use with standard weight
pipe and extra strong for use
with extra strong pipe.
Fed Spec WW-U-531, Class 2;
Type B (galvanized) for galva-
nized pipe or Type A (black) for
ungalvanized pipe.
Flanges
For Standard Weight ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150, flat
Pipe face.
For Extra Strong Pipe
Chemical Gas
Piping
Other
Services
Flange Bolts and Nuts
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -2
ASTM A105, forged steel, tongue
and groove flanged union type,
with nonmetallic gasket; rated
for a working pressure of
1,500 psi.
ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 300,
raised face.
ASTM/ASME A307, Grade B length
such that, after installation,
the bolts will project 1/8 to
3/8 inch beyond outer face of
the nut.
I-
Flange Gaskets
All Air Piping
Water Service
Other Services
Flat Face Flanges
Raised Face
Flanges
Grooved Couplings
Mechanical Couplings
Flexible Couplings
(Steel to Cast Iron)
Expansion Joints
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -3-
Flexitalic "Style CG", spiral
wound, AISI Type 304 stainless
steel, non -asbestos filler,
3/16 inch nominal thickness,
with compression ring 1/8 inch
thick to match required flange
dimensions.
ASTM D1330, Grade I, red rubber,
ring type,'1/8 inch thick.
Non -asbestos filler with
neoprene or nitrile binder;
dimensions to suit flange
contact face; 1/16 inch minimum
thickness for plain finished
surfaces, 3/32 inch minimum
thickness for serreted surfaces.
Continuous stainless steel
ribbon wound into a spiral with
non -asbestos filler between
adjacent coils with a carbon
steel gauge ring. Compressed
gasket thickness shall be
0.095 inch t0.005 inch.
AWWA C606; Gustin-Bacon "No. 100
Standard" or Victaulic
"Style 770.
Dresser "Style 38" or Smith -
Blair 'Type 411 Flexible
Coupling". (Gasketing for air
piping shall be rated for
225° F.)
Dresser 'Style 62' or Smith -
Blair "Type 415" (Gasketing for
air piping shall be rated for
225° F.)
Tempflex 'Model H Expansion
Compensators' for 3 inch or
smaller; Tempflex "Low Pressure
High Corr Expansion Joints" with
flanged ends and stainless steel
bellows for 4 inch or larger.
Iron -Pipe -Size Brass Pipe
Pipe
ASTM B43, red brass, regular
weight and extra strong.
Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.15, Class 125.
Unions
Fed Spec WW-U-516, Class 125.
Copper Tubing
Water Tubing
_
Hard Drawn
ASTM B88, Type L.
Soft Annealed
ASTM B88, Type K; cadmium plated
where used for chlorine service.
Instrument Tubing
Material
ASTM B280, soft annealed.
Dimensions
ASTM B280.
Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration (ACR)
Tubing
Materials'
ASTM B280, hard drawn.
Dimensions
ASTM B280.
Fittings
y
Flared
ANSI/ASME B16.26.
Solder -Joint
ANSI B16.18 or ANSI/ASME B16.22.
Compression
Brass; Crawford "Swagelok" or _
Parker Hannifin "CPI".
Insulating
-Threaded
Dielectric steel pipe nipple,
ASTM A53, Schedule 40, poly-
propylene lined, zinc plated; ^—
Perfection Corp. "Clearflow
Fittings".
Flanged.
Epco "Dielectric Flange Unions"
or Central Plastics "Insulating
Flange Unions".
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
--
(17578 ) -4-
Solder
Soldering Flux
Brazing Filler Metal
Brazing Flux
Expansion Joints
PVC Pipe, Schedule 40
Pipe
Fittings
Solvent Cement
Primer
PVC Pipe, Schedule 80
Pipe .
Fittings
Flanges
Flange Bolts and
Nuts
Flat Washers
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -5-
Solid-wire, ASTM B32, Alloy
Grade Sb5, (95-5).
Paste type, Fed Spec 0-F-506,
Type I, Form A.
AWS A5.8, BCuP-5; Engelhard
"Silvaloy 15". Goldsmith
"GB-15", or Handy & Harman
"Sil-Fos".
Paste type, Fed Spec 0-F-499,
Type B.
Templex "Model HB Expansion
Compensators•, with copper tube
ends.
ASTM D1785, Cell Classification
12454-B, bearing NSF seal.
ASTM D2466, Cell Classification
12454-B, bearing NSF seal.
ASTM D2564.
ASTM F656.
ASTM D1785, Cell Classifica-
tion 12454-B, bearing NSF seal.
ASTM D2464 or D2467, Cell
Classification 12454-B, bearing
NSF seal.
Diameter and drilling shall
conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5,
Class 150.
ASTM A307, Grade B, galvanized,
length such that, after
installation, the bolts will
project 1/8 to 3/6 inch beyond
outer face of the nut.
ANSI B18.22.1, plain,
galvanized.
r--
Flange Gaskets
Solvent Cement
Primer
Expansion Joints
Polyvinylidene Fluoride Pipe
Distilled Water Service
Pipe
Fittings
Polyethylene Gas Pipe
Pipe
Material
Fittings
Material
Metallic Lines Tape
Glass -Lined Steel Pipe
Pipe
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -6-
Full face, 1/8 inch thick,
chemical -resistant elastomeric
material suitable for the speci-
fied service.
ASTM D2564.
ASTM F656.
Edlon "Thermo -molded TFE" or
Resistoflex "Style R6905" molded
expansion joint.
(PVDF)
SDR 21, ASTM D-638, Schedule 80.
ASTM D-2657, socket fusion
style.
ASTM D2513, IPS, SDR11; Plexco
"Yellow Stripe PE3408 Gas Pipe".
ASTM D3350, Cell Classification
PE345434C.
ASTM D2683, socket type or ASTM
D3261, butt heat fusion type,
with wall thickness same as
pipe.
ASTM D1248, Type III, Class C,
Grade P34.
Printed polyethylene tape with
metallic core, color to conform
to APWA and AASHTO standards.
Shallow bury above all below
grade natural gas piping.
Standard weight steel pipe with
flanged ends and Ceramic Coating
"Non -Stick Glass Lining" or
Vitco "SG-14 Glass Lined Pipe".
Fittings Cast iron as specified in the
cast iron pipe section, with
Ceramic Coating 'Non -Stick Glass
Lining' or Vitco "SG-14 Glass
Lined Pipe'.
Lining Two -coat system applied over
blast cleaned surface; ground
and finish coats separately
fired; finished lining thickness
not less than 8 mils, Mohs Hard-
ness 5 to 6, density 2.5 to
3.O g/cm3 as determined by
ASTM D792.
Stainless Steel Pipe, Schedule 10S
Pipe
Fittings
Flanged
Backing Flanges
Flange Bolts and Nuts
Flange Gaskets
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -7
ASTM A312 or ASTM A778,
Grade TP304L.
ASTM A774, wrought stainless
steel, Grade TP304L, with angle
face rings and stainless steel
backing flanges.
AISI Type 304 stainless steel
plate, with ANSI/ASME B16.5,
Class 150 diameter and drilling;
with the following thickness:
Nominal Flange
Pipe Size Thickness
inches inches
1/2 - 8 1/2
10 - 14 5/8
16 - 18 3/4
20 - 30 1
36 1-1/4
ASTM A307, galvanized, length
such that, after installation,
bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8
inch beyond outer face of nut.
Flexitalic 'Style CG', spiral
wound, AISI Type 304 stainless
steel, non -asbestos filler,
3/16 inch nominal thickness,
with compression ring 1/8 inch
thick to match required flange
dimensions.
Stainless Steel Tubing
Tubing
ASTM A269, seamless, Grade
TP316, annealed, max hardness
Rockwell B80; with the following
min wall thickness:
Tube OD Wall Thickness
inches inch
1/4 - 3/8 0.065
1/2 - 7/8 0.083
1 - 2 0.109
Fittings
Compression type, AISI Type 316
stainless steel; Crawford
"Swagelok", or Parker Hannifin
"CPI" or "Ferulok".
Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Pipe and Fittings
Service Weight
ASTM A74, service weight.
Hubless
CISPI 301.
Jointing Materials
Lead
Fed Spec QQ-C-40, Type I.
Packing
Hooven & Allison "Sure Seal
White Oakum" or Sealite "White
Oakum Caulking Yarn 110".
Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C564.
Acid Waste Pipe and Fittings
High Silicon Iron
Duriron "Durichlor 51
Superchlor"; with manufacturer's
fittings, below or above grade.
Polypropylene
Orion, Sloane "GSR Fuseal", or
Enfield; with manufacturer's
standard fusion welded or
mechanical joints, above grade.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -8-
Tempered Glass Owens-Illinois "Kimax Tempered
Glass Drainline"; with manufac-
turer's drainline couplings,
above grade.
Pipe Insulation
Hot/Cold and Vacuum
Piping
Aluminum Jacketed
Heat Tape
Watertight/Dusttight
Pipe Sleeves
Anti -Seize Thread Lubricant
Teflon Thread Sealer
Teflon ThreadTape
Pipe Sleeve Sealant
Protective Coatings
Plastic -Coated Pipe
Tape Wrap
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -9
Fed Spec HH-I-573; tubular,
closed cell elastomeric, at
least 3/4 inch thick.
As indicated above, but with
0.016 inch thick fabricated
aluminum jacket.
Raychem Chemelex "Auto -Trace,
5BTU1" with "AMCFS" thermostat.
0-Z Electrical Manufacturing
"Thruwall" and "Floor Seals', or
Thunderline, "Link -Seals"; with
modular rubber sealing elements,
nonmetallic pressure plates, and
galvanized bolts.
Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane
"Thred Gard Nickel", Never-Seez
"Pure Nickel Special", or
Permatex "Nickel Anti -Seize'.
Paste type; John Crane "JC-30",
Hercules "Real -tuff", or
Permatex "Thread Sealant with
Teflon".
John Crane 'Thred-Tape" or
Hercules "Tape Dope".
Polysulfide or urethane as
specified in the caulking
section.
Plexco 'Plexguard Coating". The
products of other manufacturers
will not be acceptable.
ANSIJAWWA C209, except single
ply tape thickness shall not be
less than 30 mils; Protecto Wrap
1200" or Tapecoat "CT".
Primer As recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
Coal Tar Coating MIL-C-18480; Kop-Coat
"Bitumastic No. 50" or Tnemec
"46-450 Heavy Tnemecol".
3. SERVICE AND TYPE REQUIREMENTS. Except as otherwise specified, pipe
and tubing shall conform to the general requirements which follow. Pipe
materials for service conditions not listed shall be as specified in
other sections, as indicated on the drawings or, in the absence of any
definite requirement, as determined by the Engineer. —
Where optional pipe materials or fittings are specified for a particular
service, either may be provided at the Contractor's option. —
For all services where ASTM A53 steel pipe is required, the use of
ASTM A106 steel pipe of equivalent wall thickness will be acceptable.
3.01. Galvanized Steel Pipe.
a. ASTM A53 Standard Weight Type E with Threaded Cast Iron
Fittings.
Drain piping from equipment. —
All pipe sleeves except where plastic sleeves are required.
b. ASTM A53 Standard Weight Tvpe E with Threaded Malleable Iron
Fittings. All 2 inch and smaller piping for the following
services:
Sump pump discharge piping.
Filtrate piping.
C. ASTM A53 Standard Weight Tvpe E with Cast Iron Flanged
Fittings. All 2-1/2 inch and larger piping for the following
services:
Sump pump discharge piping in interior locations.
All piping not otherwise specified.
3.02. Black Steel Pipe.
a. ASTM A53 Standard Weight Tvpe E with Malleable Iron Fittings.
All 2 inch and smaller piping for the following services:
Natural gas piping inside or outside structures or buildings.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -10
b. ASTM A53 Standard Weight Tope E with Forged Steel Socket -
Welding Fittings. All 2 inch and smaller piping for the
following services:
Natural gas piping in buried locations.
Compressed air piping (optional).
C. ASTM �53. Standard Weight Tvpe E with Buttwelding Fittings.
All 2-1J2 inch (unless otherwise noted) and larger piping for
the following services:
Compressed air supply piping.
d. ASTM A53 Extra Strong Type S with Forged Steel Threaded
Fittings. All 2 inch and smaller piping for the following
services:
All piping not otherwise specified.
3.03. Regular Weight Iron -Pipe -Size Brass Pipe. Gauge piping for the
following services:
Cold water piping.
Seal water piping.
Compressed air piping (optional).
3.04. Copper Water Tubing.
a. Soft Annealed with Flared Fittings.
contact with earth or submerged.
To be used for piping in
2 inch and smaller cold water supply piping.
Compressed air supply and pneumatic signal piping.
Differential pressure lines from flowmeters to transmitters.
All instrument piping not otherwise specified.
b. Hard Drawn with Solder -Joint Fittings. To be used for 3 inch
and smaller piping inside structures or buildings.
Cold water supply piping.
Hot water supply piping.
Differential pressure lines from flowmeters to transmitters.
Seal crater piping.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
1 (17578 ) -11
Compressed air supply piping.,
Laboratory vacuum piping.
3.05. Copper ACR Tubing with Brazed Fittings..
Refrigerant piping.
3.06. PVC Pine, Schedule 40.
a. With Solvent Welded or Fusion Joints.
Odor control piping below grade.
3.07. PVDF Chemical Service Pine.
a. With Socket Fusion Joints.
Distilled water piping.
3.08. PVC Pine, Schedule 80.
a. With Solvent Welded Joints.
Chlorine solution piping.
b. With Flanged or Union Joints. Flanges or unions shall be
provided at each valve, device, and item of equipment to
facilitate disassembly. All other connections, including
joining of flanges or unions to pipe, shall be solvent welded
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
3.09. Polyethylene Gas Pine.
a. Four Inch and Smaller with Socket Fusion Fittings.
Natural gas piping in buried locations, where permitted by the
Engineer.
b. Six Inch and Larger with Butt Fusion Fittings.
Natural gas piping in buried locations, where permitted by the
Engineer.
3.10. Glass -Lined Steel Pine.
Scum piping.
All sludge piping except piping conveying activated sludge from
-final settling basins at Plant No. 3.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -12-
'i
3.11. Stainless Steel Pipe, Schedule 10S.
a. With Flanged Fittings.
Aeration drop pipes.
3.12. Stainless Steel Tubing with Compression Fittings.
Laboratory gas tubing.
3.13. Cast Iron Soil Pipe.
` All 6 inch and smaller drainage piping buried beneath floors or
underground, unless otherwise specified.
All 6 inch and smaller drainage, waste, and vent piping inside
structures, unless otherwise specified.
3.14. Acid Waste Pipe.
All drainage and vent piping from laboratory sinks and troughs, to
the extent indicated on the drawings.
Other locations indicated on the drawings.
3.15. Cast Iron Pipe. (See Section 15061).
Buried 4-inch nonpotable water piping.
3.16. Pipe Insulation. Pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, and other
accessories in the following services shall be insulated:
All domestic hot water piping.
Cold water lines and roof drainlines which pass through spaces
above suspended ceilings or are exposed over equipment, electrical
panels, or cabinets.
Vacuum pump discharge piping, including silencers.
All roof drain lines concealed in exterior walls.
All exposed exterior nonpotable and potable water piping (10-inch
and smaller) with aluminum jacketing.
Insulation for refrigeration piping is covered in the heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning section.
�., 3.17. Heat Tape. All potable and nonpotable water piping (10-inch and
smaller) in exterior locations shall be heat taped.-
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060'
(17578 ) -13
4. PIPE JOINTS. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in
accordance with the requirements which follow.
4.01. Threaded. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT,
and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three
threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation.
Ends of pipe shall be reamed, after threading and before assembly, to
remove all burrs.
Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with teflon thread
tape applied to all male threads. Threaded joints in stainless steel
piping shall be made up with teflon thread sealer and teflon thread tape
applied to all male threads. At the option of the Contractor, threaded
joints in other piping may be made up with teflon thread tape, thread
sealer, or a suitable joint compound. Thread tape and joint compound or
sealers shall not be used in threaded joints which are to be seal
welded.
4.02. Compression. Ends of tubing shall be cut square and all burrs
shall be removed. The tubing end shall be -fully inserted into the
compression fitting and the nut shall be tightened not less than
1-1/4 turns and not more than 1-1/2 turns past fingertight, or as .-
recommended by the fitting manufacturer, to produce a leaktight, torque -
free connection.
4.03. Flared. Ends of annealed copper tubing shall be cut square and _
all burrs shall be removed prior to flaring. Ends shall be uniformly
flared without scratches or grooves. Fittings shall be tightened as
required to produce leaktight connections.
4.04. Soldered and Brazed. Where solder fittings are specified for
lines smaller than 2 inches, joints may be soldered or brazed at the
option of the Contractor. Joints in 2 inch and larger copper tubing
shall be brazed. Joints in copper chlorine tubing and refrigerant
piping shall be brazed; solder will not be acceptable.
Surfaces to be joined shall be thoroughly cleaned with flint paper and
coated with a thin film of flux. At each joint, tubing shall enter to
the full depth of the fitting socket.
Care shall be taken to avoid overheating the metal or flux. Each joint
shall be uniformly heated to the extent that filler metal will melt on
contact.. While the joint is still hot, surplus filler metal and flux
shall be removed with a rag or brush.
4.05. Solvent Welded. All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing
operations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and
ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to the dimensions
recommended by the manufacturer. Newly assembled joints shall be suit-
ably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the set time
recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure testing of solvent welded
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -14-
r
r-r
piping systems shall not be performed until the applicable curing time,
set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D2855, has elapsed.
4.06. Epoxy and Adhesive Bonded. All joint preparation, cutting, and
jointing operations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommen-
dations. Adhesive shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. After joining, either the pipe or the
fitting shall be rotated approximately one-half turn to uniformly
distribute adhesive. A slight fillet of adhesive at the bond line is
desirable, but all excess adhesive shall be wiped off immediately.
Newly assembled joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to pre-
vent movement during the curing period recommended by the manufacturer.
4.07. Heat Fusion Bonded Joints. All joint preparation, cutting,
jointing equipment, and jointing operations shall comply with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The heating time, temperature, pressure
applied to the joint during bonding, and cooling time shall consistently
produce leaktight joints as strong as the pipe being joined.
4.08. Flanged. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to
slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but not so tight as to
fracture or distort the flanges. A plain washer shall be installed
under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges. Anti -
seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all
stainless steel bolts during assembly. Connecting flanges shall have
similar facings, i.e., flat or raised face.
4.09.. Welded. Welding shall conform to the specifications and recom-
mendations contained in the 'Code for Pressure Piping', ANSI B31.1.
4.10. Grooved Couplings. Grooves for grooved couplings shall be cut
with a specially designed grooving tool. Grooves cut in steel pipe
shall conform to flexible grooving dimensions as set forth in AWWA C606,
and shall be clean and sharp without burrs or check marks.
4.11. Push -on. Gasket installation and other jointing operations shall
be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Each
spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly. All joint
surfaces shall be lubricated with a heavy vegetable soap solution
immediately before the joint is completed. Lubricant shall be suitable
for use in potable water, shall be stored in closed containers, and
shall be kept clean.
4.12. Lead. Packing for lead joints in cast iron soil pipe shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The
joint space between the packing and the face of the bell of each joint
shall be filled in one continuous pour with lead. After the lead has
cooled, the joint shall be caulked until thoroughly compacted and water-
tight.
4.13. Rubber Gasketed. When rubber gasketed joints are used for hub
and spigot type cast iron soil pipe, spigot ends shall be plain, without
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
15060
-15
beads. Cut ends of all pipe shall be cut square and all burrs removed.
Spigot ends shall be coated with a lubricant recommended by the gasket
manufacturer and fully seated in the gasket. Clamps for hubless cast
iron soil pipe shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
4.14. Other Pipe Joints. Coupled joints in tempered glass pipe and
other proprietary type joints shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5. PIPE SLEEVES. Piping passing through concrete or masonry shall be
installed through sleeves installed before the concrete is placed or
when masonry is laid. Pipe sleeves installed through floors provided
with a special finish, such as ceramic or vinyl composition tile, shall
be flush with the finished floor surface and shall be provided with
nickel or chromium plated floor plates.In all other locations where
pipes pass through floors, pipe sleeves shall project not less than one
inch nor more than 2 inches above the floor surface, with the projection
uniform in each floor area. In the case of insulated pipes, the insula-
tion shall extend through pipe sleeves. Where the drawings indicate
future installation of pipe, sleeves shall be provided and the ends
sealed with suitable plastic caps or plugs.
Holes drilled with a suitable rotary drill will be considered in lieu of
sleeves for piping which passes through interior walls and through
floors having special finish.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all pipes passing through
walls or slabs which have one side in contact with earth or exposed to
the weather shall be sealed watertight with special rubber gasketed
sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber.sealing
elements.
6. PIPE INSTALLATION. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indi-
cated on the drawings, or, in the absence of detail piping arrangement,
in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
The water, gas, and air supply piping at each fixture or unit of equip-
ment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, whether indicated
on the drawings or not, which will permit isolation and disconnection of
each item without disturbing the remainder of the system. Air supply
piping shall be provided with sectionalizing valves and valved air inlet
connections as required for isolation of portions of the system for
periodic testing. The natural gas supply line to each building shall be
provided with a shutoff valve and union located above grade immediately
outside the building. A capped drip leg shall be provided at the bottom
of the vertical riser of natural gas supply piping adjacent to each gas -
fired -appliance.
A union shall be provided within 2 feet of each threaded end valve
unless there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the
valve. Unions shall also be provided in piping at _locations adjacent to
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -16
devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and at
locations required by the drawings or specifications.
Pipe shall be cut from measurements taken at the site and not.from the
drawings. All necessary provisions shall be taken in laying out piping
to provide throughout for expansion and contraction. Piping shall not
obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of contact
with building construction so as not to transmit noise resulting from
expansion.
All air piping shall be graded to points of drainage collection where
drip legs and drain valves shall be provided. Air piping shall be sized
for the service conditions with the following minimum sizes:
Service Min Size
Air signal 1/4 inch OD
Power air 1/2 inch OD
Air supply 1/2 inch OD
Buried piping 3/4 inch'
Watersupply piping within structures shall be arranged, and.facilities
provided, for complete drainage. All piping serving metering equipment
shall be uniformly graded so that air traps are eliminated and complete
venting is provided.
r Stuffing box leakage from water sealed pumps shall be piped to the
nearest point of drainage collection.
rTaps for pressure gauge connections on the suction and discharge of
pumping units shall be provided with a nipple and a ball type shutoff
valve.
[a
Drilling and tapping of pipe walls for installation of pressure gauges
or switches will not be permitted.
In all piping except air and natural gas piping, insulating fittings .
shall be provided to prevent contact of dissimilar metals wherever
copper tubing or fittings or stainless steel pipe, tubing, or fittings
are connected to iron or steel pipe or fittings.
Branch connections in horizontal runs of air, vacuum, and natural gas
piping shall be made from the top of the pipe.
Buried PVC piping shall be 'snaked' in the trench and shall be kept as
cool as possible during installation. PVC pipe shall be kept shaded and
shall be covered with backfill immediately after installation...
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -17-
7. CHEMICAL PIPING. All chemical piping shall be installed so that
lines are readily accessible for cleaning. At changes in direction in
all chemical piping except chlorine piping, tees shall be provided with
extra openings plugged to facilitate cleaning. Teflon thread tape or
teflon thread sealer shall be applied to the threads of all plugs so
that they can be easily removed. At each point where hose or reinforced
plastic tubing is connected to rigid piping, a quick -disconnect coupling
shall be provided.
Chlorine gas and chlorine vent piping shall be installed so that liquid
traps are avoided. The open end of each vent line shall elbow down and
shall be provided with a corrosion -resistant insect screen.
8. INSULATION. Pipe insulation shall be neatly installed by skilled
workmen. Piping shall be clean and dry and shall have been tested
before insulation is applied.
End joints shall be tightly butted. Seams and joints shall be held by
the manufacturer's standard adhesive. Jacket laps shall be neatly
pasted in place. All joints shall be pointed with insulating cement.
Fittings, flanges, and valves shall be insulated with molded insulation
or insulating cement of the same thickness as the pipe insulation.
Hangers shall permit insulation to ;-ss through and suitable saddles
shall be provided to prevent the weight of the piping from being sup-
ported by{the insulation.
9. PROTECTIVE COATING. Black steel pipe in buried locations shall have
exteriorsurfaces protected with a shop -applied plastic coating.
Extra strong black steel pipe in buried locations shall have exterior -
surfaces protected by either a shop -applied plastic coating or a shop or
field applied tape wrap. -
All fittings, couplings, specials, and other exterior surfaces of buried
piping not protected with plastic coating shall be tape wrapped in the
field. All surfaces to be tape wrapped shall be thoroughly cleaned and
primed in accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations
immediately before wrapping. Tape wrapping shall be two-ply (half -lap)
application or as required to provide a total installed tape thickness
of not less than 60 mils. Joints in plastic -coated pipe shall be
cleaned, primed, and tape wrapped after installation.
Joints in galvanized steel piping in underground locations shall be
field -painted with two coats of coal tar coating.
9.01. Inspection. All shop -applied plastic coatings and tape wrap on
pipe or fittings shall be inspected for holidays and other defects after
receipt of the pipe or fitting on the job and immediately before instil-
lation. All field -applied tape wrap on pipe, pipe joints, fittings, and
valves shall be inspected for holidays and other defects following com-
pletion of wrapping. Inspection of plastic coatings after installation
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -18-
ri,
of the pipe or fitting in the trench shall be made where, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the coating may have been damaged during installation.
Holidays and defects disclosed by inspection shall be repaired in
accordance with the recommendations of the coating or tape wrap manu-
facturer, as applicable.
Inspection shall be made using an electrical holiday detector. The
detector and inspection procedures shall conform to the requirements of
Section 4.4 of ANSI/AWWA C209.
9.02. Handling and Storage. Pipe and fittings shall be handled and
stored in a manner which will ensure installation in sound, undamaged
condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to
the protective coating and shall include the use of end hooks, padded
calipers, and nylon or similar fabric slings with spreader bars. Bare
cables, chains, or metal bars shall not be used. Coated pipe shall be
stored off the ground on wide padded skids. Whenever the storage period
on the job exceeds 30 days, plastic -coated pipe shall be covered or
otherwise protected from exposure to sunlight.
10. CLEANING. The inside of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be
smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and
other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be
thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, before being
placed in service.
Metal chlorine piping shall be cleaned as recommended by the chlorine
feed system supplier. All surfaces which may come in contact with
chlorine gas shall be thoroughly dry and free of oil or grease before
placing in service. Valves shall be disassembled and cleaned with a
suitable solvent. The recommended cleaning procedures shall be sub-
mitted for review in accordance with the submittals section.
Tin -lined copper tubing for distilled water distribution shall be
flushed and cleaned with distilled water in accordance with the tubing
manufacturer's recommendations.
11. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING. All specified tests shall be made by
and at the expense of the Contractor in the presence, and to the satis-
faction, of the Engineer. Each piping system shall be tested for at
least one hour with no loss of pressure. Piping shall be tested at the
following pressures:
Service Test Pressure
Water supply 125 psi
Seal water 100 psi
Gas supply 1-1/2 times working
pressure but not
less than 50 psi
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -19-
Test Medium
water
water
compressed air
Service
Compressed air
supply and
signal, vacuum
Aeration air
Other piping
Test Pressure
1-1/2 times working
pressure but not
less than 50 psi
15 psi
1-1/2 times working
pressure but not
less than 50 psi
Test Medium
zero humidity air
or nitrogen
zero humidity air or
nitrogen
suitable fluid or
gas; for distilled
water piping, dis-
tilled water or
filtered oil -free
compressed air may be
used
Compressed air or pressure gas shall not be used to test plastic piping
unless specifically recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical
indicator, or other positive and accurate method acceptable to the
Engineer. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be
connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the
specified test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch
lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures.
After completion of the specified pressure tests, all chlorine gas
piping shall -be tested for leakage using chlorine gas under operating
pressures. Piping shall be thoroughly clean and dry before admitting
chlorine gas into the system. Chlorine shall be slowly admitted to the
piping system. Leakage shall be checked with a swab soaked in aqua
ammonia solution and waved in the vicinity of each fitting. Ammonia
solution shall not be applied to the fittings. Formation of white fumes
will be evidence of leaks. All chlorine gas shall be purged from the
line before leaks are repaired.
Drainage and venting systems shall be tested by filling with water to
the level of the highest vent stack. Openings shall be plugged as
necessary. Each system shall hold the water for 30 minutes without any
drop in the water level.
All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appli-
ances and devices, shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and
at the expense of the Contractor and at such time as directed by the
Engineer.
All joints in piping shall be tight and free from leaks. All joints
which are found to leak, by observation or during any specified test,
shall be repaired, and tests repeated.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -20-,
12. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts
or drawings covering the following items furnished under this section
shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section:
Acid waste pipe and fittings.
Cleaning procedure for metal chlorine piping.
Expansion joints for copper, steel, and PVC pipe.
Flange gaskets.
Glass -lined pipe and fittings.
Grooved and mechanical couplings.
Insulating (dielectric) couplings, threaded and flanged.
Pipe insulation.
Polyethylene gas pipe and fittings.
Polyvinylidene fluoride pipe and fittings.
PVC pipe and fittings.
Watertight/dusttight pipe sleeves.
Written verification of temperature ratings for flange gaskets,
pipe sleeve modular seals, and mechanical couplings gasketing for
all air piping.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15060
(17578 ) -21-
INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
DESCRIPTION SHEET
This page describes the information that is contained in the Input/Output listing on the following pages.
The following explain the data fields in the I/O list that are common to both Analog and Digital points
1) Processor -Rack Number: This column defines the DCU/RTU/Processor and local or remote rack as defined
by the designer.
2) Reference Number: This column contains the reference number for the I/O point.
for each point as follows:
I/O Type: (AI) - Analog Input
(AO) - Analog Output
(DI) - Digital Input
(DO) - Digital Output
3) Field Device Number: (HS-001) - This column identifies the point as listed on
Schedule drawings and shown on
the MID drawings.
4) Description: This column contains a description of the point.
The following explain the data fields presented in the Analog I/O reports only.
The number is unique
the Instrument Device
1) Signal Range: (4-20 MA) - This column lists the IJO signal levels and units for the field device
2) Process Range: (0-10 MGD) - This column list the I/O process levels and units for the field device
* Note - Loop power for 4-20 mA signals will be powered from power supplies installed in the I/O cabinets
unless otherwise denoted in the I/O list.
The following explain the data fields presented in the Digital I/O reports only.
1) Field Contact Closed: This column describes the state of the I/O point when the field contact is closed.
2) Main: This column designates whether the digital output I/O point is maintained or momentary.
A <Y> designates a maintained output. An <N> or blank designates a momentary output.
3) Signal Level: (120 VAC) - This column gives the I/O point voltage level.
t.
Page No.
1
09/29/92
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
LISTING
PROC REF
FIELD
SIGNAL
PROCESS
RACK N0.
-
DEVICE
—
DESCRIPTION-��
RANGE
RANGE _- M_ -REMARKS
w_____-
•• PROCESSOR/RACK
NUMBER: 10/
10/ AI005
FIT-2101
610-TOYER
FILTER NO.1 RECIRCULATION FLOW
4-20 MA
0-6 MGD
10/ AI006
FIT-2102
8I0-TOWER
FILTER NO.2 RECIRCULATION FLOW
4-20 MA
0-6 MGD
10/ AI007
LY-2105A
BIO-TOWER
FILTER RECIRC PUMP WETWELL LEVEL
4-20 MA
0-12 FT
10/ AI020
SPARE
4-20 MA
i
t
1-
r
k
r
rPage No. 1
09/29/92
L
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
PROC
REF
FIELD
CONTACT
A
SIGNAL
RACK
NO.
DEVICE
DESCRIPTION
CLOSED
I
LEVEL
aw
r
_
N
����---
-REMARKS -
--------- -----
PROCESSOR/RACK
NUMBER: 10/
10/
01001
HS-2201-1
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
PUMP IP-2201
10/
DIO02
HS-2201-2
8IO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
PUMP IP-2202
10/
01003
MS-2201-3
610-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
PUMP IP-2203
10/
DIO04
HS-2201-4
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
PUMP IP-2204
10/
DIO05
HS-2201-5
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
PUMP IP-2205
�..
10/
DIO06
LSL-2104
610-TOWER RECIRC PUMP WETWELL LEVEL LOW
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
}
10/
01007
LSHH-2104
5I0-TOWER RECIRC PUMP WETWELL LEVEL HI -HI
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
F
10/
.0I008
LSLL-2104
BIO-TOWER RECIRC PUMP WETWELL LEVEL LOW -LOW ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO09
SEE REMARK
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE COLL. SC-2101 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
10/
01010
SEE REMARK
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE COLL. SC-2102 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
10/
DI011
SEE REMARK
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE COLL. SC-2401 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
10/
01012
SEE REMARK
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE COLL. SC-2402 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
10/
DIO33
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SCUM PUMP SP-2101 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO34
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2101 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO35
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2102 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO36
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2103 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO37
MCC
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2201 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
01038
MCC
8I0-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2202 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
l
10/
DIO39
MCC
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-22M STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO40
MCC
BIO-TOYER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2204 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI041
MCC
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2205 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI042
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SCUM PUMP SP-2401 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI043
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE PUMP UP-2401 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
ram.
10/
DI044
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2402 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
01045
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2403 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO56
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SCUM PUMP SP-2101 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO57
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2101 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
Page No. 2
09/29/92
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
PROC REF FIELD CONTACT A SIGNAL
RACK NO. DEVICE DESCRIPTION CLOSED I LEVEL
10/
DI058
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2102 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO59
MCC
PLANT 2 PRI. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2103 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI060
MCC
610-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2201 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
01061
MCC
8I0-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2202 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI062
MCC
8I0-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2203 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO63
MCC
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2204 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
D1064
MCC
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2205 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI065
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SCUM PUMP SP-2401 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI066
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2401 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI067
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2402 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DIO68
MCC
PLANT 2 SEC. SLUDGE PUMP WP-2403 TRIP-
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI117
PLANT 2 PRI SLUDGE PUMP STATION SMOKE ALARM
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI118
PLANT 2 PRI SL.OGE PMP STATION AIR FLOW LOST
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI119
PLANT 2 SEC SLUDGE PUMP STATION SMOKE ALARM
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI120
PLANT 2 SEC SLDGE PMP STATION AIR FLOW LAST
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI121
MCC
PLANT 2 SUMP PUMP SU-2101A TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI122
MCC
PLANT 2 SUMP PUMP SU-21018 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI123
MCC
PLANT 2 SUMP PUMP SU-2101A STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
DI124
MCC
PLANT 2 SUMP PUMP SU-21010 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
10/
D0001
HS-2201-1
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2201 START
START
Y
120 VAC
10/
D0002
HS-2201-2
BIO-TOWER IMFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2202 START
START
Y
120 VAC
10/
00003
HS-2201-3
610-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2203 START
START
Y
120 VAC
10/
D0004
HS-2201-4
BIO-TOYER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2204 START
START
Y
120 VAC
10/
D0005
HS-2201-5
BIO-TOYER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2205 START
START
Y
120 VAC
10/
00017
HS-2201-1
SIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2201 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
10/
D0018
HS-2201-2
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2202 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
10/
00019
HS-2201-3
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2203 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
10/
D0020
HS-2201-4
BIO-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2204 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
10/
00021
HS-2201-5
610-TOWER INFL/RECIRC PUMP IP-2205 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
REMARKS
Page No. 1
09/29/92
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
PROC REF FIELD SIGNAL PROCESS
RACK NO. DEVICE DESCRIPTION RANGE RANGE REMARKS
" PROCESSOR/RACK NUMBER: 11/
11/
AI001
FIT-0001
EFFLUENT
FLOW TO LLAS
4-20 MA
11/
AI002
FIT-0002
EFFLUENT
FLOW TO SPS
4-20 MA
11/
AI003
FIT-0003
EFFLUENT
FLOW TO HLAS
4-20 MA
11/
AI0%
FIT-0004
EFFLUENT
FLOW TO LLAS
4-20 MA
11/
AI021
LIT-4003
EFFLUENT
PUMP WETWELL LEVEL
4-20 MA
0-10 FT
11/
AI022
ZT-0012
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-005 POSITION
4-20 MA
0-100% OPEN
11/
AI023
ZT-0011
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-006 POSITION
4-20 MA
0-10= OPEN
11/
AI024
FIT-=
EFFLUENT
FLOW TO HOLDING POND
4-20 MA
0-5 MGD
11/
AI025
NOT USED
4-20 MA
11/
AI026
ZT-0010
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-010 POSITION
4-20 MA
0-1= OPEN
11/
AI027
ZT-0009
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-813 POSITION
4-20 MA
0-100% OPEN
11/
A0030
HS-0009
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-813 OPEN
4-20 MA
0-100% OPEN
1,
Page No. 1
09/29/92
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
PROC REF FIELD CONTACT A SIGNAL
RACK NO. DEVICE DESCRIPTION CLOSED I LEVEL REMARKS
'" PROCESSOR/RACK NUMBER: 11/
11/
DID26
HS-4002-1
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4001 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI027
HS-4002-2
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4002 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI028
HS-4002-3
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4003 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO29
HS-4002-4
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4004 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIC30
HS-4002-5
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4005 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO31
LSH-4003
EFFLUENT
PUMP VETWELL LEVEL HIGH
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIC32
LSL-4003
EFFLUENT
PUMP WETYELL LEVEL LOW
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO46
MCC
NON POTABLE WATER PUMP NP-4001 STATUS'
RUNNING
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO47
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-<001 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120
VAC
11/
0I048
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4CM STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI049
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4003 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI050
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4004 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI051
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4005 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO69
MCC
NON POTABLE WATER PUMP NP-40DI TRIP
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
0I070
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4001 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI071
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4002 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIM
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4003 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO73
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4004 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
0I074
MCC
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4005 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120
VAC
11/
0I079
HS-0012
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-005 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
01080
HS-0015
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-003 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIO81
ZS-0015
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-003 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI082
ZS-0015
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-003 CLOSED
CLOSE
Y
120
VAC
11/
0I083
HS-0011
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-006 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DI084
HS-0007
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-007 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIM
ZS-0007
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-007 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120
VAC
11/
DIOB6
ZS-0007
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-007 CLOSED
CLOSE
Y
120
VAC
Page No. 2
09/29/92
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
PROC
REF
FIELD
CONTACT
A
SIGNAL
RACK
NO.
DEVICE
DESCRIPTION
CLOSED
I
LEVEL REMARKS
N
L
11/
DIO87
HS-0010
EFFLUENT
VALVE EV-010 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
11/
DIMS
HS-0008
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-817 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC EXISTING VALVE
11/
DIO89
MS-0009
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-813 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
L
L
11/
DI125
NOT USED
120 VAC
11/
DI126
NOT USED
120 VAC
11/
DI127
NOT USED
120 VAC
11/
DI128
NOT USED
120 VAC
11/
DI129
NOT USED
120 VAC
11/
DI130
NOT USED
120 VAC
r�
11/
DI131
ZS-0008
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-817 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120 VAC
11/
DI132
ZS-0008
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-817 CLOSED
CLOSED
Y
120 VAC
11/
D0009
HS-4002-1
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4001 START
START
N
120 VAC
11/
DO010
HS-4002-2
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4002 START
START
N
120 VAC
11/
D0011
HS-4002-3
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4003 START
START
N
120 VAC
11/
D0012
HS-4002-4
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4004 START
START
N
120 VAC
11/
D0013
HS-4002-5
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4005 START
START
N
120 VAC
r
11/
D0025
HS-4002-1
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4001 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
it
11/
D0026
HS-4002-2
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4002 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
11/
D0027
MS-4002-3
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4003 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
11/
D0028
HS-4002-4
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4004 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
11/
00029
HS-4002-5
EFFLUENT
PUMP EP-4005 STOP
STOP
N
120 VAC
11/
D0030
HS-0012
EFFLUENT
VALVE EV-005 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120 VAC
11/
D0031
HS-0012
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-005 CLOSE
CLOSE
Y
120 VAC
11/
D0032
HS-0015
EFFLUENT
VALVE EV-003 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120 VAC
C
11/
00033
HS-0015
EFFLUENT
VALVE OV-003 CLOSE
CLOSE
Y
120 VAC
11/
D0034
HS-0011
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-006 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120 VAC
11/
00035
HS-0011
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-006 CLOSE
CLOSE
Y
120 VAC
11/
00036
HS-0007
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-007 OPEN
OPEN
Y
120 VAC
11/
00037
HS-0007
EFFLUENT
VALVE BV-007 CLOSE
CLOSE
Y
120 VAC
F.
Page No. 3
09/29/92
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
PROC REF FIELD CONTACT A SIGNAL
RACK NO. DEVICE DESCRIPTION CLOSED I LEVEL REMARKS
N
11/ OPEN Y 120 VAC
CLOSE Y 120 VAC
OPEN Y 120 VAC EXISTING VALVE
CLOSE Y 120 VAC EXISTING VALVE
D0038
NS-0010
EFFLUENT
VALVE
BV-010
OPEN
11/
D0039
NS-0010
EFFLUENT
VALVE
BV-010
CLOSE
11/
D0040
NS-0008
EFFLUENT
VALVE
EV-817
OPEN
11/
D0041
NS-0008
EFFLUENT
VALVE
EV-817
CLOSE
Page No. 1
09/29/92
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
PROC
REF
FIELD
SIGNAL
PROCESS
RACK
NO.
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
RANGE
RANGE
-- PROCESSOR/RACK NUMBER: 12/
REMARKS
12/
AI008
FIT-3303-1 AERATION LINE 1A AIR FLOW
4-20 MA
SEE REMARKS 0-10,000 SCFM
12/
AI009
FIT-3303-2
AERATION LINE 1B/2A AIR FLOW
4-20 MA
SEE REMARKS 0-10,000 SCFM
12/
AI010
FIT-3303-3
AERATION LINE 2B/3A AIR FLOW
4-20 MA
SEE REMARKS 0-10,000 SCFM
12/
AI011
FIT-3303-4
AERATION LINE 3B AIR FLOW
4-20 MA
SEE REMARKS 0-10,000 SCFM
12/
AI012
AIT-3201-1
AERATION BASIN NO.1 DISSOLVED OXYGEN
4-20 MA
0-5 MG/L
12/
AI013
AIT-3201-2
AERATION BASIN NO.2 DISSOLVED OXYGEN
4-20 MA
0-5 MG/L
12/
AI014
AIT-3201-3
AERATION BASIN NO.3 DISSOLVED OXYGEN
4-20 MA
0-5 MG/L
12/
AI015
FIT-0006
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE RECIRCULATION FLOW
4-20 MA
12/
AI016
FIT-3307
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE FLOW TO WAS PUMPS
4-20 MA
EXISTING METER
12/
AI017
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 SPEED
4-20 MA
0-100% SPEED
12/
AI018
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3302 SPEED
4-20 MA
0-100% SPEED
12/
AI019
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3303 SPEED
4-20 MA
0-100% SPEED
12/
A0001
NIK-3301-1
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 SPEED CONTROL
4-20 MA
0-100% SPEED
12/
A0002
NIK-3301-2
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3302 SPEED CONTROL
4-20 MA
0-100% SPEED
12/
A0003
NIK-3301-3
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3303 SPEED CONTROL
4-20 MA
0-100% SPEED
Page No.
1
09/29/92
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
PROC
REF
FIELD
CONTACT
A
SIGNAL
RACK
NO.
DEVICE
DESCRIPTION
CLOSED
I
LEVEL
REMARKS
N-
----------
•• PROCESSOR/RACK NUMBER: 12/
12/
DIO13
SEE REMARK
PLANT 3 PRI. SLUDGE COLL. SC-3101 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
12/
DI014
SEE REMARK
PLANT 3 PRI. SLUDGE COLL. SC-3102 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
12/
DI015
SEE REMARK
PLANT 3 SEC. SLUDGE COLL. SC-3301 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
12/
DIO16
SEE REMARK
PLANT 3 SEC. SLUDGE COLL. SC-3302 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
SLUDGE COLL. CONTROLS
12/
DIO17
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DI018
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3302 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DI019
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP,-3303 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO20
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO21
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP,-3302 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO22
AFD
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3303 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO23
NS-3301-18
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO24
NS-3301-2B
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP,-3302 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO25
NS-3301-38
PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP,-3303 IN REMOTE
REMOTE
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO52
MCC
AERATION BLOWER EL-3201 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO53
MCC
AERATION BLOWER BL-�M STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO54
MCC
AERATION BLOWER BL-3203 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO55
MCC
AERATION BLOWER BL-3204 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DI075
MCC
AERATION BLOWER BL-3201 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DI076
MCC
AERATION BLOWER BL-3202 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO77
MCC
AERATION BLOWER EL-3203 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO78
MCC
AERATION BLOWER BL-:3204 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO90
MCC
PLANT 3 SLUDGE PUMP WP-3101 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO91
MCC
PLANT 3 SLUDGE PUMP WP-3102 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO92
MCC
PLANT 3 SLUDGE PUMP WP-3101 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO93
MCC
PLANT 3 SLUDGE PUMP WP-3102 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO94
MCC
PLANT 3 RAS PUMP RP-3301 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
12/
DIO95
MCC
PLANT 3 RAS PUMP RP-3302 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
Page No. 2
09/29/92
PROC REF FIELD
RACK NO. DEVICE
DESCRIPTION
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
12/ DIO96 MCC PLANT 3 RAS PUMP RP-3303 STATUS
12/ DIO97 MCC PLANT 3 RAS PUMP RP-3301 TRIP
12/ DI098 MCC PLANT 3 RAS PUMP RP-3302 TRIP
12/ DI099 MCC PLANT 3 RAS PUMP RP-3303 TRIP
12/ D0006 NS-3301-16 PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 START
12/ 00007 HS-3301-2B PLANT 3 WAS PUMP UP-3302 START
12/ D0008 MS-3301-3B PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-33M START
12/ 00014 UP-3001 GRAVITY BELT THICKENER RUNNING
12/ 0= 5 WP-3002 GRAVITY BELT THICKENER RUNNING
12/ D0016 WP-3003 GRAVITY BELT THICKENER RUNNING
12/ D0022 MS-3301-1B PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3301 STOP
12/ D0023 NS-3301-28 PLANT 3 WAS PUMP UP-3302 STOP
12/ 00024 NS-3301-38 PLANT 3 WAS PUMP WP-3303 STOP
M
CONTACT A SIGNAL
CLOSED I LEVEL
N ---
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
START
N
120 VAC
START
N
120 VAC
START
N
120 VAC
RUN PERMISS
Y
120 VAC
RUN PERMISS
Y
120 VAC
RUN PERMISS
Y
120 VAC
STOP
N
120 VAC
STOP
N
120 VAC
STOP
N
120 VAC
REMARKS
Page No. 1
09/29/92
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
PROC REF FIELD SIGNAL PROCESS
RACK NO. DEVICE DESCRIPTION RANGE RANGE
PROCESSOR/RACK NUMBER: 13/
13/ AI028 ZT-5001 DIGESTER NO.9 COVER POSITION
13/ AI029 LIT-5002 DIGESTER NO.9 LEVEL
13/ AI030 FIT-5003 DIGESTER TOTAL PRODUCED GAS FLOW
13/ AI031 FIT-5004 DIGESTER SLUDGE INFLUENT FLOW
REMARKS
4-20 MA 0-10 FT.
4-20 MA 0-15 FT.
4-20 MA SEE REMARKS 0-18,000 SCFM
4-20 MA
Page No. 1
09/29/92
PROC REF FIELD
RACK NO. DEVICE
•• PROCESSOR/RACK NUMBER: 13/
DESCRIPTION
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT LISTING
M
CONTACT A SIGNAL
CLOSED I LEVEL REMARKS
N
13/
DI100
MCC
GAS MIXING COMPRESSOR NO.9 TROUBLE
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI101
SEE RMKS
DIGESTER NO.9 GAS PRESSURE HIGH/LOW
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
PSH-5005 = PSL-5006
13/
DI102
MCC
HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.9 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI103
MCC
NOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.9 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI104
LSL-5009
BOILER EXPANSION TANK LEVEL LOW
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI105
SEE REMARK BOILER NO.9 ALARM
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
BOILER CONTROLS
13/
DI106
MCC
SLUDGE RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.9 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
13/
. DI107
MCC
SLUDGE RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.9 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI108
SEE "KS
DIGESTER NO.8 GAS PRESSURE HIGH/LOW
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
PSH-5007 Z PSL-5008
13/
DI109
MCC
GAS MIXING COMPRESSOR NO.8 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI110
MCC
SLUDGE RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.8 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI111
MCC
SLUDGE RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.8 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI112
SEE REMARK BOILER NO.8 ALARM
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
BOILER CONTROLS
13/
DIM
MCC
HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.8 STATUS
RUNNING
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI114
MCC
NOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMP NO.8 TRIP
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
DI115
LSL-5010
BOILER EXPANSION TANK LEVEL LOW
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
13/
01116
LSHH-5011
DIGESTER BUILDING SUMP FLOOD ALARM
ALARM
Y
120 VAC
Section 15061 - CAST IRON PIPE
1. SCOPE. This section covers cast iron pipe. Cast iron pipe shall be
furnished complete with all fittings, jointing materials, pipe hangers
and supports, anchors, encasement, and other necessary appurtenances.
Pipe shall be tested in accordance with the pipeline pressure and
leakage testing section.
All potable and nonpotable water pipe and effluent pump discharge
(smaller than 12-inch) exposed to exterior locations shall be heat
traced and insulated. Heat tape and insulation are covered in the
miscellaneous piping section.
Pipe hangers and supports are covered in the pipe supports section.
Cast iron soil pipe is covered in the miscellaneous piping section.
2. MATERIALS.
Pipe
Fittings
12 Inch and Smaller
14 Inch and Larger
Push -on Joints
Restrained Push -on Joints
Flanged Joints
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -1-
Ductile iron, ANSI/AWWA
C151/A21.51; thickness class as
listed in the table at the end
of this section.
ANSIJAWWA C110/A21.10, except
shorter laying lengths will be
acceptable. AWWA C153 ductile
iron fittings will be an accept-
able alternative for buried
fittings.
250 psi pressure rating.
150 psi pressure rating.
ANSIJAWWA C111/A21.11, except
gaskets shall be neoprene or
other synthetic rubber. Natural
rubber will not be acceptable.
American 'Flex -Ring", "Lok-Fast"
or 'Lok-Ring";_Clow "Super -
Lock'; U.S. Pipe "TR Flex'; or
Griffin "Snap-Lok". Use of set-
screws bearing on the pipe wall
will not be acceptable.
ANSI/AWWA C115JA21.15.
Flanges
Ductile iron, ANSI/AWWA
C115/A21.15, flat faced.
Bolts
ASTM A307, chamfered or rounded
ends projecting 1/4 to 1/2 inch
beyond outer face of nut.
Nuts
ASTM A307, hexagonal, ANSI/ASME
B18.2.2, heavy semifinished
pattern.
Gaskets
ASTM D1330,' Grade I rubber, full
face type, 1/8 inch thick.
Insulating Flanges
Flanges
Flanges as specified herein,
except bolt holes, shall be
enlarged as required to accept
bolt insulating sleeves.
Insulation Kits
As manufactured by PSI
Industries or Central Plastics.
Insulating
Type E, pyrox lE glass rein -
Gaskets
forced epoxy, 1/8 inch thick,
with Buna-N sealing element.
Bolt Insulating
Mylar 1/32 inch thick.
Sleeves
Insulating
Phenolic laminate, 1/8 inch
Washers
thick, one for each flange bolt.
Backing Washers
Steel, 1/8 inch thick, two for
each flange bolt.
Mechanical Joints
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, except
gaskets shall be neoprene or
other synthetic rubber. Natural
rubber will not be acceptable.
Wall Castings
Mechanical joint with water stop
and tapped holes; single casting
or fabricated ductile iron. All
holes shall be sized in accord-
ance with details on drawings
sheet M-4 and shall be provided
with removable plugs.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -2-
Mechanical Joints with Tie Rods
Tie Rods
Steel Pipe
Washers
Threaded Connections
Mechanical Couplings
Couplings
Gaskets
Grooved Couplings
Pipe Ends
Couplings
Flanged Coupling Adapters
Tapping Saddles
Shop Coating and Lining
Cement Mortar Lining
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -3-
See details on drawings sheet
M-4.
ASTM A307.
ASTM A53, standard weight.
ANSI B18.22.1, plain steel.
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT; provide
boss or tapping saddle wherever
wall thickness minus the foundry
tolerance at the tapped connec-
tion is less than that required
for 4-thread engagement as set
forth in Table A.1, Appendix A,
of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.
Dresser "Style 381, Smith -Blair
0441 or 411 Flexible Coupling",
or Romac "Style 5011; without
pipe stop.
Oil -resistant synthetic rubber.
ANSI/AWWA C606.
Grooved, with dimensions con-
forming to AWWA C606, Table 5,
for rigid joints.
Grinnell "Figure 7001", Gustin-
Bacon "No. 500 Gruvajoint", or
Victaulic "Style 31".
Smith-Blair"Type 912" or Romac
"Style FCA501% with anchor
studs, 12 inch and smaller;
Smith -Blair "Type 913" or Romac
Style FC4000, 14 inch and
larger.
Ductile iron, with steel straps
and rubber sealing gasket,
250 psi pressure rsting.
ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.
Polyethylene Lining
ASTM D1248, Class C, heat
bonded, 30 mil nominal thick-
ness, except min thickness shall
be not less than 25 mils.
Thickness may taper to not less
than 10 mils beginning 4 inches
from the end of pipe or
fittings.
Glass Lining
Two -coat system applied over
blast -cleaned surface; ground
and finish coats separately
fired; finished lining thickness
not less than 8 mils, Mohs'
Hardness 5 to 6, density 2.5 to
3.0 g/cm3 as determined by
ASTM D792; Ceramic Coating "Non -
Stick Glass Lining" or Vitco
"SG-14 Glass Lined Pipe".
Shop Primer
Ameron "Amercoat'3153A Universal
Primer", Cook "391-N-167 Barrier
Primer", Kop-Coat "340 Gold
Primer", or Tnemec "37-77
Chem -Prime".
Asphaltic Coating
Manufacturer's standard.
Coal Tar Epoxy
Manufacturer's standard.
Liquid Epoxy
ANSI/AWWA C210.
Rust -Preventive
Houghton "Rust Veto 344" .
Compound
Polyethylene Tube
Seamless, ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.
3. SHOP COATING AND LINING. The interior of all pipe for gravity
sewers or drains 6 inch and larger
shall be polyethylene lined. The
interior of all gravity sewers or drains
smaller than 6 inch shall be
coal tar epoxy lined. The interior
of all other pipe and fittings
shall be cement mortar lined.
Glass -lined pipe shall be provided
for the following services:
Scum piping.
All sludge piping at Plant No.
2 and No. 3, except piping
conveying activated sludge from final settling basins at Plant
No. 3.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -4-
/`.
The exterior surfaces of all pipe and fittings which will be exposed in
interior locations shall be shop primed. Flange faces shall be coated
with rust -preventive compound. Exterior surfaces of all other pipe and
fittings shall be asphaltic coated.
4. HANDLING. Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in a
manner that will ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition.
Equipment, tools, and methods used in handling and installing pipe and
fittings shall not damage the pipe and fittings. Hooks inserted in ends
of pipe shall have broad, well -padded contact surfaces. Unpadded hooks,
wire brushes, or other abrasive tools shall not be permitted to contact
the polyethylene lining.
Pipe and fittings in which the lining has been damaged shell be
replaced. With the concurrence of the Engineer, small and. readily
accessible damaged areas may be repaired.
All pipe coating which has been damaged shall be repaired by the
Contractor before the pipe is installed.
5. CUTTING PIPE. Cutting shall be done in a neat manner, without
damage to the pipe or the lining. Cuts shall be smooth, straight, and
at right angles to the pipe axis. After cutting, the end of the pipe
shall be dressed with a file or power grinder to remove all roughness
and sharp edges. The cut ends of push -on joint pipe shall be suitably
beveled.
All cutting of gray cast iron pipe shall be done with mechanical pipe
cutters, except where the use of mechanical cutters would be difficult
or impracticable.
Ends of ductile iron pipe shall be cut with a portable guillotine saw,
abrasive wheel, saw, milling cutter, or oxyacetylene torch. The use of
hydraulic squeeze type cutters will not be permitted. Field -cut holes
for saddles shall be cut with mechanical cutters; oxyacetylene cutting
will not be permitted.
6. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned of all foreign matter prior to installation and shall be kept
clean until the work has been accepted. Before jointing, all joint
contact surfaces shall be wire brushed if necessary, wiped clean, and
kept clean until jointing is completed.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the
pipe during installation. Debris, tools, clothing, or other materials
shall not be placed in or allowed to enter the pipe. -
Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the pipe shall be
sealed with a watertight plug which will prevent trench water from
entering the pipe.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -5-
7. INSPECTION. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for
cracks and other defects immediately before installation; spigot ends
shall be examined with particular care. All defective pipe and fittings
shall be removed from the site of the work.
8. ALIGNMENT. Piping shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated
on the drawings. Pipelines or runs intended to be straight shall be
laid straight. Deflections from a straight line or grade shall not
exceed the values stipulated in Table 4 or Table 5 of AWWA C600, unless
specially designed bells and spigots are provided.
Either shorter pipe sections or fittings shall be installed where
required to conform to the alignment or grade indicated on the drawings.
Batter boards, laser beam equipment, or surveying instruments shall be
used to maintain alignment and grade.
Batter boards, if used, shall be erected at intervals of not more than
25 feet. Batter boards shall be used to determine and check pipe sub -
grades. Not less than three batter boards .shall be maintained in proper
position at all times when trench grading is in progress.
If laser beam equipment is used, periodic elevation measurements shall
be made with surveying instruments to verify accuracy of grades. If
such measurements indicate thermal deflection of the laser beam due to
differences between ground temperature and the air temperature within
the pipe, precautions shall be taken to prevent or minimize further
thermal deflections.
9. LAYING PIPE. Pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by
placing the specified pipe embedment material. Under no circumstances
shall pipe be laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid under unsuitable
weather or trench conditions.
Pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing the direction of laying,
except when reverse laying is specifically authorized by the Engineer.
10. FIELD JOINTS. Joints in buried locations shall be mechanical joint
or push -on type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Bells on
wall castings and wall sleeves shall be mechanical joint type with -,
tapped holes for tie rods or stud bolts. All other joints shall be
flanged unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Where permitted by the Engineer, grooved couplings may be used in lieu
of flanges, provided rigid grooving is used to preclude longitudinal
pipe movement and angular deflection at joints. Fittings, valves, and
other items of equipment installed using grooved couplings shall be
adequately supported and blocked or restrained as required to prevent
rotation.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -6-
-11
F
r
11. MECHANICAL JOINTS. Mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If effective
sealing is not obtained, the joint shall be disassembled, thoroughly
cleaned, and reassembled. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to the
torque values listed in Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111JA21.11. Over -
tightening of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will
not be permitted.
The holes in mechanical joints with tie rods shall be carefully aligned
to permit installation of the tie rods. In flange and mechanical joint
pieces, holes in the mechanical joint bells and the flanges shall strad-
dle the top (or side for vertical piping) center line. The top (or
side) center line shall be marked on each flange and mechanical joint
piece at the foundry.
" 12. PUSH -ON JOINTS. The pipe manufacturer's instructions and recom-
mendations for proper jointing operations shall be followed. All joint
surfaces shall be lubricated with heavy vegetable soap solution immedi-
ately before the joint is completed. Lubricant shall be suitable for
use in potable water, shall be stored in closed containers, and shall be
kept clean. Each spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate
assembly.
Pipe ends for restrained joint pipe shall be prepared in accordance with
the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.
13. FLANGED JOINTS. Pipe shall extend completely through screwed -on
flanges. The pipe end and flange face shall be finish machined in a
single operation. Flange faces shall be flat and perpendicular to the
pipe center line.
When bolting flanged joints, care shall be taken to avoid restraint on
the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would prevent uniform
gasket compression or which would cause unnecessary stress in the
flanges. One flange shall be free to move in any direction while the
flange bolts are being tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually
and at a uniform rate, to ensure uniform compression of the gasket.
Special care shall be taken when connecting to pumping equipment to
ensure that pipe stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges. All
such piping shall be permanently supported so that accurate matching of
bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire surface of abutting pump
and piping flanges are obtained before installation of any bolts in
those flanges. In addition, pump connection piping shall be free to
move parallel to its longitudinal center line while the flange bolts are
being tightened.
Each pump shall be leveled,aligned, and wedged into position to fit the
connecting piping, but shall not be grouted until the initial fitting
and alignment of the pipe so that the pump may be shifted on its
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -7-
foundation as necessary. Each pump shall be grouted before final
bolting of the connecting piping.
Insulated flanged joints shall be installed in the following locations;
on both sides of all wall pipes; where connecting to dissimilar
materials or when connecting buried piping to above grade piping. In
addition to one full-faced insulating gasket, the flange insulating
assembly for each insulated flanged joint shall consist of one full-
length sleeve, one insulating washer, and two backing washers for each
flange bolt. The insulating gasket ID shall be 1/8 inch less than the
ID of the flange in which it is installed. The insulating flanged joint
accessories shall be installed in accordance with the instructions and
recommendations of the manufacturer.
14. FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS. Flanged coupling adapters shall be
installed in strict accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recom-
mendations. After the pipe is in place and bolted tight, the proper
location of holes for the anchor studs shall be determined and the pipe
field drilled. Holes for anchor studs shall be drilled completely
through the pipe wall. Hole diameter shall- be not more than 1/8 inch
larger than the diameter of the stud projection.
Where flanged coupling adapters are located on a pump discharge flange,
tie rods of the size and quantity shown in the Tie Rod Schedule on Sheet
M-4 shall be used to restrain the pipe.
The inner surfaces of the coupling shall be prepared for painting in
accordance with instructions of the paint manufacturer and shall then
be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. The
remaining surfaces, except flange mating surfaces, shall be cleaned and
shop primed with the manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer.
15. MECHANICAL COUPLINGS., Mechanical couplings shall be carefully
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A
space of at least 1/4 inch and not more than one inch shall be left
between the pipe ends. Pipe and coupling surfaces which contact gaskets
shall be clean and free from dirt and other foreign matter during
assembly. All assembly bolts shall be uniformly tightened so that the
coupling is free from leaks and all parts of the coupling are square
and symmetrical with the pipe. Following installation of the coupling,
damaged areas of shop coatings on the pipe and coupling shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The interior surfaces of the middle rings shall be prepared for painting
in accordance with instructions of the paint manufacturer and shall then
be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. The
remaining components shall be cleaned and shop primed with the
manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer.
16. GROOVED END JOINTS. Grooved couplings shall be installed in
accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Completed
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -8-
zl-
1-
F
joints shall be rigid and shall not allow angular deflection or longi-
tudinal movement. Except for closure pieces, field grooving of pipe
will not be permitted.
Special care shall be taken when connecting to pumping equipment to
avoid transmitting pipe stresses to the pump flanges. Piping shall be
permanently supported so that accurate matching of piping and abutting
pump flanges is obtained before any bolts are installed in the flanges.
17. POLYETHYLENE TUBE PROTECTION. All buried cast iron pipe shall be
provided with polyethylene tube protection installed in accordance with
AWWA C105, Method A.
18. WALL CASTINGS. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, wall
castings shall be provided where cast iron pipes pass through concrete
walls.
Where a flange and mechanical joint piece is to connect to a mechanical
joint wall casting, the bolt holes in the bell of the wall casting shall
straddle the top (or side for vertical piping) center line of the
casting and shall align with the bolt holes in the flange and mechanical
joint piece. The top center line shall be marked on the wall casting at
the foundry.
19. REDUCERS. Where indicated on the drawings, reducers shall be
eccentric pattern, installed with the straight side on top so that air
traps are not formed. All other reducers shall be concentric pattern.
20. OUTLETS. Where a 12 inch or smaller branch outlet is indicated
and the diameter of the line pipe is at least twice the diameter of the
branch, either a tee, factory welded -on boss, or a tapping saddle will
be acceptable.
Gauge connections in cast iron piping shall conform to the pressure
u gauges section.
r
21. CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING. Connections between new work and
existing piping shall be made using fittings suitable for the conditions
encountered. Each connection with an existing pipe shall be made at a
time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to
customers, and as authorized by the Owner. Facilities shall be provided
for proper dewatering and for disposal of all water removed from the
dewatered lines and excavations without damage to adjacent property.
Special care shall be taken to prevent contamination when dewatering,
cutting into, and making connections with existing potable water piping.
Trench water, mud, or other contaminating substances shall not be per-
mitted to enter the lines. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and
valves installed in such connections shall be thoroughly cleaned and
then swabbed with, or dipped in, chlorine solution having a chlorine
content of 200 milligrams per liter.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
15061
-9-
22. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. Concrete encasement shall be installed as
indicated on the drawings. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as
specified in the cast -in -place concrete section. All pipe to be encased
shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper position, and shall be
anchored to prevent flotation.
23. REACTION ANCHORAGE. All exposed piping with mechanical couplings,
push -on or mechanical joints, or similar joints subject to internal
pressure shall be anchored or harnessed to preclude separation of
joints. All push -on and mechanical joint tees, Y-branches,'bends
deflecting 22-1/2 degrees or more, and plugs which are installed in
buried piping (subjected to internal hydrostatic heads in excess of
30 feet) shall be restrained. Mechanical joint piping to be restrained
shall be provided with suitable anchors, joint harness, or other
acceptable means for preventing movement of the pipe caused by internal
pressure. Push -on joints to be restrained shall be restrained joint
pipe as previously specified.
Metal harness anchorages shall be installed to provide the necessary
support. Metal harness anchorages shall consist of steel rods extending
across the joint and securely anchored to pipe and fitting, or other
adequate anchorage facilities shall be installed to provide the
necessary support. Metal harness anchorages shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor as indicated in the following table. The
table indicates the length of pipe to be restrained on each side of a
bend, valve, or dead end.
Pine Size
(inches)
Test
Pressure
(psi)
<450
(ft)
46-900
(ft)
Dead End/Valve
(ft)
4
150
10
20
50
6
25
10
10
20
75
10
10
40
125
10
20
60
150
10
20
70
8
25
10
10
20
75
10
20
50
10
150
20
30
110
14
25
10
10
30
16
150
20
40
130
18
150
20
50
170
20
50
10
20
60
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -10-
cr,
G
i
r
r';
i
0
Pipe Size
(inches)
Test
Pressure
(psi)
<450
(ft)
46-900
(ft)
Dead End/Valve
(ft)
150
20
50
180
24
50
10
20
70
75
20
30
110
30
25
10
20
50 .
150
30
70
250
36
25
10
20
50
150
40
80
270
42
25
10
20
60
The first section of pipe adjacent to each side of the bend should be a
full length of pipe. Field closure pieces should be located away from
the bend beyond the length over which joints are to be 'restrained.
Anchorages or other supports for fittings installed in fills or other
unstable ground, above grade or exposed within structures, shall be
provided as required by the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
24. LEAKAGE. All joints shall be watertight and free from leaks. Each
leak which is discovered within the correction period stipulated in the
General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
25. PRESSURE TEST. After installation, piping shall be tested for
defective workmanship and materials by being subjected to a hydrostatic
test as specified in the pressure and leakage testing section..
26. DIMENSIONS. The thickness class for cast iron pipe shall be as
indicated in the following table:
Location
All locations
Nominal Size
inches
6-inch diameter
and larger
ANSIJAWWA
Thickness
Class
50
Note: The specified thickness class includes corrosion allowance
and foundry tolerance.
Pipe wall thickness for grooved and threaded pipe shall be increased if
necessary to comply with the following minimum thicknesses:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -11-
Minimum Thickness Class
Pipe Size Threaded Ends Grooved Ends
(1) (2)
4-16 inch 53 53
18 inch 53 54
20 inch 53 55
24 inch and larger 53 56
(1) Complies with ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 for minimum pipe wall
thickness for threaded flanges.
(2) Grooved couplings are cataloged through 24 inch; larger sizes
require cast -on or threaded -on shoulders.
27. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete layout drawings, details, and specifi-
cations covering all cast iron piping and accessories shall be submitted
in accordance with the submittals section.
Submittal data shall clearly indicate the country of origin of pipe,
fittings, restraining devices, and accessories. When requested by the
Engineer, certified copies of physical and chemical test results shall
be submitted for the materials to be provided.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15061
(17578 ) -12
F
Section 15062 - STEEL PIPE
1. SCOPE. This section covers steel pipe 6 inches in diameter and
larger, together with fittings, specials, and appurtenances.
Steel pipe smaller than 6 inches in diameter, miscellaneous small
piping, pipe supports, and pressure and leakage tests, are covered in
other sections.
Pipe trenching, bedding, and backfill are covered in the excavation
section.
The size, service, and location of steel pipelines are covered in the
pipe schedule section.
All potable and nonpotable water pipe exposed to exterior locations
shall be heat traced and insulated. Heat tape and insulation are
covered in the miscellaneous piping section.
Steel piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all fit-
tings, specials, jointing materials, appurtenances, and accessories
indicated on the drawings or otherwise required for proper installation
and functioning of the piping.
2. GOVERNING STANDARDS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all
steel pipe, fittings, and specials shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the following standards:
AWWA Standards Title
C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger
C203 Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and
Linings for Steel Water Pipelines -
Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied
C205 Cement -Mortar Protective Lining and
Coating for Steel Water Pipe - 4 Inch
and Larger - Shop Applied
C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks
Service - Sizes 4 Inches Through
144 Inches
j C209 Cold Applied Tape Coatings for the
tt Exterior of Special Sections, Connec-
tions, and Fittings for Steel Water
® Pipelines
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
,,.. (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
t(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -1
AWWA Standards Title
C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the
Interior and Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines
C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior
of Steel Water Pipelines
C602 Cement -Mortar Lining of Water Pipe-
lines in Place
C606 Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints
ANSI Standards
B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts
ANSI/ASME Standards
B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel
Pipe
B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads
3. BASIS OF DESIGN. Steel pipe, fittings, and specials may be either
fabricated or mill type. In either case, all items shall be fabricated
to the sizes, dimensions, and shapes indicated on the drawings or speci-
fied herein.
The specified size of fabricated pipe, fittings, and specials shall be
the nominal inside diameter, in inches, where 12 inches and smaller in
size, and the actual inside diameter of pipe lining, where 14 inches and
larger in size.
The specified size of mill pipe, fittings, and specials shall be the
nominal pipe size as set forth in ASME/ANSI B36.10.
3.01. Pipe Wall Thickness. All pipe shall have a wall thickness of at
least 1/4 inch.
3.02. Fitting Dimensions. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer,
the dimensions of steel pipe fittings shall be as indicated on
Figure 1-15062 bound at the end of this section.
3.03. Shop Tests. Shop hydrostatic testing of steel pipe, fittings,
and specials will not be required; however, field hydrostatic testing
after installation will be required as specified.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -2-
r-
3.04. Reinforcement of Fittings and Specials. All bends, fittings,
�^
branch connections, reducers, and special sections shall be reinforced,
or the wall thickness shall be increased so that the combined stresses
due to internal pressure (circumferential and longitudinal) and bending
will not exceed 67 percent of the yield strength of the pipe material.
r:.
Whether or not indicated on the drawings, reinforcements or additional
wall thickness shall be provided as required to ensure that the combined
(�
stresses do not exceed the specified maximum. Unless otherwise indica-
ted or directed, the internal pressure shall be the specified field test
pressure for the piping adjacent to the item in question, and the dead
load shall be equal to the pipe full of water.
In addition to the above and where in trench, the design of reinforce-
ment or wall thickness shall take into consideration an external load of
1960 pounds per linear foot.
Wall thicknesses of reducing sections shall be not less than the
thicknesses for the larger ends.
rrequired
4. MATERIALS.
Pipe ANSIJAWWA C200.
Fittings and Specials ANSIJAWWA C200.
Flanged Joints
Flanges ANSI/AWWA C207, slip-on, except
where otherwise permitted or
required.
Dimensions and ANSIJAWWA C207, Class D, Table 1
Drilling or Table 2, except where otherwise
required.
Blind Flanges ANSI/AWWA C207, unless otherwise
f indicated on the drawings or
specified.
Insulating Flanges
Flanges Flanges as specified herein,
except bolt holes shall be
enlarged as required to accept
bolt insulating sleeves.
Insulation.Kits As manufactured by PSI Industries
or Central Plastics.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -3
I, —
Insulating
Type E. pyrox lE glass reinforced
Gaskets
epoxy,
r
1/8 inch thick, with Buna-N
sealing element.
Bolt Insulating
Mylar, 1/32 inch thick.
Sleeves
Insulating
Phenolic laminate, 1/8 inch
.--
Washers
thick, one for each flange bolt.
Backing Washers
Steel, 1/8 inch thick, two for
each flange bolt.
Flange Bolting
-
Material
ANSI/AWWA C207.
Type
Bolt and nut; bolt -stud and two
nuts permitted for one inch and
.r
larger.
Bolts and Bolt -Studs
Length
Such that ends project 1/4 to
1/2 inch beyond surface of nuts.
�.
Ends
Chamfered or rounded.
-Threading
ANSI/ASME B1.1, coarse thread
series, Class 2A fit. Bolt -studs
may be threaded full length.
Studs for tapped holes shall be
threaded to match threading in
holes.
Bolt Head Dimensions
ANSI B18.2.1; regular pattern for
square, heavy pattern for
hexagonal.
Nuts
Hexagonal.
Dimensions
ANSI B18.2.2, heavy, semifinished
pattern.
Threading
ANSI/ASME B1.1, coarse thread
_
series, Class 2B fit.
Gaskets
ASTM D1330, Grade I rubber, full
face type, 1/8-inch thick.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -4-
Mechanical Couplings
Reducing
All Others
Restrained Joints
Lugs or Collars
Tie Bolts
. Threading
Ends
Nuts
Threading
Dimensions
Flat Washers
Flanged Coupling Adapters
Grooved Couplings
Dresser "Style 621, Rockwell "413"
and 1415", or Baker "Series 220";
without pipe stop.
Dresser 'Style 388, Rockwell
"411 Flexible Coupling", or Baker
"Series 200"; without pipe stop.
Of the type indicated on the
drawings or specified.
ASTM A283, Grade B or C; or
ASTM A36.
ASTM A193, Grade B7.
ANSIJASME B1.1, Class ZA fit,
coarse thread series for 7/8 inch
and smaller and 8-thread series
for one inch and larger.
Chamfered or rounded.
Hexagonal, ASTM A194, Grade 2H or
better.
As specified for tie bolts except
Class 2B fit.
ANSI B18.2.2, heavy semifinished
pattern.
Hardened steel, ASTM A325.
Dresser 'Style 128' or Rockwell
19131; with anchor studs of
sufficient size and number to
withstand test pressure.
AWWA C606; Gustin-Bacon 'No. 120
Rigid' or Victaulic 107 ZeroFlex".
Small Branch Connections
Pipe Nipples Seamless black steel pipe,
ASTM A53, standard weight
(Schedule 40).
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -5-
Welding Fittings
Threaded Outlets
Welded Outlets
Coatings and Linings
Rust -Inhibitive Primer
Rust -Preventive Compound
Tape Coating
Cement Mortar
Cement
Sand
Epoxy Bonding Agent
Latex Admixture
Bituminous Filler for Wall
Fittings
Watertight Pipe Sleeves
Bonney "Thredolets", Porter "W-S
Teelets", or Vogt "Weld Couplets".
Bonney "Weldolets", Porter "W-S
Teelets", or Vogt "Weld Couplets".
Cook 1391-N-167 Barrier Coat",
Kop-Coat "340 Gold Primer", Tnemec
"37-77 Chem -Prime", or Valspar
013-R-28 Chromox Primer".
Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or
Rust-Oleum "R-9".
AWWA C209 and C214.
ANSI/AWWA C205 and C602.
ANSIIASTM C150, Type II.
AWWA C205, Section 2.3, except
sand for field -applied lining
shall pass a 16 mesh sieve.
ASTM C881, Type II, moisture
insensitive and suitable for
service conditions.
Protex Industries "Probond Vinyl".
Plastic asphalt roof cement,
asbestos -free; ASTM D4586,
Type II.
Thunderline Corporation "Link -
Seal", insulating type with
modular rubber sealing elements,
nonmetallic pressure plates, and
galvanized bolts and nuts.
Anchor Bolts ASTM A307.
5. ENDS OF SECTIONS.
5.01. For Field Weldiniz. Ends of pipe, fittings, and specials for
joints butt -welded in the field shall have the ends beveled for butt
welding in accordance with the governing standards.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -6-
d�
V
5.02. For Fitting with Flanges. Ends to be fitted with slip-on flanges
shall be prepared to accommodate the flanges in accordance with the
governing standards.
r,, 5.03. For Mechanical Couplings. Ends to be joined by mechanical
couplings shall be plain end type in accordance with the governing
l standard. In addition, the welds on ends to be joined by couplings
without pipe stops shall be ground flush to permit slipping the coupling
in at least one direction to clear the pipe joint.
5.04. For Grooved Couplings. Ends to be joined by grooved couplings
shall be of the shouldered type conforming to the governing standard and
as recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the size and wall thick-
ness of the pipe, fitting, or special being coupled; and for the maximum
test or working pressure to which the couplings will be subjected.
5.05. For Flanged Coupling Adapters. Ends to be fitted with flanged
coupling adapters shall be plain end type in accordance with the govern-
ing standard for mechanical couplings. Welds shall be ground flush to
permit installation of the coupling, and holes shall be field drilled at
the proper location for anchor.studs.
5.06. For Connection to Dissimilar Pipe Materials. Where the.steel
pipe is to be connected to buried or submerged concrete pipe, cast iron
pipe, stainless steel pipe, or to existing steel pipe, the connection
shall be made by means of an insulating flange. See paragraph 11 for
additional requirements for insulating flanges.
6. SEAMS. Except for seamless mill -type pipe, all piping shall be made
from steel plates rolled into cylinders or sections thereof with the
longitudinal seams butt -welded, or shall be spirally formed and butt -
welded. There shall be not more than two longitudinal seams. Girth
seams shall be butt -welded and shall be spaced not closer than 10 feet
apart except in specials and fittings.
7. PIPE LENGTHS. Straight pipe sections shall be random lengths unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
All pipe to be connected with mechanical couplings shall be ,fabricated
so that the space between pipe ends within the couplings will.,not exceed
the allowable as recommended by the coupling manufacturer but will be at
least 1/2 inch.
8. SMALL BRANCH CONNECTIONS. Branch connections 2"1/2 inches and,
smaller shall be made with welding fittings with threaded outlets..
Where there is some doubt as to the exact outlet size desired, but it is
known that the size will be less than one inch, a one inch outlet shall
be provided and reducing bushings used as required.
Branch connections 3 inches through 12 inches in size shall be made with
pipe nipples or with welding fittings with welded outlets. Pipe nipples
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
r
& EXPANSION)
15062
-7-
and welding fittings shall be welded to the pipe shell..and reinforced as
required to meet design and test requirements. `-
Small branch connections shall be located so as not to interfere with
joints, supports, or other details and shall be provided with caps or
plugs to protect threads during shipping and handling.
9. DRAINS AND VENTS. In interior and exterior locations, drains and
vents shall be provided at the locations and in the sizes indicated on
the drawings. Pipe used for drain and vent piping shall be ASTM A53
standard weight, black steel pipe.- Drain valves shall be hose valves.
Vent valves shall be resilient seat globe valves. Drain and vent valves
shall comply with the requirements of the miscellaneous valves section.
10. FIELD JOINTS. Welded joints shall be provided for all buried pipe
except where otherwise indicated on the drawings. Flanged, welded, and
mechanically coupled joints shall be provided at the locations indicated
on the drawings. To facilitate installation, additional field -welded
joints may be provided. Additional field joints shall be kept to a
minimum and their location shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
Field -welded joints shall not be used in pipe smaller than 27 inches
except in locations where the interior coating can be satisfactorily
repaired and inspected.
11. FLANGED JOINTS. Flange faces shall be normal to the pipe axis.
Angular deflection (layback) of the flange faces shall not exceed the
allowable set forth in Section 4.3 of ANSIIAWWA C207. All flanges,
after welding to the pipe, shall be refaced, if necessary, to prevent
distortion of connecting valve bodies from excessive flange bolt
tightening and to prevent leakage at the joint. "1
Pipe lengths and dimensions and drillings of flanges shall be coordi-
nated with the lengths and flanges for valves, pumps, and other equip-
ment to be installed in the piping. All mating flanges shall ,have the
same diameter and drilling and shall be suitable for the pressures to
which they will be subjected.
Flanges shall be of the slip-on type, except that welding -neck or
slip-on flanges welded to short lengths of pipe shall be used where
installation of flanges in the field is permitted or required.
Insulating flanged joints shall be installed in the following locations;
on both sides of all wall pipes; where connecting to dissimilar mate-
rials; or when connecting buried piping to above grade piping. In
addition to one full-faced insulating gasket, the flange insulating
assembly for each insulated flanged joint shall consist of one full- _
length sleeve, one insulating washer, and two backing washers for each
flange bolt. The insulating gasket ID shall be 1/8 inch less than the
ID of the flange in which it is installed. The insulating flanged joint
acces-sories shall be installed in accordance with the instructions and
recommendations of the manufacturer.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -8-
r
r
t.
12. MECHANICAL COUPLINGS. The middle ring of each mechanical coupling
shall have a thickness at least equal to the wall thickness specified
herein for the size of pipe on which the coupling is to be used. The
length of each middle ring shall be not less than 10 inches for 36 inch
and larger pipe and not less than 7 inches for pipe smaller than 36 inch
size.
The interior surfaces of the middle rings shall be prepared for painting
in accordance with instructions of the paint manufacturer and shall then
be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. The
remaining components shall be cleaned and shop primed with the manufac-
turer's standard rust -inhibitive primer.
13. GROOVED COUPLINGS. Grooved couplings shall be sized for proper
installation on the pipe ends provided.
After fabrication, all housing clamps forming the coupling shall be
cleaned and primed (as specified for the pipe) by the coupling manu-
facturer.
14. RESTRAINED JOINTS. Restrained joints shall be flanged, welded,
flanged coupling adapters with anchor studs, or harnessed as specified
or indicated on the drawings.
Where indicated on the drawings, mechanically coupled, or grooved
coupling joints shall be restrained with harness bolts and lugs or
collars. Joint harnesses shall conform to the details indicated on the
drawings. Lugs or collars shall be shop welded to the pipe and coated
as specified for the adjacent pipe.
15. WELDED JOINTS. All welds shall be sound and free from embedded
scale or slag, shall have tensile strength across the weld not less than
that of the thinner of the connected sections, and shall be watertight.
Butt welds shall be used for all welded joints in pipe assemblies and in
the fabrication of bends and other specials. Field -welded joints shall
be either butt -welded or lap welded.
Single field -welded butt joints with outside backing rings may be used
for pipe larger than 27 inches in diameter. Backing rings will not be
permitted for 27 inch and smaller pipe. Butt straps, where used as
permitted by AWWA C206, shall be welded on both the inside and outside
of the pipe and at each end of the pipe and strap to avoid stress
multiplication.
Fillet welds shall be used for flange attachment in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C207
Field welding of joints shall conform to AWWA C206. Field welding
procedures shall be furnished in accordance with Section 3.2 of
AWWA C206.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
1 (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -9-
A yield point determination of a welded joint shall be made by an inde-
pendent testing laboratory at the beginning of the work. All costs for
laboratory testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.
Weld test specimens shall be furnished to the inspector for the inde-
pendent testing laboratory whenever, in the judgment of the inspector,
a satisfactory weld is not being made. Test specimens shall also be
furnished when the inspector desires. All costs for testing of produc-
tion welds will be paid for by the Owner.
Test reports of all laboratory tests shall be submitted as provided in
the quality control section.
16. FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS. Flanged coupling adapters shall be
installed in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommenda-
tions. After the pipe is in place and all bolts have been properly
tightened, the location of holes for the anchor studs shall be deter-
mined and field drilled. Hole diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch
larger than the diameter of the stud projection. Anchor stud holes
shall extend completely through the pipe wall and lining material.
The inner surfaces of the coupling shall be prepared for painting in
accordance with instructions of the paint manufacturer and shall then
be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C210. The -
remaining surfaces, except flange mating surfaces, shall be cleaned and
shop primed with the manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer.
17. WALL SLEEVES. Unless otherwise noted, wall sleeves of the type
indicated on the drawings shall be provided where steel pipe passes
through concrete or masonry walls. Where harness lugs are attached to
wall sleeves, the sleeves shall be carefully aligned to permit instal-
lation of the tie rods. In flange and mechanical joint wall sleeves,
holes in the mechanical joint bells and flanges shall straddle the top �-
(or side for vertical piping) center line. The top (or side) center
line shall be marked on each flange and mechanical joint piece at the
fabricating shop.
18. PIPE ANCHORS, ENCASEMENT, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS. Pipe anchors,
hangers, and supports shall be fabricated in accordance with the
requirements of the pipe supports section and the details indicated on
the drawings and shall be furnished and installed complete with all
concrete bases, anchor bolts and nuts, plates, rods, and other acces-
sories required for proper support of the piping. All piping shall be
rigidly supported and anchored so that there is no movement or visible
sagging between supports. Where the details must be,modified to fit
the piping and structures, all such modifications shall be subject to
acceptance by the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted, lugs required
for lateral or longitudinal anchorage shall be shop welded to the pipe.
Concrete encasements and supports shall be provided as indicated on the
drawings or as otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Concrete for
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) .15062
(17578 ) -10-
11
,
zI
anchorages, encasements, and supports shall conform to the requirements
of the cast -in -place concrete section.
19. PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS. All steel pipe, fittings, spe-
cials, wall fittings, and accessories shall be lined, coated, or wrapped
as specified herein.
19.01. Type of Coating and Lining. Surface preparation shall be in
accordance with the coating or lining manufacturer's instructions.
Types of protective coating and lining shall be as follows:
Exterior Surfaces in
Interior and Exterior
Locations
Exterior Surfaces
Underground
Exterior Surfaces Buried
or Encased in Concrete
Interior Surfaces of all
Pipe except Air Service
Interior Surfaces of Pipe
for Air Service
Pipe Joints
Couplings
Ends of Sections
Machined Surfaces
Shop -applied rust -inhibitive
primer. Field painting is covered
in the painting section.
Tape coating ANSI/AW6TA C214, as
modified herein. -
Tape coating, ANSI/AWWA C214, as
modified herein.
Cement mortar, ANSI/AWWA C205, as
modified herein.
Shop -applied rust -inhibitive
primer
Shop coating as specified for each
type of coupling. Field coating
as specified for ends of sections.
As specified herein.
Rust -preventive compound.
19.02. Field Repair of Coatings and Linings. Entry into the pipe for
application of interior linings to unlined ends shall be from open ends
except as otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Field repair of shop -applied exterior coatings and interior linings
shall conform to the following:
For Field -Welded Joints
Cement Mortar Hold back coating and lining
4 inches from joint. Field repair
in accordance with Appendix A of
ANSI/AWWA C205 as modified herein.
t.:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -11-
Tape Coating
For Flanged Joints
For Mechanically Coupled Joints
Cement Mortar
Tape Coating
For Grooved Coupled Joints
Cement Mortar
Tape Coating
Hold back at least 4 inches from
joint. Field repair in accordance
with ANSIJAWWA C209, except the
total applied tape thickness_ shall
be not less than 75 mils.
Extend lining to ends of pipe.
The coating of exterior surfaces
is covered in the painting
section.
Hold back coating 16 inches from
joints; paint exposed surfaces
with 2.5 mil dry film thickness of
Type B primer in accordance with
ANSIJAWWA C203. Lining shall
extend to end of pipe. Field coat
exterior surfaces with 35 mil dry
film thickness of thixotropic coal
tar. Repair of lining at joints
not required.
Hold back coating 16 inches from
joints; paint exposed surfaces
with 2.5 mil dry film thickness of
Type B primer in accordance with
ANSIJAWWA C203. Field coat
exterior surfaces with 35 mil dry
film thickness of thixotropic coal
tar. Repair of lining at joints
not required.
Hold back coating 6 inches at
joints; paint exposed surfaces
with 2.5 mil dry film thickness of
Type B primer in accordance with
ANSIJAWWA C203. Lining shall
extend to end of pipe. Field
repair exterior surfaces with
35 mil dry film thickness of
thixotropic coal tar. Repair of
lining at joints not required.
Hold back coating 12 inches at
joints; paint exposed surfaces
with 2.5 mil dry film thickness of
Type B primer in accordance with
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) -
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -12-
ANSI/AWWA C203. Field coat
exterior surfaces with 35 mil dry
film thickness of thixotropic coal
tar. Repair of lining at joints
not required.
19.03. Modifications to the Governing Standards.
19.03.01. Shop -Applied Cement Mortar Lining. Unless otherwise accept-
able to the Engineer, cement mortar lining for all 36 inch and smaller
steel pipe shall be shop applied. Except as modified herein. shop -
applied mortar linings shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C205.
a. Specials. Wire fabric reinforcement shall be used in lining
of fittings and specials in accordance with Section 4.5 of
ANSI/AWWA C205.
b. Field Repair. Field repair of inside joint surfaces shall be
performed in accordance with Appendix A, Paragraph A2 of
ANSI/AWWA C205, except that an epoxy bonding agent and latex
admixture shall be used in conjunction with the sand and cement
mortar. The addition ,of lime or pozzolan will not. be
permitted.
The exposed steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and all grease
shall be removed. A coat of epoxy bonding agent shall be
applied over the area to be lined in accordance with the manu-
facturer's recommendations. A coat of soupy mixture of cement
and water shall be applied over the epoxy after it becomes
tacky. Cement mortar to which the latex admixture has been
added shall then be packed into the area to be patched and
screeded off level with the adjacent cement mortar lining. The
patched area shall be given an initial floating with a wood
float followed by a steel trowel finish.
Defective or damaged shop -applied cement mortar linings shall
be removed, surfaces cleaned, and the lining repaired as
specified above for joint repair.
c. Adiacent to Valves. Steel pipe installed adjacent to butterfly
valves shall be provided with tapered cement mortar lining so
L that the valve disc will not interfere with the lining material
during valve operation.
19.03.02. Shop -Applied Tape Coat. Except as modified or supplemented
herein, shop -applied tape coating shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C214. The
tape coating system shall be composed of four layers consisting of a
primer layer, one inner layer of tape for corrosion protection, and two
outer layers of tape for mechanical protection. The total thickness of
the tape coating system shall be not less than 80 mils. The outer layer
of tape shall be white in color.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
�. (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -13-
w,
20. SHOP INSPECTION AND TESTING. Inspection and testing by an indepen-
dent laboratory will not be required at the fabricating or coating shop;
however, the pipe manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit of compliance
certifying that all materials used and work performed comply with the
specified requirements. Seven copies of the affidavit shall be
furnished.
21. HANDLING. Pipe, fittings, specials, and appurtenances shall at all
times be handled and stored in a manner that will ensure installation in
sound, undamaged condition.
22. FIELD INSPECTION. All shop -applied exterior'tape coatings on pipe,
fittings, or specials shall be electrically inspected for holidays and
other defects and repaired if necessary. All electrical inspection
shall be made in accordance with Section 2.14.12 of ANSI/AWWA C203.
Inspection and repair of exterior coatings shall be performed by and at
the expense of the Contractor, after receipt of the pipe, fittings, or
specials on the job and before installation. Electrical inspection of
exterior tape coatings after installation of the pipe, fitting, or
special in the trench shall be made where, in the opinion of the Engi-
neer, the coating may have been damaged'by handling during installation.
23. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter before being installed and
shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted.
Precautions shall be taken to ensure that foreign matter does not enter
the pipe during jointing, lining repair, or inspection operations.
24. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE. Pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades
indicated on the drawings. Pipelines or runs intended to be straight
shall be laid straight. Maximum joint openings and deflections shall be
as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. In welded pipe, deflections up
to 4-1/2 degrees may be made by shop -mitering one end of one pipe.
Deflections up to 22-1/2 degrees may be made by shop -mitering the ends
of two adjacent sections of pipe by equal amounts. Deflections greater
than 22-1/2 degrees shall be made by use of fabricated bends.
25. INSTALLATION.
25.01. Buried Pining. All trenching, embedment, and backfilling for
buried piping shall conform to the requirements of the earthwork sec-
tion and the details indicated on the drawings.
Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the line shall be
sealed with a watertight plug. All water in the trench shall be removed
prior to removing the plug.
Pipe embedment and backfilling shall closely follow the installation and
jointing of steel pipe in the trench to prevent flotation of the pipe by
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -14-
water which may enter the trench and to prevent longitudinal movement
caused by thermal expansion or contraction of the pipe. Not more than
160 feet of restrained joint pipe shall be exposed at any time ahead of
the backfilling in any section of 'trench. The backfill adjacent to each
field joint may be temporarily omitted to provide adequate space for
field coating the joints. Closure welds on restrained joint pipe shall
be made during the cool part of the day.
25.02. Out -of -Round Pipe. Pipe which deviates from a true circle by
more than one percent shall be laid with its larger diameter vertical,
or struts or jacks on continuous head and sill timbers may be used to
correct the vertical diameter where permitted by the Engineer. Struts
or jacks shall be left in place until the joints at each end have been
completed and until the pipe embedment and backfilling for the section
have been completed to at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
Final inspection, repair, and checking of interior lining shall be
performed after the struts or jacks have been removed.
25.03. Flanged Joints. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints
so that there is no restraint on the opposite end of the piece which
► would prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the
gasket. The pipe or fitting must be free to move in any direction while
bolting. Bolts shall be gradually tightened in a crisscross pattern, to
ensure a uniform rate of gasket compression around the entire flange.
Special care shall be taken when connecting to pumping equipment to
ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges.
All connecting piping shall be permanently supported so that accurate
matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire surface of
flanges are obtained before any bolts are installed in the flanges. In
addition, pump connection piping shall be free to move parallel to its
longitudinal center line while the bolts are being tightened. Each pump
shall be leveled, aligned, and wedged into position which will fit the
connecting piping, but shallnotbe grouted until the initial fitting
and alignment of the pipe so that the pump may be shifted on its founda-
tion if necessary to properly install the connecting piping. Each pump
shall, however, be grouted before final bolting of the connecting
piping. After final alignment and bolting, the pump connections shall
be tested for applied piping stresses by loosening the flange bolts
which, if the piping is properly installed, should result in no movement
of the piping relative to the pump or opening of the pump connection
joints.
25.04. Couplings. Surfaces of pipe ends and couplings which contact
the sealing gasket shall be clean and free from foreign material when
the coupling is installed on the pipe. Wrenches used in bolting
couplings shall be of a type and size recommended by the coupling manu-
facturer. All bolts shall be tightened approximately the same amount,
with all parts of the coupling square and symmetrical with the pipe.
Following installation, the exterior coating of each coupling shall be
touched up or reprimed.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -15-
26. CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING. Connections between new work and
existing piping shall be made using fittings suitable for the conditions
encountered. Each connection with an existing pipe,shall be made at a
time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to
customers, and as authorized by the Owner.
Facilities shall be provided for proper dewatering and for disposal of
all water removed from the dewatered lines and excavations without
damage to adjacent property. --
27. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. Concrete encasement shall be installed as
indicated on the drawings. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as
specified in the cast -in -place concrete section. All pipe to be encased
shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper position and shall be
anchored to prevent flotation.
28. HYDROSTATIC TESTS. After installation, steel piping shall be
tested for defective workmanship and materials by being subjected to a
hydrostatic test as specified in the pressure and leakage testing
section.
29. LEAKAGE. All steel piping shall be watertight and free from leaks.
Each leak which is discovered within the correction period stipulated in
the General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
30. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Drawings, specifications, installation sche-
dules, and other data showing complete details of the fabrication,
construction, weld locations, joint details and certification, and
installation of pipe, fittings, specials, and connections, together
with complete data covering all materials proposed for use, shall be
submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
Submittals shall indicate the ASTM designation for the material from
which each class of pipe is fabricated.
In addition to the markings as specified under the governing standard,
the Contractor's drawings shall include a complete laying schedule with
piece description to show where each numbered pipe, fitting, or special
.is to be installed. The numbers indicated on the drawings shall corre-
spond with those painted on the pipe.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15062
(17578 ) -16-
S
49
TN
?roe iy9410 ..T
s.d l ece t1 M.
"40 dN
Casa
v —�— 4
oao ,=
In
•N
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
MINNUMMIN
Tee Lateral True vlre
(awl "A] tto MT!
Lateral
1146M •tat 1&.4N seu
t
� RisrQ=
Tee i
Mile
llwrises t�
a
R.�seer
tl aa.s
de.leal
CAN
fig-
$oree�
a�lr•
Oia.
�M
pie"
pless
piece
As.
0■tiet
Or.
ortl.t
r
r
(oftx
l
fas•i0
_..��
tisAo
..��
i•ll
�
o
t
•
v
4.s
33
u
12
6.6
1
s
�.
Ls
u
o
ss
is
ss. s
s
J. s
s
s
s
s
u
f
is
22
17. s
f
4.5
L s
Ls
f
to
22
is
i2
iL s
20. s
is
s
6.5
L s
U
u
is
a
30
is.$
u
L s
7.5
7.5
u
sa
to
ss
is
v
u
0
7.5
7.5
sa
u
30
ss
30
X s
!o
u
Ls
s
o
u
is
33
ZL s
7!
)9
�2
s L s
7
L i
6.1
iL s
20
K
u
70
W
7s
u
•
9.5
9.5
is
22
no
20
to
46
17.6
to
to
20
Is
ss
Is
is
soA
a0.s
a
f
is
ss
n
ao
so
a
so
N
a+
is
to
u
u
is
K
is
is
ss
0
io
u
to
a
at
a
31
a
to
W
ti
is
is
ao
a
77
is
is
is
M
M
all
M
30
30
DIMENSIONS FOR STEEL PIPE -FITTINGS
STEEL PIPE
I
Moult[ 1-15062
RNYsar I
Ceee
r
r
Section 15065 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE
1. SCOPE. This section covers fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe
to be furnished and installed as part of the odor control systems.
The piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings,
specials, jointing materials, supports, anchors, expansion joints, and
other necessary appurtenances.
2. GENERAL.
2.01. Coordination. Material furnished and work performed under this
section shall be coordinated with the existing odor control system
piping.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment
Stipulations shall apply to all material and work performed under this
section.
2.03. Related Work. The following items of associated work and
equipment are specified under other sections:
Dampers and valves Odor control dampers and shutoff
valves section.
Supports Pipe supports section.
2.04. Governins Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
all materials and construction methods shall comply with the applicable
provisions of the following standards:
ASTM D231O - "Standard Classification for Machine -made Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin".
ASTM D2412 - "Standard Test Method for External Loading of
Plastic Pipe by Parallel -Plate Loading".
ASTM D2996 - "Standard Specification for Filament -Wound
Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe".
ASTM D2997 - "Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Rein-
forced Thermosetting Resin Pipe".
PS-15-69 - National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product
Standard, "Custom Contact -Molded Reinforced -
Polyester Chemical -Resistant Process Equipment".
2.05. Environmental Requirements. The fiberglass reinforced plastic
piping and accessories will be installed in exterior locations with
ambient air temperatures ranging from 0 to 120F.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15065
(17578 ) -1-
M
2.06. Quality Assurance. All tests shall be conducted in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer and shall be repeated as many times as
necessary to demonstrate satisfactory performance. Tests shall be made
by and at the expense of the Contractor in the presence, and to the
satisfaction, of the Engineer. The piping system shall be tested with
air for at least one hour and proved absolutely tight. Odor control
piping shall be tested at 20 inches water column.
Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure or other positive and
accurate method acceptable to the Engineer. All equipment or other
accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be
damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure shall be discon-
nected and ends of branch lines plugged or capped as required during the
testing procedures.
All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appli-
ances, and devices shall be furnished, and all tests shall be made by
and at the expense of the Contractor and at such time as directed by the
Engineer.
All joints in piping shall be tight. All joints which are found to leak
by observation or during testing shall be repaired by the Contractor and
tests repeated.
2.07. Delivery, Storage, and Handling. Pipe and fittings shall be
protected from damage due to impact and point loading. Pipe shall be
properly supported to avoid damage due to flex strains. The Contractor
shall not allow dirt, debris, or other extraneous material to get into
pipe or fittings. Pipe and fittings shall not be thrown or dropped from
truck to the ground.
2.08. Acceptable Manufacturers. Acceptable manufacturers of FRP pipe
shall be Fibercast, or Smith Fiberglass Products, Inc.
3. MATERIALS. Materials used shall be:
Pipe
Centrifugally Cast, ASTM D2997, RTRP-21C, centri-
14 inches and smaller fugally cast reinforced epoxy in
pipe with 30 mil liner;
Fibercast "Centricast IIIEP" or
equal. Ultraviolet inhibitors
shall be added to the exterior
coat of all pipes.
ASTM D2412, minimum pipe stiff-
ness (PS) at 5 percent deflec-
tion shall be:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15065
(17578 ) -2-
Filament Wound
16 inches and smaller
Flanges and Fittings
Flanges
Fittings
Bell and Spigot
Joints
Butt Joints
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15065
(17578 ) -3-
Nominal Diameter PS
inches (psi)
1-8 36
ASTM D2996, RTRP-12EF, with
10 mil reinforced liner; Fiber -
cast "F-Chem 1222" (12 inches
and smaller) or "F-Chem-V" (14
and 16 inches) or Smith
Fiberglass Products, Inc. of
A.O. Smith Corp. 'Poly Thread".
ASTM D2412, minimum pipe stiff-
ness (PS) at ,5 percent deflec-
tion shall be:
Nominal Diameter PS
inches (psi)
1-8 36
Manufacturer's standard, glass
fiber reinforced, compatible
with the specified pipe, with
chemical resistance equal to or
greater than the specified pipe.
Flanges shall comply with
PS-15-69 Table 5 at a design
pressure of 25,psi and shall
have ANSIIASME B16.1, Class 25
diameter and drilling.
Couplings with adhesive (14 inch
and smaller piping).
Branch connections shall be fac-
tory tees or saddle type with
compatible adhesive over the
entire surface between the
saddle and pipe.
Matched tapered bell and spigot
ends bonded with adhesive.
Butt and wrap, resin bonded,
PS-15-69 with psi rating equal
to pipe ratings.
Flange Bolts and Nuts ASTM A307, Grade B, stainless
steel, after installation bolts
shall project 1/8 to 3/8 inch
beyond the outer face of the
nut.
Flat Washers
Flange Gaskets
Expansion Joints and
Flexible Connections
ANSI B18.22.1, plain, stainless
steel.
Full face, ASTM D2240 Type A
durometer 50-70; 1/8 inch
minimum thickness, neoprene for
odor control, viton for chlorine
scrubber service or other
chemical -resistant elastomer
compatible with the applicable
pipe contents.
As specified herein.
Adhesive Pipe manufacturer's standard.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.01. Conditions of Service. Fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe will
be used for all collection and exhaust pipe in the odor control system
where indicated. Piping and appurtenances furnished under this section
will'be used in a wet or humid atmosphere containing up to 75 ppm
hydrogen sulfide.
4.02. Design Criteria. Piping including all connections and fittings
shall meet or exceed the more stringent of the minimum material and
design requirements in addition to being suitable for conditions of
service. The pipe shall be suitable for continuous service an internal
vacuum of 7 inches water column.
Bends, fittings, and special sections shall be reinforced or shall have
their shell thickness increased at locations where the combined stresses
due to internal pressure and bending will exceed the maximum stress
recommended by the manufacturer. They shall be'designed to withstand
the loads due to burial depths as indicated on drawings or a minimum of
4 feet, whichever is greater. Whether indicated on the drawings or not,
the Contractor shall determine and provide reinforcements or additional
shell thickness as required to keep the combined stresses within the
recommended maximum. The piping shall be designed to withstand H-20
traffic loadings under roads.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )' 15065
(17578 ) -4-
1i
5. FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE.
5.01. Jointing Method. All piping 14 inches and smaller shall have
coupled adhesive bonded joints unless otherwise specified. Butt joints
shall be shop fabricated to the maximum extent possible.
Flanged joints shall be provided at each valve and item of equipment to
facilitate disassembly, at each change in material, and where indicated
on the drawings.
Field butt joints, when needed, shall be made at locations at least 12
inches from any increasing or decreasing cross-section of pipe where the
pipe to be jointed has the same diameter.
The pipe supplier shall provide all gaskets, bolts, nuts, and washers
required for all connections of the piping system including connections
to all equipment.
5.02. Expansion Joints and Flexible Connections. Expansion joints and
flexible connections shall be of a hypalon.material resistant to ultra-
violet degradation and suitable for the conditions of service specified.
They shall be furnished and installed at the locations indicated on the
drawings and at other locations required for proper FRP pipe
I installation.
Expansion joints and flexible connections shall be capable of compres-
sing one inch and elongating one inch with a maximum force to cause
movement of 100 pounds or less. The joints shall also allow lateral
deflections of up to one inch. The joints shall be designed to with-
stand 25 inches of water column to 25 psig at a temperature range of 0 F
to 120 F.
Expansion joints and flexible connections shall be slip-on or flange
type. Slip-on type shall be sized to fit tightly over the outside
diameter of the FRP piping and be secured by corrosion resistant bands.
Flange type expansion joints shall have split steel retaining rings and
shall have ANSI B16.1, Class 25 diameter and drilling.
5.03. Instrument Test Openings. Two 1 inch diameter fiberglass rein-
forced plastic nipples with caps shall be provided in the odor control
piping at each instrument test location.
6. PREPARATION.
6.01. Field Measurements. Pipe lengths shall be determined from
measurements taken at the project site and not from the drawings.
6.02. Jointing Procedures Training and Certification. All joints
assembled or constructed in the field shall be performed by the pipe
manufacturer or employees of the Contractor that have been trained and
certified in writing by the pipe manufacturer. The pipe manufacturer
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
d (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15065
(17578 ) -5-
shall train the Contractor's employees in the proper jointing and
assembly procedures required for the project including hands-on
performance by the Contractor's employees. After satisfactory comple-
tion of the training by the Contractor's employees, the pipe manufac-
turer shall submit written certification that the Contractor's employees
named have satisfactorily completed all training and instruction, and
have shown the ability to perform the jointing required for the project
in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as speci-
fied herein. The pipe manufacturer shall observe each of the Contrac-
tor's employees perform each jointing procedure at least once during
training, and during field construction of the work shall observe at
least three field joints of each type, but spend not less than one
8-hour day.
7. INSTALLATION. -
7.01. Pipe Installation. Pipe shall be installed as specified and as
indicated on the drawings.
All necessary provisions shall be taken in fabrication and installation
of piping to provide throughout for expansion and contraction.
An antiseize thread compound shall be applied to all nuts and bolts.
The piping shall be supported as indicated on the drawings and in
accordance with the requirements of the pipe supports and anchor bolt
section.
Buried pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by placing the
specified pipe embedment material. Under no circumstances shall pipe be
laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid under unsuitable weather or
trench conditions.
7.02. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in
accordance with the requirements specified herein and as recommended by
the manufacturer.
7.02.01. Adhesive Bonded. The surfaces to be joined shall be
thoroughly cleaned and cut to proper shape to obtain contact. The
adhesive shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufac-
turer's recommendations.
7.02.02. Flanged. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to
slightly compress the gasket and make a good seal, but not so tightly as
to distort the flanges. A flat washer shall be installed under all nut
and bolt heads. After field drilling holes, the cut surfaces shall be
immediately coated with resin. .-
7.02.03. Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures and as specified herein. Butt _
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15065
(17578 ) -6-
joints shall be overlaid on the outside. The minimum width of the
overlay shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
Finished joints shall be built up in successive layers, shall be as
strong as the pieces being joined, and shall be as crevice -free as is
{"1
commercially practicable in accordance with ASTM D2563. The width of
the first layer shall be at least 4 inches. Successive layers shall
increase uniformly to provide the minimum total width of overlay which
�!
shall be centered on the joint as recommended by the manufacturer.
between be filled leaving
1
Crevices jointed pieces shall with resin, a
smooth inner surface.
7.03. Cleaning. The inside of all pipes, specials, and fittings shall
be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, sand, and dirt when erected.
All lines shall be thoroughly blown before placing in service.
8. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete details and specifications covering all
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe and accessories shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals section. This data shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
l
Wall thickness.
Design pressure/vacuum rating.
Design calculations.
UV inhibitor.
Stresses at supports.
Resin manufacturer, types and quantities.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15065
4.: (17578 j -7-
a' i
I
Section 15100 - MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
1. SCOPE. This section covers all valves, except where specific
requirements are stipulated in other sections.
Z. GENERAL.
2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.02. Manual Actuators. All valves, except those -which are equipped
with power actuators or are designed for automatic operation, shall be
provided with manual actuators. Unless otherwise specified or indicated
on the drawings, each manual actuator shall be equipped with an opera-
ting handwheel.
2.03. Chainwheels. Unless specifically required to be equipped with
other types of actuators, all valves with center lines more than 7'-6'
above the floor shall be provided with chainwheels and operating chains.
Each chainwheel operated valve shall be equipped with a chain guide
which will permit rapid handling of the operating chain without 'gag-
ging" of the wheel and will also permit reasonable side pull on the
chain. Suitable actuator extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to
prevent interference of chain and adjacent piping or equipment. Operat-
ing chains shall be hot -dip galvanized carbon steel and shall be looped
to extend to within 4 feet of the floor below the valve.
2.04. Wrench Nuts. Wrench nuts shall be provided on all buried valves,
on all valves which are to be operated through floor boxes, and where
indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, all
wrench nuts shall comply with Section 3.16 of AWWA C500. Not less than
two operating keys shall be furnished for operation of the wrench nut
operated valves.
2.05. Operating Stands. Cast iron or fabricated steel operating stands
shall be provided in the locations indicated on the drawings. Operating
stands shall support the handwheel or lever approximately 36 inches
above the floor. Handwheel diameter shall be not less than 8 inches. A
sleeve made from standard weight galvanized steel pipe shall be provided
for the opening in the floor beneath each operating stand.
2.06. Rotation. Unless otherwise required by the Owner, the direction
of rotation of the wheel, wrench nut, or lever to open the, valve shall
be to the left (counterclockwise). Each valve body or actuator shall
have cast thereon the word 'Open' and an arrow indicating the direction
to open.
2.07. Length Tolerance. Unless otherwise specified, the actual length
of valves shall be within 1/16 inch (plus or minus) of the specified or
theoretical length.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -1-
r' '
2.08. Ends. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified,
all 3 inch or larger buried valves shall have push -on or mechanical
joint ends; all other 2-1/2 inch or larger valves shall have flanged
ends; and all 2 inch or smaller valves shall have threaded, solder, or
welding ends as required by the piping system in which the valve is to
be installed. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, flange diam-
eter and drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or ANSI 816.5,
Class 150. Push -on and mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA
C111IA21.11. Wafer style valves shall be designed for installation
between ANSI Class 125 flanges.
2.09. Unions. A union or flanged connection shall be provided within.
2 feet of each threaded end valve unless the valve can be easily removed
from the piping.
2.10. Shop Painting. All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and acces-
sories, both interior and exterior, shall be shop painted for corrosion
protection. .The valve manufacturer's standard paint will be acceptable
provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified paint .and is
compatible with the field painting specified in the painting section.
a. Materials.
Asphalt Varnish
Coal Tar
Epoxy
For Liquid Service
For Gas Service
Rust -Inhibitive Primer
Rust -Preventive Compound
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -2-
Fed Spec TT-V-51.
Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super
Service Black" or Tnemec 046-449
Heavy -Duty Black".
Cook "920-W-965 Epicon-MW HB
Epoxy", Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard
Epoxy", or Tnemec "Hi -Build
Epoxoline Series 660.
Wisconsin Protective Coating
"Plasite 71220.
Universal type; Ameron "Amercoat
3153A Universal Primer", Cook
"391-N-167 Barrier Primer",
Kop-Coat "340 Gold Primer", or
Tnemec.037-77 Chem -Prime"
Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or
Rust-Oleum "R-90.
b. Surfaces To Be Painted.
Unfinished Surfaces
Interior Surfaces
For Liquid Service
For Gas Service
Exterior Surfaces of
Valves To Be Buried,
Submerged, or Located in
Manholes or Valve Vaults
Exterior Surfaces of
All Other Valves
Polished or Machined Surfaces
Actuators and Accessories
Asphalt varnish (two coats) or
epoxy.
Epoxy.
Asphalt varnish or coal tar.
Rust -inhibitive primer.
Rust -preventive compound.
Rust -inhibitive primer.
3. GATE VALVES. Two inch and smaller gate valves shall be Class 125,
solid wedge type. Each valve shall be of bronze construction with
screwed bonnet, rising stem, and teflon impregnated packing. Threaded
end valves shall be Milwaukee 1111480,.Stockham OB-1001, or Walworth
'Fig 55". Soldered end valves shall be Milwaukee 11490, Stockham
"B-1090, or Walworth "Fig 55SJ'.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, all 2-1/2 inch
and 3 inch gate valves for use in copper piping shall be Class 125,
solid wedge type. Each valve shall be of bronze construction with
screwed bonnet, rising stem, teflon impregnated packing, and solder -
joint ends. Valves shall be Milwaukee "1492, Stockham "B-108", or
Walworth "Fig 55SJ'.
Unless otherwise specified, all gate valves provided in flanged copper
piping shall be Class 150 with solid wedge and flanged ends. Each valve
shall be of bronze construction with screwed bonnet, rising stem, and
teflon impregnated packing. Flanges shall be flat faced with ANSI
B16.1, Class 125 diameter and drilling. Valves shall be Powell
"Fig 515" or Stockham "B-1250.
All other 3 inch and larger gate valves shall be resilient -seated as
specified in the resilient -seated gate valve section.
4. CHECK VALVES. Check valves for effluent non -potable pump discharge
piping shall be Apco "Series 800" slanting disc check valves as manufac-
tured by Valve and Primer Corporation.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
4 Y (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
f� (17578 ) -3-
1,:
Check valves for 6 inch and larger sewage or sludge piping shall be of
the unobstructed waterway, quick closing, spring -loaded, horizontal
swing type with iron body, flanged ends, and bronze trim. Hinge pins
shall be stainless steel with both ends extending through bronze -bushed
bearings and outside stuffing boxes with grease lubricated packing or
0-ring seals. Flanges shall be flat faced with ANSI/ASME B16.1,
Class 125 diameter and drilling. Equal end size check valves shall be
American Valve & Hydrant "52SC", Dresser "M&H Style 259-02", or Mueller
"A2600-6-02".
Unless otherwise specified, all 2-1/2 inch and larger check valves in
water, sludge, or other liquid piping shall be Class 125 horizontal
swing type with iron body and flanged ends. All seats, seat rings,
pins, bushings, and other parts subject to wear shall be bronze.
Flanges shall be flat faced with ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 diameter and
drilling. Swing check valves shall be Milwaukee "F-2974", Stockham
"G-931", or Walworth "Fig 8928F".
Check valves 2 inches and smaller in water, sludge, or other liquid
piping shall be Class 125 or higher, all bronze, Y-pattern, regrinding,
horizontal swing type. Threaded end valves shall be Stockham "B321" or
Walworth "Fig 3406". Soldered end valves shall be Nibco "S-413-B' or
Walworth "Fig 3046SJ".
All 2 inch and larger check valves in'air or vacuum piping shall be
Techno Corporation "Technocheck Silent Seatless Check Valves", Hoffman
'Air Check Valves", or Lamson "Check Valves". Check valves installed in
the discharge piping of centrifugal compressors shall be positioned with
the valve hinge perpendicular to the impeller shaft of the compressor.
Check valves installed in the discharge piping of compressors shall be
suitable for an operating temperature of 300 F.
Check valves smaller than 2 inches in air and vacuum piping shall be
Circle Seal 1224B" or Nupro "Series C
Check valves in PVC piping shall be PVC ball check valves with Viton
seats and seals and flanged ends, and shall be Hayward Plastics Products
"Ball Check Valve" or Nibco "Chemtrol True Union Ball Check Valve".
5. BALL VALVES. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all
2-1/2 inch and smaller shutoff valves shall be ball valves.
Two inch and smaller ball valves for air vacuum and water service shall
be of bronze or brass construction with two-piece end entry body, bronze
or brass ball, teflon or Viton stem seal, reinforced teflon seats and
thrust washer, a removable operating lever, and threaded ends'. Valves
shall be rated not less than 500 psi nonshock cold WOG and shall be
driptight in both directions. Valves shall be Conbraco Industries
"Apollo 70-100 Series', Powell 'Fig 4210T", or Stockham 'S-2161.
Two inch and smaller ball valves installed in stainless steel piping
shall be of AISI Type 316 stainless steel construction with two-piece
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -4-
end entry body, stainless steel ball, teflon or Viton stem seal, rein-
forced teflon seats and thrust washer, a removable operating lever, and
threaded ends. Valves shall be rated not less than 800 psi nonshock
cold WOG and shall be driptight in both directions. Valves shall be
Conbraco Industries "Apollo 76-100 Series", Jamesbury "Series 3000, or
Nibco 0580 Series".
Ball valves for air and water service in 2-1/2 inch size shall be
ANSI/ASME Class 150 regular port valves with split, bolted steel or
ductile iron body, hard chrome plated carbon steel ball, reinforced
teflon seats, 0-ring or adjustable chevron stem packing, a removable
operating lever, and flanged ends. Flange diameter and drilling shall
conform to ANSI B16.5, Class 150. Valves shall be driptight in both
directions and shall be Balon "Series F" or MarPac 1400" ball valves.
Three inch and larger ball valves for air and water service shall be
ANSI Class 150 regular port valves with end entry carbon steel body,
hard chrome plated carbon steel ball,. reinforced teflon seats, teflon
upper and lower stem seal, teflon body seal, a removable operating
lever, and flanged ends. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to
ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150. Valves shall be driptight in both direc-
tions and shall be Conbraco Industries "Apollo 88-100 Series", Jamesbury
"Series 5000, Fig 5150-11-2200TT", or Powell "Fig 4224T" ball valves.
Ball valves 2 inches and smaller for welded steel piping systems shall
be of three-piece design with carbon steel body and end caps, nickel
plated or hard chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, teflon seats
and seals, socket -weld ends, and a removable operating lever. Socket -
weld ball valves shall be rated at least 800 psi nonshock cold WOG and
shall be Conbraco Industries "Apollo 83-200 Series", Contromatics
"C-1122-BB-DLO, or Jamesbury "BWS22MT".
Ball valves 2-1/2 inches through 4 inches for welded steel piping
systems shall be of three-piece design with carbon steel body and end
caps, nickel plated or hard chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem,
teflon seats and seals, buttwelding ends, and a removable operating
lever. Buttwelding end ball valves shall be Contromatics
"C-1133-BB-DLO.
All shutoff valves in PVC and FRP piping shall be full-size port PVC
ball valves unless otherwise noted, with Viton 0-rings. teflon seats and
flanged ends, and shall be Nibco "Chemtrol TU Series Tru-Bloc Ball
Valve" or Hayward Plastic Products "True Union Ball Valve". The port
diameter shall not be smaller than the ID of Schedule 80 PVC pipe.
6. BUTTERFLY VALVES. Unless otherwise specified, butterfly valves
shall be of the rubber -seat tight -closing type. Except where other
types are specified, butterfly valves shall be wafer type. Valve discs
shall seat at 90 degrees with the pipe axis.
Flanged end valves shall be of the short -body type. Where mechanical
joint ends are specified, either mechanical joint or push -on ends
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
15100
-5-
conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 will be acceptable. For buried or
submerged service, shaft seals shall be 0-ring type. —
Each valve shall be provided with an actuator having a torque capability
sufficient to seat, unseat, and maintain intermediate positions under
the operating conditions specified herein. Lever actuators may be
furnished for 6 inch and smaller valves, except where chainwheel actua-
tors are required. All 8 inch and larger valves shallhaveenclosed,
geared, handwheel or chainwheel actuators with position indicator. -
Actuators shall be designed to produce the rated torque with a maximum
pull of 80 pounds on the lever or wheel.
Each valve actuator, except actuators that are buried, shall have a
valve disc position indicator mounted on the end of the valve shaft. A
disc position indicator shall also be provided on each operating stand
or the actuator mounted thereon. --
6.01. Air Service Valves. Butterfly valves in air piping shall be
industrial valves suitable for 15 psi air service, a maximum air
velocity of 100 fps, and an operating temperature of 225 F.
Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Body Cast iron.
Shaft AISI Type 304 or 316 stainless _
steel.
Disc Bronze, or cast iron with
corrosion -resistant metal
plating.
Seat EPDM, or other elastomer with
suitable temperature rating.
Shaft Bearings Upper and lower bearings,"bronze
or reinforced teflon.
Shaft Seal Synthetic rubber rings with
suitable temperature rating.
6.02. Schedule. Butterfly valves shall be as follows:
Valve Type of Type of
No. Size Service Installation Ends 1 Actuator(2)
inches
BV-3201 4 Air Drop Exterior W L
thru
BV-3284
(1) Letters define valve ends as follows:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS I)
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -6-
W Wafer
(2) Letters define actuators as follows:
L - Lever
Valves for throttling service shall be equipped with an infinitely
variable locking device or a totally enclosed geared actuator. Other
lever actuators shall be designed so that the valve can be readily
locked open, closed, or in at least five intermediate positions.
7. HOSE VALVES AN HYDRANTS.
Interior Locations (or where indicated on drawings)
3/4 Inch Hose Faucets
Water Piping Chicago Faucets "No. 7T", Prier
Brass "C-1381, or Tanner 01235".
1-1/2 Inch Hose Valve
Valve
Hose Nipple
Exterior Locations
3/4 Inch Wall Hydrants
3/4 Inch Box Type Yard
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -7-
Class 125 angle valve with
bronze body, seat, and disc;
screwed bonnet, rising stem, and
threaded ends; Milwaukee "5040,
Stockham "B-216", or Walworth
"Fig 30590.
One piece, all brass, double
male ends, NPT and straight hose
thread; Croker Standard
"No. 146", Elkhart "No. 3061, or
Powell "Fig 526"; with cap and
chain in exterior locations.
All brass, freezeproof type,
with Vacuum Breaker with vacuum
breaker; Josam 171050", Wade
"W-86200, Woodford "650, Smith
156091, or Zurn "Z-13101.
Nonfreeze type with bronze box,
Hydrants cover, and casing for 3
feet bury; Josam 17160-3/41,
Wade "W-86091, Smith 05810", or
Zurn "Z-13901.
1-1/2 Inch Post Type Nonfreeze type with bronze
Yard Hydrants casing for 3 feet bury; Josam
"71701-1J2", Wade "W-8610",
Smith 15913", or Zurn "Z-1390".
8. THROTTLING VALVES.
8.01. Angle Valves. Angle valves shall be furnished where indicated or
specified and may also be used as throttling valves for air or water
service.
Two inch and smaller angle valves for water service shall be Class 125
valves with bronze body, seat, and disc; screwed bonnet; rising stem;
teflon impregnated packing; and threaded ends. Valves shall be Mil-
waukee "504", Stockham "B-2160, or Walworth "Fig 30590.
Two inch and smaller angle valves for air service shall be Class 150
valves with bronze body and seat, rising stem, teflon impregnated
packing, and threaded ends. Valves shall be Milwaukee "595", Stockham
"B-222", or Walworth "Fig 3096".
Angle valves for air and water service in 2-1/2 inch and larger sizes
shall be of cast iron construction with bronze trim, bolted bonnet,
outside screw stem and yoke, teflon impregnated packing, and flanged
ends. Flanges shall be flat faced with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 diameter
and drilling. Valves shall be Powell "Fig 1254" or Walworth --
"Fig 8907F".
8.02. Globe Needle Valves. For water and air service, throttling
valves smaller than 314 inch shall be Class 200 globe needle valves of
bronze constructionwith union or screwed bonnet, rising stem, teflon or
graphite impregnated packing, and threaded ends. Valves shall be Mil-
waukee "600", Powell "Fig 1801, or Stockham "B-64". Larger throttling
valves shall be angle valves or globe valves.
8.03. Globe Valves. Globe valves shall be furnished where indicated or
specified and may also be used as throttling valves for air or water
service.
Two inch and smaller globe valves for water service shall be Class 125
valves of bronze construction with bronze seat and disc, screwed bonnet,
rising stem, and teflon impregnated packing. Threaded end valves shall
be Milwaukee 0502", Stockham "B-169, or Walworth "Fig 3058". Soldered
end valves shall be Milwaukee 11502" or Stockham "B-17".
Two inch and smaller globe valves for air service shall be Class 150
valves of bronze construction with bronze seat, teflon disc, union '-
bonnet, rising stem, teflon impregnated packing, and threaded ends.
Valves shall be Milwaukee "590", Stockham "B-22", or Walworth
"Fig 30951. Soldered end valves shall be Milwaukee 115901, Stockham
"B-24", or Walworth "Fig 3095 SJ".
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -6-
r
Globe valves for water.service in 2-1/2 inch and larger sizes shall be
of cast iron construction with bronze trim, bolted bonnet, outside screw
stem and yoke, teflon impregnated packing, and flanged ends. Flanges
shall be flat faced with ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125 diameter and
drilling. Valves shall be Milwaukee IF29811, Powell "Fig 1253 or
Walworth "8096F".
9. ELECTRIC VALVES. Valves which are specified or indicated on the
drawings to be electrically operated shall be of the following types:
Valve Size Type
1" or smaller Solenoid valve
1-1/2" through 30 Motor operated globe valve
9.01. Solenoid Valves. Solenoid valves shall have brass or bronze
bodies and bonnets and packless construction without packing box or
sliding seal. Solenoid valves shall be equivalent to the following
types listed in ASCO Catalog 32:
Size
Operation
Catalog No.
inch
1/4
Normally Closed
DF8262G20
1/4
Normally Closed
DF8262G22
1/4
Normally Open
DF8262G260
1/4
Normally Open
DF8262G261
1/4
Normally Open
DF8262G262
1/4
Three Way
DF8320G172
3/8
Normally Closed
DF8210G1
1/2
Normally Closed
DF8210G2
3/4
Normally Closed
DF8210G3
1
Normally Closed
DF8210G4
Solenoid coils for ac service shall be 115 volts ac, 60 Ez, encapsu-
lated, Class F, for continuous duty at rated voltage plus or minus
10 percent and 40 C ambient, in a NEMA Type 1 or 4 (outdoor) enclosure
with a conduit knockout.
A strainer shall be provided in the piping immediately upstream from
each solenoid valve in water service. Strainers shall be provided in
the piping on both sides of each solenoid valve in each water seal
system. Strainers shall be Y-pattern units with brass or bronze body
and monel or stainless steel screens. Strainers shall be Cash -Acme
ISYO, Hoffman Specialty "Model 420", or Wright -Austin "Y -The blowoff
from each strainer shall be equipped with a shutoff valve.
9.02. Motor Operated Globe Valves. Motor operated globe valves in
2 inch and smaller size shall be soft seat type with Class 125 pressure
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -9-
rating, cast iron body. single seat, stainless steel trim, and screwed
ends. Valves shall be Honeywell "Model 1407".
Motor operated globe valves in 2-1/2 inch and larger sizes shall be
Class 125 with cast iron body, bronze or stainless steel trim, 0-ring
sealed cylinder, and flanged ends. Flange diameter and drilling shall
conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125. Valves shall be Honeywell "Model
8107
Motor operated globe valves shall be suitable for operation on a
115 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power supply and shall have an actuator
cycle time of 30 seconds from fully open to fully closed.
10. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES. Each pressure reducing valve.shall be
designed to provide tight shutoff under conditions of no flow and shall
not "hunt" under ordinary flow conditions. Pressure reducing valves
shall be selected and sized as recommended by the valve manufacturer.
10.01. Water Service. Pressure reducing valves for water service shall
be installed in the following locations:
Valve W-2101 Waste Pumps - Primary Sludge Pumping Station
Valve W-2102 Scum Pump - Primary Sludge Pumping Station
Valve W-2401 Waste Pumps - Secondary Sludge Pumping Station
Valve W-2402 Scum Pump - Secondary Sludge Pumping Station
Valve W-3301 Waste Pumps - Aeration Pipe Gallery
Pressure reducing valves for water service.shall be suitable for opera-
tion under the following conditions: --
W-2101 W-2102 W-2401 W-2402 W-3301
Maximum inlet
90
90
90
90
90
pressure, psig
Minimum inlet
70
70
70
70
70
psig
Reduced pressure
40
40
40
40
40
setting, psig
Maximum flow, gpm
3
1
3
1
3 '—
Ordinary flow, gpm
3
1
3
1
3
Valves with flow greater
than
150
gpm shall
be pilot
operated, globe
pattern and shall be
Cla-Val 190G-01
Series"
with screwed connections,
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
)
r
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
& EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4
)
15100
(17578
)
-10-
in 2 inch and smaller sizes, and flanged connections.in 2-1/2 inch and
�-+
larger valves. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI ,
B16.1, Class 125. Other water pressure reducing valves shall be Fisher
°
Controls "Type 75A Water Pressure Regulator" or Kieley & Mueller 'Type
461".
is
A strainer shall be installed in the piping immediately upstream from
each 2 inch or smaller pressure reducing valve. Strainers shall be
Y-pattern units with bronze, brass, or cast iron body and monel or
stainless steel screens. Strainers shall be Cash -Acme "SY", Hoffman
Specialty "Model 4200, Metraflex "Style S", or Wright -Austin 'Y'.
Strainers installed in copper piping shall be of bronze or brass con-
struction. The blowoff from each strainer shall be equipped with a
shutoff valve.
10.02. Air and Gas Service. Pressure reducing valves for air and gas
service shall be installed inthefollowing locations:
t;
Valve G-1401 Laboratory
l
Valve G-2101 MAU-2101 - Primary Sludge Pumping Station
Valve G-2401 MAU-2401 - Secondary Sludge Pumping Station
Pressure reducing valves for air and gas service shall be suitable for
operation under the following conditions:
i.
G-1401 G-2101 G-2401
Maximum inlet pressure, psig 3.0 3.0 3.0
Minimum inlet pressure, psig 2.7 1.5 1.3
4
Reduced pressure setting,
Maximum flow, scfh 30 500 500
Ordinary flow, scfh 21 321 313
scfm
Minimum permissible pressure 7 7
7
tt
at maximum flow, inch W.C.
Specific gravity or gas .65 .65
.65
E
Pressure reducing valves for air or gas service shall be aluminum or
bronze stainless steel trimmed, composition disc valves as manufactured
by Fisher Controls or Kieley & Mueller. Valves for gas service shall be
AGA approved.
11. AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES. Individual air
release
valves and combination air release and vacuum relief valve
assemblies
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -11-
a
shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings. Each
valve assembly shall be installed complete with appurtenant piping and .-
valves as specified or indicated on the drawings.
Individual air release valves shall have an inlet connection of the site
indicated on the drawings, and shall be GA Industries "Figure AR",. -
Multiplex "Crispin Type P", or Valve and Primer •Apco 200A".
Combination air release and vacuum relief valves shall be of the - -�
integral type with.a valve assembly which functions as both an air and
vacuum valve and an air release valve. Valves shall have an inlet
connection of the size indicated on the drawings, and shall be GA
Industries -"Figure GH-7K","Multiplex "Crispin Universal Air Valves or
Valve and Primer "Apco Standard Combination Air Release Valves".
Air-release/vacuum relief valves for vertical diffusion vane pumps shall
be deep well type, equipped with surge valve, throttling valve, and
externally mounted air release valve. The deep well air valve assembly
shall be as manufactured by Valve and Primer or Crispin.`
The valves shall be designed for a water working pressure of 300 psi
and shall have stainless steel floats. All working parts shall be con-
structed of brass, stainless steel, or other corrosion -resistant
materials.
The exhaust from each valve shall .be piped to a suitable disposal point.
A shutoff valve shall be provided in the piping to each air release
valve or combination air release and vacuum relief valve assembly.
12. NATURAL GAS VALVES. Valves in natural gaspiping shall be eccen-
tric action cocks with cast iron bodies and bronze or nickel plated
cast iron plugs and shall be DeZurik "Fig 425-RS510. Natural gas
valves larger than 4 inch size shall be DeZurik "Fig 100-RS24" or �.
"Fig 100-RS25" eccentric plug valves.
13. CURB STOPS. Curb stops shall be bronze construction, tee head
type, Ford Meter Box "Ford Ball Valve", Hays "Nuseal Curb Stop", or
Mueller "Mark II Oriseal".
14. BASIN PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES. Pressure relief valves shall be
provided in the bottom concrete slab of the basins at the locations
indicated on the drawings. The valves shall be 4 inch size with cast
iron body, nonseparating cast iron or bronze cover, neoprene or Buna-N
seat, bottom strainers. and a length suitable for the depth of concrete
in which the valves are installed. Pressure relief valves shall be
American -Darling "Tank Pressure Relief Valve -Floor Type" or Neenah
"R-5000, Type CO.
Crushed rock or gravel shall be installed below the slab as indicated on
the drawings. The crushed rock or gravel fill shall be covered with
polyethylene film before the concrete slab is placed. After the slabs
are completed, holes shall be punched in the film beneath each valve.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -12- _
15. MUD VALVES. Mud valves shall be flanged end, rising stem type,
with threaded stem, seat ring, and gate ring of bronze. Each valve
shall be provided with coupling nut. extension stem, stem guides. and
operating stand, wheel, or wrench nut as required by the drawings. Mud
valves shall be installedwith the valve seat level.
16. BACKFLOW PREVENTER. The backflow preventer shall consist of a dual
check valve assembly with reduced pressure zone between the check valves
and dual shutoff valves. Backflow preventers in 2 inch and smaller
sizes shall be Cla-Val "Model RP-2", Febco "Model 825Y". Hersey "Beeco
Model FRP-II", or Watts "No. 909" with bronze body and threaded end
connections. Backflow preventers in 2-1/2 inch and larger sizes shall
be Febco "Model 825N, Hersey "Beeco Model 6CM1, or Watts "No. 909" with
cast iron body and flat faced flanged end connections. Flange diameter
and drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. All backflow
preventers shall be provided with an air gap fitting and drain piped to
a bell -up or floor drain.
17. FIRE HYDRANTS. Fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C502. The
information required by Section 2 is as follows:
Affidavit of compliance
Not required.
Catalog and maintenance
Required.
E
data
Type of shutoff
Compression or gate.
Size of hydrant
5-1/4 inches.
Inlet connection
6 inch, locked push -on.
Harnessing lugs
Not required.
Bury length
4.5 feet.
Outlet nozzles
Two 2-1/2 inch hose and one
�!
4 inch pumper (4 threads per
inch with a crest dimension
Outlet nozzle threads
of 4.995 inches)
ANSI/NFPA 1963.
Direction to open
Counterclockwise.
Stem seals
0-ring.
Outlet nozzle cap
Required.
chains
Drain outlet
Required.
Hydrants shall be set so that
at least the minimum pipe cover is pro- -
vided for the branch supply line and the nozzles are at least 12 inches
above finished grade. Each hydrant shall be set on a concrete founda-
tion at least 18 inches square and 6 inches thick. Each hydrant shall
be blocked against the end of
the trench with concrete or shall be suit-
ably anchored.
7.
Hydrant drainage shall be provided by installing at least 7 cubic feet
of gravel or crushed stone around the hydrant and below the! top of the
hydrant supply pipe.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -13-
All hydrants shall stand plumb. Hydrants with pumper nozzles shall have
hose nozzles parallel with, and the pumper nozzle perpendicular to, the
curb line. Hydrants having hose nozzles 90 degrees apart shall be set
so that the line bisecting the angle between the nozzles is perpendi-
cular to the curb line. Hydrantslocatedbehind curbs, where sidewalks
extend close to or abut the curb, shall be set so that no portion of the
pumper or hose nozzle caps will be less than 6 inches nor more than
12 inches from the gutter face of the curb. Where set between the curb
and sidewalk, or between the sidewalk and property line,,no portion of
the hydrant or nozzle cap shall be within 6 inches of the sidewalk.
Operating nuts shall be 1-1/2 inch pentagons measured to a point. The r
hydrants shall be painted orange.
The hydrants shall be Clow -Medallion, American Darling "Model B-84-B",
Dresser "Style 129-09", or Mueller Centurion.
Immediately before installation of a hydrant, the following operations
shall be performed: (a) the hydrant shall be thoroughly inspected;
(b) the hydrant interior shall be thoroughly cleaned; and (c) the
hydrant shall be opened and closed as many times as may be necessary to
determine if all parts are in proper working order, with valves seating
properly and the drain valve operating freely.
18. TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be
furnished and installed where required by the drawings. Each tapping
sleeve and valve shall be designed for a minimum water working pressure
of 150 psi and shall be tested at 300 psi.
With the exception of the valve ends and ,other modifications necessary
for tapping service, tapping valves shall conform to AWWA C500 and shall
be Mueller "No. H-667". Each tapping valve shall be provided with a
flanged inlet end designed, faced, and drilled for attachment to the
outlet flange of the tapping sleeve; with an outlet end provided with a
tapping flange for attachment of a standard drilling machine; and also
with a mechanical joint type bell end for connection of the branch main.
Tapping sleeves shall be of the flanged outlet type designed for
attachment to the flanged inlet end of the tapping valve, and shall be
provided with mechanical joint ends at each end of the run. Tapping
sleeves shall be Mueller "No. H-615".
19. EXTENSION STEMS. Extension stems and stem guides shall be fur-
nished and installed where specified, indicated on the drawings, or
.otherwise required for proper valve operation. Extension stems shall be
of solid steel and shall be not smaller in diameter than the stem of the
valve actuator shaft. Extension stems shall be connected to the valve --
actuator by means of a Lovejoy "Type D" single universal joint with
grease -filled protective boot. All stem connections shall be pinned.
At least two stem guides shall be furnished with each valve requiring
stem guides. Stem guides shall be of cast iron construction, bronze
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15100
(17578 ) -14-
0
I
r-
bushed and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide spacing shall not
exceed 100 times the stem diameter or 10 feet, whicheveris,smaller.
The top stem guide shall be designed to carry the weight of the exten-
sion stem. The extension stem shall have a collar; the collar shall be
pinned to the stem and shall bear against the stem thrust guide.
Extension stems shall be provided for buried valves when the valve
actuator is 4 feet or more below finished grade. Each extension stem
for a buried valve shall extend to within 6 inches of the ground.
surface, shall be provided with spacers which will center the stem in
the valve box, and shall be equipped with a wrench nut.
20. FLOOR BOXES. Where openings through concrete slabs are provided
for key operation of valves with the operating nut being in or below the
slab, such openings shall be provided with a cast iron floor box com-
plete with cover. Each floor box shall be of the depth required for
installation in the slab indicated on the drawings. Where the operating
nut is in the slab, the stem shall have a guide to maintain the nut in
the center of the box; where below the slab, the opening in the bottom
of the box shall permit passage of the operating key. Covers shall have
cast thereon designation of the service for which the valve! is used. -
Each floor box and cover shall be shop coated by dipping in asphalt
varnish.
21. VALVE BOXES. Unless otherwise specified, each valve buried to a
depth of 4 feet or less shall be provided with a slide type valve box.
Valve boxes shall be cast iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for the
depth of cover required by the drawings. Not more than one extension
will be allowed with each slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be
not less than 5 inches in inside diameter, shall have a minimum thick-
ness at any point of 3/16 inch, and shall be provided with suitable cast
iron bases and covers.
Each valve buried to a depth greater than 4 feet shall be provided with
a valve box consisting of a cast iron cover and a 6 inch cast iron pipe
section. The cover shall be a Clay & Bailey "No 2193" or Tyler "Series
6890-A'. The pipe shaft shall be sized to extend from the valve to
5 inches inside the valve box cover. Covers shall have cast thereon
designation of the service for which the valve is used.
All parts of valve boxes, bases, and covers shall be shop coated by
dipping in asphalt varnish.
Top sections and covers for valve boxes which are to be provided with.
position indicators shall be designed for proper installation of the
position indicator and accessories.
Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be
placed directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box
brought flush with the finished grade. After being placed in proper.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
15100
-15-
position. earth shall be filled in around each valve box and thoroughly
tamped on each side of the box.
22. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts
or drawings covering the items furnished under this section shall be
submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
Drawings and data submitted shall include complete connection and
schematic wiring diagrams for electric actuators and controls.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) '15100
(17578 ) =16-
r
Section 15101 - BUTTERFLY VALVES
1. SCOPE. This section covers AWWA butterfly valves for cold water
service as indicated in the valve and flow element schedule section and
the Butterfly Valve Schedule included herein. Butterfly valves shall be
furnished complete with actuators and accessories as specified herein.
All other butterfly valves are covered in the miscellaneous valves
section.
2. GENERAL.
2.01. Acceptable Products. Butterfly valves furnished under this
section shall be limited to the following:
Manufacturer Size Rantte
American -Darling All sizes
DeZurik All sizes
M&H 14 inch and larger
Mueller 12 inch and larger
Pratt All sizes
2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
all butterfly valves, including actuators, shall conform to the appli-
cable requirements of ANSIJAWWA C504.
2.03. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.04. Marking. Supplementing the requirements of Section 6.1 of the
governing standard, the country of origin shall be cast on the outside
of the body and on the disc of each valve.. An identifying serial number
shall be stamped on a corrosion -resistant plate attached to the valve
body.
2.05. Power Supply. Power supply to equipment will be 480 volts,
60 Hz, 3 phase.
2.06. Shop Painting. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces,
except finished surfaces, bearing surfaces, and stainless steel com-
ponents, of valves and accessories shall be shop painted for corrosion
protection. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be accept-
able provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and
is compatible with the specified field painting.
The following surfaces shall be painted:
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
r (17578 ) -1-
1
Unfinished Surfaces
Interior Surfaces Epoxy.
Exterior Surfaces of Coal tar.
Valves To Be Buried
or Located in Manholes.
Exterior Surfaces of Rust -inhibitive primer.
Other Valves
Polished or Machined Surfaces Rust -preventive compound.
Actuators and Accessories Rust -inhibitive primer.
Interior coatings shall comply with AWWA C550 and shall be free of —
holidays. The total dry film thickness of shop -applied coatings shall
be not less than:
Minimum
Type of Coating Dry Film Thickness
Coal Tar 6 mils
Epoxy 10 mils
Rust -Inhibitive Primer 3 mils
2.07. Temporary Number Plates. Each butterfly valve shall be factory
tagged or marked in such a manner as to identify the valve by number or
service as indicated in the Butterfly Valve Schedule, and the valve and
flow element schedule section. `
2.08. Permanent Number Plates. Each butterfly valve, except buried
valves, shall be provided with a permanent number plate. Numerals shall
be not less than one inch high and shall be black baked enamel on
anodized aluminum plate. The location of number plates and the method
of fastening shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
3. MATERIALS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials
used in the manufacture of butterfly valves and actuators shall conform
to the requirements of ANSIJAWWA C504.
Shop Coatings
Coal Tar Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super
Service Black", Tnemec "46-449 --
Heavy Duty Black", or Valspar
"35-J-10 Hi -Build Bituminous
Coating". —
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -2-
Epoxy Cook 1920-W-965 Epicon-MW HB
Epoxy", Engard "Engard 4601,
Indurall "Induron Ruff Stuff
t 3300 HMW Epoxy", Kop-Coat
OHi-Gard Epoxy", Soc-Co
"Keysite 7501, Tnemec "Series 20
Pota-Pox", or Valspar 078-W-3B
Val -Chem Hi -Build Tank Epoxy".
Rust -Inhibitive Primer
Rust -Preventive Compound
4. VALVE CONSTRUCTION.
Cook 1391-N-167 Barrier Coat",
Kop-Coat "340 Gold Primer",
Tnemec 037-77 Chem -Prime", or
Valspar 113-R-28 Chromox
Primer".
Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or
Rust-Oleum "R-90.
4.01. Valve Bodies. Valves shall be short -body type except where wafer
type is specified.
a. Bodv Stops. The use of a stop or lug cast integrally with or
mechanically secured to the body for the purpose of limiting
disc travel by means of direct contact or interference with
the valve disc (in either the open or closed position) will
not be acceptable.
b. Flanges. Flanges shall be finished to true plane surfaces
within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. The finished face
shall be normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maxi-
mum angular variation tolerance of 0.002 inch per foot of
flange diameter.
C. Mechanical Joint Ends. Where mechanical joint ends are speci-
fied, either mechanical joint or push -on ends conforming to
ANSIJAWWA C111JA21.11 will be acceptable.
4.02. Valve Shafts. Valve shafts shall be fabricated of AISI Type 304
or 316 stainless steel. The use of shafts having a hexagonal cross
section will not be acceptable.
4.03. Valve Discs. Valve discs shall be secured to shafts by means of
solid, smooth sided, stainless steel or monel taper pins or dowel pins.
Each taper pin or dowel pin shall extend through or shall wedge against
�.., the side of the shaft and shall be mechanically secured in place. The
use of bolts, setscrews, knurled or fluted dowel pins, expansion pins,
roll pins, tension pins, spring pins, or other devices in lieu of the
pins specified herein will not be acceptable.
i
k.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -3-
4.04. Valve Seats. Acceptable seating surfaces mating with rubber are
AISI Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, monel, or plasma -applied nickel
chrome overlay for all valves; bronze for 20 inch and smaller valves;
and alloy cast iron for 20 inch and smaller manually operated valves.
Valve seat configurations which rely on the mating pipe flange to hold
the seat in position in the valve body will not be acceptable.
4.05. Shaft Seals. Shaft seals shall be of the chevron or 0-ring type.
4.06. Thrust Bearings. Each valve shall be provided with one or more
thrust bearings in accordance with the governing standard. Thrust bear-
ings which are directly exposed to line liquid and which consist of a
metal bearing surface in rubbing contact with an opposing metal bearing
surface will not be acceptable.
5. VALVE ACTUATORS. Valve actuators shall be provided, installed, and
adjusted by the valve manufacturer. Actuator mounting arrangements and
handwheel or chainwheel positions shall be as indicated on the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.
5.01. Manual Actuators. Unless otherwise required by the Owner,_ the
direction of rotation of the wheel or wrench nut to open each valve
shall be to the left (counterclockwise). Each valve body or actuator
shall have .cast thereon the word "Open" and an arrow indicating the
direction to open.
The housing of traveling -nut type actuators shall be fitted with a
removable cover which shall permit inspection and maintenance of the
operating mechanism without removing the actuator from the valve.
Travel limiting devices shall be provided inside the actuator for the
open and closed positions. Travel limiting stop nuts or collars
installed on the reach rod of traveling -nut type operating mechanisms
shall be field adjustable and shall be locked in position by means of a
removable roll pin, cotter pin, or other positive locking device. The
use of stop nuts or adjustable shaft collars which rely on clamping
force or setscrews to prevent rotation of the nut or collar on the reach
rod will not be acceptable.
The valve and actuator shall be designed so that shaft seal leakage
cannot enter the actuator housing.
5.01.01. Handwheels. Handwheel diameters shall be at least 8 inches
but not more than 24 inches for 30 inch or smaller valves and not more
than 30 inches for 36 inch and larger valves.
5.01.02. Chainwheels. Unless specifically required to be equipped with
other types of actuators, all valves with center lines more than 7'-6"
above the floor shall be provided with chainwheels and operating chains.
Each chainwheel operated valve shall be equipped with a chain guide
which will permit rapid handling of the operating chain without
"gagging" of the wheel and will also permit reasonable side pull on the
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -4-
chain. Suitable actuator extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to
prevent interference of the chain with adjacent piping or equipment.
Operating chains shall be hot -dip galvanized carbon steel and shall be
looped to extend to within 4 feet of the floor below the valve.
5.01.03. Wrench Nuts. Wrench nuts shall be provided on all buried
valves, on all valves that are to be operated through floor boxes, and
where indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise directed by the
Owner, all wrench nuts shall comply with Section 3.16 of AWWA C500. At
least two operating keys shall be furnished for operation of the wrench
nut operated valves.
1 5.01.04. Lever Actuators. Lever actuators shall be designed to produce
the specified torque with a maximum pull of e0 pounds. Levers on valves
for throttling service shall have an infinitely variable locking device,
rand levers for other valves shall be capable of being locked in at least
It five intermediate positions between fully open and fully closed.
u
7
5.02. Electric Actuators. Electric actuators for 12 inch and smaller
butterfly valves shall be quarter -turn type and shall be limited to Auma
"SG05" through "SG120, EIM "Series Q", Limitorque "LY", or Rotork "AQ".
Electric actuators for 14 inch and larger valves shall be multiturn type
and shall be limited to Auma "SA07.1" through "SA48.1", EIM "Series
M/MG", Limitorque "L120" with "T Series" worm gear actuator, or Rotork
"A Range" with "Type IW" or "Type IWS" worm gear actuator. Electric
actuators produced by other manufacturers will not be acceptable.
Each electric actuator shall be furnished complete with a motor,
gearing, handwheel, limit and torque switches, lubricants, heating
elements, wiring, and terminals. Each actuator shall be constructed
as a self-contained unit with a weatherproof housing and shall be
integrally assembled on the applicable valve by the valve manufacturer.
The housing of actuators for 12 inch and smaller valves shall be either
cast iron or die-cast aluminum alloy. The housing of actuators for
14 inch and larger valves shall be cast iron. Each actuator indicated
in the Butterfly Valve Schedule as submersible shall be constructed.as
a self contained unit with a cast-iron submersible housing. Actuators
designed for submersible service shall be designed to prevent the
entrance of water when submerged 20 feet for 48 hours.
Actuators indicated in the Butterfly Valve Schedule to be electric
actuated shall be designed to require not more than 180 seconds nor less
than 60 seconds to operate from fully open to fully closed position or
the reverse.
Actuator motors may be mounted horizontally adjacent or vertically above
the reduction gearing. All gearing shall be either oil bath or grease
lubricated. If grease lubrication is used, in no case shall motors be
mounted vertically below the gearing.
5.02.01. Motors. Motors shall be totally enclosed, high torque design
made expressly for valve actuator service, capable of operating the
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
15101
-5-
valve under full differential pressure for a complete open -close and
reverse cycle of travel at least twice in immediate succession without
overheating. Motors shall be designed in accordance with NEMA standards
and shall operate successfully at any voltage within 10 percent above or
below rated voltage. Motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated.
Valves indicated in the Butterfly Valve Schedule to be electrically
actuated shall be provided with motors rated at 460 volts, 60 Hz,
3 phase.
5.02.02. Power Gearing. Power gearing shall consist of hardened steel
spur or helical gears and alloy bronze or hardened steel worm gear, all
suitably lubricated, designed for 100 percent overload, and effectively
sealed against entrance of foreign matter. Steel gears shall be
hardened to not less than 350 Brinell. Gearing shall be designed to be
self-locking so that actuation of a torque switch by a torque overload
condition will not allow the actuator to restart until the torque over-
load has been eliminated. The use of planetary or cycloidal gearing or
aluminum, mild steel, or nonmetallic gears will not be acceptable.
5.02.03. Handwheel Mechanism. The handwheel shall not rotate during
motor operation. During handwheel operation the motor shall not affect
the actuator operation. The actuator shall be responsive to electrical
power and control at all times and, when under electrical control, shall
instantly disengage the handwheel. The handwheel shall rotate counter-
clockwise to open the valve. An arrow indicating the opening direction
and the word "Open" shall be cast on the handwheel. The force required
to operate the handwheel shall not exceed'80 pounds.
5.02.04. Torque Switches. Torque and thrust loads in both closing and
opening directions shall be limited by torque limit switches. Each
torque switch shall be provided with a micrometer adjustment and refer-
ence setting indicator. The adjustment shall permit a variation of
approximately 40 percent in torque setting. Switches shall have a
rating of not less than 6 amperes at 120 volts ac and 0.5 ampere at
115 volts dc.
5.02.05. Limit Switches. The design of each multiturn electric actu-
ator shall be such that it is readily field adaptable for four limit
switch assemblies. Each switch assembly shall have at least three
separate limit switches. Each switch assembly shall be operated by the
driving mechanism and shall be independently adjustable to trip at any
point at and between the fully open and fully closed valve positions.
Each quarter -turn actuator shall be provided with end -of -travel limit
switches in addition to four spdt switches, each independently adjust-
able at any point of valve travel.
All switches shall have an inductive contact rating of not less than
6 amperes at 120 volts ac, 3 amperes at 240 volts ac, 1.5 amperes at
480 volts ac, and 0.5 ampere at 115 volts dc.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -6-
Limit switches shall -be furnished as indicated in the valve and pump
control schematics on the drawings.
5.02.06. Heating Elements. Space heating elements shall be provided
to prevent condensation in the motor and limit switch housing. Heating
elements shall be rated 120 volts ac. Heaters shall be continuously
energized.
5.02.07. Terminal Facilities. Terminal facilities for connection to
motor leads, switches, position transmitter, and heating elements shall
be provided in readily accessible terminal compartments.
5.02.08. Controller. Each valve shall be furnished with a reversing
controller located either inside the actuator housing or mounted on the
housing in a NEMA Type 4 stainless steel enclosure. The controller
shall be equipped withs
a. A motor overload protective device in each phase.
b. A circuit breaker type disconnect.
C. A control power transformer with fused secondary, if power
supply is greater than 120 volts ac, with volt ampere capacity
suitable for starter control plus continuous service to space
heater elements in motor housing, limit switch compartment,
and controller enclosure.
[: d. A terminal.block with connectors for all external controls.
All leads from the actuator motor and limit switch assembly
shall be ;routed to terminal connections in the controller for
external connections to all other control devices.
e. A nameplate of permanent type construction on the controller
enclosure identifying the equipment controlled as VALVE NO.
(valve tag number). The letters and numerals shall be not
less than 3/4 inch high.
Reversing controllers shall be both mechanically and electrically inter-
locked and provided with the necessary direct.operated auxiliary con-
tacts for required interlocking and control.
"Open -Stop -Close' push buttons and a "Local -Off -Remote' selector switch.
and red and green indicating lights shall be furnished as a part of the
enclosure.
Valve controllers shall be expressly selected for long life, reliable
and maintenance -free service, under rugged service conditions.
5.02.09. Control Module. Valves listed for modulating service in the
Butterfly Valve Schedule shall be provided with a control module for
position modulating type service. The control module shall be mounted
within the valve actuator limit switch housing. The module shall accept
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -7
a standard 4-20 mA do analog input signal with a load impedance of not
greater than 400 ohms. The control module shall contain adjustments for
span, zero, gain, and deadband.
The actuator shall have a slide -wire type position feedback potentiom-
eter which 'provides a position feedback signal to the control module.
A "Manual -Automatic" selector switch shall be provided. The actuators
shall have "Open -Close" momentary contact push buttons for local
electric operation in the manual mode.
5.02.10. Control Performance. For any operating torque within the
specified range of the valve actuator, the valve and actuator shall
perform within these specified limits:
Linearity Linearity of actual valve posi-
tion as compared to demand
signal shall be within plus or
minus 4.0 percent of span over
the entire operating range.
Repeatability For any repeated demand signal
to the valve actuator, the
actual valve position shall be
repeated within 0.5 percent of
span.
Deadband: Deadband of the valve actuator
shall be adjustable from 1.0 to
10 percent of span.
Hysteresis For any repeated demand signal
to the valve actuator, from
either an increasing or a
decreasing direction, the actual
valve position shall be repeated
within one degree of valve shaft
rotation.
6. EXTENSION STEMS. Extension stems and stem guides shall be furnished
and installed where specified, indicated on the drawings, or otherwise
required for proper valve operation. Extension stems shall be of solid
steel and shall be not smaller in diameter than the stem of the valve
actuator shaft. Extension stems shall be connected to the valve actua-
tor by means of a Lovejoy "Type D" single universal joint with grease
filled protective boot. All stem connections shall be pinned.
At least two stem guides shall be furnished with each valve requiring
stem guides. Stem guides shall be of cast iron construction, bronze
bushed, and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide spacing shall not
exceed 100 times the stem diameter or 10 feet, whichever is smaller.
The top stem guide shall be designed to carry the weight of the eaten-
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -8-
sion stem. The extension stem shall have a collar; the collar shall be
pinned to the stem and shall bear against the stem thrust guide.
Extension stems shall be provided for buried valves when the valve
actuator is 4'feet or more below finished grade. Each extension stem
for a buried valve shall extend to within 6 inches of the ground sur-
face, shall be provided with spacers which will center the stem in the
valve box, and shall be equipped with a wrench nut.
6.01. Extension Bonnet. Butterfly valves BV-003, -005, -006, -007, and
BV-010 shall be provided with an extension bonnet to elevate the
electric activator 3 feet above grade. The bonnet shall be capable of
accepting full specified torque load of the actuator.
7. POSITION INDICATORS. Unless otherwise specified, each valve shall
be provided with a position indicator to display the position of the
disc.
Each valve actuator, except actuators that are buried, shall have a
valve disc position indicator mounted on the end of the valve shaft. A
disc position indicator shall also be provided on each operating stand
or the actuator mounted thereon.
Position indicators will not be required for buried valves.
8. VALVE BOXES. Each valve buried to a depth of 4 feet or less shall
be provided with a slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be cast
iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for the depth of cover required by
the drawings. Not more than one extension will be allowed with each
slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be not less than 5 inches in
inside diameter, shall have a minimum thickness at any point of
3/16 inch, and shall be provided with suitable cast iron bases and
covers..
Each valve buried to a depth greater than 4 feet shall be provided with
a valve box consisting of a cast iron cover and a 6 inch cast iron pipe
section. The cover shall be a Clay & Bailey "No. 2193" or Tyler 'Series
6890-A". The pipe shaft shall be sized to extend from the valve to
5 inches inside the valve box cover.
All parts of valve boxes, bases, and covers shall be shop coated by
dipping in asphalt varnish.
Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be
placed directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box
brought flush with the finished grade. After being placed in proper
position, earth shall be filled in around each valve box and thoroughly
tamped on each side of the box.
9. INSTALLATION. Unless otherwise necessary for proper operation or as
permitted by the Engineer, all butterfly valves shall be installed with
the shaft horizontal.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -9
r.
Whenever
an actuator must be
removed to permit installation
of a
butterfly
valve, the actuatorshall be promptly reinstalled
and shall be
inspected
and
readjusted by
a representative of the
valve manufacturer.
Prior to
acceptance
of the valve by the Owner, the manufacturer's
representative
shall submit
a written report to the
Engineer
certifying
that the
valve
and actuator
have been inspected and
adjusted
and are
suitable
for the service conditions set forth herein.
10. BUTTERFLY
VALVE SCHEDULE.
Minimum
Actuator
Type of AWWA Type.of '
Torque
Mode of
Valve No.
Site
Service Installation Class 1 Actuator
Caoabilit4(2) Operation
inch -pounds
BV-2101,
14
Bio-Tower
In -Plant 25A-F Electric
1,680
Modulating
-2102
Filter
Recirculation
BV-2201
20
Bio-Tower
Exterior 25A-F Electric
3,966
Open -Shut
thru
Filter
-2205
Influent/
Recirculation
BV-2208
20
Bio-Tower
Exterior 25A-F Handwheel
3.966
Open -Shut
thru
Filter
-2212
Influent/
Recirculation,
BV-2206,
24
Bio-Tower
Exterior 25A-F Haudwheal
6,598
Open -Shut
-2207
Filter
Influent/
Recirculation
BV-4001,
30
EPS Discharge
Exterior 75A-F Electric
26,177
Opau-Shut
-4002,
to LLAS
-4003
BV-4004,
20
EPS Discharge
Exterior 75B-7 Electric
10,471
Open -Shut
-4005
to LLAS
BV-4006
10
Nonpotable
Exterior 15OA-7 Electric
2,767
Open -Shut
Water
BV-003
30
EPS Discharge
Buried 75A-MJ Electric
26,177
Open -Shut
to LLAS
(Submersible)
BV-005,
36
EPS Discharge
Buried 75A-MJ Electric
38,286
Throttling
-006
to LLAS
(Submersible)
BV-007
16
EPS Discharge
Buried 75A-MJ Electric
5,772
Open -Shut
to Holding
(Submersible)
Pond
BV-008,
36
EPS Discharge
Buried 75A-MJ Wrench
38,286
Open -Shut
-009
to LLAS
Nut
BV-010
18
EPS Discharge
Buried 75B-MJ Electric
8,000
Throttling
to SPS
(Submersible)
BV-011
24
Return
Buried 23A-MJ Wrench
5,609
Open -Shut
Activated
Nut
Sludge -
Plant No. 3
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -10-
r
f
Actuatrn-
Type of AWWA Type of Torque Hods of
Valve Ho. Size Service Installation Class(l) Actuator Capability(2) Operation
inch -pounds
BV-012 24 EPS Discharge Buried 75B-MI drench 16,423 Open -Shut
to SPs
�1) Suffix letters define valve ends as followse
F - Flanged
W -Wafer
MJ - Mechanical joint
S - Single flange
(2) The manufacturer's rated torque capacity for each butterfly valve actuator shall be at least"
equal to the actuator torque capability specified herein. If valves with as AWWA class
designation higher than listed above are furnished, actuator torque capabilities shall be
increased accordingly and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
11. DRAWINGS An DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
covering the valves and their appurtenances shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals section. Submittal drawings shall
clearly indicate the country of origin of all cast gray iron and ductile
riron valve components.
L Drawings submitted shall include separate wiring diagrams for each
electrically operated or controlled valve and the electrical control
r- equipment therefor. Each drawing shall be identified with the valve
number or name as specified herein.
When requested by the Engineer, certified copies of physical and
chemical test results shall be submitted for the materials of con-
struction of valve components.
Certified copies of the results of all tests as required by Section 3.8
and Section 5 of ANSI/AWWA C504, together with an affidavit of compli-
ance as indicated in Section 1.7. shall be furnished to the Engineer
before the valves are shipped.
�. (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15101
(17578 ) -11-
I
F
7
Section 15102 - ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
1. SCOPE. This section covers all eccentric plug valves. Plug valves
shall be furnished complete with actuators and accessories as specified
herein.
2. GENERAL.
2.01. Acceptable Products. Eccentric plug valves furnished under this
section shall be limited to DeZurik, Milliken, and Victaulic. The
products of other manufacturers will not be acceptable.
2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
electric actuators shall conform to applicable requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C540.
2.03. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment,Stipula-
tions shall apply to the equipment furnished under this section.
2.04. Marking. The body of each valve shall be marked with the
manufacturer's name, size, pressure rating, and the country of origin of
the body casting. All markings shall be cast on the outside surface of
the body. An identifying serial number shall be stamped on a corrosion -
resistant plate attached to the valve body.
2.05. Shop Painting. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces,
except bearing and finished surfaces and stainless steel components of
valves and accessories, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection.
The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable provided it
is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible
with the specified field painting.
The following surfaces shall be painted:
Unfinished Surfaces
Interior Surfaces
For Liquid Service
Exterior Surfaces of
Valves To Be Buried,
or Located in Manholes.
Exterior Surfaces of
Other Valves
Polished or Machined Surfaces
Actuators and Accessories
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
(17578 ) -1-
Asphalt varnish (two coats) or
epoxy.
Coal tar.
Rust -inhibitive primer.
Rust -preventive compound.
Rust -inhibitive primer.
Interior epoxy coatings shall comply with AWWA C550 and shall be free of
holidays. The total dry film thickness of shop -applied coatings shall
be not less than:
Tyne of Coating
Minimum Dry Film Thickness
Asphalt Varnish
3 mils
Coal Tar
6 mils
Epoxy
10 mils
Rust -Inhibitive Primer
3 mils
2.06. Temporary Number Plates,
Each eccentric plug valve shall be
factory tagged or marked in such
a manner as to identify the valve by
number as indicated in the Plug Valve Schedule or the valve and flow
element schedule section.-
2.07. Permanent Number Plates.
Each plug valve, except buried valves,
shall be provided with a permanent number plate. Numerals shall be not
less than one inch high and shall
be black baked enamel on anodized
aluminum plate. The location of
number plates and the method of
fastening shall be acceptable to
the Engineer.
3. MATERIALS. Materials used in the manufacture of eccentric plug
valves shall be as follows:
:Body
Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B;
or ductile iron. ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12.
Plug
Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B.
Plug Facing
Neoprene or Buna-N, 70 Type A
durometer hardness in accordance
with ASTM D2240.
Body Seat
Welded nickel overlay.
Upper and Lower Trunnion
Sleeve type; stainless steel
Bearings
or teflon fabric with stainless
steel backing.
Upper Bearing
TFE or Delrin.
Stem Seal
V»type packing or U-cups, Buna-N
or TFE.
Shop Coatings
Asphalt Varnish
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
(17578 ) -2-
Fed Spec TT-C-494.
r
Coal Tar Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super
r Service Black", Tnemec 146-449
Heavy Duty Black", or Valspar
[[[ "35-J-10 Hi -Build Bituminous
Coating".
Epoxy
For Liquid Service Cook "920-W-965 Epicon-MW EB
Epoxy", Kop-Coat "Hi -Gard
Epoxy", Tnemec "Series 20
Pota-Pox", or Valspar "78-W-3B
Val -Chem Hi -Build Tank Epoxy".
Rust -Inhibitive Primer Cook 0391-N-167 Barrier Coat",
Kop-Coat "340 Gold Primer",
Tnemec "37-77 Chem -Prime", or
Valspar 013-R-28 Chromox
Primer".
Rust -Preventive Compound Houghton "Rust Veto 344". or, ,
Rust-Oleum."R-9'.
r4. VALVE CONSTRUCTION.
4.01. Valve Bodv. The valve port area of each valve shall be at least
80 percent of the cross section of the connecting piping for 20 inch and
smaller valves and 70 percent for 24 inch and larger valves. Valves
shall provide tight shutoff at the rated pressure from either direction.
r An adjustable closed position plug stop shall be provided.
Each valve body shall be plainly marked to indicate the seat end.
Actual length of 10 inch and smaller valves shall be within 1/16 inch
(plus or minus) of the theoretical length. Actual length of 12 inch and
larger valves shall be within 1/6 inch (plus or minus) of the theo-
retical length.
Valve ends shall be compatible with connecting piping. Unless otherwise
specified or indicated on the drawings, all valves shall have flanged or
grooved ends. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1,
Class 125. Flanges shall be flat faced and finished to true plane sur-
faces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. The finished face shall
be normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular varia-
tion tolerance of 0.002 inch per foot of flange diameter. Grooved end
dimensions shall conform to AWWA C606, Table 5, for rigid joints. When
grooved end valves are to be installed in flanged piping, two flange
adapters compatible with the connecting piping shall be provided with
each valve. Mechanical joint ends shall conform to ANSI/AWWA
11 C111/A21.11.
Valve bodies shall be rated for a working pressure of at least 150 psi.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
(17578 ) -3-
4.02. Plug. The plug shall be of one-piece construction and shall have
a cylindrical or spherical seating surface eccentrically offset from the
center of the plug shaft. The interference between the plug face and
body seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall be externally
adjustable in the field with the valve in the line under pressure. Plug
surfaces shall be faced with a resilient material as specified.
4.03. Seats. Seats shall be cast in the body and shall have raised,
welded -in nickel overlay not less than 0.050 inch thick on all surfaces
in contact with the plug face. The overlay shall be at least 90 percent
nickel and have a Brinell hardness of 200 or greater.
4.04. Stem Seals. The valve shaft shall be sealed by U-cups or by at
least four self-adjusting chevron type packing rings.
5. VALVE ACTUATORS. Each valve actuator shall be designed to open or
close the valve under all operating conditions. Actuators shall be
designed for the maximum pressure differential across the valve as set
forth in the Plug Valve Schedule.
Actuator mounting arrangements and handwheel or chainwheel positions
shall be as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
5.01. Manual Actuators. All valves shall be provided with manual
actuators. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, each geared manual
actuator shall be equipped with an operating handwheel. Unless other-
wise.required by the Owner, the direction of rotation of the wheel,
wrench nut, or lever to open the valve shall be to the left (counter-
clockwise). Each valve body or actuator shall have cast thereon the
word "Open" and an arrow indicating the direction to open.
Totally enclosed geared actuators shall be provided on all 8 inch and
larger valves, on all 6 inch and larger valves where the unseating
pressure exceeds 25 psi, on all 4 inch and larger buried valves, and on
all valves to be designated chainwheel operated unless chain levers are
indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings
or specified herein, all other 6 inch and smaller valves shall be lever
operated.
Geared actuators for plug valves not listed in the Plug Valve Schedule
in this section shall be rated for a differential pressure across the
valve, on the seating side, of 100 psi for 8 inch and smaller valves.and
50 psi for 10 inch and larger valves.
Manual actuators shall produce the required torque with a maximum pull
of 80 pounds on the lever or handwheel. Actuator components shall with-
stand, without damage, a pull of 200 pounds on the handwheel or chain -
wheel or an input of 300 foot-pounds on the operating nut.
Unless otherwise specified, actuators for valves to be buried, sub-
merged, or installed in vaults or manholes shall be sealed to prevent
the entrance of water when submerged to a depth of 20 feet.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
(17578 ) -4-
5.01.01. Handwheels. Handwheel diameters shall be at least 6 inches .
but not more than 24 inches for 30 inch and smaller valves and not more
than 30 inches for 36 inch and larger valves.
5.01.02. Chainwheels. Unless specifically required to be equipped with
other types of actuators, all valves with center lines more than 7'-6"
l
above the floor shall be provided with chainwheels and operating chains.
Each chainwheel operated valve shall be equipped with a chain guide
which will permit rapid handling of the operating chain without
"gagging" of the wheel and will also permit reasonable side pull on the
chain. Suitable extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to prevent
interference of the chain with adjacent piping or equipment. Operating
chains shall be hot -dip galvanized carbon steel and shall be looped to
extend to within 4 feet of the floor below the valve.
5.01.03. Lever Actuators. In any building or structure containing
lever operated valves, at least two operating levers shall be provided
for each size and type of lever operated valve.
5.01.04. Wrench Nuts. Wrench nuts shall be provided on all buried
valves, on all valves that are to be operated through floor boxes, and
where indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise directed by the
Owner, all wrench nuts shall comply with Section 3.16 of AWWA C500. At
least two operating keys shall be furnished for operation of the wrench
nut operated valves.
6. TESTING. Except as modified herein, eccentric plug valves shall be
tested in accordance with Section 5 of ANSIIAWWA C504 entitled "Rubber -
Seated Butterfly Valves". Each valve shall be performance tested in
accordance with Section 5.2 and shall be given a leakage test and a
hydrostatic test as described in Sections 5.2.2 and 5.2.3. The leakage
test shall be applied to the seating face of the plug (tending to unseat
the plug) at the rated pressure of the valve.
Each valve shall be leaktight in both directions when closed by the
actuator with the maximum differential pressure applied to the plug as
specified in the Plug Valve Schedule.
7. POSITION INDICATORS. Unless otherwise specified, each valve shall
be provided with a position indicator to display the position of the
plug -relative to the body seat opening.
For valves installed in interior locations, the indicating pointer shall
be mounted on the outer end of the valve operating shaft extension and
shall operate over an indicating scale on the operating mechanism cover.
A suitable stuffing box or other seal shall be provided to prevent the
entrance of water where the shaft passes through the cover.
Position indicators will not be required for buried valves.
8. INSTALLATION. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all
eccentric plug valves shall be installed with the shaft horizontal and
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
(17578 ) -5-
i
the plug.in the upper half of the valve body. Valves in sewage,,sludge,
or scum lines shall be installed with the seat on.the upstream end.
9. PLUG VALVE SCHEDULE.
Type of
Type of
Type of
Type of
Valve No.
Size
Service
Installation
Actuator
Ends
inches
PV-2101,-2105,
6
Primary Sludge
Interior
HW
F
-2107, -2109,
Suction
-2110, -2111,
-2112.
PV-2102, -2106,
6
Waste Primary
Interior
CW
F
-2108,
Sludge Discharge
PV-2103
6
Primary Scum
Interior
HW
F
Suction
PV-2104
6
Primary Scum
Interior
CW
F
Discharge
PV-2401,
6
Waste Secondary
Interior
HW
F
-2405, -2407,
Sludge Suction
-2409, -2410,
-2411, -2412
PV-2402,-2406
6
Waste Secondary
Interior
CW
F
-2408
Sludge Discharge
PV-2404
6
Secondary Scum
Interior
CW
F
Discharge
PV-2403
6
Secondary Scum
Interior
HW
F
Suction
PV-3201,
30
Aeration Basin
Interior
CW
F
-3202. -3203
Influent
PV-3301,
6
Waste Secondary
Interior
HW
F
-3303, -3305
Sludge Suction -
Plant No. 3
PV-3302,
6
Waste Secondary
Interior
HW.
F
-3304. -3306
Sludge Discharge
-
Plant No. 3
CW - Chainwheel
HW - Handwheel
F - Flange
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
(17578 ) -6
0
[:.
10. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
r, covering the valves and their appurtenances shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals section. Submittal drawings shall
clearly indicate the country of origin of all cast gray iron and ductile
iron valve components.
Certified copies of reports covering proof -of -design testing of valves,
as set forth in Section 5.2 of ANSI/AWWA C504, together with an affi-
davit of compliance, as indicated in Section 1.7 of ANSI/AWWA C504 shall
be submitted to the Engineer before the valves are shipped.
When requested by the Engineer, certified copies of physical and chemi-
cal test results shall be submitted for the materials of construction of
valve components.
�•. (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15102
r (17578 ) -7-
1,
r
7
Section 15104 - RESILIENT -SEATED GATE VALVES
1. SCOPE. This section covers resilient -seated AWWA gate valves for
water service as indicated in the Gate Valve Schedule included herein.
�! 2. GENERAL.
2.01. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein.
all resilient -seated gate valves shall conform to the applicable
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C509.
F
r
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. ;The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Temporary Number Plates. Each gate valve shall be factory tagged
or marked to identify the valve by the number indicated in the Gate
Valve Schedule.
2.04. Marking. Supplementing the requirements of Section 7.1 of the
governing standard, the country of origin of the valve body shall be
cast on the exterior of the body. The country of origin of the gate
shall be molded into the resilient seat material.
2.05. Shop Coating. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces
of valves and accessories shall be shop coated for corrosion protection.
The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable provided it
is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible
with the specified field painting.
The following surfaces shall be coated:
Interior Surfaces
Exterior Surfaces of
Valves To Be Buried
Polished or Machined Surfaces
Epoxy.
Epoxy or coal tar.
Rust -preventive compound.
The protective coating on interior surfaces of each valve shall be
subjected to a nondestructive holiday test in accordance with ASTM G62,
Method A, and shall be electrically void -free.
Exterior surfaces of valves coated with coal tar shall be field painted
in accordance with the painting section. Field painting of valves
coated with epoxy shall be limited to touchup painting of damaged
surfaces. Holiday testing of exterior coatings will not be required.
The total dry film thickness of shop -applied coatings shall be not less
thane
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15104
(17578 ) —1—
Tyne of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness
Coal Tar 6 mils
Epoxy 10 mils
3. MATERIALS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials
used in the manufacture of resilient -seated gate valves shall conform to
the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C509.
3.01. Bronze Components. All wetted bronze valve components shall be
fabricated of bronze containing less than 15 percent zinc. All wetted
aluminum bronze components shall be heat treated to inhibit dealumini-
zation in accordance with Section 2.2 of ANSI/AWWA C504.
3.02. Gaskets. Gasket material shall be sheet paper or elastomer, free
from asbestos and corrosive ingredients.
3.03. Shop Coatings. The following coating materials shall be shop
applied. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable
provided it is functionally equivalent to the products specified herein
and is compatible with the specified field painting.
Coal Tar Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super
Service Black", Tnemec "46-449
Heavy Duty Black", or Valspar
"35-J-10 Hi -Build Bituminous.
Coating".
Epoxy Manufacturer's standard fusion -
bonded or liquid epoxy.
Rust -Preventive Compound
4. VALVE CONSTRUCTION.
Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or
Rust-Oleum "R-9".
4.01. Flanges. Flanges shall be finished to true plane surfaces within
a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. The finished face shall be normal to
the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular variation tolerance
of 0.001 inch per inch of flange diameter.
4.02. Stem Seals. Valves with nonrising stems and all buried valves
shall be provided with 0-ring stem seals.
4.03. Rotation. The direction of rotation of the handwheel or wrench
nut to open the valve shall be to the left (counterclockwise).
5. EXTENSION STEMS. Extension stems shall be furnished and installed
where specified, indicated on the drawings, or otherwise required for
proper valve operation. Extension stems shall be of solid steel and
shall be not smaller in diameter than the valve stem. Extension stems
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15104
(17576 ) -2-
r
t.
�y shall be connected to the valve stem by means of a Lovejoy 'Type D"
single universal joint with grease filled protective boot. All stem
connections shall be pinned.
Extension stems shall be provided for buried valves when the valve is
4 feet or more below finished grade. Each extension stem for a buried
valve shall extend to within 6 inches of the ground surface, shall be
provided with spacers which will center the stem in the valve box. and
T' shall be equipped with a wrench nut.
6. VALVE BOXES. Each valve buried to a depth of 4 feet or less shall
be provided with a slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall. be cast
iron, extension sleeve -type, suitable for the depth of cover required by
the drawings. Not more than one extension will be allowed with each
slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be not less than 5 inches in
inside diameter, shall have a minimum thickness at any point of
3/16 inch, and shall be provided with suitable cast iron buses and
covers.
Each valve buried to a depth greater than 4. feet shall be provided with
a valve box consisting of a cast iron cover and a 6 inch cast iron pipe
section. The cover shall be Clay & Bailey "No. 2193' or Tyler 'Series
6890-A". The pipe shaft shall be sized to extend from the valve to
5 inches inside the valve box cover.
All parts of valve boxes, bases. and covers shall be shop coated by
dipping in asphalt varnish.
Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be
placed directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box
�> brought flush withthefinished grade. After being placed in proper
position, earthfill shall be placed around each valve box and thoroughly
tamped on each side of the box.
7. INSTALLATION. Valves shall be handled and installed in accordance
with the recommendations set forth in the appendix to ANSI/AWWA C509 and
the recommendations of the manufacturer.
8. GATE VALVE SCHEDULE.
Type of
Valve No. Size Service Installation Ends Stem Actuator
inches
GV-015,-016,-018, 6 PW Buried MJ NRS WN
-019, 026
GV-017,-020, 10 NPW Buried Mi NRS WN
-025,-024,-023
GV-021,-022 6 NPW Buried MJ NRS WN -
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15104
�. (17578 ) -3-
Abbreviations used in the Gate Valve Schedule are as follows:
Ends
MJ Mechanical joint
Stem
NRS - Nonrising stem
Actuator
WN - Wrench nut
Service
PW - Potable Water
NPW - Nonpotable Water
9. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
covering the valves and their appurtenances shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals section.
Submittal drawings shall clearly indicate the country of origin of all
cast gray iron or ductile iron valve components. When requested by the
Engineer, certified copies of physical and chemical test results shall
be submitted for the materials of construction of valve components.
All valves shall be tested in accordance with Section 6 of ANSIJAWWA
C509. Certified copies of the results of all tests, together with an
affidavit of compliance as indicated in Section 1.5,-shall be furnished
to the Engineer before the valves are shipped.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15104
(17578 ) -4-
F
r
Section 15112 - SLUICE GATES
1. SCOPE. This section covers sluice gates and actuators. Sluice
gates shall be furnished complete with wall thimbles, frames, operating
stems, stem guides, actuators, anchor bolts, and appurtenances.
2. GENERAL. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated,
assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full
conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
Gates and actuators shall be furnished with all necessary parts and
accessories indicated on the drawings, specified, or otherwise required
for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the latest
standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production
of sluice gates.
2.01. Governinta Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
all sluice gates and manual actuators shall conform to the applicable
requirements of AWWA C501.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to the equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless
steel and shall conform to the requirements of the anchor bolts and
expansion anchors section.
2.04. Shop Painting. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined
surfaces, shall be shop cleaned by blasting in accordance with the
coating manufacturer's recommendations and finish painted with an epoxy
or epoxy/polyurethane coating system. Actuators and other nonsubmerged
components shall be painted with one coat of epoxy paint having a dry
film thickness of at least 5 mils and one topcoat of polyurethane having
a dry film thickness of at least 2 mils. All components subject to
submergence shall be painted with two coats of epoxy paint having a
total combined dry film thickness of at least 10 mils. Finish color
shall be medium gray, except for handwheels, levers, and other operating
devices which shall be safety red. Field painting of gates, actuators,
and appurtenances, other than touchup painting, will not be required. A
sufficient quantity of additional coating materials shall be furnished
by the gate manufacturer to permit field touchup painting of damaged
coatings.
2.05. Number Plates. Each sluice gate shall be provided with a number
plate. Numerals shall be not less than one inch high and shall be black
baked enamel on anodized aluminum plate. The location of number plates
and the method of attachment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The
number assigned to each gate shall be as indicated in the Sluice Gate
Schedule at the end of this section.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
EXPANSION)
15112
-1-
2.06. Minimum Metal Thickness. Where so indicated in the governing
standard, the design safety factors stipulated with regard to tensile, �-
compressive, and shear strength of materials used shall be observed. In
addition, unless otherwisepermittedby the Engineer, all portions of
submerged cast iron components of each gate, exclusive of wall thimbles ^
and stem guide wall brackets, shall have a metal thickness of not less
than 3/4 inch.
3. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Sluice gates, actuators, and
appurtenances shall be designed for the conditions and requirements
listed in the Sluice Gate Schedule.
Gates shall be designed for the design seating and unseating heads
indicated in the schedule. Actuators, regardless of type, shall be
sized to produce the torque or thrust required to operate the applicable
gate when the gate is subject to the seating and unseating operating ti
heads set forth in the schedule.
Both the design and the operating heads shall be measured from the --
surface of the liquid to the center line of the gate.
4. MATERIALS. Copper alloys susceptible to either dezincification or v
dealuminization, as set forth in Section 2.3 of AWWA C501, shall not be
used for wetted gate components. Materials of construction shall be as
follows:
Wall Thimble, Gate Frame, Cast iron, ASTM A120, Class B,
Slide, Side Guides, Stem or ASTM A48, Class 30.
Guides, and Reinforcing
Members
Seating Faces Phosphor bronze, ASTM B139, �.
CA 510; or silicon bronze, ASTM
B98, CA 651 or CA 655.
Wedges Silicon bronze, ASTM B584, --
CA 872 or CA 878.
Adjusting Bolt and Silicon bronze, ASTM B98,
Locknut CA 655; or stainless steel,
ASTM F593 and F594, Type 304,
305, or 316
Operating Stems Silicon bronze, ASTM B98,
and Couplings CA 655; or stainless steel, ASTM
A276, Type 302 or 304, or ASTM
A582, Type 303.
Stem Guide Liners Silicon bronze, ASTM B98, CA 651
or CA 655; or phosphor bronze,
ASTM B139, CA 510.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15112
(17578 ) -2-
r"
Manual Actuators
h
Gear and Bearing
Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B.
Housing, and
or ASTM A48, Class 30.
Floorstand
Gears
Aluminum bronze, ASTM B148,
CA 952, CA 954, or CA 958;
manganese bronze, ASTM B584,
CA 865 or CA 867; or carbon
steel, AISI 8620 or 4140.
j�
Lift Nut
Manganese bronze, ASTM B584,
t
CA 863 or CA 865; or silicon
bronze, ASTM B584, CA 872 or
CA 878.
Stem Covers
Transparent butyrate plastic
pipe•
Assembly Fasteners
Silicon bronze, ASTM B98, CA 651
or CA 655; or stainless steel,
ASTM F593 and F594. Type 304,
1,
305, or 316.
Coal Tar Paint
Medium Consistency
Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super
Service Black", Tnemec "46-449
Heavy Duty Black", or Valspar
"35-J-10 Hi -Build Bituminous
Coating".
Epoxy Paint
High solids polyamide epoxy;
Ameron "Amerlock 400" or Kop-
Coat "Super Hi -Gard Epoxy
Coating".
Polyurethane
Aliphatic polyurethane; Ameron
"Amercoat 450HS" or Kop-Coat
"1122BRS Linear Polyurethane".
Grout
As specified in the grout
1
section.
f
5. CONSTRUCTION.
i
5.01. Wall Thimbles. Wall thimbles
shall be furnished by the gate
manufacturer. The type of wall thimbles
shall be as listed in the
i
Sluice Gate Schedule. The length
of wall thimbles shall be as indicated
on the drawings.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
15112
E
(17578 )
-3-
5.02. Frames. Gate frames shall be of the configuration listed in the
Sluice Gate Schedule. All joint surfaces and bearing areas shall be `
machined. Accurately machined dovetail grooves shall be provided in the
frame face to retain seating faces.
5.03. Slides. Slides shall be of one-piece construction with
accurately machined dovetail grooves in the back face to retain seating
faces.
Each slide of rising stem gates shall be provided with a socket to
receive the stem thrust nut. The socket shall be constructed so that
the thrust nut can be secured to the stem after the stem -has been --
screwed into the nut.
5.04. Wedges. Adjustable wedges shall be provided on each gate slide.
The number of wedges shall be as recommended by the gate manufacturer,
except that at least two side wedges shall be provided on each side of
each gate. Side wedge systems utilizing adjustable wedges mounted on
the guides will not be acceptable.
5.05. Seating Faces. Seating faces shall fill and permanently lock
into finished dovetail grooves on each slide and frame. Seating faces
shall be pressed or expanded into the grooves.
5.06. Operating Stems. Each sluice gate shall be provided with an _
operating stem of the type listed in the Sluice Gate Schedule:
Stems shall be of sufficient size to withstand, without damage or perma-
nent distortion, the tensile and compressive stresses resulting from the -�
application of 250 foot-pounds of torque on the pinion shaft of geared
actuators by means of a crank.
Contact surfaces of stem threads shall be rolled or machined and
polished to a 63 microinch finish, or smoother.
6. MANUAL ACTUATORS.
6.01. General Requirements. Manual actuators of the types listed in
the Sluice Gate Schedule shall be provided by the sluice gate r
manufacturer.
All bearings and gears shall be totally enclosed in a weathertight
housing having a sufficient number of fittings to permit periodic lubri-
cation of all internal moving components without partial or total
disassembly of the mechanism. The pinion shaft of crank -operated
mechanisms shall be supported by roller bearings or needle bearings.
Each manual actuator shall be designed to operate the gate when a
40 pound effort is applied to the crank or handwheel and shall be able _
to withstand, without damage, an effort of 200 pounds.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15112
(17578 ) -4
F
r;
6.02. Floorstands. Floorstands shall be designed to transfer operating
thrusts to the supporting structure. Each floorstand shall be designed
to position the crank approximately 36 inches above the supporting
surface, or adjacent operating floor or platform.
6.03. Stem Covers. Unless otherwise specified, each rising stem manual
actuator shall be provided with a stem cover.
Stem covers for all gates shall be constructed of transparent plastic
pipe and shall be furnished with a removable end cap, condensation
vents, and a clear mylar position indicating tape. The marking tape
shall be adhesive backed and shall be permanently marked and calibrated
in feet and inches. The tape shall be field applied to the stem cover
after the gate has been installed. The tape shall be positioned so that
the height of the slide will be indicated by reference to the top of the
stem.
7. INSTALLATION. Sluice gates and appurtenances shall be handled and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Wall thimbles shall be accurately positioned and supported to prevent
shifting during placement of surrounding concrete. Square or
rectangular thimbles shall be carefully braced both horizontally and
vertically to prevent distortion.
Each sluice gate shall be carefully installed and adjusted for proper
operation. Care shall be taken to avoid warping the gate frames and to
maintain tolerances between seating faces.
Each actuator shall be accurately set and plumbed and shall be in proper
alignment with the gate and stem before the actuator is grouted in
place. Operating stems shall be installed in proper alignment and shall
not bind in the lift nut or stem guides.
The threaded portion of each plastic stem cover shall be wrapped in at
least two layers of teflon thread tape immediately prior to installation
of the cover on the actuator.
All bolts shall be tightened and all items requiring lubrication shall
be lubricated. Anti -seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied
to the threaded portion of stainless steel anchor bolts during installa-
tion and tightening of nuts. Excess lubricant shall be thoroughly
removed following final tightening.
Following the completion of each sluice gate installation, the gate
shall be operated through at least two complete open -close -cycles,
readjusted and reoperated as necessary, and left in a condition
acceptable to the Engineer.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
15112
-5-
N0cnr
Ln Z to
V H t"
oo�old O
H H 7C
Z"�H
0 C
Z
�-3
En
to
ro
H
0
Z
v v v v
r
Ln
Of r
I r
N
8. SLUICE GATE SCHEDULE.
Gate No.
(1)
Location
(2)
Service
Nominal
Design
Read
Operating
.Head
Gate
Center
Line
Elevation
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(3)
Wall
Thimble
Type
(4)
Frame
Type
and Shape
(5)
Type of
Closure
(6)
Type of
Actuator
(7)
Type of
Mounting
(8)
Type of
Stem
Operation
Size,
WxH, or
Dia,
inches
feet of water
Seating/
Unseating
Seating/
Unseating
SG-2403
SDS2
SO
30 x 30
12.33/12.33
2.75/2.75
3118.17
3130.50
FR
FLR
CC
CGFS
DCNSC
RS
SG-3301
-3302
SDS3
SO
36 x 36
16.00/16.00
12.75/12.75
3118.36
3134.45
FR
FLR
CC
CGFS
DCNSC
RS
8.01. Abbreviations. Abbreviations used in the Sluice Gate Schedule
are defined as follows:
(1) Location abbreviations are as follows:
SDS2 - Secondary Distribution Structure - Plant No. 2
SDS3 - Secondary Distribution Structure - Plant No. 3
(2) Service abbreviations are as follows:
SO - Shutoff, gate will normally be fully open or closed
(3) Wall thimble abbreviations are as follows:
FC - "F" shape, circular
FR - "F" shape, rectangular
(4) Abbreviations for frame types and shapes are as follows:
FLR - Flanged, rectangular
(5) Closure abbreviations are as follows:
CC - Conventional closure
(6) Abbreviations for types of actuators are as follows:
CGFS - Crank -operated, geared, concentric
floorstand
(7) Abbreviations for types of mountings are as follows:
DCNSC - Downward closing, non -self-contained
(8) Abbreviations for types of stem operation are as follows:
RS - Rising stem
9. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
covering the sluice gates, actuators, and appurtenances shall be sub-
mitted in accordance with the submittals section. Each drawing shall be
identified with the applicable gate designation.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15112
(17578 ) -7-
I
r.,
Section 15114 - SLIDE GATES
1. SCOPE. This section covers slide gates and actuators. Slide gates
shall be furnished complete with frames, slides, seals, actuators,
operating stems, anchor bolts, and appurtenances.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
Gates and actuators shall be furnished with all necessary parts and
accessories indicated on the drawings, specified, or otherwise required
for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the latest
product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of slide
gates.
2.01. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
manual slide gate actuators, operating stems, stem couplings, and stem
guides, and stem covers shall conform to the applicable requirements of
AWWA C501.
2.02. Design. Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout the
design and especially in the design of parts subject to intermittent or
alternating stresses. In general, working stresses shall not exceed
one-third of the yield point or one -fifth of the ultimate strength of
each material.
Gates shall be designed to.fit into the structures as indicated on the
drawings.
2.03. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to the equipment furnished under this section.
2.04. Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless
steel and shall conform to the requirements of the anchor bolts and
expansion anchors section.
2.05. Shop Painting. Actuators and other ferrous metal surfaces,
except stainless steel. shall be shop painted as specified in the
General Equipment Stipulations.
2.06. Shop Testing. Gates shall be completely assembled in the shop to
ensure that all parts fit together properly.
2.07. Number Plates. Each slide gate shall be provided with a number
plate. Numerals shall be not less than one inch high and shall be black
baked enamel on anodized aluminum plate. The location of number plates
and method of attachment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 } 15114
(17578 ) -1-
number assigned to each slide gate shall be as indicated in the Slide
Gate Schedule at the end of this section.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Slide gates will be used for shutoff service at
the locations indicated in the Slide Gate Schedule.
4. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Slide gates, actuators, and
appurtenances shall be designed for the conditions and requirements
specified in the Slide Gate Schedule.
4.01. Leakage. Maximum allowable leakage of slide gates shall not
exceed 0.30 gallon per minute per foot of wetted perimeter at any head
up to the maximum seating head specified.
5. MATERIALS.
Frames, Guides, Slides, - Stainless steel, AISI Type 304L
and Reinforcing Members, or 316L.
and Yoke Beams
Flush Bottom Closure Seal Compressible neoprene.
Hollow Bulb J-Seals Compressible neoprene.
Seal Retainer Bar Stainless steel, AISI, Type 304 -
_ L or 316L.
Slide Seats and Bearing UHMW polyethylene.
Bars
Operating Stems Stainless steel, AISI Type 304
Actuator Cross Shafts
Stem Covers
Assembly Fasteners
Coal Tar Paint
Medium Consistency
Grout
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15114
(17578 ) -2
or 316.
Stainless steel, AISI Type 304.
Transparent butyrate plastic
pipe.
Stainless steel, AISI Type 302,
303, or 304.
Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super
Service Black", Tnemec "46-444
Heavy Duty Black", or Valspar
835-J-10 Hi -Build Bituminous
Coating".
As specified in the grout
section.
r
I,
dl
6. CONSTRUCTION.
5'
6.01. Frames. Each frame shall be an integral unit of extruded or
welded structural shapes having a thickness of not less than 114 inch.
Frames shall be designed for embedment in concrete or installation on
the face of concrete walls or pipe flanges as indicated in the Slide
Gate Schedule. Embedded frames shall be recessed so that the waterway
is not obstructed. Flanged pipe mounted frames shall be installed with
an insulated flange between pipe flange and frame.
Guides shall be provided on each side of each frame. Guides shall be
sufficiently strong so that no further reinforcing will be required
where the guides extend above the operating floor. Guides shall support
the entire height of the slide in all positions.
All self-contained gates shall be equipped with a yoke, shop welded to
the top of vertical frame members to support the actuator. Yokes shall
be fabricated from a pair of rolled or extruded channels or angles and
shall be designed for deflection of not more than 1/720 of the span when
the gate is operated at the specified maximum seating pressure. Each
yoke shall be designed to permit vertical removal of the slide. Actua-
tors shall be mounted so that no eccentric loads are transmitted to the
yoke.
6.02. Slides. Slides shall have a thickness of not less.than 1/4 inch
and shall be provided with welded stiffeners to limit deflection to
11360 under the maximum seating or unseating head specified. Slides
shall be adequately reinforced to withstand, without permanent distor-
tion, the maximum thrust which can be transmitted by the operating stem.
Each slide shall have a reinforced pocket or internally threaded nut
welded to the slide for connection of the stem. The pocket or nut shall
be designed to withstand the maximum thrust which can be transmitted by
the operating stem.
6.03. Closures. The bottom of each slide gate frame shall be recessed
so that the waterway is not obstructed. A compressible seal shall be
securely attached to the bottom of the slide or to the frame invert.
The seal shall be of sufficient length to seal the bottom corners of
each slide.
Each gate so indicated in the Slide Gate Schedule shall be provided with
resilient hollow bulb J-seals attached to the frame members.
Each J-seal shall be provided with a full-length retainer bar which
shall compress,the seal and prevent leakage between the seal and the
frame member. The method of attachment of J-seals to frame members
shall permit replacement of the seals without disassembling or removing
the gate.
6.04. Operating Stems. Operating stems shall conform to the require-
ments of Section 3.11 of AWWA C501. Contact surfaces of threads shall
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15114
(17578 ) -3-
be rolled or machined to a 63 microinch finish, or smoother. Each stem
shall be securely attached to the slide. ;r
Dual stems shall be provided where listed in the Slide Gate Schedule, or -
required for proper operation of the gate.
7. MANUAL ACTUATORS.
7.01. General Requirements. Manual actuators shall conform to the
requirements of Section 3.14 of AWWA C501 and shall be of the types
listed in the Slide Gate Schedule.
7.02.- Dual Actuators. 'Dual actuators shall'be provided for the gates
so indicated in the Slide Gate Schedule. Dual actuators shall be inter-
connected by means of a cross shaft complete with required couplings so
that both stems move at the same rate. Each cross shaft shall be pro-
tected by a full-length, removable aluminum or stainless steel cover
attached to the yoke beam or actuator.
7.03. Stem Covers. Unless otherwise specified, each manual actuator
shall be equipped with a stem cover. Stem covers shall conform to the
requirements of Section 3.4 of AWWA C501.
Stem covers for all gates shall be constructed of transparent plastic
pipe and shall be furnished with an end cap, condensation vents, and a
clear mylar position indicating marking tape. The marking tape shall be ='
adhesive backed and shall be permanently marked and calibrated in feet
and inches. The tape shall be field applied to the stem cover after the
gate has been installed. The tape shall be positioned so that the
height of the slide will be indicated by reference to the top of the
stem.
8. PACKAGING FOR SHIPMENT. Slide gates shall be prepared for shipment
as set forth in the General Equipment Stipulations. In addition, frames
shall be provided with corner bracing, plywood sheet backing, or other
means which will rigidly hold the frames in proper alignment during s-
shipment and installation. 'The bracing or backing shall be factory
applied and shall not be removed until after frames have been installed
in the structures.
9. INSTALLATION. Slide gates and appurtenances shall be handled and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Each
embedded frame shall be carefully braced in the forms before concrete is
placed, or a space shall be boxed out and the frame shall be grouted in
place later. Care shall be exercised to ensure that frame members and
anchor bolts do not rest upon or contact steel reinforcing bars.
Damaged areas of shop -applied coatings shall be repainted and allowed to
dry prior to placement of concrete or grouting. Anchor bolts shall be
carefully set to template.
Each gate shall be carefully installed and shall be adjusted so that it
does not bind or leak in excess of specified requirements.
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS ) -
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15114
(17578 ) -4-
P
The threaded portion of each plastic stem cover shall be wrapped in at
least two layers of teflon tape immediately prior to installation of the
cover on the actuator.
All bolts shall be tightened and all items requiring lubrication shall
be lubricated. Anti -seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied
to the threaded portion of stainless steel anchor bolts during
installation and tightening of nuts. Excess lubricant shall, be
thoroughly removed following final tightening.
Following the completion of each slide gate installation, the gate shall
be operated through at least two complete open -close cycles, readjusted
and reoperated as necessary, and left in a condition acceptable to the
Engineer.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15114_
(17578 ) -5-
N C) cn t-4
4y
H �
ZPCH
O 0
Z
H
N
a+
9b
x
H
O
., .. Z
1 tr
o+ H
� w
10. SLIDE GATE SCHEDULE.
(4)
Maximum Head,
Slide
(3)
feet of pater
Operating
Top of
(5)
(b)
(7)
(8)
Cate/Control
(1)
(2)
Nominal Size,
Invert
Floor
Yoke
Type of
Type of
Type of
Special
Seating
Unseating
Weir No.
Location
Service
WxH, incbes
Elevation
Elevation
Elevation
Mounting
Closure
Actuator
Notations
SG-2101,
BU-2100
SO
72 x. 30
1.25
0
3133.13
3137.00
3140.00
ESC
FBJS
D,HGBS
A
-2102
SG-2401,
BU-2400
SO
72 x 30
1.25
0
3119.84
3130.50
3133.50
ESC
FBJS
D,HGBS
A
-2402
SC-3201,
BU-3200
SO
18 x 18
2.0
2.0
3131.21t
3134.50
3137.50
PSC
FM
HGBS
-3212
r
10.01. Abbreviations. Abbreviations used in the Slide Gate Schedule
are defined as follows:
(1) Location abbreviations are as follows:
BV-2100 - Primary Distribution Structure-
BV-2400 - Secondary Distribution Structure
BV-3200 - Aeration Basins
(2) Service abbreviations are as follows:
SO - Shutoff
(3) The nominal size does not include any projection in the_
guides.
(4) The indicated seating and unseating pressures are the maximum
differential head measured above the invert of the gate.
(5) Type of mounting abbreviations are as follows:
ESC - Embedded, self-contained
FSC - Face (wall) mounted, self-contained
PSC Pipe (flange) mounted, self-contained
(6) Type of closure abbreviations are as follows:
FBJS - Flush bottom with hollow bulb J-seals
(7) Type of actuator abbreviations are as follows:
D Dual actuators required
HGBS - Handwheel-operated, geared, benchstand
(8) Special notations and requirements are as follows:
A. Interconnected dual actuators and dual stems are required
for this gate.
11. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, construction details, and
specifications covering the slide gates and appurtenances shall be
submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
Drawings submitted shall include separate wiring diagrams for each
electrically operated gate and related electrical control equipment.
Each drawing shall be identified with the slide gate designation.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15114
(17576
a
Section 15130 - PRESSURE GAUGES
` 1. SCOPE. This section covers analog dial -type pressure, vacuum, and
compound pressure/vacuum gauges and accessories to be furnished and
installed at the locations indicated on the drawings or as indicated in
+ the Gauge Schedule at the end of this section.
Gauges to be furnished by an equipment supplier, either with an item of
equipment or as a component of an equipment package, are covered in the
applicable equipment section.
Gauge piping and fittings are covered in the miscellaneous piping
section.
2. GENERAL.
2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.02. Governina Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein,
all gauges shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B40.1.
2.03. Accuracy Grade. Unless otherwise specified, gauge cccuracy shall
be ANSI Grade A or better. Overall accuracy for diaphragm seal
protected and liquid filled gauges shall be ANSI Grade B or better.
3. GAUGE CONSTRUCTION. Unless otherwise specified, gauges shall be
.: indicating dial type with C-type phosphor bronze Bourdon tube; stainless
! steel rotary geared movement; phenolic or polypropylene open front
turret case; adjustable pointer; stainless steel, phenolic, or poly-
propylene ring; and acrylic plastic or shatterproof glass window.
The dial shall be 4-1/2 inch size with white background and black mark-
ings. The units of measurement shall be indicated on the dial face.
Subdivisions of the scale shall conform to the requirements of the
governing standard. Pointer travel shall be not less than 200 degrees
nor more than 270 degrees of arc.
All stem -mounted gauges shall be provided with 1/2 inch NPT connections.
The units of measurement, range, and mounting configuration of each
gauge shall be as indicated in the Gauge Schedule.
4. GAUGE ACCESSORIES.
4.01. Isolation Valves. Each gauge shall be provided with a threaded
end ball -type shutoff valve as specified in the miscellaneous valves
section.
4.02. Gauge Isolators. A suitable isolator shall be provided for each
gauge so indicated in the Gauge Schedule.
r
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
.. (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15130
(17578 ) -1
Unless otherwise specified, a diaphragm seal shall be provided Dia-
phragm seals shall be thread -attached type with removable AISI Type 316
stainless steel diaphragm, zinc or cadmium plated carbon steel upper
housing, and PVC lower housing. The upper housing shall be contoured to
fit and provide a seat and seal for the diaphragm and shall be designed
to permit removal of the gauge with the system under pressure. The
lower housing shall be provided with a tapped and plugged 1/4 inch NPT
flushing connection.
Inline, flow-thru type diaphragm seals shall be provided at the
locations indicated in the Gauge Schedule. Ends shall be flanged,
threaded, or welding type as required by the piping system in which the
unit is installed. Flanges shall be flat faced with ANSI B16.5,
Class 150 diameter and drilling. Threaded ends shall conform to
ANSIJASME B1.20.1, NPT. Each diaphragm seal shall be provided with a
removable stainless steel diaphragm and shall be tapped for a 1/2 inch
NPT gauge connection.
An inline, flow-thru, flange type gauge isolator shall be provided at
the locations indicated in the Gauge Schedule. Each unit shall consist
of a carbon steel housing, carbon steel assembly flanges, and Buna-N
flexible cylinder, and shall be filled with silicone oil. Each isolator
shall be a Ronningen-Petter "Iso-Ring" or Red Valve "Series 40 Flanged
Sensor", suitable for installation between two flat faced ANSI B16.1,
Class 125 cast iron pipe flanges, and tapped for a 1/2 inch NPT gauge
connection.
Each isolator and diaphragm seal and the gauge served shall be factory
assembled, filled with a suitable fluid, and calibrated as a unit.
5. INSTALLATION. Gauges shall be installed at the locations indicated
on the drawings. Installation configurations shall conform to the re-
quirements of the Gauge Schedule and the applicable figures at the end
of this section.
Unless otherwise specified herein, direct tapping of pipe walls for
installation of gauge connections will not be permitted.
Glass lined cast-iron or steel pipe shall not be drilled or tapped for
pressure gauges. Where pressure gauges are indicated on piping required
to be glass lined, a small spool piece of pipe without glass lining
shall be provided for tapping of pressure gauges.
Direct tapping of 8 inch and larger ductile iron pipe will be permitted,
in lieu of a tee or tapping saddle, provided the pipe thickness class
equals or exceeds the following:
C
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15130
(17578 ) -2
r�
Minimum ANSI/AWWA Thickness Class
Connection
Size
Pine Size
1 2 Inch
314 Inch
8 inch
53
53
10 inch
52
53
12 inch
52
52
14 inch
51
52
16-18 inch
51
51
20 inch and larger
50
50
Saddles provided for gauge connections on FRP pipe shall be installed
in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Penetra-
tions through the pipe wall shall be cut by means of a circular hole
saw. Exposed fiberglass reinforcing shall be liberally coated with a
compatible resin or adhesive as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
All gauges and diaphragm seals shall be installed in the vertical up-
right position. Teflon thread tape or teflon thread sealer, as speci-
fied in the miscellaneous piping section, shall be used in the assembly
of threaded connections. All connections shall be free from leaks.
Lines shall be purged of trapped air at gauge locations prior to instal-
lation of the gauge or diaphragm seal.
6. Gauge Schedule. Refer to the table at the end of this section.
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings or catalog cuts together with
detailed specifications and data covering material used shall be submit-
ted in accordance with the submittals section.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15130
(17578 ) -3
rC1�nC
40
Vx yyyWbd
OD '0 O
ay�x
O O 1-3
C
z
H
w+
0
ro
H
O
x
N
L
4-'r
w
O
6. GAUGE SCHEDULE.
Designation
Service
media
Type
Units
Range
Special Requirements
PG-2101, -2105, -2107
Primary Sludge Suction
Sludge
Compound
in HG vac./psi
30/30
2,4,5,7,10,12
-2103
Primary Scum Suction
Scum
Compound
in HG vac./psi
30/30
2,4,5,7,10,12
PG-2102, -2106, -2108
Waste Primary Sludge
Discharge
Sludge
Pressure
psi
0-60
2,4,5,7,9,12
-2104
Primary Scum Discharge
Scum
Pressure
psi
0-60
2,4,5,7,9,12
-2201 thra -2205
Bio-Tower Filter
Influent/Recirculation
Primary
Effluent
Pressure
psi
0-25
2,5,6,7,8,9,11,12
PG-2401, -2405, -2407
Waste Secondary Sludge
Suction
Sludge
Combination
in HG vac./psi
30/30
2,4,5,7,10,12
PG-2403
Secondary Scum Suction
Scum
Combination
in HG vac./psi
30/30
2,4,5,7,10,12
PG-2402, -2406, -2408
Waste Secondary Sludge
Discharge
Sludge
Pressure
psi
0-60
2,4,5,7,9,12
PG-2404
Secondary Scum
Discharge
Scum
Pressure
psi
0-60
2,4,5,7,9,12
PG-4001 thra -4005
EPS Discharge to LUS
Plant Effluent
Pressure
psi
0-75
2,5,6,7,8,9,11,12
PG-4006
Noupotable Water
Plant Effluent
Pressure
psi
0-200
2,5,6,7,8,9,11,12
PG-3301, -3303, -3305
Waste Secondary Sludge
Suction
Sludge
Combination
in HG vac./psi
30130
2,4,5,7,10,12
PG-3302, -3304, -3306
Waste Secondary Sludge
Discharge
Sludge
Pressure
psi
0-60
2,4,5,7,9,12
(1) Gauge shall be liquid filled.
(2) Snubber not required.
(3) Diaphragm seal shall be inline, flow-thru type with threaded, flanged, or welding ends.
(4) Inline, flow-thru, flange type isolator required.
(5) Gauges shall be stea-mounted with stem on lower and.
(6) Diaphragm seal required.
(7) Open front case with pressure relief required.
(8) Gauge case shall be waterproof.
(9) Overload stop required.
(10) Undarload stop required.
(11) Freeze protection required.
(12) ANSI Accuracy Grade A required.
in
Pressure Snubber
if Specified (typ)
of aphragm Seal,
if Specified (typ.)
112 `r I PS Brass Nipple (ty
.112rr Boll Valve (type
Reducer Bushings,
as Required.
Standard or Reducing
Tee. See Note I
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Scale
VERTICAL RUN
No Scale
NOTES.
1. Where specified in the Gauge Schedule, provide Wine flow-thru diaphragm seal and
delete tee, reducer bushings, and thread -attached diaphragm seal.
2. Dimension " C' shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
8vMM s %f8at n
Engenewi • Arenrteeu
Kansas Citr. Miseawn
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
STEEL PIPE
2 inch and smaller
FIGURE 1-15130
1�
Presstae Snubber,
if Specified (typ.)
Diaphragm Seal,
if Specified (typ.)
112" IPS Brass Nipple (tyI
112`r Ba// valve Opp)
Reducer Bushings,
as Req ,d.
Welding Fitting Oyp.)
See Note I
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Scale
NOTES.
VERTICAL RUN
No Scale
1. Welding fitting shall be Bonney Forge "Thredolets', Porter "W--S Teeters" or Vogt
"Weld Couplets"
2. ANSI B1615, Class 125 bronze threaded fitting.
3. Dimension '2" shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
BtacK s %4VMtct1
Engenoers • ArchimCIS
Kansas Cily. Missouri
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
STEEL PIPE
2-1 /2 inch and larger
?-IGURE 2-15130
2
�l0
Pressure Snubber,
if Specified (typ.)
Diaphragm Seal,
if Specified Oyp.)
112 /PS Bross Nipple
112 Ball Valve 0,yp.)
Blind Flange Drill
and Tap 112 pi
See Note I
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Scale
VERTICAL RUN
No Scale
NOTES.•
1. Except for glass lined cast iron pipe, a tapping saddle conforming to the requirements
of the cast iron pipe section may be used in lieu of the tee indicated.
2. ANSI 816.15, Class 125 bronze threaded fitting.
3. When an inline flow-thru diaphragm seal is specified in the Gauge Schedule, the
tee or tapping saddle and thread -attached diaphragm seal indicated will not be
required.
4. Dimension "L" shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Engenaars • Architects
Kansas City. Missouri
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
6 inch and smaller
FIGURE 3-15130
2
.)
Pressure Snubber
Specified (typ.j
DiophroQm Seal,
if Specified (fyp.)
//2 /PS Bross Nipple
�— 1/2 Bo// Volvo (typ.)
See Note /
HORIZONTAL RUN
Mt scale
VERTICAL RUN
No scale
NOTES:
1. A tapping saddle conforming to the requirements of the cast iron pipe section shall
be provided in lieu of direct tapping if pipe thickness class does not equal or exceed
the minimum required thickness class specified.
2. ANSI 816.15, Class 125 bronze threaded fitting. .
3. Dimension ' L" shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Btac:l< a N/eatcn
Engineers - ArcA,t•cts
Kansas City. Missouri
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
8 inch and larger
FIGURE 4-15130
,21
e
vre Snubber,
ecified (typ.)
ro;m Sea/,
ecified (typ.)
W S Bross Nipple (typ.)
90// Valve (typ. )
to.4 to A F Tea (typ.)
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Scale
NOTES:
1. ANSI B1615, Class 125 bronze threaded fitting.
VERTICAL RUN
A(0 Scale
Z. Dimension "L" shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
Brack s Veatcn
Engineers - Arr:t+rtects RIGID COPPER TUBING FIGURE 5-15130
Ksnsas City. Missouri
Pressure Snubber
it Specified (typ]
Diaphrogm Seal,
if Specified (W.)
/ rr Schedule 80 PVC
Nipple &YPJ See Note
/ " PVC Ball Valve (ty
See Note 2
Reducer Bushings,
•as Required.
Standard or Reducing
Tee (typ.)
HORIZONTAL RUN
NO Scale
VERTICAL RUN
NO Scale
NOTES
1. PVC nipples shall be factory fabricated and shall not be threaded in the field.
2, Ball valve shall be deleted for gauges installed in chemical service lines.
3. 90 degree elbow, 1-112 inch or larger.
4. Dimension "L" shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
esacx s veaccn
Engineers • Architects
Kansas City, Misscun
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
PVC PIPE
FIGURE 6-15130
Pressure Snubber,
if Specified (typ.)
Diaphragm Seat,
if Specified Oyp.)
/ " Sch. 60 PVC Nipple
(typ.) See Note l
/ PVC So// Valve (typ.)
See Note 2
See Note 3
See Note 4
+
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Scale
VERTICAL RUN
No Scale
NOTES.
1. PVC nipples shall be factory fabricated and shall not be threaded in the field.
Z Ball valve shall be deleted for gauges installed in chemical service lines.
3. Adaptor and/or reducer bushings compatible with tee and gauge piping provided.
4. Standard or reducer tee.
5. Standard or reducer elbow.
6. Dimension ' ' shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the gauge case,
diaphragm seal housing, or valve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
es Ck s veatcn
Engineers • A/Chtt*Cta
Kansas Citv, Missouri
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
FRP PIPE
4 inch and smaller
FIGURE 7-15130
Pressure Snubber,
if Specified
(fyp.)
Diaphragm
Seal,
if Specified
(typ.)
/" Schedule
Bo PVC
Nipple (fyp.)
See Note
/" PVC Ball
Valve (ty�
See Note 2
See Note 3
See Note 4
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Scale
VERTICAL RUN
No Scale
NOTES:
1. PVC nipples shall be factory fabricated and shall not be threaded in the field.
2. Ball valve shall be deleted for gauges installed in chemical service lines.
3. Adaptor and/or reducer bushings compatible with saddle outlet and gauge piping
provided.
4. Saddle with belled or NPT internal threaded side outlet, adhesive bonded to pipe.
5. Saddle with belled side outlet.
6. 90 degree elbow, 2 inch or larger.
7. Dimension 'T' shall not exceed 4 inches.
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
esaCk 6 VeaCCt1
Engineers • A/Chlteeta
Kansas City, Mhsourl
FRP PIPE
6 inch and larger
FIGURE 8-15130
s
s
r
Pressure Snubber,
if Specified (typ)
112" Boll Valve (typ.)
/PS Bross Nipple (typ)
I
See Note 2
Inline F/ow-Thru l�2 /PS
Diophrogm Seal Of'o.) d Bross Nipple
See Note /.
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Sca/O
VERTICAL RUN
No Scale
No rES:
/. Diophrogmsealshol/hove flanged, threaded, or weldinq ends as specfied in
the Gouge Schedule or required to fit connecting piping.
2. ANS/816./5, CLoss 125 bronze threaded fitting,
J. Dimension "L "shell be ofsufficient length to prevent contact between the
gouge case or w/ve operating lever and adjacent piping or insulation
but shall not exceed 4 inches un,*ss otherwise permitted Dy the Engineer.
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
BLACK A VEATCH INLINE FLOW THRU
EN0114EERS-ARCHITECTS FIGURE 9-15130
KANSAS CITY. MISSOURI DIAPHRAGM SEAL
ire Sn"W er,
Vfied llyp l
all valve (typ )
;S Bross Nippk (typ)
nmirc, vivN 71L1ru
Companion Fla ve We
vauge Isolator (Typ.)
HORIZONTAL RUN
No Sco%
See Mote Below
VERTICAL RUN
No Sco%
NOTE:
Do not install this type of gouge isolator in vertical piping
0
GAUGE INSTALLATION DETAILS
SLACK A HATCH GAUGE ISOLATOR
ENGINEERS• ARCHITECTS FIGURE 10-15130
KANSAS CITY, MISSOWI
Section 15140 - PIPE SUPPORTS
1. SCOPE. This section covers pipe hangers, brackets, and supports.
Pipe supports shall be furnished complete with all necessary inserts,
bolts, nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories.
This section also covers the spacing of expansion joints in piping
systems. Expansion joints are covered in other sections.
2. GENERAL. In certain locations, pipe supports, anchors, and expan-
sion joints have been indicated on the drawings, .but no attempt has been
made to indicate every pipe support, anchor, and expansion joint. It
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide a complete system of
pipe supports, to provide expansion joints, and to anchor all piping, in
accordance with the requirements set forth herein. Additional pipe
1 supports may be required adjacent to expansion joints, couplings, or
valves.
Concrete and fabricated steel supports shall be as indicated on the
drawings, as specified in other sections, or, in the absence of such
requirements, as permitted by the Engineer.
All piping shall be rigidly supported and anchored so that there is no
movement or visible sagging between supports.
Pipe supports and expansion joints are not required in buried piping,
but concrete blocking or other suitable anchorage shall be provided as
indicated on the drawings or specified in other sections.
3. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise specified, all pipe supports shall
comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Materials of construction for
fabricated steel supports are covered in the structural and miscel-
laneous metals section. All pipe support materials shall be packaged as
necessary to ensure delivery in satisfactory condition.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, pipe supports
shall be fabricated of manufacturer's standard materials and provided
with manufacturer's standard finish.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the use of supports which
rely on stressed thermoplastic components to support the pipe will not
be acceptable.
Contact between dissimilar metals, including contact between stainless
steel and carbon steel, shall be prevented. Supports for brass or
copper pipe or tubing shall be copper plated. Those portions of pipe
supports which contact other dissimilar metals shall be rubber or vinyl
coated.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
I (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
a
EXPANSION)
15140
-1-
All pipe supports located in the Bio-Tower Filters
shall be AISI
Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Stainless steel
supports fabricated by �.
welding shall be AISI Type 304L or 316L material.
All pipe supports located in the Primary and Secondary Sludge Pumping
Stations, Effluent Pumping Station No. 1, and the
Plant No. 3 Aeration
Basin Pipe Gallery shall be hot -dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM
A153 and A385.
_
Pipe support types and application shall comply with
the following:
Type
MSS SP-69'
Description or Location (Note l)
Other
Hangers
2-1/2 inch and smaller pipe
J-style 5-
B-Line "B3690",
Grinnell "67",
or Unistrut --
"J Hangers".
clevis 1
B-Line "B3104" or
Grinnell "65".
3 inch through 10 inch pipe
clevis 1
B-Line "B3100" or
Grinnell "260" for
steel pipe; B-Line —
"B3102" or Grin-
nell "590" for
cast iron pipe.
12 inch pipe, clevis or saddle 1
Figure 1-15140.
14 inch and larger pipe
i
saddle --
Figure 1-15140.
Concrete Inserts, steel
12 inch and smaller pipe 18
Channel 12 ga,
galy, 1-5/8" x �.
1-3J8", min 8"
long, anchor lugs
on 4" centers, at �-
least three lugs,
r
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15140
(17578 ) -2=
14 inch and larger, fabricated --
insert, except as noted
Beam Clamps, malleable iron or 21
steel, 12 inch and smaller pipe
Side Beam Bracket
Wall Supports and Frames, steel
12 inch and smaller pipe (Note 2)
brackets
prefabricated channels
offset pipe clamp, (1-1/2 inch
and smaller pipe)
offset pipe clamp, (2 inch to
3-1/2 inch pipe)
Floor Supports, steel or
cast iron
6 inch and smaller pipe
8 inch through 24 inch pipe
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15140
(17578 ) -3
28, 29
30
34
end caps, and
filler strip.
Figure 1-15140.
B-Line "3050" and
"3055" or Grinnell
"133" and "1340.
Grinnell "292".
B-Line "3054" or
Grinnell "228".
B-Line "B3062" or
Grinnell "202".
32 B-Line "B3066" or
Grinnell "195".
33 B-Line "B3067" or
Grinnell "199".
-- 12 ga, galy,
1-5/8" x 1-5/8",
with suitable
brackets and pipe
clamps.
-- Galy, 1-1/4" x
3/16" steel, with
3/8" bolts.
-- Galy, 1-1/4" x
1/4" steel, with
3/8" bolts.
37 B-Line "B3090" or
(with base) Grinnell 02591.
38 B-Line "B3093" or
Grinnell "264".
Pipe Alignment Guides
--
B-Line
"B3281"
through
_
"B3287" or
Grinnell
"255".
Notes:
1. MSS SP-69 supports and
hangers are illustrated on
Fig 2-15140.
2. Pipe clamps or
other devices which rely
on the application
of
a clamping force to the
supported pipe
in order to
maintain
the clamp position or location
in a prefabricated
channel or
track will not
be acceptable
for use with
nonmetallic
pipe or
tubing.
4. LOCATION. Unless closer spacing
is indicated
on the drawings,
the --
maximum spacing for pipe
supports
and expansion
joints shall
be:
Max Run
Without'
Pipe
Expansion
Expansion
Support
Joint, Loop,
Joint Max
Type of
Max
or Bend
Spacing
Expansion —"
Type of Pipe
Spacing
(Note 11
(Note 2)
Joints
feet
feet
feet
Cast iron
15
80
80
Mechanical
Couplings
Cast iron, glass=lined
12
80
80
Mechanical
Couplings
Steel for other services
--
1-1/4 inch and
7
30
100
Note 3
smaller
1-1/2 to'4 inch
10
30
100
Note 3 _
Over 4 inch
15
80
80
Mechanical
Couplings
Stainless steel
1-1/4 inch and
7
30
100
Note 3
smaller
1-1/2 to 4 inch
10
30
100
Note 3 —.
Over 4 inch
15
80
80
Note 3
Copper for hot water
r
1 inch and smaller
5
20
100
Note 3
Over 1 inch
7
20
100
Note 3
Copper for other services
'-
1 inch and smaller
5
--
--
None
Required
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
)
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4
)
15140
(17578
)
-4-
Max Run
Without
Pipe
Expansion
Expansion
Support
Joint, Loop,
Joint Max
Type of
Max
or Bend
Spacing
Expansion
Type of Pipe
Spacing
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Joints
feet
feet
feet
Over 1 inch
7
50
100
Note 3
PVC, Schedule 80
1/8 and 1/4 inch
Continuous
20
60
Note 3
Support
1/2 inch
4
20
60
Note 3
3/4 inch
4-1/2
20
60
Note 3
1 and 1-1/4 inch
5
20
60
Note 3
1-1/2 and 2 inch
5-1/2
20
60
Note 3
2-1/2 inch
6
20
60
Note 3
3 inch
7
20
60
Note 3
4 inch
7-1/2
20
60
Note 3
6 inch
8-1/2
20
60
Note 3
8 inch
9-1/2
20
60
Note 3-
10 inch
10
20
60
Note 3
12 inch
11
20
60
Note 3
FRP
1 inch
4
60
100
Note 3
1-1/2 inch
4-1/2
60
100
Note 3
2 inch
5-1/2
60
100
Note 3
3 inch
6
60
100 -
Note 3
4 inch
6-1/2
40
100
Note 3
6 inch
7-1/2
40
100
Note 3
8 inch
8-1/2
40
100
Note 3
10 inch
9-1/2
40
100
Note 3
12 inch and larger
10
40
100
Note 3
Tempered glass (Note 4)
8
--
--
None
Required
High silicon iron
15
(Note 5)
Required
Polypropylene
6
--
--
None
Required
Cast iron soil
10
--
--
None
Required
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
)
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4
) 15140
(17578
)
-5--
Notes•
1. Unless otherwise permitted, an expansion joint shall be pro-
vided in each straight run of pipe having an overall length
between loops or bends exceeding the maximum run specified
herein.
2. Unless otherwise permitted, the spacing between expansion
joints in any straight pipe run shall not exceed the maximum
spacing specified herein.
3. Expansion joint fittings as specified in the miscellaneous
piping section.
4. At least two properly padded supports for each pipe section.
5. At least one support for each pipe section.
Rubber hose and flexible tubing shall be provided with continuous angle
or channel support.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, --
piping shall be supported approximately 1-1/2 inches out from the face
of walls and at least 3 inches below ceilings.
5. APPLICATION. Concrete inserts or L-shaped anchor bolts shall be ~
used to support piping from new cast -in -place concrete. Expansion
anchors shall be used to fasten supports to existing concrete and
masonry.
Design loads for inserts, brackets, clamps, and other support items
shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended loads.
Pipe supports shall be manufactured for the size and type of pipe to
which they are applied. Strap hangers will not be acceptable. Threaded
rods shall have sufficient threading to permit the maximum adjustment
available in the support item.
Anchorage shall be provided to resist thrust due to temperature changes,
changes in diameter or direction, or dead ending. Anchors shall be
located as required to force expansion and contraction movement to occur
at expansion joints, loops, or elbows, and as required to prevent exces-
sive bending stresses and opening of mechanical couplings. Anchorage
for temperature changes shall be centered between elbows and mechanical
joints used as expansion joints. Anchorage for bellows type expansion
joints may be located adjacent to the joint.
Pipe guides shall be provided adjacent to bellows type expansion joints.
Guides will not be required when mechanical couplings are permitted as --
expansion joints. Guides shall be placed on both sides of expansion
joints except where anchors are adjacent to the joint. Unless otherwise
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15140
(17578 ) -6-
indicated on the drawings, one guide shall be within four pipe diameters
from the joint and a second guide within 14 pipe diameters from the
first guide. Pipe supports shall allow adequate movement; pipe guides
shall not be used for support. Pipe guides shall be installed as recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
6. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete data and catalog cuts or drawings
covering fabricated pipe supports, fabricated inserts, and stainless
steel, galvanized, and copper- and plastic -coated pipe supports shall be
submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
Data shall include a listing of the intended use and general location of
each item submitted.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15140
(17578 ) -7-
Rod
Jizs41
IndiridUC1 ar QO'MHMADW
insert with reinforcing
bars N1mrimcarn hrsr�sr
rod goad /too Ib. _�
PIPE SIZE
A
MANGER ROD
.
.
jag 4&
•
6'tfiry /Fold
•
M=imum SpOring liar oia?k
hanger rod with IY"plpeo /O
INDIVIDUAL OR CONTINUOUS INSERT
I+- is nvif7 ra.- Mn n: Q0117
fabricated insert
Undividuol or comtinwo
�'•' �� ;
k7WPft OW
:� �' / h1 a pipe wi
• •
Rfot�irlvrr7 hcnger
t1oa99er rqlboh'cm
spacing of /2' )
iTto'dGyre
t nuts es Mown. Weld
Mov Rut to rod. rack weld
`�
nut to insert after
ins tallatic r7 and alignnxnt
PIPE
ofbend f
to be pipe
FOCQ of ?addle hcrng�-a are not rwq& irod
we/-/�• forlP"pips with euppartap= ngor kw.
.'
..• • � ! I I �-� 1104T
�� •• II if 1i
►A0R1CATE0 INSERT
ECTION I
Jhre+e
pipe
Use P Hex. P ' 815tet/ c%ure 9.s
nuts as
ihowin
SECTION 2
? A 0 0 L E M A N G E R . I
PIPE HANGERS
FIGURE 1-15140
F.
AN. ft[tl elcrli Ae.1.fTELI fAMo MfR fT[EL rooauc sLt
TTPf.$ TT►E-T TTPE-If
r
ALLOT OTMPIPECLAW [tTallm" PIPE an fTC[L CL[rlf
TTPf-f 49m CLAMP TYPE. 141
TTPE-E
t, r
O
"Aeon oA ALLIT
fTf LL foYCL OLT AL. EAAO AM. fr1Y[l
PIPE CL�W TTPC-[ TYAft C&16
TTPC.i ,. TTP418
P1
fTCEL PIP[ CLAW Ao�./WITEt AYAE W1LLSA LE
T TK-O 4M TT►c MIO•mam
TYPE•10 TTPLN
n
MP[ "ma MtITPwE EMIE f CMEL •LLealf
TTPE-f TMAAEYCAL[ [T[ NWT
TTPC-II TTP[-IT
r� IL C rpI`I-j
ou RAIA- T n reNi¢00 iia BOLT '~T1P H"A
Sous e1M
TTPs
l� itj ve
Tor Use TOP I-ofAM CLAW
C.CLAM► 11PS-Si
TY09-IS
LIMY MtLKO ATCCL
Al VIVA :IF.
p T►Pf-■
.. AEATT `;u�toMEL
fto[ 1- NAM CLIP IIIA"
OA CAAMIfL CLAW TVPE-AA T
TTPC-go
IT
j�
1
CSYIT C-81 f10[ TTPCif LAf7o[ L RT
L
MfLPEo ATTA91811 MY MEL 6-09AN CLAW
TTPL-IL mf ETC "I PIPE SLOE o
as fAeOe on TTPLAf SLICE S�LLATE
IMYEATte LCSC MT TTPE-if
LJ u ��
TT [ tiP f [ LTt CCLAW PMC AMM SUPPORT
36
TT►[ -se
•
4� P 4,4
I I
u Lj
wa—ul"L[ "am CLAW
Y-0OLT /[i TCACg11 PIECE PIPE STA0NY4 $AiXj
TTPC-tA T♦►C-30 TTPC47
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
SLACK i VUTCH C" FIGURE 2-15140 (a)
r
r:
11�
o�_ye
�n wr eaar.
woeat�s ueas
P
/-1
»AboKLj6jn
WIGrvm&.
rrm-a
rrt mLL taranc
Tsao-w
UID
..mn,,— sm" ..t FALL . PLAT=
TTIR-" \ TTm-48
li � II
mat ..e ■xa A" wr .era . MA
BLACK A VEATCH
ii
TM
TAN-N
J
Vow wr so=
TTI!-p
n
�-"
wr�ew
,PAPA«
TMAPCM TTM
U
FIAT( w
TT/[-6T
L_1
O
imam" MII�1� I m Tommm
TmMTII MAC TTK-N
TTK-q
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FIGURE 2-15140 (b)
m 1
Section 15400 - PLUMBING
1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing and installation of
materials, devices, appliances, fixtures, equipment, and appurtenances
required for complete plumbing systems as specified herein Bind as
indicated on the drawings.
Principal items of work to be performed, and materials, equipment,
devices, and appliances to be furnished and installed hereunder, include
the following:
a. Drainage and vent piping systems, with connections to each
fixture and piece of equipment requiring a waste or vent
connection.
b. Hot and cold water supply piping systems, including connec-
tions to each fixture and piece of equipment requiring water.
C. Natural gas piping systems, including connections to gas -fired
equipment.
d. Compressed air piping systems.
e. Laboratory piping systems, including connections to laboratory
fixtures.
f. Plumbing fixtures, except those specified in other sections.
g. Floor drains, cleanouts, bell -ups, and roof drains.
Valves and miscellaneous piping materials are covered in the miscel-
laneous valves and miscellaneous piping sections, respectively. Labora-
tory fixtures and fittings are covered in the laboratory furniture
section. Piping systems for refrigeration is covered in the heating,
ventilating, and air conditioning section.
2. CODES AND ORDINANCES. Plumbing work shall be performed in accord-
ance with all applicable codes and ordinances which pertain to such
work. In case of conflict between these specifications and any appli-
cable code or ordinance, the latter shall govern. In the absence of an
applicable plumbing code or ordinance, plumbing work shall conform to
the provisions of the Uniform Plumbing Code.
All gas piping shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations
of the National Fire Protection Association.
3. PIPING SYSTEMS.
3.01. Drainage and Vent Piping. Drainage and vent piping shall be
installed where required and shall, in general, conform to the locations
r,
4,' (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
f7 (CONTRACT 4 ) 15400
(17578 ) -1-
indicated on the drawings. Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall have a
grade of 114 inch per foot. Where cleanouts are required in finished
floors or in partition walls, a nickel -bronze access cover and frame
with securing screw shall be installed over the cleanout plug.
Drainage piping which is required to be buried beneath floors or under-
ground shall be cast iron soil pipe, as indicated on the drawings and as
specified in other sections, to a point not less than 5 feet beyond the
outside face of the structure. All drainage piping buried beneath
floors shall be encased in concrete.at least 6 inches thick.
All cast iron soil pipe shall be -service weight, bell or hubless type.
Rubber-gasketed joints may be used on all bell type pipe joints. No
hubless joints shall be used underground.
Bell -ups shall be installed with the top rim flush with the floor
surface.
Packing box drainage from each pump shall be piped directly from the
tapped outlet in the bearing support bracket to,a bell -up.
A gauge cock shall be installed in each gauge and vent connection of —
each pump.
All vents passing through roofs shall be located at least 10 inches from
the intersection of a cant with the roof deck, and shall be adequately
flashed as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the sheet metal
section.
3.02. Acid Waste Piping. Acid waste piping may be high silicon iron,
tempered glass, or polypropylene, except that tempered glass or poly-
propylene piping shall not be used for lines which are buried or encased
in concrete. Stainless steel and neoprene sleeve joints may be used
with high silicon iron pipe if permitted by the applicable code.
3.03. Water Supply Piping. Hot and cold water supply piping shall be
installed where required and shall, in general, conform to the locations
indicated on the drawings. Suitable connections shall be made to each
fixture and piece of equipment requiring water. -
Water hammer arresters shall be provided in the hot and cold water
piping at the locations indicated on the drawings. Water hammer
arresters shall be tested and certified in accordance with ASSE 1010.
Water hammer arresters shall have a pre -charged air chamber and shall be
Watts or Sioux Chief.
3.04. Other Piping Systems. Other plumbing systems, including com-
pressed air piping, laboratory piping, and natural gas piping, shall to
furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. Suitable connec-
tions shall be made to fixtures and equipment as required.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT 4 ) 15400 —
(17578 ) -2-
4. ROOF AND FLOOR DRAINS. Roof and floor drains shall be as manu-
r factured by Josam, Smith, Wade, or Zurn. For ease of identification,
the drawings indicate products manufactured by Wade.
Roof drains shall be of the types and sizes indicated on the drawings,
and shall have threaded or spigot outlets depending on the type of con-
ductor pipes used. Roof drains in precast concrete and metal roof decks
r, shall be equipped with suitable deck clamps. Roof drains shall be
securely and rigidly attached to the roof decks to prevent movement and
shall be set at a proper level for flashing and drainage.
Floor drains shall be of the types and sizes indicated on the drawings.
Floor drains shall be carefully adjusted to the correct elevation for
proper drainage. Except at floor drains having integral traps, each
floor drain shall be provided with a "P" trap installed as close to the
drain as possible.
5. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES. Plumbing fixtures and
accessories shall be provided as indicated on the drawings and as listed
herein.
Sample Room Supply American -Standard '8340.242;
Fittings Kohler "K-89051, or Eljer
0749-1371" with rough chrome
finish.
Hose One 5-foot with brass coupling.
Emergency Shower and Freestanding, with stanchion and
Eye Wash (EEW-1401, -1402, floor flange, deluge shower, -
1403, -1404) aerated eye/face wash, delayed
action self -closing valves, and
interconnecting piping; Water
Saver "SS-9038, Speakman
"SE-601" with "SE-400" eye/face
wash, or Western "W93270.
Service Sink 24 inches by 20 inches with
stainless steel rim guard;
American -Standard 47695.018
Akron" or Kohler "K-6716
Bannon".
Supply Fitting American -Standard "8340.242",
Kohler "K-89051, or Eljer 1749-
1371" with rough chrome finish.
Trap 3 inch "P" type, acid -resisting
enamel; American -Standard or
Kohler. -
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT 4 ) 15400
(17578 ) -3
Hanger
Water Heater (WH-1401)
Min Capacity
Min Recovery Rate
Relief Valve
Drinking Fountain (EWC-1401)
Trap
Stop
Concealed, with through -wall
bolts and backing plates.
Electric, glass -lined, with
magnesium anode; Bradford -White
"M-I-20L5DS", or Rheem
081VP2058, 5 year warranty.
19 gallons.
20 gallons per hour at 90 F
rise, 4,500 watt, 240 volt,
single phase electrical service.
ASME-AGA temperature and
pressure type; Cash -Acme "Type
FV", McDonnell & Miller "203
Series", or Watts "Type 40L".
Wall -hung, Oasis "Model
OEP8WM-D0, Halsey -Taylor
"BCF-7F", or Sunroc "Model
NWC-8".
1-1/4 inch rough brass "P" type.
American -Standard "8204.026",
Eljer 1801-0780", or Kohler
"K-7682".
Water Heater Expansion
Pressurized bladder type, steel,
Tank
115 psig, 5.0 gallon, suitable
for potable water, Wessels
"NL-16", or Watts "ET-300.
Neutralization Tank
ASTM D1248-70 HDPE tank and
cover, heavy-duty pedestrian
traffic cover, one to three inch
diameter lump limestone fill,
capacity as noted on drawings,
Town & Country Plastics, Inc.
"Model NT" or equal.
Spray Nozzles
PVC, standard spray,,_full cone,
Spraying System Co. "Fulljet".
5.01. Supports and Fastenings.
Fixtures and accessories shall be
securely and rigidly supported.
Exposed heads of bolts shall be hexag-
onal with rounded chromium plated
tops. Chromium plated hexagonal cap
nuts shall be provided to conceal
the ends of exposed bolts.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT 4 ) 15400
(17578 ) -4-
Fasteners for mounting accessories shall be concealed, galvanized, or
zinc plated toggle bolts or expansion anchors.
5.02. Supply Piping. All exposed supply piping to plumbing fixtures
shall be chromium plated brass or copper.
6. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING. Immediately prior to the final inspection
of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned.
All equipment, pipe, drains, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned. All
flush valves and other devices shall be adjusted for quiet operation.
All drains shall be checked for proper operation.
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete specifications, data, and drawings
covering all materials, fixtures, and equipment shall be submitted in
accordance with the submittals section.
1,
f
i.
r
i
t;
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
r-
(CONTRACT 4 ) 15400
f
(17578 ) -5-
7
Section 15500 -_HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
l _
1. SCOPE. This section covers the heating, ventilating, and air
,.. conditioning systems, including all equipment, piping, fittings,
controls, ducts, devices, accessories. and appurtenances necessary for
complete, properly operating systems.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering
data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer
unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
Equipment furnished under this section shall be the standard product of
the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equip-
ment are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer;
however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products
of one manufacturer.
2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipula-
tions shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.02. Metal Thickness. Metal thicknesses and gages specified herein
are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage.
2.03. Equipment Nameplates. Each major component of equipment shall
,have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a nameplate
securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of a
distributing agent only will not be acceptable.
2.04. Shop Painting. Unless otherwise specified, all ferrous sheet
metal surfaces other than ductwork shall be given a rust -inhibiting
treatment consisting of galvanizing or bonderizing followed by a rust -
inhibitive primer and finish paint. Surface finish damaged during
installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.05. Related Work. The following items of associated work and
equipment are specified under other sections:
Combination Louver/Dampers
Louvers Section
3. PIPING. Unless specified herein, natural gas piping is covered in
the plumbing section and the miscellaneous piping section.
r" 4. REFRIGERANT PIPING. Refrigerant piping shall conform to the
t
requirements of the miscellaneous piping section. Piping shall be
supported in accordance with the requirements of the pipe supports
r.. section. Refrigerant filter dryers, expansion valve, combination sight
i glass and moisture indicators, charging valves, relief valves, and other
accessories shall be furnished and installed as required for proper
operation of the system.
r�
(., (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
�^ (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -1-
5. INSULATION. The Contractor shall furnishandinstall all insulation
materials as required and as specified herein for piping systems, duct-
work, and equipment. Insulation materials shall be installed in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
5.01. Pipe Insulation. All refrigerantpipingshall be insulated with
3/4 inch thick tubular foamed plastic. Insulation shall be installed as
recommended by the manufacturer. The insulation shall be Armstrong
"Armaflex" or Manville.
5.02. Duct Insulation. Interior duct liner insulation shall be one
inch thick, 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot density, spray coated duct
liner. The duct liner shall be held to the duct by a coat of 3M "33"
adhesive applied over the entire duct surface. Where duct dimensions
exceed 24 inches on any side, mechanical fasteners shall be used in
addition to adhesive. The top.and bottom pieces of duct liner shall
overlap the sides. All exposed edges of the duct liner shall be coated'
with 3M "33" adhesive.
The following ducts shall be insulated:
a. Makeup or outside air ducts.
b. - Air conditioning system supply and return ducts.
C. Other ducts where indicated on the drawings.
Duct insulation shall be CertainTeed 1150 Ultralite Duct Liner" or
Owens-Corning "Aeroflex Duct Liner".
Exterior duct insulation for round supply and return air ductwork shall
be 2 inch thick, one pound per cubic foot density fiberglass duct wrap.
The insulation shall have a factory -applied foil-scrim-kraft facing with
a 2 inch tab along one edge to overlap the adjacent section of insula-
tion to provide a continuous vapor seal. Exterior duct insulation shall
meet MIL-I-22023C, Types I and II, Class 3.
Exterior duct insulation shall be CertainTeed "Standard Duct
Insulation".
6. AIR HANDLING UNITS. Air handling units, denoted by the symbol
"AHU", shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings.
Air handling unit capacities and coil capacities shall be as indicated
in the schedules. Each air handling unit shall be complete with the
sections and components required to satisfy the requirements indicated
on the drawings and in the schedules.
Air handling units shall be factory built and tested draw -through units.
The unit shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and painted with the
manufacturer's standard enamel finish
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -2-
r
The casing shall consist of the fan section, cooling coil section where
indicated, heating section where indicated, intake damper where indi-
cated, and filter section.
Removable panels shall be furnished to provide access to all internal
parts. Drain pans shall extend under the entire cooling coil and fan
section. The air handling units shall be lined with a one half inch
thick fiberglass insulation. The unit shall be designed to have an
internally mounted disposable air filter.
Fan motors shall be resiliently mounted with a variable speed direct
drive motor. Horsepowers set forth in the Air Handling Unit Schedule
are minimum motor horsepowers. Larger motors shall be provided if
required to meet the requirements specified.
Air handling units AHU-3201 and AHU-3202 shall be complete with a
control panel containing motor starter, control transformer, circuit
fuses and overloads with all necessary wiring and identified terminal :.
strips for external connections as required by the sequence! of opera-
tions.
Electric heating coils shall be helical wound bare nichrome wire
elements exposed directly in the air stream. The heating coils shall be
furnished complete with factory mounted manual reset circuit breakers,
automatic reset high temperature limit controls, control transformer,
and all necessary internal controls.
The cooling coil shall be sized to meet the requirements scheduled on
the drawings. The coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tubing
with mechanically bonded aluminum fins in a galvanized steel frame.
Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI standards.
Air handling unit AHU-1402 shall be supplied with a programmable
heatingicooling thermostat.
Air handling units shall be as manufactured by Lennox, McQuay, or Trane.
7. CONDENSING UNITS. Condensing units, denoted by the symbol ICU' and
an identifying number, shall be furnished and installed where indicated
on the drawings. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled and
tested, piped, internally wired, and fully charged with Refrigerant-22
and compressor oil.
The unit shall be constructed of heavy gage zinc -coated steel. The unit
shall be properly reinforced and braced for maximum rigidity. The
casing shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard baked enamel
finish. Each unit shall have removable panels or access doors for
access to all components and connections.
Each unit shall be provided with single compressor, condenser coil,
g
condenser fan,and motor, charging valves, and all controls. The
condensing unit shall comply with ARI Standard 210, National Rating
r
t
;.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -3-
Standard of the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. Conden-
sing units shall be selected to satisfy the cooling requirements of the
air handling unit being served. A two degree F suction temperature
difference shall be allowed between the condensing unit and air handling
unit for piping losses. _
Compressors shall be of the hermetic, reciprocating or scroll type with
thermal sensors in the stator windings for overheating protection, high
pressure switch, loss of charge switch, timed -off control, and immersion
type crankcase heaters. Compressors shall be mounted on rubber -in -shear
vibration isolators.
Condensers shall be of the air-cooled, finned tube type with propeller
fans. Condenser coils shall be constructed of 3/8 inch OD seamless
copper tubing with aluminum fins securely bonded to the surface. Metal
grilles for coil protection shall be provided.
Condenser fans shall be direct -drive propeller type. Fans shall be
statically and dynamically balanced and shall discharge vertically. Fan
motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in
overload protection.
Condensing units shall be completely factory wired. All wiring shall be
installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. A local
disconnect for each unit shall be supplied by the manufacturer.
The condensing unit shall be designed to operate on the power supply as
indicated on the schedules.
The condensing unit shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at an
ambient air temperature of 0 F.
The condensing unit shall be as manufactured by Lennox, McQuay or Trane.
8. MAKE-UP AIR UNITS. Packaged make-up air units, denoted by the
symbol "MAU" and an identifying number, shall be furnished and installed
where indicated on the drawings and schedules. The make-up air units
shall be factory assembled and tested, and shall consist of a blower
section, burner section, filter section, intake hood, disconnect switch, --
curb adapter frames and controls and accessories as described herein,
and as required for a complete operating unit.
The cabinets shall be of a weatherproof design. All cabinets shall be
constructed of heavy gauge zinc -coated 'steel. The cabinets shall be
properly reinforced and braced for maximum rigidity. The cabinets shall
be given a factory -applied coat of rust -inhibitive primer and shall be
provided with the manufacturer's standard enamel finish. Interior
surfaces of the blower section shall have one inch thick, one and one-
half pound density glass fiber insulation.
The blowers shall be forward curved, multiblade, centrifugal type with
steel wheel and housing and shall be statically and dynamically balanced _
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -4-
by the blower manufacturer. The blower drive shall be V-belt type with
adjustable sheaves and shall be designed for 50 percent overload. -The
blowers shall have steel shafts operating in permanently lubricated
sealed ball bearings. The blower motors shall be TEFC and shall conform
to the requirements of the Motors and Motor Controls paragraph. Access
t
t
panels shall be provided to allow access to motors and filters.
Make-up air units for gas heating shall be of the direct gas -fired type
and shall include FM approved manifold, gas pressure regulators, stain-
less steel burner combustion baffles, stainless steel tubes and headers,
non -clogging gas ports, pilot controls, electric safety shutoff valve,
self-contained or motorized modulating gas valve, spark -ignited inter-
mittent pilot, electronic flame supervision, high;.temperature limit
switch, airflow switch, modulating room thermostat, mild weather burner
lockout, weatherproof enclosure and remote control station with system
switches and indicating lights. MBH output shall be as indicated on the
schedules.
Filter sections shall be of the V-bank type with two inch throwaway
glass fiber as indicated in the Air Filter .paragraph. Filter sections
shall have a removable gasketed access cover for filter replacement.
Rain hoods shall be flanged to the air inlet at the make-up air units.
Hoods shall have rain gutter around all edges and full size 1/2 inch
aluminum bird screen over intake opening.
Each make-up air unit shall be complete with a control panel,containing
motor starter, control transformer, circuit fuses and overloads with all
necessary wiring and identified terminal strips for externe.l connections
as required by the sequence of operations.
The make-up air units shall be as manufactured by Hastings, Rupp, or
Industrial Airsystems, Inc. -
9. HEAT EXCHANGER. A packaged air to air heat exchanger unit. denoted
by the symbol "HE" and an identifying number, shall be furnished and
installed where indicated on the drawings. The heat exchanger shall be
factory assembled and tested, and shall consist of an exchange matrix,
blowers, filter section where indicated, exhaust cowl, motor starter,
disconnect switch, curb adapter frame, roof curb, and controls and
t
accessories as described herein, and as required for a complete opera-
ting unit.
The cabinet shall be weatherproof design of heavy gauge zinc -coated
steel. The cabinet shall be given a factory -applied coat of rust -
inhibitive primer :and shall be provided with the.manufacturer•s standard
enamel finish. Interior surfaces shall have one inch thick, one and one
`
half pound density glass fiber insulation. Access doors for regular
maintenance and inspection shall be insulated double wall, continuously
hinged.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
�-
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -5-
The supply and exhaust blowers shall be forward curved, multiblade,
centrifugal type with steel wheel and housing and shall be statically
and dynamically balanced by the manufacturer. The blower drive shall be
V-belt type with adjustable sheaves and shall be designed for 50 percent
overload. The blowers shall have steel shafts operating in permanently
lubricated, sealed ball bearings. The blower motors shall be TEFC and
shall conform to the requirements of the Motors and Motor Controls
paragraph. Access panels shall be provided to allow access to motors.
The supply blower shall have a capacity of 3985 cfm at 1.5" T.S.P. and
the exhaust blower shall have a capacity of 3935 cfm at 1:5" T.S.P.
The heat exchanger matrix shall be an air-to-air stationary plate design.
as indicated on the drawings. The matrix unit shall be constructed of
aluminum material continuously formed and folded having no less than
four plates per inch and no more than five. All seams and -joints shall
be sealed with high temperature RTV silicone to prevent cross -
contamination and shall withstand pressures to 10" W.C. and temperatures
of 350° F. The matrix shall be a C-flow pattern and shall provide a
minimum efficiency of 65 percent at the specified airflow.
A 2-inch throwaway glass fiber filter, as indicated in the Air Filter
paragraph, shall be provided on the exhaust plenum prior to the matrix.
An exhaust cowl with bird screen shall be provided.
The packaged heat exchanger unit shall be complete with a control panel
containing motor starter, control transformer, disconnect switch,
differential pressure switch for clogged filter indication circuit fuses
and overloads with all necessary wiring and identified terminal strips
for external connections as required by the sequence of operations. The
unit shall be suitable for 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hz electrical service.
The heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by Tri-State Energy
Products, Model "TES", Temp-X-Changer, or equal.
10. HEATERS. Heaters of the types, sizes, and capacities specified
herein shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings
and in the schedules. All heaters shall be complete with controls and
accessories as required for satisfactory operation. All electric
heaters shall be UL listed.
10.01. 'Electric Duct Heaters. Electric duct heaters, denoted by the
symbol "EDH" and an identifying number, shall be furnished and installed
where indicated on the drawings and shall be designed for the conditions
indicated in the schedules.
Electric duct heaters shall be of open coil construction with 80 per-
cent nickel and-20 percent chromium resistance elements.Bushings shall
be ceramic and terminals shall be stainless steel. Heaters shall have
galvanized or aluminized welded steel frames and shall comply with the
National Electrical Code.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -6-
r
r
The heaters shall.have one inch wide flanges and shall be securely
fastened.to the ductwork. Heaters shall be completely factory wired and
shall be provided with disconnecting backup and safety contsictors,
transformers, automatic reset thermal cutout, manual reset, thermal
cutout, disconnect switch, and differential pressure airflow switch.
All interconnecting wiring shall be enclosed in a terminal box fastened
to the heaters and oriented as indicated on the drawings. The terminal
boxes shall be furnished with double doors.
Contactors shall be 600 volt rated, 3 pole, UL listed, and suitable for
100,000 operations. Built-in industrial dry type 24 volt control trans-
former shall be furnished and sized to carry the full contactor holding
coil load. Primary and secondary windings shall be -fused. Secondary
windings shall have one lead grounded.
( The duct heaters shall be furnished with an SCR control unit mounted in
J the duct heater terminal box. The SCR control unit shall be a solid-
state proportioning controller designed to modulate the heater output
from 0 to 100 percent. The duct heaters shall be controlled by a room
thermostat as indicated in the schedule and.on the drawings. The duct
heater SCR shall be compatible with the 0 to 18 volt ac signal from the
rroom thermostats.
i The duct heater output in kW shall be as indicated on the schedules.
Wiring diagrams for the duct heater shall be submitted in accordance
with the submittals section.
Electric duct heaters shall be as manufactured by Indeeco, Brasch, or
equal. .
10.02. Electric Unit Heaters. Electric unit heaters, denoted by the
symbol "EUH" and an identifying number, shall include fan and motor
assembly, built-in contactor, and a control transformer for 120 volt
control, and shall be suitable for use with the power supply indicated
in the schedules. Heater elements shall be steel plate, fin type with
elements brazed to common fins for maximum strength and heat. transfer.
Each unit heater fan motor shall be provided with automatic: reset.
thermal overload protection.
Each unit heater shall have a capacity as indicated in the schedules.
Horizontal unit heaters shall be,provided with a wall mounting bracket.
Electric unit heaters shall be Chromalox "LUH', "VUH" for vertical
applications, Berko, or Brasch.
11. FANS., Fans of the types, sizes, and capacities specified shall be
furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings and in the
` schedules. Each fan shall be complete with safety disconnect switch,
electric drive motor, drive, and accessories as required for satisfac-
tory operation. Where belt -driven fans are furnished, each fan shall be
complete with V-belt drive designed for 50 percent overload capacity,
i (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
i` (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -7
adjustable sheaves, adjustable base or rails for belt tightening, and a
belt guard.
Fans shall be rated in accordance with AMCA standards and shall be
licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Rating Label, and shall be UL
listed.
Fan drive motors and controls shall conform to the requirements of the
Electric Motors and Motor Controls paragraph. Motor horsepowers in the
Fan Schedule are minimum motor horsepowers. Larger motors shall be
provided if required to meet the specified requirements. All 120 volt,
single phase motors shall have internal thermal overload protection.
Fan curves shall be furnished with the fan submittals.
Fan noise level tests and ratings shall be made and published in accord-
ance with AMCA Standards 300 and 301. Fan sound ratings and sound test
verifications shall be furnished with each fan submittal.'
11.01. Centrifugal Blowers. Centrifugal blowers, denoted by the symbol
"CB" and an identifying number, shall be multiblade , squirrel -cage type
and shall have non -overloading type blades. Blowers shall be statically
and dynamically balanced to ensure quiet, vibration -free operation.
Blowers shall be suspended with vibration isolators from the existing
roofing system where indicated on the drawings. The blower drive motors
shall be open drip -proof, with permanently lubricated, double -sealed
ball bearings, and shall be suitable for use with the power supply
indicated in the schedule. Fan housings shall be fabricated of heavy
gauge steel and shall be coated inside and out with chemical -resistant
air-dried epoxy enamel. Fan bearings shall be of the self -aligning,
ball type. Blowers shall have capacities as indicated in the schedule.
Centrifugal blowers shall be Labconco, Kewaunee, or Peerless.
11.02. Power Roof Ventilators. Power roof ventilators, denoted by the
symbol "PRV" and an identifying number, shall be of the centrifugal type
and shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ensure quiet,
vibration -free operation. Each fan shall be complete with a weather
hood, safety disconnect switch mounted in the hood, and 1/2 inch mesh
aluminum bird screen over all openings. Fan housings shall be construc-
ted of,aluminum and shall have an aluminum base of the self -flashing
type suitable for mounting on the curbs indicated on the drawings.
Fan motors shall be open drip -proof, with permanently lubricated double -
sealed ball bearings, and shall be suitable for use with the power
supply indicated in .the schedules. Power roof ventilators shall have
capacities as indicated in the schedules.
Where indicated, power roof ventilators shall be given a special
interior protective coating capable of resisting a laboratory exhaust
atmosphere.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -8-
r
Power roof ventilators shall be as manufactured by Penn Ventilator,
"Model Domex", or "Model Fumex" as indicated on the schedules, Loren
Cook, or Ilg.
12. ROOF HOODS. Roof hoods, denoted by the symbol "RHO and an iden-
tifying number, shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the
drawings and in the schedules. Roof hoods shall be suitable for air
exhaust and shall have throat dimensions as indicated in the.schedules.
The roof hood shall be constructed of aluminum and shall be complete
with weather hood,.1/2 inch mesh aluminum bird screen over all openings,
and mounting base suitable for installation on an existing curb as
r• indicated on the drawings.
Roof hoods shall be Penn Ventilator "Airette", Loren Cook,, or Ilg.
13. DAMPERS. Dampers of the types and sizes specified shall be
furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings and, in the
schedules.
13.01. Control Dampers. Control dampers, denoted by the symbol "CD"
and an identifying number, shall be furnished and installed where
indicated on the drawings and in the schedules.
Dampers shall be located where indicated on the drawings. Dampers
having an area exceeding 25 square feet or any blade dimension exceeding
48 inches shall be built in multiple sections. All dampers shall be
carefully inspected before and after installation, and any damper having
poorly fitted blades, insufficient frame rigidity, or excessive
clearance or backlash in moving parts will be rejected and should be
replaced with an acceptable unit.
Type 1 rectangular and square control dampers where indicated on the
schedules shall be Ruskin "Type CD-40" or Arrow Louver & Damper. ..
Control damper frames shall be constructed .of 4 inch by one inch 6063 T5
extruded aluminum. Damper blades shall be constructed of 4 inch wide
airfoil -shape extruded aluminum.
Type 2 rectangular and square control dampers where indicated on the
schedules shall be Ruskin "Type CD-50" or Arrow Louver & Damper. The
damper frames shall be constructed of 5 or 6 inch 6063 T5 extruded
aluminum. Damper blades shall be constructed of_6 inch wide
r airfoil -shape extruded aluminum.
Two -position dampers shall have parallel operating blades. Modulating
dampers shall have opposed operating blades.
All damper blades shall be installed on a steel shaft operating in
synthetic bearings. Bearings shall be suitable for industrial service.
Dampers shall be close fitting and designed to offer minimum resistance
to the airflow when in the full open position. Dampers shall have blade
linkage concealed in the frame.
c (LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
r (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
f (17578 ) -9
Round control dampers shall be Ruskin "Type CDR 25" or Arrow Louver &
Damper.
13.02. Volume Control Dampers. Volume control dampers, denoted by the
symbol "VCD", shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the
drawings. Rectangular dampers shall be fabricated of 16 gage galvanized
steel, with 5 inch by one inch channel frame, and opposed operating
blades. Round dampers shall be fabricated of 14 gage galvanized steel,
with a 2 inch channel frame, a round blade and coated for laboratory
exhaust.
The damper shall be provided with adjustment quadrants and locking
devices so that the position of the damper will be indicated and the
damper will not move when locked:
Volume control dampers in round ductwork shall be Ruskin "Type CDR-25"
or Arrow Louver & Damper.
Volume control dampers in rectangular ductwork shall be Ruskin "Type
MD-35 OB" or Arrow Louver & Damper.
13.03. Counterbalanced Backdraft Dampers. Counterbalanced backdraft
dampers shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the
drawings. Rectangular dampers shall be fabricated of aluminum with 2
inch frame and have zinc plated adjustment bar on the blades so that the
blades will open when the static pressure as indicated on the drawings
is reached.
Counterbalanced backdraft dampers shall be Ruskin "Type CBD2" or Arrow
Louver & Damper.
13.04. Fire Dampers. Fire dampers, denoted by the symbol "FD", shall
be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings and as
required by NFPA No. 90A. Dampers shall have 5-inch wide galvanized
steel channel frame, galvanized steel interlocking blades, stainless
steel closure springs,-165° F fusible links, 20 gauge galvanized
enclosure, and 14 gauge galvanized field fabricated wall sleeve. Fire
dampers shall be 1-1/2 hour rated in accordance with UL-555. Fire
dampers shall be Ruskin "Model IBD2 Type C", or equal.
14. DAMPER OPERATORS. The damper operators shall be complete with
necessary linkage and mounting brackets, and shall be installed where
indicated on the drawings.
A maximum of`25 square feet of control damper shall be controlled by one
damper operator. The operators shall have sufficient torque required to
operate the damper.
14.01. Electric Damper Operators. 'The electric damper operators shall
be two -position type:
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -10-
r
F
i
14.01.01. Two -Position Electric Damper Operators. Two -position elec-
tric damper operators shall be housed in a die-cast aluminum case with
mounting flange. Motor and gear train components shall be immersed in
oil. Damper operators shall have a 318 inch square, double -ended drive
shaft.
Damper operators shall be two -position type with spring return and shall
have one internal spdt auxiliary switch rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac.
Damper operators shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 Hz,
single phase power supply. Where auxiliary transformers are required,
the transformer shall be factory wired to the damper operator and
installed in a HEMA Type 1 rated enclosure fastened to the motor
housing.
Two -position electric damper operators shall be Honeywell "Model M445A"
or Johnson Controls `Model M1OO
15. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES. Diffusers, registers, and
grilles shall be furnished in accordance with the Diffuser, Register,
and Grille Schedule included herein; the requirements are .indicated on
the drawings and as follows.
Diffusers, registers and grilles at the Laboratory. Building shall be
painted as indicated on the schedules or drawings.
15.01. Ceiling Diffusers. Ceiling diffusers shall be aluminum as
manufactured by Titus, or equal. Diffusers shall be square or rectan-
gular with removable core and shall have a key -operated opposed blade
damper, Titus •AG-951, mounted in neck except where noted to be omitted.
Size, location, and direction of blow shall be as indicated on the
drawings. Diffuser type shall be as indicated in the Diffuser,
Register, and Grille Schedule.
15.02. Resisters and Grilles. All registers and grilles shall be as
manufactured by Titus, or equal. Registers and grilles shall be
constructed of extruded aluminum. All registers shall be furnished with
key -operated opposed blade dampers. Register and grille type shall be
as indicated in the Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule and as
indicated on the drawings.
16. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Ductwork connections to the air handling
units and fans, and where indicated on the drawings, shall be made by
means of a fabric connector. Fabric shall be fire-resistant, water-
proof, and mildew -resistant, and shall be held with airtight collar and
metal band. At least 4 inches of fabric shall be exposed. Fabric shall
be Ventfabrics "Ventglass Flexible connections shall be in accordance
with the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association.
17. AIR FILTERS. Replaceable air filters shall be furnished and
installed where indicated on the drawings. Filters shall be throw -away
type with 2 inch thick glass fiber media and an initial resistance of
0.10 inch water column at 300 fpm. Filters shall be American Air Filter
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
15500
-11-
"Type 5700 Industrial Filter Two additional spare sets of filters
shall be furnished for all locationsand: shall be delivered to the Owner
in unopened packages.
Two inch galvanized steel filter holding frames with neoprene gaskets,
holding latches, and all necessary clip angles, bolting hardware and
supports shall be provided at the filter -room in the Solids Handling
Building and where indicated on the drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all filters shall have a mini-
mum efficiency of 20 percent atmospheric dust based on the NBS dust spot
test.
18. FLEXIBLE DUCT. Flexible duct shall be furnished and installed as
indicated on the drawings. The flexible duct .shall be for heating and
cooling. The duct shall be a.vinyl-coated, spring steel helix, bonded
to a vinyl -coated glass fiber mesh liner, and wrapped with glass fiber
wool insulation. The outer jacket shall be a vapor barrier of poly -
olefin material. The flexible duct shall be Automation Industries
"Thermaflex III Type G-KM" or Wiremold "WG-.C".
18.01. Flexible Duct Takeoffs. Takeoffs for flexible duct shall be
manufactured of galvanized steel. Takeoffs shall be of the bellmouth
type and shall include a neoprene gasket and predrilled holes for quick
mounting. Each takeoff shall have a balance damper constructed of
26 gage galvanized steel. Scoops, or other obstructions in the main
duct, will not be acceptable.
Takeoffs shall be Buckley Air Products "Air-Tite" or "Bellmouth BM".
19. ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS. Access doors where indicated on the
drawings shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of
the SMACNA manual for HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Access panels
shall be double skin type for insulated ductwork and single skin type
for uninsulated ductwork. Access panels shall have sash locks and no
hinges.
20. DUCTWORK. The location, arrangement, and size of all ductwork
shall be as indicated on the drawings. The duct sizes indicated are
clear dimensions inside the duct or duct lining. Ductwork shall be
constructed and installed in accordance with the drawings. Variations.
in the size and location of ductwork may be made, asacceptableto the
Owner, where required to avoid interference with building structure,
piping systems, or electrical work. The installation shall be coordi-
nated with other phases of the work to establish space and clearance
requirements. All ductwork, accessories, bracing, and supports shall be
constructed of galvanized steel or.rigid fiberglass duct board as noted
on the drawings. Ductwork, turning vanes, and other accessories shall
be fabricated, installed, and supported in accordance with the latest
edition of the SMACNA manual for HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
Single thickness turning vanes shall be installed in all turns with
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -12-
r-
a' F cr
angles of 45 degrees or greater. Plenums shall be constructed of
reinforced, 16 gage galvanized sheet metal.
Fibrous glass ducts in the Laboratory shall be one inch thick rigid
glass fiber with aluminum foil with a thermal conductivity factor of .23
at 75° F mean. The duct shall be sealed with heat activated tape or
pressure tape as recommended by the manufacturer. Where duct dimensions
exceed manufacturer's recommendations, reinforcement shall be in
accordance with SMACNA Fibrous Glass Manual.
Fibrous glass ducts shall be Manville "Type 475" Micro -Aire", Knauf or
r� Owens/Corning.
I
21. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS. The automatic temperature control systems
shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein. Ll temperature controls shall consist of electric
equipment as specified and shall be the product of a single manufac-
turer, unless otherwise indicated.
E Prior to the performance of any work or installation of any materials,
the Contractor shall submit the following data in accordance with the
submittals section:
Published descriptive data on each item of equipment and acces-
sories, indicating all specific characteristics and options and.
noted with the identification designation used herein and on the
drawings.
Schematic control diagrams giving specific data on all settings,
ranges, action, adjustments, and normal positions. Although sche-
matic, these diagrams shall, as closely as possible, represent the
actual systems with all significant equipment and devices identi-
fied and located relative to each other. These diagrams shall also
show detailed multiline wiring and instrument piping with all
terminals and ports accurately identified. Wiring diagrams shall
be detailed to the degree required for field construction and.shall
include all related wiring.
Sequence of operation for each system corresponding to -the control
schematics.
Detailed panel construction drawings, including description of all
materials and finishes, complete internal wiring and piping sche-
matics, and complete data on all mounted components.
Space thermostat schedule indicating the types of covers and
adjustment means for each space.
The electrical control components shall be as manufactured by Johnson
Controls, Honeywell or equal. The control apparatus shall consist of
all necessary thermostats, switches, relays, and gauges as indicated.on.
the drawings and as specified herein.
j (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -13-
21.01. Control Panels. Control panels shall be installed where
indicated on the drawings. Control panels shall be designed for wall
mounting and shall be completely prewired and checked.
Control panels shall be NEMA Type 12 as manufactured by Hoffman -Engi-
neering, or equal. The panels shall be mounted so that selector
switches and indicating lights on the panel are located approximately
5'-0" above the finished floor.
All electrical accessory devices and internal electrical wiring shall be
furnished and installed.
Where 24 volt ac control power is required by the temperature control
components, 120/24 volt ac transformers shall be installed. The trans-
formers shall be sized for their,control system electrical load. The.
transformers shall be mounted in the control panels and shall have both
the primary and secondary leads fused.
All controllers, selector relays, switching relays, fan interlock
relays, manual switches, alarm and indicating lights, and other devices
indicated to be panel mounted, shall be mounted in or on the control
panel.
Accessories,_ such as indicating lights and selector switches, shall be
mounted on the front hinged covers of the panels. The accessories and
panels shall be identified with engraved phenolic nameplates with 1/4
inch high letters at each switch and light. The nameplates shall be
fastened to the panel covers with stainless steel panhead screws.
Twenty-five percent extra terminals shall be provided in each control
panel. Bulbs for indicators and running functions shall be furnished.
One spare bulb for each light shall be provided.
21.02. Thermostats. Thermostats shall be as specified herein and as
indicated in the Thermostat Schedule; on the drawings.
Wall -mounted thermostats shall be mounted 4'-6" above finished floors.
Insulating spacers for thermostats mounted on exterior building walls
shall be provided. The spacers shall be installed between the thermo-
stat and its mounting surface so that the thermostat will not be
affected by surface temperatures.
21.02.01. Remote Bulb Thermostats. All electric remote thermostats for
air shall be provided with liquid filled copper sensing elements.
Remote bulb thermostats shall be furnished with adjustable'sensitivity
and set point. The thermostats shall control the controlled device
within plus or minus one degree F when occurring at the sensing element.
All submaster thermostats shall be furnished with readjusting dials
clearly marked so the range of the instrument can be changed.
21.02.02. Thermostats for Unit Heaters and Power Roof Ventilators.
Thermostats for control of unit heaters and power roof ventilators shall
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -14
be two -position line voltage thermostats. The thermostats shall have an
spdt switch rated for one horsepower.
The thermostats shall have a range of approximately 35 F to 100 F with a
nonadjustable differential of 2 degrees F, and shall be Honeywell "T631C
Airswitch" or Penn Controls "A19BAC-1".
21.03. Smoke Detectors. Smoke detectors shall be Pyrotronics "Model
DA-3 Air Duct Detector Unit". Duct -mounted ionization detectors shall
be completely self-contained, including integral power supply and super-
visory and control circuitry. Three sets of isolated alarm contacts
shall be provided. One set of alarm contacts shall be spst, normally
open; the second set shall be spdt; and the third set shall. be spdt and
shall indicate a detector malfunction. All contacts shall be sated
3 amperes at 120 volts ac. Pilot lights shall provide visual indication
of alarm and power supply status on the front of the unit. A key -
operated reset switch and a test jack shall also be provided. Detectors
shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power
supply and shall be U.L. rated. All detectors shall be tied to the
SCADA system.
r
r
Detectors shall be designed to provide detection of combustion gases,
fire, and smoke in air conditioning and ventilating duct systems in
compliance with the National Fire Protection Association. In addition,
they shall contain an ionization type detector and air sampling chamber
which serves as a reference point to help stabilize the detector against
effects from changes in temperature, humidity, and pressure. Detectors
shall be provided with sampling tubes extending the width of the air
duct.
Smoke detectors for room monitoring are specified in the Miscellaneous
Specialties section.
21.04. Differential Pressure Switches.
21.04.01. Airflow Monitors. Airflow monitors.shall be Dwyer differen-,
tial pressure switches"Series 1800". Switches shall be spdt, diaphragm,
operated by an air pressure differential between duct and atmosphere,
and rated 4 amperes at 120 volts ac. All airflow monitors, except at
HE-1401, shall be tied to the SCADA system.
22. NAMEPLATES. Phenolic nameplates shall be provided and permanently
attached to the wall at each control device to indicate the equipment
controlled. The letters used shall be the same as the symbols indicated
herein and on the drawings for various equipment., Each nameplate shall
have white letters on a black background.
23. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION. The sequence of operation shall be as indi-
cated on the drawings.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -15-
24. ELECTRIC MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS. The following requirements
apply only to electric motors and motor controls which are not covered
in other sections.
Motors shall conform to the requirements of the General Equipment
Stipulations. One-half horsepower and larger motors shall be energy -
efficient type. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished under
the electrical section.
All electrical controls shall have a case or cabinet at least equivalent
to NEMA Type 1 for wiring in conduit.
Typical schematics on the drawings indicate electrical control items and
functions required for most of the equipment; however, actual motor
sizes shall comply with the General Equipment Stipulations.
25. ANCHOR BOLTS AND EXPANSION ANCHORS. All anchor bolts, nuts,
washers, inserts, supports, and other accessories which are required for
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning work shall be furnished and
installed. Anchor bolts and expansion anchors shall conform to the
requirements of the anchor bolts and expansion anchors section.
26. GROUT. Grout shall be as specified in the grout section.
27. TESTS. All tests shall be conducted in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer and shall be repeated as many times as necessary to secure the
Engineer's acceptance of each system.
27.01. Refrigerant Piping. The piping system shall be tested in
accordance with ANSIJASME B31.5.
The completed refrigerant system shall be guaranteed to be free from
leaks for one year from the date of acceptance.
27.02. Completed Systems. After completion of the heating, ventila-
ting, and air conditioning systems, tests shall be conducted to
demonstrate that each system is functioning in accordance with speci-
fication requirements and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
27.03. Defective Work. If inspection or tests indicate defects, the
defective work or material shall be replaced, and inspection and tests
repeated.
27.04. Air System Testing and Balancing. The Contractor shall provide
the services of a licensed independent contractor, certified by NEBB or
AABC who shall test and balance the air systems installed under these
specifications, and shall perform an operational check of all air
conditioning equipment and fans installed under this contract.
All air systems shall be tested and balanced in accordance with the
latest applicable edition of the SMACNA manual for Balancing and Adjust-
ment of Air Distribution Systems. Air systems shall be tested and
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -16
balanced at airflow rates indicated on the drawings. Dampers behind
diffusers, registers, and grilles shall be adjusted to the flow rates
indicated on the drawings. In the event a drive assembly requires a
change of belts and pulleys, the Contractor shall size, furnish and
install the replacement drive assembly.
Final test readings shall be recorded. Apparatus report sheets for all
fans and outlet test sheets for all air outlets shall be accurately and
completely filled out in accordance with the SMACNA manual. Copies of
the final test readings shall be submitted to the Engineer for accept-
ance within one week after completion of the testing.
28. CLEANING AND ADJUSTING. At the completion of the work, all parts
of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All equipment and
fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which
may have accumulated by operation of the system for testing. Any
stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building,
building finish, or furnishings shall be repaired at no additional cost
to the Owner.
29. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete fabrication, assembly, foundation, and
installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data
covering material used, parts, devices, and other accessories forming a
part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with
the submittals section. The data and specifications shall include, but
shall not necessarily be limited to, the following:
Ductwork.
Temperature controls system.
Equipment.
Fan curves.
Smoke detectors.
Airflow monitors.
FDamper motors.
( (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
�» (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 15500
(17578 ) -17-
r
r
Section 16050 - ELECTRICAL
1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of electrical equipment
furnished under other sections, except electrical items designated to be
installed under those sections; and furnishing and installation of all
additional equipment and materials needed for the electrical require-
ments of this contract.
The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment
furnished under this section.
2. CODES AND PERMITS. All work shall be performed and all materials
shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, the National
Electrical Safety Code, and applicable local regulations and ordinances.
Where required by applicable codes, materials and equipment shall be
listed by Underwriters, Laboratories or other testing organization
acceptable to the governing authority. The Contractor shall, at his own
expense, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and
approval by the proper authorities in local jurisdiction of such work.
3. RELATION TO OTHER WORK. Electrical work shall be done to conform
with the construction schedule and progress of other trades and the .
scheduling requirements of Lubbock Power & Light. Electrical apparatus
a on all equipment shall be handled, set in place, connected, checked out,
rserviced, and placed in readiness for proper operation.
4. POWER AND TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCES. The Contractor shall
P' familiarize himself with the service installation requirements of the
local and telephone utilities, and shall furnish and install the service
equipment in complete accordance therewith.
The Contractor shall coordinate details and timing of removal of local
electric utilities and requirements for temporary power with Lubbock
Power & Light.
5. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. The following procedures shall be used in
performing electrical work except as otherwise specified or indicated on
the drawings.
5.01. Care of Equipment. During construction, all electrical equipment
insulation shall be protected against absorption of moisture, and metal-
lic components shall be protected against corrosion by strip heaters,
lamps, or other suitable means. This protection shall be provided
immediately upon receipt of the equipment and maintained continuously.
5.02. Setting of Equipment. All equipment shall be installed level and
plumb. Sheet metal junction boxes, equipment enclosures, sheet metal
raceways, and similar items mounted on water- or earth -bearing walls
shall be separated from the wall not less than 1/4 inch b, corrosion -
resistant spacers.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
�"- (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
` (17578 ) -1-
5.03. Sealing of Equipment. All outdoor substation, switchgear, motor
control center, and similar equipment shall be permanently sealed at the
base, and all openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed as required to prevent the entrance of 'rodents and insects the size of
wasps and mud daubers. Sealing material at,the base shall be concrete
grout. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with
silicone sealant, Dow-Corning"795" or GeneralElectric'"SCS1200".
6. CONDUIT. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the
drawings, the following procedures and requirements shall be used for
conduit installation and identification.
6.01. Interior and Exposed Exterior Conduit Installation. This section
covers the installation of conduit inside structures, above and below
grade, and in exposed outdoor locations. In general, conduit inside
structures shall be concealed. Large conduit and conduit stubs may be
exposed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. No
conduit shall be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the
drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall be
responsible for determining conduit routing that conforms to the instal-
lation requirements set forth herein.
Conduit installation shall conform to the following requirements:
a. Intermediate metal conduit shall be installed in concrete, in
masonry walls, and for exposed indoor applications. Conduit
shall not be installed in water bearing walls.
b. PVC -coated rigid steel conduit shall be installed in all
exposed outdoor locations. r
C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be installed for
final connections to dry type transformers, motors without
flexible cords, and other equipment with rotating or moving
parts.
d. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be installed with
watertight connectors and in minimum lengths without sharp
bends.
e. Terminations and connections of intermediate metal conduit
shall be taper threaded. Conduits shall be reamed, free of
burrs, and terminated with conduit bushings.
f. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpen-
dicular to 'structural members and surfaces.
g. Two or more conduits in the same general routing shall be
parallel with symmetrical bends.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -2-
1
I
h. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature
piping, ducts, and flues.
i. Conduit shall be rigidly supported by galvanized hardware and
framing materials, including nuts and bolts.
j. Conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures shall be
securely fastened by locknuts inside and outside.
k. Conduits shall be installed between the reinforcing steel in
walls or slabs which have reinforcement in both faces. In
slabs which have.only a single layer of reinforcing steel,
conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement.
1. Conduit across structural joints where structural movement is
allowed shall have an 0-Z "Type DX" or Crouse -Hinds "Type XD",
bonded, weathertight expansion and deflection fitting of that
conduit size.
M. Conduit shall be clear of structural openings and indicated
future openings.
n. Conduits through roofs or metal walls shall be flashed and
sealed watertight.
o. Conduit shall be neatly grouted into any openings cut into
concrete and masonry structures.
p. Conduits shall be capped during construction to prevent
entrance of dirt, trash, and water.
q. Exposed conduit stubs for future use shall be terminated with
galvanized pipe caps.
r. Concealed conduit for future use shall be terminated in equip-
ment or by galvanized couplings plugged flush with structural
surfaces.
S. Conduit installed horizontally shall allow headroom of at
least 7 feet except where it may be installed along struc-
tures, piping, and equipment, or in other areas where headroom
cannot be maintained because of other considerations.
t. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, no conduit shall
be smaller than 3/4 inch.
U. PVC -coated rigid steel conduit shall be threaded and installed
as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. Threading tools
used for steel conduit shall not be used to thread PVC -coated
rigid steel conduit.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -3-
V. All conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated by L
fittings which ensure that the NEMA rating of the enclosure is
not affected or changed.
W. Underground nonmetallic conduit which turns out of concrete,
masonry, or earth shall be connected to metallic conduit
before emergence, with 90 degree elbows of steel conduit
indoors and PVC -coated rigid steel conduit outdoors.
X. A corrosion -resistant coating shall be applied to all conduits
that turn out of concrete, masonry, or earth indoors. The
coating shall consist of a heavy coat of coal tar paint
extending one inch on each side of the point of turn -out.
Y. Electrical metallic tubing shall be installed in gypsum board
walls and above gypsum board or lay -in ceilings.
6.02. Underground Conduit Installation. All excavation, backfilling,
and concrete work shall conform to respective sections of these specifi-
cations. Underground conduit shall conform to the following require-
ments:
a. All underground conduits not indicated as otherwise on the
drawings shall be concrete encased. No underground conduit
shall be smaller than one inch. —
b. Underground portions of conduit for power and control cables
shall be polyvinyl chloride type EB. Conduits shall have end _
bells where terminated at walls, or adapters for steel conduit
continuations where required. All PVC conduit joints shall be
solvent welded in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
C. Underground portions of conduit for telephone, intercommuni-
cation, and instrument cables shall be polyvinyl chloride type
EB. Conduits shall have end bells where terminated at walls.
d. Concrete encased conduit shall have minimum concrete thick-
nesses of 2 inches between conduits and 4 inches over outer
conduits.
e. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall
continue to 3 inches above grade, with top crowned and edges
chamfered.
f. Where conduit and concrete encasement are terminated under-
ground, the conduit shall be terminated flush at the bulkhead
with a coupling and a screw plug. After concrete placement,
con-duit shall be cleaned and coated with two coats of
thixotropic coal tar.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
A
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -4-
F
r
i
g. Underground conduits indicated not to be concrete encased
shall be PVC -coated rigid steel conduit.
h. Underground conduit bend radius shall be not less than 2 feet
at vertical risers nor less than 3 feet elsewhere.
i. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have 2 feet
minimum earth cover except where indicated otherwise.
j. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast
in place, or concreted into boxouts with water stops on all
sides of the boxout. Water stops are covered in the cast -in -
place concrete section.
k. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls
which have one side in contact with earth shall be sealed
watertight with special rubber gasketed sleeve and joint
assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing
elements.
1. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings
to the manholes. Where this is not possible, a handhole or
manhole shall be constructed adjacent to the building so that
water cannot drain into the building.
M. Each 5 kV or higher voltage cable, each 250 MCM or larger
cable, and each conduit group of smaller cables shall be sup-
ported from manhole walls by Unistrut "P-3259" inserts with
"P-2544" brackets, and fiberglass reinforced polyester cable
saddles.
6.03. Sealing of Conduits. After cable has been installed and con-
nected, conduit ends shall be sealed by nonhardening sealing compound
forced into conduits to a minimum depth equal to the conduit diameter.
This shall apply for all conduits at handholes, manholes, and building
entrance junction boxes, and for one inch and larger conduit connections
° to equipment.
Conduits entering chlorine or sewage screen rooms and submersible or
explosionproof enclosures shall have Appleton "Type ESU" sealing fit-
tings with sealing compound.
6.04. Conduit Identification. Conduits shall be provided with identi-
fication tags in manholes, handholes, building entrance pull boxes,
junction boxes, and equipment. Identification tags shall be 19 gage
stainless steel, with 1/2 inch stamped letters and numbers as indicated
on the drawings. Identification tags shall be attached to conduits with
nylon tie wraps and shall be positioned to be readily visible for
inspection.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
` (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
l (17578 ) -5-
7. CABLE. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings,
the following procedures and requirements shall be used for cable
installation and identification.
7.01. Cable Installation. Care shall be taken to protect the cable and
avoid kinking of conductors, cutting or puncturing the jacket, contami-
nation by oil or grease, or damaging in any manner. Cable installation
shall conform with the following requirements:
a. Stranded conductor cable shall be terminated by lugs, cup
washers, or pressure type connectors. Stranded cables shall
not be wrapped around screw type terminals.
b. Stranded conductor cable shall be spliced by solder or crimp
type connectors. Twist -on wire connectors shall not be used
on stranded cable.
C. Cables may be spliced only at readily accessible locations.
d. Cable terminations and splices shall be made as recommended by
the cable manufacturer for the particular cable and service
conditions. All shielded cable stress cone terminations made
to electrical equipment, either indoors or outdoors, shall be
IEEE Class 1 molded rubber type. Shielded cable splices shall
be tape or molded rubber type as required. Shielded cable —
splices and stress cone terminations shall be made by quali-
fied splicers. Materials used shall be as manufactured by 3M
Company or Raychem Electric Power Products.
e. Cable shall not be pulled tight against bushings nor pressed
heavily against enclosures.
f. Cable -pulling lubricants shall be as recommended by the cable
manufacturer for that particular type cable.
g. Cables operating at over 3,000 volts shall be fireproofed in
all cable vaults, manholes, and handholes. Such cables shall
be fireproofed by a half -lapped layer of 3M "Scotch 77 Arc -
Proofing Tape" anchored by a double wrapof3M "Scotch 69
Glass Cloth Tape" at each end.
h. Cables in vertical risers shall be supported by Kellems, or --
equal, woven grips where necessary to prevent heavy loading on
cable connections.
i._ Spare cable ends shall be taped and coiled.
j. Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than the
manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radius.
k. All cables in one conduit, over one foot long, or with any
bends, shall be pulled in or out simultaneously.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -6-
7
fi,
7.02.- Cable Identification. Except for lighting and receptacle cir-
cuits, each individual wire in power, control, indication, and instru-
mentation circuits shall be provided with identification markers at the
�* point of termination.
tThe wire marker shall be of the self -laminating write -on type.'
The wire numbers shall be as shown on the equipment manufacturer's
1 drawings.
Wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection.
Power wires not having individualized identification numbers shall be
color coded with electrical tape or colored wire jacket.
8. GROUNDING. Electrical system grounding and equipment grounding
shall be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code and
shall conform with the following applicable requirements:
a. All ground conductors shall be bare or green insulated in
accordance with the National Electrical Code, soft drawn
copper cable or bar, not smaller than 12 AWG.
b. Ground cable splices and joints which will be inaccessible
upon completion of construction shall meet the requirements of
IEEE Standard 837, and shall be Cadweld "Exothermic" or Burndy
"Hyground" type.
C. Ground cable through building exterior walls shall enter
within 3 feet below finish grade and shall be prepared with a
water stop. Unless otherwise indicated, the water stop shall
include filling the space between the strands with solder and
soldering a 12 inch copper disc over the cable.
L
d. Ground cable near the base of a structure shall be in earth
and as far from the structure as the excavation permits but
c not closer than 6 inches.
e. The main grounding conductor, when exposed within a building,
shall be copper bar supported with suitable spacers at 112 to
one inch from the structure.. Unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings, the ground bus shall be not smaller than 1/4 by
one inch rectangular.
f.
Lighting fixtures and convenience outlets shall be grounded
through the conduit system.
a
g.
Convenience outlet receptacles
shall be grounded by a bare
d:
copper conductor in addition -to
the conduit connection.
i'
h.
Ground connections to equipment
and ground buses shall be by
copper ground lugs or clamps.
Connections to enclosures not
(LUBBOCK,
TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
NO. 4 ) 16050
y
(17578
) -7-
provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be by
clamp type lugs added under permanent assembly bolts or under
new bolts drilled and added through enclosures other than
explosionproof, or by grounding locknuts or bushings.
Explosionproof enclosures not provided with any of the above
grounding means shall be grounded by the addition of an
adjacent junction box with a ground lug. Ground cable
connections to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or var-
nish; or on bolts holding removable access covers will not be
permitted.
i. The grounding system shall be bonded to station piping by con-
nection to the first flange inside the building on either a
suction or discharge pipe which will form a good ground con-
nection. The connection shall,,be made with a copper bar or
strap by drilling and tapping the flange and providing a
bolted connection.
j. Ground conductors on equipment shall be formed to the contour
of the equipment and firmly supported.
k. All ground connection hardware, bolts, and nuts shall be high
strength, high conductivity copper alloy.
1. Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be 5/8 inch diameter
by 8 feet long, with a copper jacket bonded to a steel core.
9. OUTLETS AND FITTINGS. Concealed conduit systems shall have a flush -
mounted switch and convenience outlets. Exposed conduit systems shall
have a surface -mounted switch and convenience outlets.
9.01. Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
a. Boxes and fittings in exposed conduit systems shall: be galva-
nized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron, Appleton.
b. Boxes and fittings in conduit systems encased in concrete, in
exterior faces of walls, in water- or earth -bearing walls, and
where weatherproof devices are required shall be galvanized or
cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron, Appleton.
C. Boxes in concealed conduit systems„ other than in cast -in -
place concrete and exterior faces of walls or where weather-
proof devices are required, shall be galvanized or cadmium
plated steel.
d. Hub arrangements on threaded fittings shall be the most appro-
priate for the conduit arrangement required in each case, to '
avoid unnecessary conduit bends and fittings.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SE'WRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050 L
(17578 ) -8-
n
9.02. Device Plates
a. Galvanized or cadmium plated device plates shall be used on
surface -mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are not
required.
b. Device plates on flush -mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof
plates are not required shall be Type 302 stainless steel.
C. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and
finished to match the plate.
d. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard plates do
not fully cover the wall opening.
e. Device plates for switches outdoors or indicated as weather-
proof shall have provisions for padlocking switches "On" and
"Off", and shall be Appleton"FSK-1VS" or Crouse -Hinds
"DS185".
f. Device plates for receptacles outdoors or indicated as
weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK-WRD" or Crouse -Hinds
"WLRD1".
g. Flush -mounted, weatherproof plates shall be provided with
adapter plates, Crouse -Hinds "FS031".
h. Engraved device plates, where required, shall be as manufac-
tured by Sierra Electric Corporation.
9.03. Wall Switches.
a. Switches on ac lighting panel load circuits through 240 volts
shall be 20 amperes, 120/277 volts, Hubbell "1221" through
"1224".
b. Wall switches shall be mounted 3'-6" above floor or grade.
C. Light switches in the Administration Building shall be equal
to Lutron, Nova T-Star Model NT-lPS and shall match and gang
with wallbox dimmers called for in these specifications.
Switches shall be white.
9.04. Receptacles.
a. Standard convenience outlets shall be duplex, 3 wire, ground-
ing, 20 amperes, 125 volts, Hubbell "5362-GRY" for 120 volt
circuits, and 250 volts, Hubbell 05462-GRY" for 240 volt
circuits.
r-
t (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -9-
MR
b. Ground fault receptacles shall be duplex, 3 wire, grounding,
20 amperes, 125 volts, Hubbell "GF-5362-GY" for 120 volt
circuits.
C. Convenience outlets shall be 18 inches above the floor unless
otherwise required.
d. Convenience outlets outdoors and in garages, basements, shops,
storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be hosed down shall
be 4'-0" above floor or grade.
9.05. Special Outlets.
a. Wall thermostats shall be 5'-6 " above the floor unless other-
wise required. Thermostats on exterior walls shall be
suitably insulated from wall temperature.
b. Telephone outlets shall be 8 inches above the floor unless
otherwise required. Telephone outlets outdoors and in
garages, basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where
equipment may be hosed down shall be 4'-0" above the floor.
C. Clock outlets shall be Hubbell "5235" located 7'-0" above the
floor.
10. JUNCTION BOXES AND WIRING GUTTERS. Indoor boxes (larger than
switch, receptacle, or fixture type) and gutters shall be constructed of
sheet steel and galvanized after fabrication. Similar enclosures out-
doors shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors or
removable covers. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and instal-
lation details shall comply with the National Electrical Code.
Telephone conduit shall have separate junction boxes and pull fittings.
Bolt -on junction box covers 3'-0" square or larger, or heavier than
25 pounds, shall have a rigid handle. Covers larger than 3'-0" by 4'-0"
shall be split.
Where indicated on the drawings, junction boxes with a removable side
opposite the underground conduits shall be provided over building ends
of underground conduit banks. Boxes shall be at least Code size, in-
cluding space for full size continuations of all underground conduits
not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space
for future conduits.
11. LIGHTING FIXTURES. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished and
installed as described in the fixture schedule and as indicated on the
drawings. The drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of
fixtures desired. Fixtures in rows shall be aligned both vertically and
horizontally unless otherwise required. Fixtures shall be clear of
pipes, mechanical equipment, structural openings, indicated future
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -10-
i
r�
equipment and structural openings, and other obstructions. Lighting
fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps.
Pendant fixtures shall have swivel type box covers and threaded conduit
pendants unless otherwise specified.
12. CONDUIT. All conduit furnished shall be as described herein.
12.01. Rigid Steel Conduit. Rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall,
hot -dip galvanized, and shall conform to Fed Spec WW-C-581 and ANSI
C80.1. Rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with
UL-6.
12.02. Liouidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Liquidtight flexible metal
conduit shall be galvanized steel, covered with moistureproof and flame -
resistant polyvinyl chloride jacket.
12.03. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. PVC conduit encased in
concrete shall be Type EB and UL labeled for underground uses. The PVC
conduit shall conform to NEMA TC-6.
12.04. PVC -Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. The conduit shall be rigid
steel. Before the PVC coating is applied, the hot -dip galvanized
surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy -acrylic primer to ensure a bond
between the steel substrate and the coating. A two-part red urethane
chemically cured coating shall be applied to the interior of all conduit
and fittings. The internal coating shall be applied at a nominal 2 mil
thickness. The urethane internal coating shall afford sufficient flexi-
bility so as to permit field bending without cracking or flaking of the
interior coating.
The PVC coating shall be bonded to the primed outer surface of the
conduit. The bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the
tensile strength of the PVC coating. The thickness of the PVC coating
shall be a minimum of 40 mils.
Every female opening shall have a PVC sleeve extending one conduit
diameter or 2 inches beyond the opening, whichever is less. The inside
diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the
conduit before coating. The wall thickness of the sleeve shall be at.
least 40 mils.
All fittings, condulets, mounting hardware, and accessories shall be PVC
coated. All hollow conduit fittings shall be coated with the same red
interior urethane coating as described above. The screw heads on condu-
lets shall be encapsulated with a corrosion -resistant material by the
manufacturer. Couplings shall have longitudinal ribs 40 mils in thick-
ness to protect them from wrenches or pliers.
All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -11-
PVC -coated rigid steel conduit shall be as manufactured by Robroy
Industries.
12.05. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). IMC shall be hot -dip galva-
nized and shall conform to FedSpecWW-C-581. IMC shall be manufactured
in accordance with UL 1242.
12.06. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). EMT shall be hot -dip galva-
nized shall be UL approved, and shall conform to Fed Spec WW-C-563 and
ANSI C80.3.
13. CABLE. The cable furnished shall conform to the Cable Data sheets
bound at the end of this section and as described herein.
13.01. Cable Manufacturers. The cable furnished shall be produced by
one or more of the manufacturers -indicated in the following table;
products of other manufacturers will not be acceptable. All cables of
each type (such as lighting cable or 600 volt power cable) shall be from
the same manufacturer. Each "X" in the table indicates an acceptable
manufacturer of the indicated cable.
Multi-
8 & 15 kV 600 V 600 V Cond
Power 'Power Ltg Control instrument
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
American Insulated X X X
wiva Cnr
r•
Belden Electronic
Wire & Cable
BIW Cable System, Inc.
X
Brand -Rex Co.
Cablec Corp. (Anaconda X
X
and Phelps -Dodge Cable
only)
Fluorocarbon, Samuel
Moore Group,
Dekoron Div.
Ericsson Continental
Wire & Cable Corp.
Hi -Tech Corp.
X
The Okonite Co. X
X
Paranite (Essex)
X
(LUBBOCK. TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4
16050
(17578
-12-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
�I
Multi-
8 & 15 kV 600 V 600 V Cond
Power Power Ltg Control Instrument
Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable
Pirelli Cable Corp. X X
Southwire X X X
Rockbestos Co. X X X X
Rome Cable Corp. X X X X X
Tamaqua Cable X
Products Co.
Triangle PWC, Inc X X X
13.02. LijzhtinQ Cable. Lighting cable shall be provided only in light-
ing and receptacle circuits operating at 277 volts and below. Lighting
and receptacle circuits for underground use and cable 8 AWG or larger
shall be as specified for 600 volt power cable.
13.03. 600 Volt Power Cable. Cables in power, control, indication, and
alarm circuits operating at 600 volts or less, except where lighting,
multi -conductor control, and instrument cables are permitted or
required, shall be 600 volt power cable.
13.04. Instrument Cable. Cable for electronic circuits to instrumenta-
tion, metering, .and other signaling and control equipment shall be two -
or three -conductor instrument cable twisted for magnetic noise rejection
and protected from electrostatic noise by a total coverage shield.
Cable shall be used where indicated on the drawings.
13.05. Multi -Conductor Control Cable. Multi -conductor control cable
shall be used where indicated on the drawings.
13.06. 8 kV Power Cable. Cable for circuitsratedover 600 volts and
not greater than 5,000 volts, and rated for wet or dry locations in
conduit and open air, shall be 8 kV power cable.
13.07. 15 kV Power Cable. Cable for circuits rated over 5,000 volts
and not greater than 15,000 volts, and rated for wet or dry locations in
conduit and open air, shall be 15 kV power cable.
13.08. Cable Rated 5,000 Volts and Above. Conductors with insulation
rated 5,000 volts and above shall be given a field do insulation test.
The ampacit.y of direct current testing equipment shall be not less than
2,500 microamperes.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -13-
Final test voltages and the duration of the test shall be as indicated
on the Cable Data sheets.
Test procedures shall conform to the following standard applicable to
the cable insulation under test:
ICEA - S-68-516 (Interim Standard No. 1), Cable Rated 0-35,000
Volts and Having Ozone -Resistant Ethylene -Propylene -
Rubber Insulation.
The tests shall be performed by competent personnel specializing in
electrical cable testing. Reports on cable test data for each cable
tested shall be submitted to the Engineer in triplicate. A Cable Test
Data Form is included at the end of this section.
14. LIGHTING PANELS. Unless otherwise specified, each lighting panel
shall be dead -front, circuit breaker, 120/240 volt, single phase panel -
board type in accordance with the drawings and the following.
14.01. Cabinet. The panel shall have a surface NEMA Type l enclosure.
The enclosure shall have a door with latch and lock. A directory inside
the door shall have the panel and all circuit identities neatly
typewritten at completion of the contract.
14.02. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be thermal -magnetic,
bolt -in, individually front replaceable, and shall indicate "On", "Off",
and "Tripped". Breakers indicated as multiple -pole shall be common
trip. Breakers shall have interrupting ratings not less than _
18,000 amperes. Handle clips to prevent casual operation of breakers
shall be provided for 10 percent (minimum of 2) of the breakers and
applied to the circuits directed. Breakers and provisions for future
breakers shall be provided in the quantities, poles, and ampere ratings r
indicated on the drawings. Breakers shall be single pole, 20 amperes
except as indicated otherwise.
14.03. Buses. The panel shall have main and neutral buses insulated
from the cabinet and a ground bus. Buses shall be copper, with ampere
ratings and main lugs or breaker as indicated. The ground bus shall be
similar to a neutral bus and shall have a good ground connection to the
cabinet, a removable bond to the neutral bus, clamp type lugs for the
ground cable in each supply conduit, and connections for a ground cable
in each load conduit.
15. POWER PANELS WITHOUT NEUTRALS. Except as individually described,
each power panel without neutral shall be dead -front, circuit breaker,
panelboard type in accordance with the drawings and the following.
15.01. Cabinet. The panel shall have a surface NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
The enclosure shall have a door with latch and lock. A directory inside
the door shall have a panel and all circuit identities neatly type-
written at completion of the contract.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION) _
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -14-
k
A ground stud bolt shall be provided through the cabinet, with a .
removable 1/0 AWG bond to the panel ground bus and an external clamp
connector for a station ground cable.
15.02. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be thermal -magnetic,
bolt -in, individually front replaceable, and shall indicate "On", "Off",
and "Tripped". Breakers indicated as multiple -pole shall be common
trip. Breakers up to 240 volts shall have interrupting ratings not less
than 18,000 amperes. Breakers for 480 volts shall be rated 600 volts
with interrupting ratings not less than 22,000 amperes at 4.80 volts.
Handle clips to prevent casual operation of breakers shall be provided
for 10 percent (minimum of 2) of the breakers and applied to the cir-
cuits directed. Breakers and provisions for future breakers shall be
provided in the quantities, poles, and ampere ratings indicated.
Breakers in ac lighting panels shall be single pole, 20 amperes except
as otherwise indicated.
15.03. Buses. The panel shall have 3 phase buses and a ground bus.
Buses shall be copper, with ampere and voltage ratings and main lugs or
breaker as indicated. The ground bus shall be similar to a neutral bus
and shall have a good ground connection to the cabinet, clamp type lugs
for the ground cable in each supply conduit, and connections for a
ground cable in each load conduit.
16. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOTOR STARTERS. Separately enclosed motor
starters, unless otherwise specified, shall be full voltage, non -
reversing, circuit breaker combination magnetic motor starters sized as
indicated on the drawings.
The starters shall consist of single or 3 phase, 60 Hz contactors with
thermal overloads, 120 volt ac coil, dry type control power transformer
where required, and a magnetic motor circuit protector disconnect in a
NEMA Type 1 enclosure indoors or NEMA Type 4 stainless steel enclosure
outdoors, unless otherwise noted. Control power transformers shall be
sized to handle all simultaneous loads.
Each starter shall include auxiliary contacts as required plus one spare
NO and one spare NC contact.
Magnetic motor circuit protectors shall be single or 3 phase, 600 volt,
molded -case circuit breakers with instantaneous trip elements. The
breakers shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, trip -
free toggle mechanism.
One thermal overload relay shall be provided in each phase lead. Each
starter shall be provided with an external manual reset push button for
reset of the thermal overload relays.
An external manual breaker operating handle with provisions for up to
three padlocks shall be provided on each starter. The access door shall
be interlocked with the motor circuit protector so the door cannot be
opened while the breaker is closed, except by an interlock override.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
€ (17578 ) -15-
The complete starter shall have an interrupting rating of at least
22,000 amperes at 480 volts.
The Contractor shall match control power transformers, overloads,
heaters, and sizes of starters to the equipment furnished, which may
differ from expected values as indicated on the drawings. Control power
transformers shall have both primary leads fused, one secondary lead
fused, and one secondary lead grounded.
All push buttons, selector switches, and lights indicated on the sche-
matics to be provided on or in the starter enclosure shall be heavy-
duty, oiltight. Push buttons shall be provided with protective caps
when starters are located outdoors.
Motor starters shall have engraved or etched legends ("Start", "Stop",
etc.) as described on the drawings. Motor starters shall have name-
plates identifying related equipment, and unit numbers where applicable.
Nameplates shall be laminated black -over -white plastic, with 1/8 inch
engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the motor starter.
17. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MANUAL STARTERS. Separately enclosed manual
starters not specified otherwise shall be provided hereunder. Manual
starters shall be provided with thermal overload protection properly
sized for the motors served and with a contact and overload in each
phase lead. Manual starters shall be mounted in NEMA Type 1 enclosures
unless otherwise noted.
Manual starters shall have engraved or etched legends as described on
the drawings. Manual starters shall have nameplates identifying related
equipment, and unit numbers where applicable. Nameplates shall be lami-
nated black -over -white plastic, with 1/8 inch engraved letters, and
shall be securely fastened to the manual starter.
18. CONTROL STATIONS. Control stations shall be provided as indicated
on the one -line diagrams or schematics or as required by the equipment
furnished. Pilot devices shall be heavy-duty, oiltight and shall
perform the functions indicated. Indoor control stations shall have
NEMA Type 13 enclosures. Control stations outdoors or indicated to be
weatherproof shall have NEMA Type 4 stainless steel enclosures with
protective caps on the control devices. Control stations in Class I,
Division 2, Group D hazardous areas shall be NEMA Type 7 enclosures.
Control stations shall have engraved or etched legends ("Start", "Stop",
etc.) as described on the drawings. Control stations shall have name-
plates identifying related equipment, and unit numbers where applicable.
Nameplates shall be laminated black -over -white plastic, with 1/8 inch
engraved letters. and shall be securely fastened to the control station.
19. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS. Circuit breakers shall be
3 phase, 480 volt, molded -case circuit breakers of not less than
22,000 amperes interrupting rating at 480 volts ac, complete with ther-
mal and instantaneous trip elements in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure indoors
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
16050
-16-
v
C-
r,.
or a NEMA Type 4 stainless steel enclosure outdoors. These breakers
shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, trip -free
toggle mechanism. Bimetallic thermal elements shall withstand sustained
overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and without affect-
ing calibration.
Circuit breakers shall have "On", "Off", and "Tripped" indication and
padlockable exterior handles.
Circuit breakers shall have engraved or etched legends ("On", "Off", and
"Tripped") as described on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall have
nameplates identifying related equipment, and unit numbers where appli-
cable. Nameplates shall be laminated black -over -white plastic, with
1/8 inch engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the circuit
breaker.
20. DISCONNECT SWITCHES. Unless otherwise specified, each disconnect
switch shall be 3 phase..nonfusible, 600 volts, with a continuous cur-
rent rating as indicated on the drawings.
Switches located indoors shall have a NEMA Type 1 general purpose
enclosure. Switches located outdoors shall have a NEMA Type 4 enclo-
sure. Switches located in the chlorine rooms, or other areas where
contact with caustic substances may occur, shall have a NEMA Type 4X,
Type 316 stainless steel enclosure.
Switches shall have high conductivity, copper, visible blades; non-
teasible, positive, quick -make, quick -break mechanisms; and switch
assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure
base. Each switch shall have a handle whose position is easily recog-
nizable and capable of being padlocked in the "Off" position with three
padlocks. The "On" position and "Off" position shall be clearly marked.
All switches shall be UL listed, horsepower rated, and meet NEMA.Speci-
fication KS1-1975. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that
prevent thedoorfrombeingopened while the operating handle is in the
"On" position.
All switches shall have front cover -mounted nameplates that contain a
permanent record on switch type. manufacturer and catalog number, and
horsepower rating. An additional nameplate shall be provided to
identify the related equipment. The additional nameplate shall be
engraved or etched, laminated black -over -white plastic, with 1/8 inch
letters. Both nameplates shall be securely fastened to the enclosure.
21. LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY POWER TRANSFORMERS. Separately mounted
transformers shall be provided in the phases, kVA, and voltages indi-
cated on the drawings. Transformers shall be self -air-cooled, dry type,
wall or floor-mounted,.and enclosed for wiring in.conduit. Trans-
formers installed outdoors shall be weatherproof. Transformers shall
have at least two full capacity voltage taps.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -17-
22. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM. A complete lightning protection
system, certified by the "Lightning Protection Institute" (LPI) of
Hohokus, New Jersey, shall be -furnished and installed. The Contractor's
design shall be submitted to and modified as required by the LPI. The
installation Contractor must be LPI certified. All material shall
comply with Components Standard LPI-176 and shall meet the installation
requirements of Lightning Protection Code NFPA-78. All phases of
construction shall be inspected by the Engineer before concealment..
Lightning protection shall be furnished at the headworks, blower,
chlorine storage, and solids handling buildings, anaerobic digesters
No. 6 and No. 7, the digested.sludge pumping station, and at Phase I of
the maintenance building.
22.01. Materials. Materials shall conform to Class I (for structures
less than 75 feet in height). All conductors shall be of copper, air
terminals shall be of copper or bronze, ground terminals shall be of
copper clad steel, and fastening devices shall be of bronze or copper.
22.02. Installation. Down conductors, where used, shall be concealed
as much as possible and shall be bonded to the grounding electrode
system. The electrode system shall include a counterpoise encircling
the structure as far as possible.
22.03. Approval. An LPI Certified System Plate shall be obtained and
mounted on the building at the Engineers -Architects' direction.
22.04. Drawings. Within 60 days after Notice to Proceed, the Con-
tractor shall furnish outline drawings and bill of material data which
fully describes the lightning protection system as specified herein.
All drawings and data shall be submitted for review in accordance with
the Submittals Section.
23. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS. Power factor correction
capacitors shall be provided in the quantities as indicated on the
drawings. Power factor correction capacitors shall be completely
factory assembled in indoor rated enclosures. Power factor correction
capacitors shall be wired in a three phase delta connected configura-
tion. Each unit shall be provided with termination provisions within
the enclosure and an internal ground lug.
Power factor correction capacitor size and rating shall be coordinated
with its respective motor to obtain a power factor of 95 to 97 percent.
Capacitors shall be Westinghouse Type HWP or equal.
23.01. Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall be
provided in each phase of the capacitor in accordance with the latest
edition of the NEC.
23.02. Capacitor Cell. Individual capacitor cells shall be of the
self -healing metallized -film type filled with a dry non-flammable filler
material; oil -filled capacitors will not be acceptable. The capacitor
shall withstand 135 percent of rated current continuously, 110 percent
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -18-
of rated voltage continuously, and an ambient temperature range of -40C
to +40C. Losses shall be less than 0.5 watts per kvar. The enclosure
shall be filled with a dry, non -toxic, nonflammable insulating material.
23.03. Discharge Resistor. Discharge resistors shall be provided to
reduce the residual voltage to 50 volts or less within one minute after
the capacitor has been removed from line voltage. Resistors shall be
mounted external to the capacitor cells within the enclosure to mini-
mize the dielectric operating temperature.
24. NAMEPLATES. The Contractor shall furnish nameplates for all
+wl control stations, panelboards, terminal cabinets, switchgears, and
contactors.
Nameplate material shall be No. 7025 phenolic plastic, black surface,
white core, 1/16 inch thick, matte finish, and shall be permanently
1 attached with stainless steel hardware.
r
Lettering shall be all block, capital letters, machine engraved through
the black surface of the plastic to expose the white core. Engraved
lettering shall be minimum 3/16 inch high and shall be titled as indi-
cated herein or on the drawings.
25. CABLE IDENTIFICATION. All circuits or cables shall be marked with
the circuit number at both ends of the cable and at any terminal box,
manhole, or handhole. Power cables shall be marked with phase designa-
tion in addition to the circuit number. Identificatiion of control and
instrument cables shall match manufacturer's wiring diagrams, to include
terminal numbers, where applicable. Ends of conductors, including all
spares,.shall be suitably coded and identified with Brady "Quicklabels"
for easy recognition of terminal number and origin. Circuit numbers for
cables in manholes or,handholes shall be engraved on waterproof identi-
fication tags.
26. SUPPORT FRAMING. Steel framing hardware and related items required
for supporting and anchoring electrical equipment, devices, and circuits
shall be provided as indicated on the drawings, specified, or otherwise
required for a neat and rigid installation. Except as otherwise indi-
cated or specified, framing members shall be a minimum of Unistrut
P-1000, B-Line B-22, or equal channels, and Unistrut P-3200, B-Line
B-32-1, or equal concrete inserts; suspension rods shall be 5/8 inch
steel; and fittings shall be Unistrut, B-Line, or equal. All steel
items shall be hot -dip galvanized with galvanizing damage repaired.
27. MOTOR TESTING. All 4000 volt motors and 460 volt motors 20 horse-
power and above.shall be given a high -potential _test after installation
for the purpose of determining the adequacy against breakdown of insula-
ting materials and spacings under normal conditions. High -potential
tests shall be made in accordance with the latest revision of IEE Std.
112, Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, and
as specified under NEMA Standards Publication MG-1, Part 3. All motors
shall be given a performance test after installation. Current readings
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
(CONTRACT NO. 4
(17578
& EXPANSION)
16050
-19-
versus nameplate data shall be recorded. Copies of test data shall be
furnished to the Owner. Testing shall be performed by qualified per-
sonnel, and if required by the motor manufacturer, a factory represen-
tative shall be present. Motor testing shall not void the motor
manufacturer's warranty. Written test procedures shall be furnished to
the Engineer.
28. TERMINAL BOXES. All terminal boxes indicated on the drawings or
required shall be as specified herein.
All terminal boxes located indoors shall be provided with NEMA Type 12
enclosures minimum No. 14 gauge steel. All terminal boxes located out-
doors or in a damp location shall be provided with NEMA Type 4 316
stainless steel enclosures.
Terminal boxes shall be providedwithsubpanels of No. 12 gauge steel
for mounting terminal boards. Terminal boards shall be arranged such
that there is a minimum of six (6) inches between the wall of the
enclosure and the terminal board on each side, top, and bottom of the _
enclosure.
Terminal boards shall be screw type rated 600 volts and 25"ampere. 1�1
The temporary power panel shall be removeod when the temporary sludge
dewatering system is removed. A permanent power panel shall then be
furnished and installed and HVAC, lighting, and receptacle loads shall
be disconnected from the temporary power panel and reconnected to the
permanent power panel.
29. COORDINATION STUDY. The medium -voltage switchgear manufacturer
shall conduct a complete coordination study of relays, fuses, circuit
breakers, and all other protective devices. The coordination study
shall include the entire distribution system starting with the smallest
480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz circuit protective device on the load end, to
the nearest protective device on the power company's line side, if
available -
The study shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
A tabulation of all protective relay and circuit breaker trip
settings and recommended medium -voltage fuse"sizes and types.
Motor starting profiles for all motors sized 50 horsepower and
above.
Transformer damage curves and protection evaluated in accordance
with ANSI/IEEE C57.109.
Coordination curve(s) from the power company, if available. �-
The major electrical equipment manufacturers will be responsible for
providing to the Contractor all the required relay, fuse, and circuit
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -20-
r
breaker coordination curves and transformer damage curves as specified
in the following sections:
16310 - Secondary Integral Unit Substations Liquid -Filled.
16345 - Medium -Voltage Metal -Clad Switchgear.
16395 - Medium -Voltage Motor Control Equipment.
16480 - 600 Volt Class Motor Control Centers.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power
company to obtain the required protective device curves.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all field work required to
obtain necessary data on existing relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and -
transformers to be included in the coordination study.
The available 3 phase, symmetrical fault current at the incoming line
terminals is approximately 3,889 amperes at 12,470 rms volts.
The coordination study shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2 by 11 inch
size report. The study shall be provided in accordance with the
submittals section. Final selection of all protective device settings
or sizes shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer.
30. DRAWINGS AND DATA. All materials and equipment shall be submitted
for review in accordance with the submittals section. Each sheet of
descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the
material or equipment as follows:
a. Lamp fixture descriptive sheets shall show the fixture
schedule letter, number, or symbol for which the sheet
applies.
b. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings
shall show the specification paragraph for which the equipment
applies.
c. Sheets or drawings showing more than the particular item under
consideration shall have crossed out all but the pertinent
description of the item for which review is requested.
d. Equipment and materials descriptive literature not readily
cross referenced with the drawings or specifications shall be
identified by a suitable notation.
r,
e. .
Schematics
and connection diagrams for all electrical equip-
ment shall
be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard
connection
diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme
(LUBBOCK,
TEXAS
)
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS
& EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
140. 4
) 16050
(17578
) -21-
of connection will not .be accepted, unless it is clearly
marked to show the intended connections.
Within 90 days after the Notice.to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish
a submittal indicating all types of cable and conduit to be provided.
The submittal shall indicate the manufacturer and cable type, and shall
contain sufficient data to indicate that the cable and conduit meet the
specified requirements.
In addition to the complete specifications and descriptive literature, a
sample of the largest size of each type of cable shall be submitted for
review before installation. Each sample shall have a legible and
complete surface printing of the cable identification.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16050
(17578 ) -22-
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
REfIItIISE: M 83
CIMUUCMI Solid, unmated copper. Mlud= operating temperature 90 C dry,
75 C wet.
INSLI!T=ON: Polyvinyl Chloride, UL 83, Type MEN and MM.
582EID: Nape.
JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 ails minis= thiclamss, M 83.
FAGZICRY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of t8.83 for Type TBLN and TiiSfii.
CABLE DETAILS
NO. *CtNDMIM II+MIXIM 0. D.
SIZE OF THIMESS MAX.
12. 1 or 7 .OL9 .17
10 1 or 7 :0m0 .20
*Mm average thidamss shall be not less than that indicated above. The minusm thiclaiess
shall not be less than 90 percent of the value indicated above.
A durable maridng shall be provided an the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding
24 incises. Mazidng shall include manufacturer's name, MW or MEN, caductor size,
and 600V.
600 VOLT S NM C.ZCR LSQ= CABLE 600-1-PV THHN--7&?N
Blscsc 6 vastcn . CABLE DATA
F
co
v,
a
Un
Ic
+ N
0
r� w
}
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Rom: ICFA S-66-524 (NM YC 7).
CCNDLMM: Cwxentric-lay► uncoated copper;• strand class B. Normal aim operating
temperature 90 C.
IlSMMCN: Crcw-linked dw=csetting polYethYlene, IffA 5-66-524, Paragraph 3.6.
JACKET: None.
FAcM TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICFA 5.66-524.
CABLE DETAILS
*OMEU=CR
3IV6iRMON
0. D.
size
NO. OF
1mCIQESS
MAx.
(ARC OR M34)
S'IIim
(Dun)
14
7
.03D
.17
12
7
.03D
.19
10
7
.03D
.21
8
7
.045
.27
6
7
.045
.31
4
7
.045
.36
2
7
.045
.42
1
19
.055
.48
1/0
19
.055
.52
2/0
19
.M5
.57
4/0
19
.055
.68
250
37
.065
.75
350
37
.065
.85
500
37
.065
.98
750
61
.060
1.22
1000
61
.080
1.37
*'be average thi 4, � - m • shall be not less than that indicated above. The rdniatm thickness shall
be not less ttmn 90 percent of the valve indicated above.
A durab3,e madding shell be provided an the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding
24 inches. ?kd dng shall include manufacturer's name, IMP, MY, conductor size, and
voltage class.
CAE E OATA
1
I
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
ROE: M 62, III. 1277.
C24ILME: 16 ASE, 7 strand, concentric -lay, uncoated copper. Madan operating
temperature 90 C dry, 15 C vet.
DGI ATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils average thid=w
(13 ails minion thickness), IL 62, Type TEN.
LAY: Tvisted pair vith 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch lay.
S�iID: Cable assembly, combination altndmv-polyester tape and 7 strand, 20 Aju
minialn size, tinned copper drain vire, shield applied to achieve 100
percent cover over insulated conductors.
JACKET: Ca:ductor: Nylon, 4 ails minin n thidmess, IL 62. Cable assembly: Black
flame retardant polyvinyl chloride, LL 12T1, applied over tape vrapped
cable core.
CMELMM IM=CATION: One cad::ctor black, one conductor white.
FACTORY TESTS: Insaated conductors shall meet the regulzrew is of M 62 for Type TEN.
Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet
the vertical -tray flame test reguirm wwts of ta. 1277.
CABLE DETAILS
JACKP
O.D.
THICKNESS
MAX.
SIINME (nxHES)
(INS)
PAM .045
.34
*12* average thic3a:ess shall be not Less than that indicated above. Ile mini= thidamss
shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated above.
A durable making shall be provided an the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding
24 inches. !lancing shall include menfacam's name, Type TC, Type TFN, conductor size,
single pair, and voltage class.
F
r
b
a
W
a
r- �„
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
MUM: III. 62, IL 1277.
CIUMMS 16 AW, 7 strand, concentric -lay, uncoated cops. Maxin n operating
temperature 90 C dry, 75 C vet.
Mbi,SATICN: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils average thidamss
(13 mils miniaua thicla:ess), III. 62, Type TEN.
LAY: Twisted triad with 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch lay.
SH D: Cable assembly, combination &bxdmr -polyester tape and 7 strand, 2D AS&
miaimca size, timed copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100
pament coves over insulated conductors.
JACKET: Caaxkxtor: Nylon, 4 mils minima thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black
flame retardant polyvinyl chloride, IB. 1277, applied aver tape wrapped
cable core.
QxDUCTtR ICSf-' MITIGATION: One ca:ductor black, cm cmxkxtor white, cm c=hxtor red.
FACM TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements cf III. 62 for Type TFN.
Assembly jacket stall meet the requirements of IL 1277. Cable stall meet
the vertical -tray flame test requirements of uL 1277.
CABLE DETAILS
_ *AS.SDW
JACKET
O.D.
IMC ESS
MAX.
szN�E (IlXM5)
MIMS)
TRIAD .045
.35
WShe average thi4mess shall be not less than that indicated above. The minim= thicfaness
strap be not less tine 80 percent of the value indicated above.
A durable marking shall be provided cn the surface of the cable at intervals not emeedirg
24 inches. !Barking shall include unifactu mr's name, Type TC, Type TEN, conductor size,
single triad, and voltage class.
s 600 VIE.T Sim TRIAD _WM DSP USM CAME
EUNK iC S VUMCCM CABLE DATA
�.r
9
rGo
1 ,Ln
,d
>
a�
x
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FEFFR M M 62, UL 1277.
OMUUMM: 18 AUG, 7 strand, -1 m tric-lay, =toted copper. Mwdmun operating
temperature 90 C dry, 75 C vet.
DISLUT w., Polyvinyl chloride. Not less char► 15 mils average thidaxss (13 mils mi:Linun
thidams), UL 62, Type TEN.
LAY: Twisted pairs or triads with 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch lay.
58Z1zD: Each pair or triad and cable assembly: Combination alumim n-polyester tape and 7
strand, 20 ALiG minirm size, timed copper drain vire, shield applied to achieve 100
percent cover over insulated cardtntors. Shield tape on pair and/or triad
a�blies shall be applied in such a way as to give total shield isolation fray all
other pair or triad shields.
JA=: Cadxtor: Wlcn, 4 mils mtinimm thicaxss, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black 90C
flame retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, Table 10.17, applied over tape wrapped
cable core.
CMUx. M IlIIdPMCA27ON: Pairwne conductor black, one conductor white. Triad:cne conductor black,
one conductor white, one conductor red.
PAIR MNIFICATION: Each pair and/or triad me bered.
FACIM TESIS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TEN.
Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable dull meet the
vertical -tray flame tett requirennts of UL 1277.
CABLE DETAILS
•2,,:T-4
KMER
JAB
0. D.
OF
THICIOESS
MAX.
PAIRS
MOMS)
(Ilum5)
4
.045
.554
8
.060
.749
12
.060
.896
24
•
.080
1.256
NUM�R
OF
TRIADS
4
.060
.648
8
.060
.823
12
.080
1.030
24
.080
1.393
*The average thielaxss shall be not less than that indicated above. The mtinimua thickness shall
be not less than 80 permt of the value indicated above.
A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not euceedirg
24 inches. Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFN, motor size,
muber of pairs or triads, and voltage class.
1 � Y� Ij • :1
.11 .. 1.
!' • - 1 !'
I`
i I
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
REFERENCE: III. 83, UL 1277, kFA S�i-402 (i4iA t 5).
CMUMM 14 A;G, 7 or 19 strands, cancentzic-lay, uncoated copper. Maxdan operating
teaperature 90 C dry, 75 C vet.
IIMMCN: Polyvinyl chloride, not less dmn 15 mils average thid=w
(13 ails mirdon thidmess), III. 83, Type TW and MM.
SBI�FID: None.
JAQKEr: Ca xk:ctor: Nylm, 4 adls adnin- thidmess, III. 83. Cable assembly: Black
flame retardant polyvinyl chloride, III. 1277, applied over tape yapped
cable core.
CO U=M IIFICATTON: ICEA S-61-402 Appendix K, Method 1, TWAv K-2 or ICE'A S-61-402
Appendix K, Method 3. Qdte or green cocductors shall not be provided.
FACMEM TMM: Irailated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 83 for Type MM.-MM.
Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of III. 1277. Cable shall meet
the flame test requirements of tL 1277 for Type IC Mw and control
troy cable.
CABLE DETAILS
z'121-:1 4
NUHM
JA=
O.D.
OF
Tffimm
MAC.
omuicm
(nNMES)
(nNMES)
2
.045
.38
3
.045
.39
4
.045
.44
5
.045
.46
7
.045
.49
9
.045
.61
12
.060
.66
19
.060
.77
24
.060
.93
30
.08D
.96
37
.09D
1.05
*IIue average thi 41s shall be not less than that indicated above. The miniaLn thidmess
shall be not less than 8D percent of the value indicated above.
A disable marring shall be provided on the surface of the cable at Intervals not exceeding
24 inches. Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type WN or WV, caxhxtor
size, nmbes of conixtors, and voltage class.
Brack s %4%=CM
Y •• 1 M• 1 •i Y�; MEN .11 Y 1t. 1:
CABLE DATA
LM
a:
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FEFUML'E: UL 83, UL 1Z7`7, C 1 3 2 ( ► VC 5).
CLIUJCM 12 AYG, 7 or 19 atrarris, concentric -lay, uncoated copper. hfaximm operating
to mrature 90 C dry, 75 C wet.
DG AM: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils average thidmess
(13 mils minimm thidams), Id. 83, Type MW and M3N.
Sf.DEZD: None.
JACM Cankrtor: Nylon, 4 ells minimm thickness, M 83. Cable assembly: Black
flame retardant polyvinyl chloride, M 1277, applied over tape yapped
cable core.
CCf U= 1 :1 11FTCATIOtd: ICU S-61- iM Appendix K, Method 1, Table K-2 or ICFA S-61-402
Appendix K, Method 3. Vhite or green mnducton shall not be provided.
FACM TMM: Insulated conductors shall meet the re*dremts of M 83 for Type TM;-M&
Assembly jadmt shall meet the regAramts of M 1277. Cable shall meet
the flame test requirements of tb 1277 for Type TC power and control
tray cable.
CABLE DETAILS
• 31Ii s
NUM
JAQ=
O.D.
OF
T81CICESS
MAX.
CMUEM
()
(m)
2
.045
.46
3
.045
.49
4
.045
.56
5
.045
.60
7
.045
.66
9
.045
.77
12
.060
.91
19
.060
1.05
24.
.060
1.22
30
.OBO
1.29
37
.OBO
1.40
*The average thidc� stall. be not less time that indicated above. The minima thick -Ass
shall be not less then 80 percent of the values indicated above.
A disable mdddng shell be provided an the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding
24 inches. Mad rg shall incltde manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TiiyiN or MM, conductor
size, n nber of aaArtors, and voltage class.
Y .• • Igo •'
CABLE DATA
7
59
.r
1.
r
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
REFERENCE: ICEA S-68=516 (NEMA WC 8), AEIC No. CS6, ICEA P-45-482.
CONDUCTOR: Concentric -lay, uncoated or coated copper, strand Class B.
Normal ma=iee,m operating temperature 90 C.
CONDUCTOR SHIELD: Extruded semiconducting thermosetting material, AEIC CS6,
Paragraph D.1.
INSULATION: Ethylene -propylene rubber, ICE& S-68-516, Part 3, not less
than 115 mile average thickness (103.5 mils m4riimm
thickness).
INSULATION SHIELD: Extruded semiconducting thermosetting material, and
nonembedded coated copper tape, ICEA S-68-516, Part 4.
Extruded material shall be in accordance with AEIC CS6,
Paragraph D.2, except that the maxim — tension in Table D3
shall not be exceeded. Shield area shall be not less than
that of one helically applied 5 ail copper tape with a 10
percent overlap when calculated according to Formula 3 in
ICE& P-45-482.
JACKET: Black polyvinyl chloride, ICEA S-68-516, Paragraph 4.4.5.
FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-68-516 and AEIC
No. CS6.
CABLE DETAILS
*JACKET OD
SIZE NO. OF THICKNESS HAIL
(AUG OR MCK) STRANDS (INCHES) - (INCHES)
6 7 .060 .74
4 7 .060 .78
2 7 .060 .84
• 1 19 .060 .88
1/0 19 .060 .92
2/0 19 .080 1.01
4/0 19 .080 1.12
250 37 .080 1.18
350 37 .080 1.29
500 37 .080 1.45
750 61 .080 1.65
1000 61 .080 1.81
*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The min3mt;m
thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated above.
The conductor shield, insulation, and insulation shield shall be applied in a
triple extrusion process with all three components being cured at the same time.
A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not
exceeding 24 inches. Harking shall include manufacturer's name, insulating
material, conductor size, and voltage class.
VOLTAGE TEST AFTER INSTALLATIONS DC TEST VOLTAGE - 35 KV
DURATION OF TEST - 15 HINUTES
8,000 VOLT SINGLE CONDUCTOR POWER CABLE
8000-1-EPR-PVC-SH
100 PERCENT INSULATION LEVEL
Black i Veatch
CABLE DATA
FIGURE
7
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
REFERENCE:
ICU (k FilA VC 8), AEIC No. CS6, ICEA P-45-482.
CONDUCTOR:
Concentric -lay, uncoated copper, strand Class B. Normal
maximum operating temperature 90 C.
CONDUCTOR SHIELD:
Extruded semiconducting thermosetting material, AEIC CS6.
Paragraph D.1.
INSULATION:
Ethylene -propylene rubber. ICEA S-68-516, Part 3, not less
than 220 mils average thickness (198 mils minian-
thickne s s) .
INSULATION SHIELD:
Extruded semiconducting thermosetting material, and
uonembedded coated copper tape, ICEA S-68-516, Part 4.
Extruded material shall be in accordance with AEIC CS6.
Paragraph D.2, except that the maxiffunn tension in Table D3
shall not be exceeded. Shield area shall be not less than
that of one helically applied 5 mil copper tape with a 10
percent overlap vhen calculated according to Formula 3 in
ICBA P-45-482.
JACKET:
Black polyvinyl chloride, ICEA S-68-516, Paragraph 4.4.5.
FACTORY TESTS:
Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-68-516 and ASIC
No. CS6.
CABLE DETAILS
*JACKET
OD
SIZE
NO. OF
THICKNESS
MAX
(AWG OR HCH)
STRANDS
(INCHES)
(INCHES)
1
19
.080
1.17
110
19
.080
1.21
.210
19
.080
1.25
4/0
19
.080
1.38
250
37
.080
1.43
350
37
.080
1.53
500
37
.080
1.66
750
61
.110
1.95
1000
61
.110
2.19
*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The
minim thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated
above.
The conductor shield, insulation, and insulation shield shall be applied in a
triple extrusion process with all three components being cured at the same
time.
A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals
not exceeding 24 inches. Narking shall include manufacturer's name, insulating
material, conductor size, and -.voltage class.
VOLTAGE TEST AFTER INSTALLATION: DC TEST VOLTAGE - 65 KV
DURATION OF TEST - 15 MINUTES
15,000 VOLT SINGLE CONDUCTOR POWER CABLE
133 PERCENT INSULATION LEVEL
Black g Veatch CABLE DATA
f
15-1-EPR-PVC-SE
FIGURE
project and Location Project no.
r
Circuit Designation Date
OC TEST DATA
Time (n Mlnutes After
100! Test Voltage
is Applied
Current ua
Phase A
Phase
/hose C
1
2
3
a
6
e
9
10
I1
12
13
1a
IS
KVOC after 1 Min. Oscar
CC Test voltage
Cable Installation: Nov — Usod -----Years
Cable. Site � Lsngth Feet
Opsr. KV � Grd. � Ungro.
Rated Cable Voltage
Insulation Mall
(Type a Thickness,
Conductor Jacket Wall
(Type I nicknestl
Shield
ITyool
Cable Manufacturer
Temperature Humidity
Type Type Terminations
Type Splice A Location
100 Microamperes (),al z .1 Milliampere Remarlts A Fault Location
APPLICATION OF TEST VOLTAGE
The initially applied direct -current voltage shall be not greater than 3.0 times the rated alternatinq-
curront voltage. The rate of increase fro,. tho initially applied valttoe to the specified teat voltage
shall be approximately uniform and shall be not over L00 Der cent in 10 seconds nor less than 100
per cent in 60 seconds. The duration of the direct -current voltage test shall to 13 minutes for
shielded cables and Z minutea for nonshioldad cables.
TEST CURVE
Tim In Minutes After 1001 lost Voltage is Apolied
NOTES:
1. Plot results of tests on all three Phases on this graph.
2. Assign and indicate values for each division on the microampere scale as reduired for the
circuit being tested.
CABLE TEST DATA FORM
e:10c3c s \ARscrn
CABLE DATA
r
i
Section 16150 -ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
1. SCOPE. This section covers adjustable frequency drives (AFD) for
the items of equipment indicated in the schedule at the end of this
section.
2. GENERAL. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated,
assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full
conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, one adjustable frequency
drive shall be furnished for each motor and shall be complete with all
required control components.
2.01. Acceptable Manufacturers. Each drive, for motors rated
r' 150 horsepower and below, shall be pulse -width modulation type manufac-
tured by Allen-Bradley,,Emerson, General Electric, Robicon, or Westing-
house. The products of other manufacturers will not be acceptable.
All adjustable frequency drives of the same type shall be the product of
a single manufacturer.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The equipment furnished under
this section shall conform to the General Equipment Stipulations.
2.03. Governing Standards. Each adjustable frequency drive shall be
designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA,
ANSI, UL, and IEEE recommendations, and shall be designed for installa-
tion in accordance with the NEC. The drives shall be UL ar ETL labeled
and approved.
2.04. Coordination. Each adjustable frequency drive shall be coordi-
nated with the requirements of the driven equipment. The manufacturer
of the driven equipment shall be responsible for furnishing the adjust-
able frequency drive, for matching the motor and the drive:, and for
coordinating the collection of data and the design effort required to
limit harmonics to levels specified herein.
2.05. Nameplates. All devices mounted on the face of each drive shall
r
be provided with a suitable nameplate. Push buttons, selector switches,
and pilot lights shall have the device manufacturer's standard legend
plate. All other devices shall have an engraved, laminated plate. All
lettering shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch high and shall be white or
t:
silver on a black background.
,.,
2.06. Shop Painting. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined
surfaces and stainless steel, shall be shop cleaned in accordance with
the coating manufacturer's recommendations, followed by finish painting
r
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
pr;
(17578 ) -1-
with the drive manufacturer's standard coating. Finish color shall be
medium gray or the manufacturer's standard color. Dry film thickness of
the finish coat shall be not less than 4 mils. Field painting, other
than touchup painting, will not be required.- A sufficient quantity of
additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished to permit
field touchup painting of damaged coatings.
All paint used for intermediate and finish coats shall be guaranteed by
the paint manufacturer to be fumeproof and suitable for sewage plant
atmosphere containing hydrogen sulfide. Any paint that cannot be so
guaranteed shall not be used. Paint shall be lead-free and mercury -free
if available, but in no case shall the lead or mercury content cause
discoloration in sewage plant atmosphere.
2.07. Training of. Owner's Personnel. Following completion of instal-
lation and field testing work, three employees of the Owner shall be
trained in the proper operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance of
the equipment provided. Training shall be conducted by a qualified
representative of the drive manufacturer and shall consist of at least
16 hours of combined classroom and hands-on instruction. Training shall
be conducted at a place and time mutually agreeable to the Owner and the
drive manufacturer.
2.08. Spare Parts. The drive manufacturer shall furnish one complete
set of all plug-in drive components as spare parts for each size and
type of drive supplied.
As a minimum, the spare parts shall include the following:
Item Quantity
Power fuses 3 of each type used
Control fuses 12 of each type used
Indicating lights 1 complete set
Main control board 1 each
Inverter module 1 each
Inverter snubber module 1 each
other field -replaceable l set
component parts
Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in accordance with the General
EquipmentStipulations, with labels indicating the contents of each
package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner as directed.
3. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.
3.01. Performance. Each adjustable frequency drive controller shall be
of sufficient capacity and shall provide a quality output waveform for
stepless motor control from 10 to 100 percent of base speed. Each
adjustable frequency drive shall be suitable for either constant torque
(CT) or variable torque (VT) loads as specified in the schedule at the
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEKENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 } -2-
1'
C
end of this section. The requirements of the driven equipment are
covered in the driven equipment specification section indicated in the
schedule. Each adjustable frequency drive shall include the following
ratings and parameters:
Input voltage and frequency 460 volts (t10 percent);
3 phase, 60 Hz (t2 Hz);
imbalance, 2 percent maximum.
Continued operation with
additional momentary 25 percent
voltage dip of a 0.5 second
duration from nominal input
voltage level.
Minimum AFD efficiency
Excluding transformer and
reactor losses, 95 percent at
100 percent speed, 85 percent at
60 percent speed.
Ambient temperature
0 C to 40 C.
AFD service factor
1.0.
Overcurrent capability
150 percent for one minute.
Volts/Hz ratio
Constant over the entire range
of the unit for constant.torque
drives, except under voltage
boost condition and at
frequencies over 60 Hz.
Output speed regulation 0.5 percent.
Output frequency stability 0.5 percent of nominal.
3.02. Adiustment. The following AFD adjustments shall be provided:
Maximum speed.
Minimum speed.
Linear acceleration time.
Linear deceleration time.
Volts/Hz ratio.
Voltage boost.
Process follower gain, offset, -and bias.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 ) -3-
Torque limit.
3.03. Fault Protection. The design of the power circuit shall provide
for the protection of power circuit components from fault conditions as
follows.
3.03.01. Input Protection.
Adjustable overvoltage or undervoltage trip with auto restart
which shall ride through a momentary dip as specified herein and
shall ride through a one cycle loss of power. `
Incoming line transient suppression.
Phase loss or reverse phase trip with manual restart.
3 phase line reactors.
3.03.02. Internal Protection.
Surge suppression and power device snubbers.
Power devices rated 2.5 times line voltage.
Instantaneous overcurrent.
DC bus overvoltage trip.
Power device overtemperature.
Control logic circuit malfunction.
3.03.03. Load Protection.
Inverse -time overload.
Overvoltage.
Overfrequency.
Short circuit.
Ground fault.
3.04. Harmonic Distortion Protection. Each adjustable frequency drive
shall be designed and provided with all necessary equipment to protect
the drive and the power system ahead of the drive from harmonic
distortion.
Each drive shall be designed to operate from a power bus that may
contain up to 3 percent harmonic voltage distortion of any single
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 ) -4-
rye'"
i
harmonic and 5 percent total harmonic voltage distortion, as defined by
IEEE Standard 519.
Each single or multiple set of drives powered from the same bus shall be
designed to limit the percent individual harmonic and total harmonic
current distortion to the maximum level, as defined by IEEE
Standard 519.
Line -to -line notching at the input to the drive shall have a maximum
notch depth of 20 percent and a maximum notch area of 22,800 volt -
microseconds reflected back to the power source, as defined by IEEE
Standard 519.
r 4. CONSTRUCTION.
i 4.01. Fabrication and Assembly: Each adjustable`frequency drive system
t
shall be shop assembled in a single enclosure and shall utilize inter-
changeable plug-in printed circuit boards and power conversion
components wherever possible. Shop assembly shall be performed by the
t_ drive manufacturer; systems fabricated or assembled in whole or in part
by parties other than the drive manufacturer will not be acceptable.
Input line reactors, fuses, circuit breakers, filters, and output
contactors, where required, shall be mounted within the drive enclosure,
without exception. Isolation transformers may be separately enclosed
from the remaining drive equipment.
4.02. Wiring. The wiring in the adjustable frequency drives shall be
neatly installed in wireways or with wire ties where wireways are not
practical. Where wire ties are used, the wire bundles shall be held at
the back panel with a screw -mounted wire tie mounting base. Bases with
a self -sticking back will not be allowed.
Power entry and exit shall be through the top or bottom of each drive.
Terminal blocks shall be complete with a marking strip, covers, and
pressure connectors. They shall be nonbrittle, interlocking, track -
mounted type. Screw terminals will not be allowed. A terminal shall be
provided for each conductor of external circuits plus one ground for
each shielded cable. For freestanding panels, 8 inches of clearance
shall be provided between terminals and the panel base for conduit and
wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be
provided. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification
indicated on the supplier's submittal drawings. Each control loop or
system shall be individually fused, and all fuses or circuit breakers
shall be clearly labeled and located for ease of maintenance.
All grounding wires shall be attached to the enclosure sheet metal with
a ring tongue terminal. The surface of the sheet metal shall be
prepared to ensure good conductivity and corrosion protection.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
', (17578 ) -5-
Wiring shall not be kinked or spliced and shall have markings on both
ends or be color coordinated. Markings or color coordination shall
comply with the manufacturer's drawings.
With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be stranded
copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a moisture -resistant
and flame-retardant covering rated for not less than 90 C.
4.03. Enclosures. The drive enclosure type shall be as indicated in
the schedule herein. The dimensions of the complete drive package,
including accessories, shall fit into the.space indicated on the `
drawings.
Freestanding panels shall have provisions for anchoring to the .—
supporting structure. Suitable lifting facilities shall be provided for
handling and shipment.
Relays, terminals, and special devices inside the control enclosure
shall have permanent markings to match identification used on the
manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
4.04. Printed Circuit Boards. All printed circuit board components
shall be sprayed on both sides with Konform "C416
All plug-in type boards shall be mechanically held at the circuit board
connector. Compression fit only at the connector shall not be allowed.
All printed circuit board plug-in contacts shall be gold-plated.
5. CONTROLS.
5.01. Features. Each adjustable frequency drive shall include the
following features in addition to any features indicated on the
drawings: --
a. Microprocessor -based regulator. Nonvolatile memory modules
shall have a useful life of at least 20 years without
requiring battery or module replacement.
b. -Input thermal -magnetic molded -case circuit breaker disconnect
rated 14,000 22,000 30,000 amperes. The disconnect shall be
mounted inside the controller enclosure and shall have door
interlocks and a handle with provisions for padlocking in the
"Off" position.
C. Input line high-speed fuses rated 200,000 amperes
interrupting.
d. Manual speed adjustment.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 ) -6-
f. Elapsed time meter.
g. Speed indication - calibrated in percent rpm.
h. Automatic restart with one restrike on a power outage.
i. Critical frequency lockout.
j. Control circuits shall be not more than 115 volts as supplied
r-: by internal control power transformers. Control ,power
Itransformers shall have additional minimum capacity as
required by external devices indicated on the drawings.
k. Automatic controller shutdown on motor overtemperature and
drive fault conditions. Controller shutdown shall be manually
reset type. Incoming terminals shall accept wiring from a
temperature switch located in the motor.
1. Diagnostic indicators that pinpoint failure and fault
conditions. Indicators shall be manually reset to restore
operation after abnormal shutdown.
M. Isolated process follower with offset, gain, and span adjust-
ment for accepting a remote 4-20 mA speed control signal rated
zero to 100 percent speed.
n. Process control output for remote 4-20 mA speed indication
rated 0 to 100 percent speed.
o. Internal proportional integral process controller.
p. Motor overcurrent relay.
q. NEMA rated bypass contactor.
r. Spare interlock contacts shall be wired separately to the unit
terminal board. One NO and one NC isolated spare interlock
shall be furnished with each drive. Additional interlock
contacts.shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
Contacts shall be rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac.
S. Drive fault and run status contacts for remote indication
rated 5 amperes at 120 volts ac.
t. Noise level as installed shall not exceed 85 dB as measured by
a calibrated and appropriate instrument. The required sound
level limitation shall be met at a minimum of four locations,
each not more than 3 feet off the floor and not more than
10 feet from the equipment. This requirement shall also apply
{� (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 ) -7-
k
to all filters, reactors, and transformers supplied with the
drive.
5.02. Diagnostics. Diagnostic indicators located on the face of the
drive shall show the type of fault responsible for drive shutdown,
warning, or failure. On occurrence of more than one condition, each
condition shall be recorded or indicated by the diagnostic segment.
6. ACCESSORIES.
6.01. Output Contactor. Each drive shall be supplied with a magnetic
contactor at the output terminals. The contactor shall:be NEMA rated
for at least the horsepower rating of the motor. The contactor shall be
located within the enclosure of the adjustable frequency drive and shall
be part of the packaged unit.
The output contactor shall be electrically interlocked with the input
circuit breaker so that when the circuit breaker is opened, the drive is
disconnected from the motor, and when the circuit breaker is closed, the
drive is connected to the motor.
A warning nameplate shall be provided on each drive to warn the operator
to trip the circuit breaker prior to performing any maintenance.
7. TESTING. The drive manufacturer shall conduct all standard tests in .—
accordance with NEMA and ANSI standards to ensure conformance to
specified requirements. All power switching components shall be prerun
under temperature and load conditions.
7.01. Factory Testing. After the drive system has been assembled at
the drive manufacturer's facility, a drive system test shall be
performed before the drive package is shipped. The system test shall be
not less than 24 hours in duration. The drive package shall be free of
faults following the test.
The complete drive system, including all peripherals, shall be factory
tested under simulated operating conditions. Normal operating sequences
and fault conditions shall be simulated during the testing. Contact
closure inputs and simulated driven -outputs shall be connected to the
system input/output modules. Normal operating sequences and abnormal
fault conditions shall.be simulated during testing.
A test report summary, indicating satisfactory final test results, shall
be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment of the equipment.
7.02. Field Acceptance Testing. After installation of the system at
the site of the work and checkout by the drive manufacturer, a field
acceptance test shall be performed by the drive manufacturer in
conjunction with the manufacturer of the driven equipment.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 ) -8-
7
T.
The field acceptance test shall consist of a repeat of the factory
acceptance testing procedure and an additional 5 days of similar testing
during which the system shall run continuously without loss of basic
functions. Functional tests shall demonstrate satisfactory operation of
all interlocks, alarms, and normal operation sequences. The drive manu-
facturer shall use suitable test equipment to locate the source of
trouble or malfunction. Failure of redundant equipment will not be
considered as downtime, provided automatic failover occurs as specified
herein and, in the opinion of the Engineer, the failure was not caused
by deficiency in design or installation. Repeated failure of any
component shall cause the acceptance test to be terminated and
restarted.
7.03. Harmonic Distortion Test. The Contractor shall provide temporary
four -channel power line monitoring equipment at the site for a period of
at least 30 calendar days to graph .and.record the harmonic line distor-
tion for ac voltage, do voltage, and current, and to compute individual
harmonic values up to the 17th harmonic as well as total harmonic
distortion (THD).
The monitoring equipment shall include a four -channel power line moni-
tor, temperature and humidity compensation probes, a recorder, and
additional options required to compute harmonic values and THD. The
equipment shall be Basic Measuring Instruments "Model 4800 PowerScope"
or Dranetz "Model 3105".
Measurements shall include phase -to -phase, phase -to -neutral, neutral -to -
ground, and do power. The harmonic distortion shall be monitored at the
connection point of each drive, at MCLU buses common to more than one
drive, at the service entrance, and at other locations as directed by
the Engineer. The test shall be run for the full range of drive
operation as is practicable. The test shall be conducted by a qualified
individual acceptable to the Engineer.
8. INSTALLATION. Each adjustable frequency drive shall be installed in
accordance with the drive manufacturer's recommendations.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 )
(17578 )
16150
-9-
t
9. ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SCHEDULE.
Driven Equipment Designation
Equipment
Specification
Section
Service
Quantity
Required
VT/CT
Power
Supply,
volts
NEMA
Enclosure
Type
WP-3301, WP-3302, WP-3303
11160
Transfer
Sludge
3
CT
480
1
i j I i
rF 10. DRAWINGS AND DATA. -Complete drawings, details, and specifications
shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the submittals
section.
10.01. Shop Drawing Submittals.
a. Name of manufacturer.
b. Types and model numbers.
:7
c. Rated drive input kVA and output kVA.
d. Percent efficiency at 100 percent speed and 60 percent speed.
e. Maximum Btu heat release data and verification of the drive
cooling requirements.
f. Total weight and lifting instructions, height, mounting, and
floor space required.
g.
Panel interior and front and side exterior view details
showing maximum overall dimensions of transformer, drive, and
contactor.
h.
Schematics, including all interlocks.
i.
Wiring diagrams, including all internal and external devices
and terminal blocks.
j.
Locations and sizes of electrical connections, ground
terminations, and shielded wire.
k.
List of diagnostic indicators.
1.
List of fault and failure conditions which the drive can
recognize and indicate for simultaneous occurrence.
m.
List of standard features and options.
n.
List of spare parts to be furnished.
o.
Harmonic calculations by the drive manufacturer at the MCLU
bus feeding the drive and at the source. Detailed drawings
and information shall show how protection is applied to comply
with harmonic limits.
p.
Output contactor and input line protection model numbers and
manufacturer's data sheets.
(LUBBOCK,
TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578
) -11-
10.02. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
a. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual for each size
adjustable frequency drive furnished.
b. Manufacturer's standard manuals for each size and type of
transformer, line reactor, filter, and contactor furnished.
C. Schematics, wiring diagrams, and panel drawings in conformance
with construction record.
d. Model numbers and present cost data for spare parts.
e. Troubleshooting procedures, with a cross-reference between
symptoms and corrective recommendations.
f. Connection data to permit removal and installation of
recommended smallest field -replaceable parts.
g. Information on testing of power supplies and printed circuit
boards and an explanation of the drive diagnostics.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16150
(17578 ) -12-
Section 16200 - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of the
communication system.
The communication system shall be of the multi -party type utilizing desk
top subsets, wall handset stations, speakers, amplifiers, support
brackets and other equipment required, interconnected with special cable
and conduit as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein, to
provide a complete and satisfactory communication system.
The communication system shall be as manufactured by Gai-Tronics
Corporation or equal and shall be compatible with the existing system.
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed.under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless
exceptions are noted by the Engineer. The drawings indicate the
approximate location of each speaker and handset. The equipment manu-
facturer shall review these drawings and recommend any change he
considers necessary to provide complete coverage at the plant and plant
area. After the intercommunication system has been completely
installed, the equipment manufacturer shall furnish a competent,
experienced, and qualified technical representative to inspect system
installation and adjust the system for optimum performance.
Equipment indicated to be located in hazardous areas shall be FM
approved for those areas.
3. GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS. The General Equipment Stipulations
shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. The system shall consist of one common -talking
paging circuit and five common -talking party line circuits.
The system shall be a continuation of the existing communication system
and shall be tied in at the test and distribution junction box in the
existing administration building.
Voice paging shall be accomplished from any handset through all speakers
in the system. Automatic speaker muting shall be provided where
required to prevent acoustic coupling between adjacent handset and
speaker units.
Party line conversation shall be accomplished from any handset to any
combination of handsets in the system on any one of five circuits,
utilizing the transmitters and receivers in the handsets and muting all
speakers to the conversation. All speakers shall be available for
paging during the use of the party line circuits.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
-+ (CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16200
(17578 ) -1
Absolutely.no systems will be accepted which contain power supplies, _
power boosters, etc., mounted on distribution racks remote from the
transmitter and receiver enclosures.
5. SYSTEM COMPONENTS. The interconnection system components shall be
in accordance with the following specifications.
6. ENCLOSURES. Each unit in the interconnection system shall be
mounted in an enclosure designed for its use and environment at the unit
location. All metallic enclosures shall be fitted for direct connec-
tion of rigid metallic conduit and shall be designed for wall or column
mounting, unless otherwise specified. `
Enclosures for indoor service shall be NEMA Type lA and fabricated of
sheet steel with welded joints arranged to be dusttight. Enclosures for
outdoor service shall be NEMA Type.4 and made of heavy cast aluminum
with gasketed doors for weatherproof use.
7. HANDSETS. Each handset shall be an assembly of transmitter,
receiver, cord, and connections mounted ina tough plastic enclosure
selected to provide maximum resistance to breakage.
The transmitter shall be of a low impedance, close -talking, dynamic
type, with an adjustable receiver power attenuator and a dust and breath
moisture filter. The attenuator adjustment shall be easily available _
for maintenance but shall be inaccessible to unauthorized personnel.
The receiver shall be of the high efficiency dynamic type.
The cord for connecting the handset to the station unit shall be rubber
insulated cable, approximately 6 feet in length, with an overall
neoprene jacket. It shall be preformed into a tight coil approximately
12 inches in length and molded to retain the coil retraction spring
shape. Metal springs or other mechanical retractors are not acceptable.
r
8. PAGE -PARTY LINE SWITCHES. The switches shall be two position, push-
button type with momentary contact in the "Page" position and spring
return to "Party Line" position.
9. PARTY LINE SWITCHES. The switches shall be five position rotary
selector switches with maintained contacts.
10. TRUMPET SPEAKERS. All trumpet speakers shall be re-entrant horn
type and shall be complete with amplifiers, all mounting hardware, and
connecting conduit required to properly mount the devices at the loca-
tions indicated on the drawings.
The mounting hardware shall be designed to allow widehorizontal and
vertical adjustment of the speakers after mounting and shall provide for
secure locking after final orientation. Re-entrant horn speakers shall
have a minimum projector dispersion angle of 80 degrees, a maximum low
frequency cutoff of 150 Hz and an equivalent air column length of ._
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SMP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16200
(17578 ) -2-
3-1/2 feet. The speakers shall be of rigid metallic construction and
shall be properly damped to prevent ringing and objectionable resonant
peaks. Horns shall be Gai-Tronics Model 13302-002, or equal.
Driver units shall be of the 30 watt, permanent magnet type, with,a sub-
stantially flat frequency response from 90 to 6,000 Hz and a voice coil
impedance of 16 ohms at 1,000 Hz. Drivers shall be Gai-Tronics Model
13314-002, or equal.
The sound pressure of the projector shall be a minimum of 90 dB
(Reference Level - 0.002 dynes per square centimeter) at a distance of
30 feet on the center axis at.1,000 Hz -in a free field input of.one
watt. The diaphragm shall be fabricated from nonmetallic material.
11. CEILING SPEAKERS. Ceiling speaker assembly shall consist of an
enclosure, baffle, and 8" cone speaker and related mounting hardware.
The unit shall be factory assembled and wired, ready for installation.
It shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and be heavily undercoated.
The baffle shall be an aluminum trim ring. The frequency response shall
be 230-7,000 Hz with a power handling capacity of 7 watts. The voice
coil impedance shall be 8 ohms. The unit shall have a remote volume
control arranged to mount in a standard electrical switch box. The
assembly weight shall be 6 lbs. Ceiling speakers shall be Gai-Tronics
Model 804, or equal.
12. AMPLIFIERS. All amplifiers shall be of a sturdy compact construc-
tion employing transistors and printed circuitry with replaceable
components mounted in self -aligning, plug-in modules. Each amplifier
shall be provided with the following features.
Amplifier Use
Handset I Sneaker
Power supply 105-130 volts, 60 Hz, ac
Fuse 1/8 ampere 1/2 ampere
Power consumption (maximum)
Zero signal
Maximum signal
Ambient temperature range
Circuit class
Input impedance, transformer
coupled
Gain
1.5 watts
5 watts, 8 VA
29 watts, 35 VA
Minus 30 C to plus 70 C
A
10 ohms
75 dB
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16200
(17578 ) -3-
Push-pull B
10,000 ohms
1.5 volts
maximum output
57 dB
Output impedance, transformer
coupled
-
Frequency response
Power output
High frequency attenuation
Control
Amplifier Use
Handset Sneaker
33 ohms, 8 and 16 ohms
2.0 volts,
maximum
250 to 15,000 250 to 15,000
Hz Hz
12 watts
Internal Internal
Range To 4,000 Hz To 2,400 Hz
Controls, location Concealed, but accessible without
removing amplifier from enclosure
Type Gain and receiver Volume
volume
Handset station amplifier shall provide an output designed to drive
speaker amplifiers on the page channel and other handset station ampli-
fiers on the party line channels. The amplifiers shall be printed
wiring boards complete with components for easy replacement.
Speaker amplifiers shall provide an output designed to directly drive
cone or horn type loudspeakers.
13. CABLE. Cable used in the interconnection system shall be multi -
conductor cable specifically designed for industrial communication
systems.
Power conductors shall be twisted pairs with 3.5 inch maximum lay, each
conductor No. 14 AWG (19 strands No. 27), soft drawn concentric bare
copper with 0.015 inch wall of 105 C polyvinyl chloride insulation
armored with 0.005 inch nylon jacket. Conductors shall be color coded
black and white
Communication conductors, except as noted, shall be twisted pairs with
2.5 inch maximum lay, each conductor No. 18 AWG (16 strands No. 30),
soft drawn bare copper with 0.015 inch wall of 105 C polyvinyl chloride
insulation armored with 0.005 inch nylon jacket. Conductors shall be
color coded.
All pairs shall be twisted with systematically varying lays to minimize
crosstalk and bound with tape to provide a uniformly round cable.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16200
(17578 ) -4-
Overall jacket shall be 0.060 inch wall of gray hard service, flame-
retardant,,oil, chemical and weather -resistant, 105 C polyvinyl chloride.
Cable shall be 600 volt, UL Type MTW.
Installation of conductors shall conform to the applicable paragraphs of
Section 16050. The conductors shall be acceptable to the manufacturer
of the intercommunication system.
14. CONDUIT. All intercommunication system circuits shall be in heavy
wall, galvanized, rigid steel conduit, ANSI C80.1 and shall. be separate
from other power, control, and lighting circuits. Conduit system
installation, shall conform to the applicable paragraphs of. Section
16050.
15. INTERCOM JUNCTION BOXES. Junction boxes, if required, shall be
dusttight indoors and NEMA Type 4 stainless steel outdoors, and shall
contain pressure type terminal blocks for all incoming and outgoing
circuits. A clamp type ground lug shall be provided in each junction
box.
16. INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM STATION UNITS. All intercommunication
system station units as specified herein and as indicated on the
drawings shall include the following equipment arranged and enclosed
according to the type of station and enclosure required.
17. INDOOR SURFACE -MOUNTED HANDSET STATIONS. All indoor surface-.
mounted handset stations shall consist of one NEMA IA gasketed type
enclosure arranged for wall or column mounting and including the
following devices mounted on the front panel:
1 - Hangup switch
1 - Handset complete with retractable cord
1 - "Page -Party Line" pushbutton
1 - "Party Line" selector switch
1 - Amplifier, handset station type, mounted on the back
of the panel
1 - Station nameplate
1 - Set of terminal blocks, barrier type, and amplifier
receptacle, both mounted inside on the back surface
of the enclosure
1 Amplifier, speaker type, mounted on the back panel (on
combination handset -speaker stations only)
Indoor surface -mounted handset stations shall be Gai-Tronics Model 7005-
102, or equal.
18. DESK -TOP STATION. The desk -top station is a:completely self-
contained assembly specifically designed for industrial office appli-
cation.
i
4 The desk -top station consists of a desk -top subset, remote handset/
speaker amplifier and amplifier enclosure.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS }
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16200
E (17578 ) -5-
A telephone -type handset, equipped with a noise -canceling dynamic
transmitter, a high -efficiency dynamic receiver and a heavy -jacket vinyl
retractile cord, shall be furnished as an integral part of the subset.
It shall be constructed to withstand constant industrial use. The
amplifier shall be automatically disconnected from page/party lines when
the handset is placed on the stationary cradle. The solid-state hook -
switch shall have no moving parts.
The desk -top subset shall be a sloping front assembly suitable for
desk -top locations. It shall contain a handset cradle, handset, and two
5-position rotary party -line selector switch 'that shall control page and
party line relays through a logic.circuit that cannot mix separate
conversations. The handset plugs into the base through an industry -
standard modular coiled cord. A thumb -wheel volume control regulates
integral speaker volume.
A single audio signal and low -voltage power cable connects the subset to
a terminal box provided with the station. The terminal box provided
with the station. The terminal box contains screw -type terminals for
system connections, a power transformer and a shock -proof protective
fuse.
Desk -top handset stations shall be Gai-Tronics Model 7265-102, or equal.
19. OUTDOOR SURFACE -MOUNTED HANDSET STATIONS. Outdoor handset sta-
tions shall include the same devices as listed under indoor surface -
mounted handset stations housed in a heavy cast aluminum weatherproof
enclosure similar to Gai-Tronics Model 7305-103, or equal.
20. SPEAKER AMPLIFIERS. Speaker amplifiers where handset/page and
party capabilities are not required shall include all features and
capabilities listed under Amplifiers. Indoor speaker amplifiers shall
be Gai-Tronics Model 650-001, or equal. Outdoor speaker amplifiers
shall be Gai-Tronics Model 660-001, or equal.
21. SPARE PARTS. The following spare parts shall be supplied with the
intercommunication system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged for
shipment.
2 Handset amplifier complete wiring boards
2 - Speaker amplifier complete wiring boards
22. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete fabrication, assembly,.interconnec-
tion, and installation drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams, and
details, specifications and data covering the materials used and the
parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the equipment fur-
nished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16200
(17578 ) -6-
Section 16310 - SECONDARY INTEGRAL UNIT SUBSTATIONS - LIQUID -FILLED
1. SCOPE. This section covers secondary integral unit substations
which shall befurnished and installed as specified herein and as
indicated on the drawings.
The following substations
shall be
provided:
Designation
Location
1TL5
See
Electrical Site Plan
E
2TL5
See
Electrical Site Plan
1TL6
See
Electrical Site Plan
2TL6
1TL7
See
See
Electrical Site Plan
Electrical Site Plan
I
2TL7
See
Electrical Site Plan
1TM3
See
Electrical Site Plan
2TM3
See
Electrical Site Plan
1TM4
See
Electrical Site Plan
2TM4
See
Electrical Site Plan
r
k
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished
and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled,
erected,
and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering
prp
data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer
i
unless exceptions are noted by the
Engineer.
2.01. Acceptable Manufacturers.
Each substation shall be a product of
a substation manufacturer
who has
supplied such equipment for at least
5 years.
The equipment shall be as manufactured by Asea Brown Boveri, General
Electric, Siemens Energy & Automation, or Westinghouse. The products of
other manufacturers will not be acceptable.
r�
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment
Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Governing Standards. All equipment to be furnished under this
section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with
ANSI C37.20, NEMA SG-5, and UL 1558 (low -voltage switchgear); NEMA PB 2
(switchboards); ANSI C57.12.90 (transformer); NEMA PB 210 (unit substa-
tion); and the latest applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA, and UL.
2.04. Nameplates. Nameplates shall be of black and white laminated
k phenolic material having black exterior lamination and a white center. _
P14 2.05. Sills and Anchors. The Contractor shall furnish and install
1 steel channels, floor sills, and anchor bolts as required by the
l equipment manufacturer for proper installation.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16310
r (17578 ) -1-
t
2.06. System Characteristics The system will be a 12,470 volt,
3 phase, 60 Hz, 3 wire system. The approximate fault current will be
3,500 amperes rms.
2.07. Special Tools and Accessories. All special tools and accessories
necessary for use in testing and maintaining the equipment shall be
furnished.
3. CONSTRUCTION. Each substation shall consist of a primary incoming
line section, a transformer section, and a secondary outgoing line
section. Key interlocks or provisions for padlocking shall be provided
to make the transformer and.associated terminal compartments tamper -
resistant. Each substation shall conform with the arrangement, one -line
diagram, schematics, and requirements indicated on the drawings or
specified herein.
3.01. Primary Incoming Line Section and Secondary Switch Section. The
primary incoming line section and secondary switch section for each
substation shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein.
3.01.01. Two -Position Air -Interrupter Switch. Each two -position
(Open/Closed) air -interrupter switch shall be of the three -pole, load
break type, with stored energy operating mechanism. Each switch shall
be rated 5 kV or 15 kV (as indicated on the drawings), 600 amperes
continuous, with a momentary asymmetrical rating of 40,000 amperes. All
three poles of each switch shall open simultaneously by a handle on the
front of the primary incoming line section compartment. Each switch
shall have a mechanical position indicator.
3.01.02. Incoming Line Terminals and Secondary Line Terminals.
Terminals shall be crimp or compression type and shall be suitable for
terminating shielded cables with Class 1 type stress cones, as indicated
on the drawings. The incoming and secondary lines will enter from the
bottom of the enclosure. Adequate space shall be provided for stress
cones. Connections shall be provided between the connecting terminals
and the disconnecting switches.
3.01.03. Current -Limiting Fuses. Current -limiting fuses shall be
included in each switch compartment to protect the transformer or
secondary feeders. The incoming fuses and fuse holders shall be rated
approximately 200 to 250 percent of transformer full load amperes
continuous. Access to fuse compartments shall be by a hinged door
interlocked with the switch so that the door cannot be opened unless the
switch is opened and additional interlocking as indicated on the
drawings. The door shall be provided on the front of the enclosure.
Fuses shall be General Electric "Type EJ-1", Gould Shawmut "Type CS-3",
or Westinghouse "Type CLE".
3.01.04. Space Heaters. Space heaters for 120 volt ac service shall be
provided in each high -voltage switch compartment to prevent condensation
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16310
(17578 ) -2-
in the switch enclosure. Space heaters shall be connected to_a circuit
breaker disconnect in the transformer secondary terminal compartment.
3.02. Transformer Section. Each transformer shall be 3 phase, oil -
filled substation type with kVA and voltage ratings as indicated on the
drawings and as specified herein. Each transformer shall match and line
up with the primary switch or switches. Connections shall be provided
between the transformer high -voltage bushings and the interrupter switch
or switches. Each transformer shall conform to NEMA standards for
liquid -filled transformers.
3.02.01. Rating. Each transformer shall be rated as indicated on the
drawings and shall have four 2-1/2 percent fully rated taps, two above
and two below rated voltage. An OA rating shall indicate a self -cooled
rating, with a 65 C rise above the 40 C maximum ambient. An OA/OA
rating shall indicate self -cooled ratings at 55 C rise and 65 C rise
above the 40 C maximum ambient. Fan -cooled ratings shall be indicated
by FA and shall have a 65 C rise above a maximum ambient temperature of
40 C.
3.02.02. BIL. The BIL of
the high -voltage windings shall conform to
the following:
Primary Voltage
BIL Voltage
kV
kV
1.2
30
2.4
45
4.8
60
6.3
75
14.4
95
3.02.03. Impedance. Transformers
shall have the following impedances
at their lowest self -cooled
rating:
Transformer Size
Impedance
kVA
225
4.0
300
4.5
500
4.5
750
5.75
I
1000
5.75
3.02.04. Accessories. The transformers shall be provided with the
following accessories:
a. Magnetic -type liquid gauge with low level alarm contact and a
mark at normal 25 C level.
b. Upper and lower filter press connections.
k (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
t (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16310
j— (17578 ) -3-
C. Liquid sampling valve.
d. Drain valve.
e. Liquid temperature dial -type thermometer.
f. Pressure -vacuum gauge of suitable range.
g. Stainless steel nameplate with information as prescribed in r
ANSI standards.
h. Grounding pad with clamp -type terminal for 250 kcmil ground
cable.
i. Tank pressure relief device. --
j. Pressure test valve.
k. Tank lifting lugs.
1. Gang -operated tap -changer control switch.
M. Handhole.
n. Sudden pressure relay as indicated on the drawings.
3.02.05. Construction. Each transformer tank shall be fabricated of
steel plate reinforced by structural steel members and shall have a
structural steel base. All structural members, attachments, assemblies,
tank seams, and tube connections shall be welded. All bolted, flanged
connections shall be provided with suitable gaskets. The tank shall be
equipped with lifting lugs suitable for convenient and safe handling of
the transformer when fully assembled and filled with liquid. The tank
shall be filled and sealed at the factory.
Incoming and outgoing sections of each transformer shall be located on
opposite ends of the transformer and shall have tamper -resistant
hardware.
3.03. Secondary Outgoing Line Section. The secondary outgoing line
section shall consist of a circuit breaker compartment or two -position
air interrupter switch, as indicated on the drawings. The secondary —
outgoing line section shall be factory installed on, or close -coupled
to, the transformer.
3.03.01. Circuit Breaker Compartment. The circuit breaker compartment
for Substations shall be distribution switchboard type that is
completely enclosed in a self-supporting structure independent of wall
supports. The compartment shall consist of the required number of
vertical sections bolted together to form one rigid switchboard. The
sides and rear shall be covered with removable screw -on plates. Circuit
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16310
(17578 ) -4-
pr
i
breakers shall be molded -case type suitable for the interrupting rating
produced by the transformer with zero percent primary impedance. All
breakers shall be 80 percent rated and shall have trip ratings as
indicated on the drawings.
3.04. Busing. All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper with bolted
connections at joints. The bus bars shall be of sufficient size to
limit the temperature rise to 65 C rise based on UL tests, and shall be
rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit
conditions when directly connected to a power source having an available
fault current produced by the transformer with zero percent impedance in
the primary. A full capacity neutral shall be provided where a neutral
is indicated on the drawings.
A ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section
and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. An incoming
ground lug shall be furnished. Other ground lugs for feeder circuits
shall also be supplied as indicated on the one -line drawings.
4. COORDINATION STUDY. A coordination study of the power distribution
system will be conducted in accordance with the electrical section. The
equipment manufacturer shall provide the following information to the
Engineer with the initial equipment shop drawings:
Protective relay coordination curves for each relay provided as a
part of the unit substation assembly.
Protective fuse curves for each current -limiting fuse provided as
a part of the unit substation assembly.
Circuit breaker coordination curves for each circuit breaker
provided as a part of the unit substation assembly.
Transformer damage curves and protection evaluated in accordance
with ANSI/IEEE C57.109 for each transformer provided as a part of
the unit substation assembly.
Within 30 days after the return of the initial equipment shop drawing
submittal, the equipment manufacturer shall provide the above informa-
tion to the Contractor in accordance with Section 16050.
5. SHOP TESTS. All standard factory tests, including quality control
tests, shall be performed on the transformers. Four certified copies of
test results shall be submitted to the Engineer before the equipment is
shipped. Temperature tests will not be required, but calculated
temperature rise based on tests of similar transformers of the same size
shall be furnished.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16310
(17578 ) -5-
6. FIELD TESTS. All overcurrent protective devices shall be adjusted
as directed by the Engineer.. Overcurrent settings on breakers shall be
adjusted according to NEC requirements and the relay coordination study.
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
covering the equipment furnished under this section shall be submitted
in accordance with the submittals section.
Complete and accurate drawings of the equipment, including plan, front,
and sectional or side views, and base plans showing anchor bolt
locations and base details, shall be provided.
Within 90 days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish
outline drawings and dimensional data which fully describe the projected
floor space required for the equipment; the absolute minimum working
space required at the front,,rear, and sides of the equipment; the
equipment height; and the equipment weight.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16310
(17578 ) -6-
r
Section 16395 - MEDIUM -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
1. SCOPE. This section covers medium -voltage motor control equipment
which shall be.furnished and installed as specified herein and as
indicated on the drawings.
The following motor control lineups shall be provided:
Control Lineup
Designation Location
MCLU-4000 Effluent Pumping Station No. 2
MCLU-4001 Effluent Pumping Station No. 2
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected. and placed in proper operating
condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications,
engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
2.01. Acceptable Manufacturers. Each motor control lineup assembly
shall be a product of an industrial motor starter and power switch
equipment manufacturer who has supplied such equipment both individually
and in integrated industrial control equipment assemblies for at least
5 years.
The equipment shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Siemens
Energy & Automation, or Westinghouse. The products of other
manufacturers will not be acceptable.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment
Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Governing Standards. All equipment to be furnished under this
section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with
NEMA ICS 2-324 and 325 and UL 347.
2.04. Nameplates. Nameplates shall be provided for unit description
and for each control or indicating device. The unit description name-
plate shall be on the outer door of equipment installed in exposed
exterior locations. Dimensions and lettering of the nameplates shall be
subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer. Nameplates shall be
black over white plastic, with 3/16 inch high lettering engraved into
the white center.
Permanent nameplates or painted markings shall identify each control
device and.each control wire terminal block connection inside the units
to match identification used on the manufacturer's wiring diagram.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
{ (SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
r- (17578 ) -1,
2.05. Shov Painting. All iron and steel surfaces,.except machined
surfaces and stainless steel, shall be shop painted with the manufac-
turer's standard coating. Finish color shall be ANSI 61 for indoor
equipment or ANSI 24 for outdoor equipment. Field painting, other than
touchup painting, will not be required. A sufficient quantity of addi:
tional coating material and thinner shall be furnished to permit field
touchup painting of damaged coatings.
The underside of equipment to be installed in exposed outdoor locations
shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with an automotive type under-
coating material. The coating shall be thick enough to withstand normal
handling during shipping and installation. The underside shall be
considered to be the surfaces in contact with the floor or pad and other
surfaces not readily accessible for field painting.
2.06. Sills and Anchors. The Contractor shall furnish and install
steel channels, floor sills, and anchor bolts as required by the
equipment manufacturer for proper installation.
2.07. -System Characteristics. The system will be a 4,160 volt,
3 phase, 60 Hz, 3 wire system. The approximate fault current will
be 8000 amperes rms.
2.08. Special Tools and Spare Parts. All special tools and other
devices normally furnished or required for installation, care, and
maintenance of the controller equipment shall be furnished. As a
minimum, the following spare parts shall be provided:
Item Quantity
Power fuses of each size used 3
Primary fuses for the potential transformers 2 .--
Primary fuses for the control power transformers 2
Secondary fuses for the potential transformers 2
Secondary fuses for the control power transformers 2
Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in accordance with the General
Equipment Stipulations, with labels indicating the contents of each
package. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner as directed.
3. CONSTRUCTION. Each control lineup shall conform with the arrange-
ment, one -line diagram, schematics, and requirements indicated on the
drawings or specified herein.
3.01. Enclosures. Enclosures shall be NEMA Type l with gasketed doors'
for indoor locations. NEMA Type 3R walk-in for outdoor locations.
3.02. Vertical Sections. The equipment furnished shall be two -high
type.construction in which two single full -voltage motor controllers
require a full -height section of the equipment. one -high type
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
(17578 ) -2-
i
0
construction in which a single full -voltage motor controller requires a
full -height section of the equipment.
One -high construction shall utilize the full height of the section.
Standard two -high construction, with the top half of each section unused
space, will not be considered as meeting this specification.
Equipment shall consist of a lineup of freestanding, metal -enclosed
cubicles forming an integrally built group of medium -voltage control.
All connections and servicing shall require access from the front only.
The individual sections shall be divided into high and low voltage
compartments so that isolation of equipment for safety of personnel
during service and maintenance or cable pulling is assured while
adjacent sections of the group remain energized.
3.03. Wiring Labels. All internal wires shall be labeled at each
termination. Terminals shall also have labels giving the terminal block
and terminal number.
3.04. Space Heaters. Each section or unit shall be provided with
thermostatically controlled space heaters sized to prevent condensation
within the enclosure. A fused disconnect switch shall be provided for
each section heater circuit.
3.05. Busing. All buses shall be copper. The main bus shall be
located in a bus compartment within or at the top of the enclosure and
shall be rated as indicated on the drawings. The main bus shall be
insulated or taped.
A ground bus shall be furnished in each section, with connectors or lugs
for cables as indicated on the drawings. The ground bus shall be rated
not less than 600 amperes.
A potential bus shall include auxiliary interlocks to disconnect
potential when the starter or contactor section is isolated from the
mainline.
3.06. Rating. Each Class E2 controller shall be rated 350 MVA
symmetrical at 4,200 volts.
3.07. Fuses. Current -limiting fuses shall ensure positive interruption
of faults to limit the magnitude of short-circuit currents and electro-
mechanical stresses to values within the -allowable design of the
component apparatus of the control assembly.
rA positive action indicator shall be ,provided to identify fuses blown
during operation.
r
r` (LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
(17578 ) -3-
Fuses shall be designed for preventionofflame or gas discharge when
operated and shall not require discharge filters, fire boxes, special
vents, or reinforcing.
Fuses for protection of potential transformers, control power trans-
formers, power transformers, and feeder circuits shall be General
Electric "Type EJ-1", Gould Shawmut "Type CS-3", or Westinghouse
"Type CLE". Fuses for motor starter duty shall be General Electric
"Type EJ-2", Gould Shawmut "Type AZ40R", or Westinghouse "Type CLS".
3.08. Load Break Switches. Gang -operated load break switches shall
comply with performance requirements of UL 347.40. Switches shall be
stationary, manually operated, three -pole, single -throw disconnecting
type, with integral interrupter and stored -energy mechanism.
Each switch shall be provided with an external operating handle, with
provisions for padlocking the switch in both the "On" and "Off
positions. -
Each switch shall be provided with mechanical interlocks to prevent
operation of the switch unless the door is closed and to prevent the
door from being opened when the switch is closed.
A viewing window shall be provided for each switch, to display the
condition and position of the switch blades and the blown -fuse
indicator.
3.09. Contactors. Contactors shall be three -pole vacuum break rated,
as required by NEMA ICS 2-324. The operating voltage of the contactor
coil shall be 120 volts ac.
The manufacturer of motor controllers furnished under this section shall
be responsible for the coordination of the contactor, current trans-
formers, overload relays, surge limiters (if required), and current -
limiting fuses. In selecting suitable components, the following
requirements apply:
a. Protection of the motor against sustained overloads and
against locked rotor conditions by means of the overload
relays.
b. Protection of the fuses against sustained currents above their
continuous ampere rating but below their melting value by
means of an overload relay.
C. Protection of the circuit by means of the contactor within the
interrupting limits of the contactor and below the operating
time of the fuses.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
(17578 ) -4-
r
d. Protection of the circuit, contactor, current transformers,
and overload relays from the damaging effects of maximum fault
currents by means of properly sized current -limiting fuses.
e. Protection of the motor against voltage surge (created by the
vacuum switching) by means of surge limiters, if required.
3.10. Current Transformers. Current transformers shall be selected so
that full load secondary currents will be approximately 2.5 to 4.0
amperes, to provide for proper operation of out -of -step protective
relays on synchronous motors, and shall be coordinated with indicating
meters so they read one-half to three-quarters scale at full load.
Conventional bar type current transformers having higher burden -
capacity, to 200 volt-amperes within general industry accuracy
requirements, shall be furnished where necessary for certain devices
such as current type phase reversal relays. "Donut" type current
transformers, with burden -capacity as low as 50 volt-amperes, may be
used where such capacity is sufficient for the particular application.
3.11. Potential Transformers. Potential transformers shall have a
primary voltage rating that is not exceeded by more than 10 percent
under normal conditions, yet under emergency conditions the transformers
shall function at temporary system overvoltage of 1.25 times primary
voltage rating. The transformer insulation -class voltage shall in all
cases exceed the system line -to -line voltage. Thermal ratings shall be
such that, at rated voltage, the burden imposed does not cause the
allowable temperature rise to be exceeded. Transformers shall meet the
required accuracy limits in accordance with the ANSI accuracy classifi-
cation system. Potential transformers shall be General Electric "Type
JVM-3" or "JVM-4", Siemens "Type DP" or "Type PT3-45", or Westinghouse
"Type PT-45".
3.12. Control Power Transformers. Individual control power trans-
formers shall be provided with each contactor and each motor starter.
Control power transformers which serve external device loads shall have
extra capacity.
3.13. Control Test Circuit. Test control power interlocking provisions
shall allow testing of contactor or starter control operations from an
external source of 120 volt control power with the high voltage discon-
nected and isolated.
3.14. Cable Connectors. Bolt -on terminalconnectors, for incoming and
outgoing power cables, shall be provided for each section. Connectors
shall match the size of cables and number of cables per phase as'indi-
cated on the drawings. Connectors to the ground bus shall be provided
in each section for connecting the grounding cable in each power
circuit.
3.15. Stress Cones. The design and arrangement of each section shall
provide sufficient space for terminating power cables with IEEE Class 1
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
(17578 ) -5-
d. Protection of the circuit, contactor, current transformers,
and overload relays from the damaging effects of maximum fault
currents by means of properly sized current -limiting fuses.
e. Protection of the motor against voltage surge (created by the
vacuum switching) by means of surge limiters, if required.
3.10. Current Transformers. Current transformers shall be selected so
that full load secondary currents will be approximately 2.5 to 4.0
amperes, to provide for proper operation of out -of -step protective
relays on synchronous motors, and shall be coordinated with indicating
meters so they read one-half to three-quarters scale at full load.
Conventional bar type current transformers having higher burden -
capacity, to 200 volt-amperes within general industry accuracy
requirements, shall be furnished where necessary for certain devices
such as current type phase reversal relays. "Donut" type current
transformers, with burden -capacity as low as 50 volt-amperes, may be
used where such capacity is sufficient for the particular application.
3.11. Potential Transformers. Potential transformers shall have a
primary voltage rating that is not exceeded by more than 10 percent
under normal conditions, yet under emergency conditions the transformers
shall function at temporary system overvoltage of 1.25 times primary
voltage rating. The transformer insulation -class voltage shall in all
cases exceed the system line -to -line voltage. Thermal ratings shall be
such that, at rated voltage, the burden imposed does not cause the
allowable temperature rise to be exceeded. Transformers shall meet the
required accuracy limits in accordance with the ANSI accuracy classifi-
cation system. Potential transformers shall be General Electric "Type
JVM-3" or "JVM-4", Siemens "Type DP" or "Type PT3-45", or Westinghouse
"Type PT-45".
3.12. Control Power Transformers. Individual control power trans-
formers shall be provided with each contactor and each motor starter.
Control power transformers which serve external device loads shall have
extra capacity.
3.13. Control Test Circuit. Test control power interlocking provisions
shall allow testing of contactor or starter control operations from an
external source of 120 volt control power with the high voltage discon-
nected and isolated.
3.14. Cable Connectors. Bolt -on terminalconnectors, for incoming and
outgoing power cables, shall be provided for each section. Connectors
shall match the size of cables and number of cables per phase as'indi-
cated on the drawings. Connectors to the ground bus shall be provided
in each section for connecting the grounding cable in each power
circuit.
3.15. Stress Cones. The design and arrangement of each section shall
provide sufficient space for terminating power cables with IEEE Class 1
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
(17578 ) -5-
stress cones. The design shall provide adequate space for minimum
bending radii of the cables to be terminated.
3.16. Instruments. All indicating instruments shall be of the highest
grade and shall be designed for mounting on steel panels. The accuracy
classification of the instruments shall be plus or minus one percent.
The instruments shall be designed to operate from the secondary of
instrument current transformers having an output rating of 5 amperes and
potential transformers with 120 volt output.
3.17. Meters. Meters shall be the flush -mounted type and shall be the
products of General Electric or Westinghouse. Recording meters shall be
single -speed strip chart type. Voltage recorders shall be provided with
a hand -wound, spring clock chart drive which, on one wind, will run for
approximately 60 days or the length -of the chart, whichever occurs
first. Unless otherwise specified, chart speeds shall be one inch per
hour.
3.18. Control Switches. Control, selector, and instrument transfer
switches shall be of the multiple stage, rotary, heavy-duty switchboard
type. Type and number of contacts, position names, and action shall be
as indicated on the drawings. Spring return switches shall have indi-
cating targets.
3.19. Auxiliary Contacts. Auxiliary contacts for interlocking and
control shall be furnished as indicated on the drawings. In addition,
one spare NO isolated contact and one spare NC isolated contact shall be
provided on each controller.
3.20. Relays. Relays shall be provided as indicated on the drawings
and as specified herein.
3.20.01. Solid -State Overload Relay. A 3 phase modular electronic
relay to protect motors against overloads (51/49), acceleration time,
RTD overtemperature (49), negative sequence (46), adjustable unbalance
(46), single phase (46), multiple starts (48), short circuit (50),
ground fault (50G/51G), hot motor compensation, undercurrent/minimum
load -137), phase reversal (46), adjustable lockout on thermal trip, and
mechanical jam shall be incorporated into a single field programmable
package. The following alarm features shall also be.included: motor
overload, stator RTD alarm, ground fault alarm, undercurrent alarm,
unbalance alarm, bearing RTD alarm, broken RTD alarm, and self test
alarm. Other features shall include alphanumeric display, actual motor
values display, ;status indication, analog output load amperes, analog
output motor thermal capacity, and analog output stator temperature.
The relay shall be Multilin "269 Protection Relay" or Westinghouse
"IQ1000".
3.21. Wiring. All external connections to the equipment will enter at
the bottom and top. As much space as possible shall be provided for
conduits in unit floors and tops. All spare contacts shall.be wired to
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
(17578 ) -6
r
e
terminals for external connections. In addition to spare contact
terminals and spare terminals, terminals marked to match the manufac-
turer's drawing shall be provided for all connections wired through the
controllers.
4. COORDINATION STUDY. A coordination study of the power distribution
system will be conducted in accordance with the electrical section. The
equipment manufacturer shall provide the following information to the
Engineer with the initial equipment shop drawings:
Protective relay coordination curves for each relay provided as a
part of the medium -voltage motor control assembly.
Protective fuse curves for each current -limiting fuse provided as
a part of the medium -voltage motor control assembly.
Within 30 days after the return of the initial equipment shop drawing
submittal, the equipment manufacturer shall provide the above informa-
tion to the Contractor in accordance with Section 16050.
5. SHOP TESTS. The complete control lineup shall be tested at the
factory. All circuits, including power and control, shall be tested in
accordance with NEMA 2-324 and 325.
6. FIELD TESTS. All overcurrent protective devices shall be adjusted
as required by the Engineer. Overcurrent relays shall be adjusted
according to NEC requirements and the relay coordination study. All
controls shall be tested for conformance with schematics or as required
7 by the Engineer.
i
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
covering the equipment furnished under this section shall be submitted
r in accordance with the submittals section.
Complete and accurate drawings of the equipment, including plan, front,
and sectional or side views; base plans showing sill and anchor bolt
locations and base details; and schematics and wiring diagrams, shall be
submitted.
Within 90 days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish
outline drawings and dimensional data which fully describe the projected
floor space required for the equipment; the absolute minimum working
space required at the front, rear, and sides of the equipment; the
equipment height; and the equipment weight.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16395
,.. (17578 ) -7-
t
F
Section 16480 - 600 VOLT CLASS MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
7
1. SCOPE. This section covers motor control center equipment which
shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and as indicated on
rthe drawings.
The following motor control centers shall be provided: r
Control Center
Designation Location
�^-
1
MCC-2000 Secondary Sludge Pumping Station
MCC-3000 Plant 3
MCC-4000 Effluent Pumping Station No. 2
2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall
be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condi-
tion in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering
data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer
unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.
2.01. Acceptable Manufacturers. Each motor control center assembly
shall be a product of an industrial motor starter and circuit breaker
equipment manufacturer who has supplied such equipment both individually
and together as feeder breakers, starters, and combination starters for
rat
least 5 years.
`
The equipment shall be as manufactured by Cutler -Hammer, Furnas, General
Electric, Klockner-Moeller, Siemens Energy & Automation, or
Westinghouse. The products of other manufacturers will not be
acceptable.
2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment
r
Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.
2.03. Governing Standards. All equipment to be furnished under this
section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with
L
L
NEMA ICS 2 and UL 845.
2.04. Nameplates. Each unit assembly, control switch, and instrument
on the front of the control center shall be provided with a suitable
nameplate. Standard nameplates with 3/16 inch high letters shall be
used on push-button type units. Relays, terminals, and special devices
inside the control center shall have permanent markings to match
identification used on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
2.05. ShoD Painting. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined
surfaces and stainless steel, shall be shop painted with the
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
�.
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16480
(17578 ) -1-
manufacturer's standard coating. Finish color shall be ANSI 61 for
indoor equipment or ANSI 24 for outdoor equipment. Field painting,
other than touchup painting, will not be required. A sufficient
quantity of additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished
to permit field touchup painting of damaged coatings.
2.06. Sills and Anchors. The Contractor shall furnish and install
steel channels, floor sills, and anchor bolts as required by the
equipment manufacturer for proper installation.
3. CONSTRUCTION. Each control center shall conform with the arrange-
ment, one -line diagram, schematics, and requirements indicated on the
drawings or specified herein.
3.01. Vertical Sections. The control center shall consist of stan-
dardized, freestanding instrument sections bolted together to form a
single dead -front panel assembly containing combination motor control
units, feeder units, transformers, distribution panels, lighting panels,
metering, relaying, and interlocking and miscellaneous control devices,
as indicated on the drawings.
Each vertical section shall be 90 inches high, not less than 20 inches
deep, and not less than 20 inches wide. Removable rear plates shall be
sectionalized so that it is unnecessary to handle any plate greater than
the section width or one-half the section height.
3.02. Compartmented Units. Each vertical section shall be constructed
of various sizes of modular components. The modular component design
shall accommodate not more than six Size 1 or Size 2 full voltage
combination motor starters per vertical section.
Individual motor starter units, feeder breaker units, transformers,
lighting panels, distribution panels, and control device compartments
shall be isolated from each other by metal barriers.
Each vertical section shall have a vertical wiring trough for power and
control wiring, and wiring troughs, one top and bottom which are
continuous through the entire control center.
3.03. Wiring Labels. All internal wires shall be labeled at each
termination. Terminals shall also have labels giving the terminal block
and terminal number.
3.04. Busing. The horizontal main bus and,the vertical bus extensions
shall be tin-plated copper, mounted on supports formed of materials
having high dielectric strength, low moisture absorbency, and high
impact strength. Ample creepage distance shall be provided between
phases. Both horizontal and vertical busing shall be braced against
forces resulting from fault current.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16480
(17578 ) -2
The vertical bus connecting an incoming power feeder cable shall be of
the same rating as the main horizontal bus. Each vertical bus extension
shall have a current rating of not less than 150 percent of the
connected load specified for its respective vertical section.
A copper ground bus, with momentary and short time current rating at
least equal to the largest circuit breaker, shall be furnished through
the entire control center and shall be located where it will not inter-
fere with pulling of external cable. Grounding connections shall be
conveniently accessible from the front. A solderless connector shall be
provided on the ground bus in each end section for external grounding
cables, sized from 1/0 AWG to 250 kcmil.
` 3.05. Isolation of Buses. The main bus shall be isolated from the
horizontal wiring trough. Permanent insulation on or in front of
vertical buses, except at control unit.connection points, shall prevent
front contact with the buses while control units are removed.
�^ 3.06. Combination Starters. Control center starters, as indicated on
C+ the drawings, shall be breaker combination, magnetic, reduced voltage,
or across -the -line type as follows:
a.
Starters shall be 3 phase, 60 Hz contactors with overloads,
a 120 volt ac coil, a dry type control transformer, and a
molded -case circuit breaker. Control transformers shall be
mounted with the removable starters and shall have capacity
for all simultaneous loads. Control transformers shall have
both primary leads fused, one secondary lead fused, and one
�•
secondary lead grounded.
b.
Contactors shall have an 8 hour current rating in accordance
with the latest NEMA standards. Contactors of reversing or
multispeed starters shall be mechanically and electrically
interlocked.
r
c.
Reduced voltage starters shall be autotransformer, closed
transition type unless otherwise indicated on .the drawings.
d.
Spare interlock contacts, whether on the starter or a relay,
shall be wired separately to the unit terminal board. One NO
and one NC isolated spare interlock shall be furnished with
each starter.
e.
A 3 phase, ambient -compensated, bimetallic thermal overload
relay with external manual reset.shall be furnished with each
starter.
f.
An external manual breaker operating handle with provisions
P g
for up to three padlocks shall be provided on each starter.
I
The access door shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker
(LUBBOCK,
TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT
NO. 4 ) 16480
(17578
) -3-
so that the door cannot be opened, except by an interlock
override, while the breaker is closed.
g. The Contractor shall match control transformers, overloads,
heaters, and minimum sizes of starters to equipment furnished,
which may differ from the estimated values indicated on the
drawings. Overloads shall reflect any load -side power factor
capacitors.
h. Unless otherwise specified, spare starters shall have breakers
and overloads sized for the largest rated motor and 100 watts
extra transformer capacity.
3.07. Contactors. Contactors for control of bus voltage loads other
than motors shall be the same as combination starters, except overloads
will not be required. Mechanically held contactors shall have 120 volt
ac coils with disconnecting contacts for control over separate leads.
Other contactors shall have 120 volt, continuous duty coils and contacts
as required.
3.08. Relays and Timers. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have
120 volt, 60 Hz coils for continuous duty in 40 C ambient, and
10 ampere, 120 volt ac contacts.'
3.09. Circuit Breakers. Control center disconnects shall be
three -pole, single -throw, 600 volt, molded -case air circuit breakers.
Circuit breakers of combination starters shall be magnetic motor circuit
protector type for motors sized below 100 horsepower, and thermal -
magnetic type for motors sized 100 horsepower and above. Main and
feeder circuit breakers shall be thermal -magnetic type only. These
breakers shall be manually operated with quick -make, quick -break, trip -
free toggle mechanism. Bimetallic thermal elements shall withstand
sustained overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and
without affecting calibration. Thermal elements shall trip the breaker
at 125 percent of trip rating. The instantaneous elements of 225 ampere
frame and larger breakers shall be adjusted as low as possible and allow
any loads to start without tripping the breaker.'
Each breaker shall have suitable arc quenching devices. Main current -
carrying contacts shall be silver-plated and shall carry their rated
current without exceeding Underwriters' Laboratories specified
temperature rise. The manual operating handle shall indicate automatic
tripping.
Where a compartment contains a breaker only, the access door of the
compartment shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker so that the
door cannot be opened with the breaker in the closed position. Where
two breakers are located in a common compartment, an interlock override
shall permit door opening with one breaker closed.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16480
(17578 ) -4-
3.10. Incoming Line Metering. A solid-state metering package, as
manufactured by General Electric, Multilin, Siemens 04700 Meter", or
Westinghouse "IQ Data Plus", shall be furnished on the door of a
separate section. Necessary metering transformers shall be included.
3.11. Miscellaneous. Other items required by the drawings shall
conform to the applicable provisions of NEMA ICS 2 and UL 845.
3.12. Lighting Transformers. Lighting and auxiliary power transformers
shall be dry type with at least two full capacity taps.
3.13. Panelboards. Panelboards shall have a main circuit breaker,
buses, bolted thermal -magnetic breakers, and provisions for breakers in
the sizes, quantities, and poles indicated on the drawings. Breakers
indicated as multiple pole shall be common trip. Breaker interrupting
ratings shall be fully rated and at least 10,000 amperes, and shall be
coordinated with the control center short-circuit rating. Panels shall
be provided with a directory on which shall be typewritten load
identities of each circuit. Six breaker handle clips to prevent casual
tripping shall be provided.
3.14. Automatic Transfer and Bypass Isolation Switches. Automatic
transfer and bypass isolation switches shall be 3 pole, 480 volt, 3
phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz with ampere ratings as indicated on the drawings.
Switches shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, bear the UL
label, and shall meet all requirements of UL Standard 1008. Switches
shall be ASCO 962 or approved equal.
Minimum withstand current rating shall be 50,000 amperes.at 480 volts.
Switches shall have the following accessories:
a. Extended time delay on transfer adjustable from 0 to 5
minutes.
b. Three-phase undervoltage sensing of secondary source.
C. Three-phase overvoltage sensing of normal source.
d. Override switch to manually bypass time delay on retransfer to
normal.
e. Reset switch for manual retransfer to normal with automatic
retransfer in the event of secondary source failure.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the power company to set the time
delay on transfer for all transfer switches. The transfer switches
shall be set such that only one at a time will transfer and the first
shall transfer only after the automatic reclosures of the power company
have opened to stay open until manually closed.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16480
(17578 ) -5
3.15. Special Panels. Instruments, controls, and accessories shall be
mounted either on special doors or on sheet steel panels mounted behind
hinged doors, as indicated on the drawings. All panels and hinges shall
be sufficiently strong for the items supported.
3.16. Features. Each motor control center shall be provided with the
following features:
Enclosure:
NEMA Type 1 with gasketed door.
Arrangement:
Single face, front only, mounting units.
Straight.
Inaccessible from the rear.
Incoming feeder enters at bottom.
Outgoing feeders enter at top or bottom.
Characteristics:
Main bus rating as indicated on the drawings.
Short-circuit rating at least 42,000 amperes symmetrical.
Wiring NEMA Class 2, Type B.
4. COORDINATION STUDY. A coordination study of the power distribution
system will be conducted in accordance with Section 16050. The initial
equipment shop drawings shall indicate the circuit breaker coordination
curves for the main breaker(s), the largest circuit breaker utilized in
a combination starter, and the smallest circuit breaker provided as a
part of the motor control center assembly.
Within 30 days after the return of the initial equipment shop drawing
submittal, the equipment manufacturer shall provide the above infor-
mation to the Contractor in accordance with Section 16050.
5. SHOP TESTS. The complete control center shall be tested at the
factory. All circuits, including power and control, shall be given
dielectric tests in accordance with NEMA ICS 2-322.
6. FIELD TESTS. All adjustable breakers shall be adjusted as required
by the Engineer. Thermal overload relays shall be selected according to
NEC requirements. All controls shall be tested for conformance with the
schematics or as required by the Engineer.
7. DRAWINGS AND DATA. Complete drawings, details, and specifications
covering the equipment furnished under this section shall be submitted
in accordance with the submittals section.
Complete and accurate drawings of the equipment, including plan, front,
and sectional or side views; base plans showing anchor bolt locations
and base details; and schematics and wiring diagrams, shall be
submitted.
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS )
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS & EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4 ) 16480
(17578 ) -6-
6
Within 90 days after
the Notice to Proceed,
the Contractor shall furnish
outline drawings and
dimensional data which
fully describe the projected
floor space required
for the equipment; the
absolute minimum working
space required at the
front, rear, and sides
of the equipment; the
equipment height; and
the equipment weight.
1
4
L
l
r
(LUBBOCK, TEXAS
)
(SEWRP IMPROVEMENTS &
EXPANSION)
(CONTRACT NO. 4
) 16480
r
(17578
) -7-
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
FOR
DISCHARGE PIPELINE AND
WATER RECLAMATION IMPROVEMENTS
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Prepared For
Black and Veatch
5725 LBJ Freeway, Suite 300
Dallas, Texas 75240
August 24, 1992
SWL Report No. 92-132
S0U?m WEf Trow �Aftnm--..
F
BOUTHWEBTERN LABORATORIEB �
Materials, environmental and geotechnical engineering, nondestructive, metallurgical and analgtica! services
2575 Lone Star Drive • P. O. Box 224227. Dells, Texas 75222 • 214/631-2700
August 24, 1992
Mr. Robert G. McCollum, P.E.
Black & Veatch
5725 LBJ Freeway, Suite 300
Dallas, Texas 75240
Re: Geotechnical Investigation
Discharge Pipeline and
Water Reclamation Improvements
Lubbock, Texas
SwL Report No. 92-132
Dear Mr. McCollum:
Attached is our geotechnical report for the above
referenced project. This investigation was performed in
accordance with the Agreement Between Engineer and
Consultant effective March 5, 1992. Comments furnished
by the client have been incorporated into the report as
deemed appropriate. A letter addressing these comments
will be furnished under separate cover.
If during
additional
US.
Sincerely,
the course of this project you require
information, please do not hesitate to call
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
'!�- /J_s�seE.
Coleman,
., P.E.
c nic 1 Division
?im
. Abrams,
P.E.
Manager
Geotechnical
Division
JEC:TGA
r § . OF %Ej\�111
* f '
/ESSE E. COLEMAN. JR.
•0 39721
, IS
NAL
HOUSTON • DALLAS • AUSTIN • BEAUMONT 0 GALVESTON COUNTY • RIO GRANGE: VALLEY 0 ALEXANORIA
SAN ANTONIO • FORT WORTH • MIDLAND 0 MONROE If SHREVEPORT * TEXARKANA 0 DENISON 19 BATON ROUGE
�Y
7
0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Project Information ................................ 1
Scope of Investigation 2
Field Operations ................................... 3
Laboratory Testing ................................. 4
Subsurface Conditions .......... 6
Biotower Filter, Pumping Station Complex,
and Effluent Pump Station ..................... 6
Pipeline ....................................... 7
Groundwater ........................................ 8
Biotower Filter, Pump Station Complex,
and Effluent Pump Station 8
Pipeline ....................................... 9
Analysis and Recommendations
Foundation System ............................... 9-
Pumping Station Complex 10
Biotower Filters ............................ it
Effluent Pump Station ....................... 13
Hydrostatic Uplift .......................... 15
Mat Foundation Construction Considerations ..... 16
Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations ...... 17
Lateral Earth Pressures ........................ 16
Wall Drainage .................................. 20
Design Groundwater Level ....................... 21
Pipeline Construction Considerations ............ 21
Dewatering..................................... 24
Excavations ..................................... 26
Backfill....................................... 26
Seismic Design Considerations .................. 27
Limitations and Reproductions ...................... 27
FIGURES
Figure
Discharge Pipeline Below Lake Ransom Canyon 1
Southeast Water Reclamation Plant ................... 2
Pressure Diagram For Temporary Multi -Braced.
Retention System .................................... 3
APPENDIX
Figures
Log of Borings....................................A-1
Grain Size Analyses...............................A-40
Corrosion Test Results............................A-43
�r
t
adu �u rrra*evu � �atn e�tn e.ra
r
r
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
DISCHARGE PIPELINE AND
WATER RECLAMATION IMPROVEMENTS
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
PROJECT INFORMATION
A new 24 inch diameter discharge pipeline is planned from
U.S. Highway 84 to FM 400 near the city of Lubbock as
shown on Figure 1. The pipeline will be about 24,500
feet long and range from 8 to 32 feet deep. This project
also includes the design and construction of two biotower
filters (trickling filter), a pumping station complex
between the two biotower filters, and an effluent pump
station at the Southeast Water Reclamation Plant located
as shown on Figure 2. This study was planned to provide
recommendations to guide the design and construction of
the pipeline and treatment plant improvements.
The sizes and maximum loads for the filters and pump
stations are as follows:
Effluent Pumping Station:
48" long by 32' wide by
23, deep. with bearing
pressure, at 1,840 psf
and 21.3 kip bridge
crane loads
Id5"TYWf2Tf RM L.AnMAII.-
92-132
-1-
Biotower.Filters
Pumping Station Complex:
65' diameter. by 3' deep
with a bearing pressures
of 1,250 psf
74" long by 59" wide by
21' deep with bearing
pressures of 1,500 psf,
Two existing trickling filters are located where the new
biotowers and pumping station complex is planned. The
existing filters are approximately 180 feet in diameter,
with rock filter media to a depth of about 6 feet.
The pipeline extends from Station 100+00 at the north
fork of the Double Mountain Fork of the Brazos River and
FM 400 to Station 383+44.23 at FM 835 and US Highway 84
at Posey, Texas. The station numbering changes along the
alignment. Station equation, Sta. 187+23.80 Back =
177+49.65 Forward, may be used to correct the stationing.
SCOPE OF INVESTIGATION
The purposes of the study were to: 1) explore the subsur-
face conditions at the site, 2) evaluate the pertinent
engineering properties of the subsurface materials, 3)
provide recommendations for suitable types of foundation
systems for the proposed biotower filters and pump
stations, and 4) provide recommendations for pipeline
trench excavations.
Sn"TwWwEvram LA09%CATMaIrt .
92-132 -2-
r
I
FIELD OPERATIONS
Sixty-one borings were drilled along the pipeline align-
ment between the dates of March 20 and March 27, 1992.
Approximate boring locations at the Southeast Water
Reclamation Plant are; shown in the Boring Location
Diagram, Figure 2. Locations of Borings B-4 through B-61
are referenced by station numbers of the: pipeline. The
boring station locations and elevations of Borings B-4
through, B-60 were established by survey. The station
location and elevation of Boring B-61 was estimated from
the project topographic map.
Borings
were advanced utilizing
air rotary
methods
with a
Failing
1250, truck -mounted
drilling
rig to
obtain
samples of laboratory evaluation. Logs of the borings
with sample descriptions and approximate locations of
strata boundaries are presented on the boring logs in the
appendix.
Undisturbed specimens of cohesive soils were obtained at
intermittent intervals with standard, thin -walled,
seamless tube samplers. These specimens were extruded in
the field, logged, sealed and packaged to protect them
from disturbance and maintain their in -situ moisture
content during transportation to our laboratory.
F
92-132
-3-
seutwwcftcwu uwnnarns'ra
Where cohesionless soils, caliches, � and stiff clays
containing calcareous nodules were encountered, an
indication of their engineering propertieswas obtained
by means of the Standard Penetration test. This test
consists of determining the number of blows required for
_a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches to drive a standard
split -spoon sampler 12 inches.
.,.Double -tube core barrels and hard formation drilling bits
were used to sample the primary formation of caliche.
These samples were also extruded, logged and packaged in
the field. Foundation bearing properties of caliche were
also evaluated using the Texas Highway Department (THD)
Cone Penetrometer test. This test consists of
determining the penetration of a 3-inch diameter cone
driven with an approximate energy equivalent of a
170-pound hammer falling 24 inches.
LABORATORY- TESTING
The, -samples obtained during field operations were exam-
ined in our laboratory -by=a geotechnical engineer. The
laboratory tests were performed on selected samples under
the supervision of this engineer.
SOUTHWEST ERPI LADO RA TOR IES
92-132 -4-
The in -situ unit weight and moisture content of the sam-
ples were determined and used in conjunction with the At-
terberg Limits tests to evaluate the potential volumetric
change of the different strata, and as an indication of
the uniformity of the material
Unconfined compression tests were performed on selected
undisturbed samples of the tan and brown silty and sandy
clays to evaluate the strength of these materials. Uncon-
fined compression tests were also run on selected samples
of the.clayey sands and caliche. Grain size.analyses and
the percent finer than the No. 200 sieve was measured for
selected samples as an aid in classification.
The results of our testing program are tabulated on the
Logs of Borings and Grain Size Analyses included on
Figures A-40 to A-42 in the Appendix.
Thirteen samples were tested for chloride and sulphate
content, pH, and specific conductance -in accordance with
ASTM and EPA standards. The results of these tests are
tabulated on Figures A-43 through A-47 in the Appendix.
r
92-132
-5-
SIOUT14WCKTCN.. L.ANCNL-TG901ff
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
The subsurface conditions encountered in the borings were
generally similar. The conditions present at each boring
location are presented on the Boring Logs in the Appendix
along with descriptions of the various, strata and their
depths and thicknesses. A brief description of the
stratigraphy indicated by the borings is summarized in
the following paragraph:
Biotower Filters. Pumping Station Complex and
Effluent Pump Station
Borings B-1 and B-3 were drilled for the biotower filters
and pumping station complex. Boring B-2 was drilled for
the effluent pump station. Brown and tan sandy clay (CL)
to clayey sand (SC) was encountered at the ground surface
and extended to a depth of 2 feet. In Borings B-2 and
B-3 this material was identified as fill. Tan and brown
silty to sandy clay (CL) was next encountered and
extended to depths varying from 8 to 21.5 feet.
In Boring B-1 a reddish brown clay (CH) was encountered
at a depth of 21.5,feet and extended to the maximum 25
foot depth explored. A gray sandy clay (SC) was next
encountered at a depth of 17 feet in Boring B-2. This
sandy clay was underlain by a gray silty sand (SM) at
f OIITMWEfTENNL �BOR�T�iIES
92-132 -6-
24.5 feet. A pinkish tan -silty clay to clayey sand
(CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche) was
encountered in Boring 3 at a depth of 8 feet. Reddish
brown silty sand (SM) was next encountered in this boring
at 21.5 feet and extended to the maximum 30.5 foot depth
explored.
Pipeline
Borings B-4 through B-61 were drilled along the pipeline
route. The borings were drilled and sampled to depths
corresponding to the proposed range in the depth of the
pipeline. A summaryof the boring depths is presented
below:
Approximate
Borings Depth. ft.
4
thorough
37
10
38
thorough
40
15
41
thorough
44
20
45
thorough
46
25
47
thorough
52
35
53
thorough
55
20
56
thorough
63
10
Borings B-8, B-10, B-12, and B-20 through B-51 were
drilled through road paving consisting of 2 to 3 inches of
asphaltic concrete pavement and up to 9 inches of base
material. Boring B-11 was drilled through one foot of
road base material.
it
92-132
-7-
The .soil in Borings B-4_and B-5 consists of a very loose
to medium clayey sand extending to the maximum 10 foot
depth explored. In general, the soil in the remainder of
the borings consists of a sandy to silty clay to depths of
3 to 10 feet. Underlying this sandy to: silty clay is a
hard to very dense, weakly cemented, silty, clay to clayey
sand (caliche) extending to the maximum 10 to 25 foot
depths explored in Borings B-7 through B-45 and B-54
through B-61. The caliche also -extended to the maximum 35
foot. depth explored in Borings B-50 and B-51. A carbonate
cemented sandstone was encountered at depths,:of 9 to 17
feet in Borings B-46, B-47, B-48, B-49, and B-53. This
sandstone extended to the maximum 35 foot depth explored
in Borings B-46 through B-49 and the maximum 20 foot depth
explored in Boring B-53.
GROUNDWATER
Rotary drilling techniques, using compressed air to remove
the cuttings, were used to advance our borings. This
technique allows groundwater seepage to be.observed during
drilling operations.
Biotower Filters, Pumping Station Complex and
Effluent Pump Station
Groundwater seepage was encountered in Borings B-1, B-2,
and B-3 at depths of 10, 11, and 20 feet, respectively.
-seurWWs:rraW LAAM AW%Wlil
92-132 -8-
Groundwater levels of 8, 10, and 16 feet were ,measured in
Borings B-1, B-2, and B-3,respectively, after completion
of drilling operations.
Pipeline
Groundwater seepage was encountered at a depth of 1 foot
in Borings B-4 and B-5. The measured water level in
Boring B-4 was 4 feet at completion and 4 feet after 5
hours. Boring B-5 was dry at completion. Groundwater was
not observed in-any•of the remaining borings. Variation
in groundwater levels and -quantities should be anticipated
due seasonal variations in rainfall.
ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Foundation System
For purposes of this report, net bearing pressure is de-
fined as the pressure, in excess of the existing overbuy -
den pressure, which can be safely carried at the founda-
tion depth.- The bottom of an excavation is considered the
top of the overburden, for purposes of calculating the net
bearing pressure for foundations within an excavation.
The allowable bearing pressure values given in this report
are net bearing values.
92-132
-9-
Pumping Station Complex
The bottom of the pumping station complex will be about 21
feet below existing grade. A mat foundation is planned.
The allowable net bearing value for a mat foundation
bearing at a depth -of about 21 feet below existing grade
is 2,800 psf.- This bearing value includes a factor of
safety of 3.
The mat foundation could experience up to one-half inch of
settlement for a net bearing pressure of 1,500 psf.
Approximately 1/4 of this settlement is expected to occur
during construction and initial loading. Differential
settlement is expected to be less than 1/2 the total
settlement for a mat foundation.
Excavation for the foundation, placement of concrete and
steel, and required backfilling should proceed in as
.continuous a manner -as' practical. This will serve to
reduce deterioration of the bearing surface. The
excavation is anticipated' to be below the water table.
Accordingly, the excavation must be continuously dewatered
during construction.` The foundation subgrade soils may be
disturbed during construction activities. The subgrade
can be protected during construction by placing filter
fabric over the subgrade soils. A 6 inch layer of crushed
SOUTMWEfTC*N LAOORATORIES
92-132 -10-
stone should then beplacedover-the fabric. Should the
footing subgrade be loosened by, the excavation activities,
the subgrade should be compacted prior to placing the
filter fabric:
Biotower Filters
The bottom of the biotower (trickling) filter structures
will be about 3 feet below existing grade. Current plans
call for an integral ringwall and bottom slab foundation.
The filter media will be supported on square footings on
the filter floor slab.
An allowable bearing value of 1,500 psf is recommended for
the combination footing founded at a depth of`3 feet. The
biotower filter is planned to be 65 feet in diameter with
a sustained bearing pressure on the order of 1,250 psf.
Settlements of 1 to• 2 inches were computed for the soil
conditions indicated by Borings B-3 and B-1, respectively,
for this bearing pressure. -The actual amount of
settlement will depend upon the actual soil conditions
present at the filter locations. Differential settlement
of these foundations are estimated -to --be on the order of
50 to 70 percent of the total estimated settlement
measured between the center and edge of the filter
foundation.
f ���TYWf.TfOY � .�f10.Tne��•
92-132
-11-
Excavation for the foundation, -placement of concrete and
steel, and required backfilling should proceed in as
continuous a manner as practical. Should the subgrade
soils soften due to standing waterinthe excavation, the
soft soils should be removed to firm ground and replaced
with suitable fill soils or worked in 'placed to obtain a
dry density of at least 95 percent of the maximum dry
density as determined by. -test method ASTM D 698 at a
moisture content ±2 percent of optimum.
Should weather conditions at the time of construction
indicate rainfall will occur, consideration should be
given to the use of a lean concrete seal slab to help
preserve the subgrade soils.
If these settlements cannot be toleratedbythe biotower
structure, then a drilled and underreamed shaft foundation
.is recommended. :The shafts should be founded in the sandy
clay at a depth of 10 feet below existing grade. A base
to -shaft diameter ratio between 2 and 2.5 to 1 is
recommended. An allowable net bearing pressure of 2,500
psf is recommended.
lOL1TMRtf TtRN L�eO R�TORIE�
92-132 -12-
Settlement -of drilled and .underreamed shafts loaded to a
net bearing pressure as recommended-above.is estimated to
be less than one inch, with up to, one-half of this
settlement occurring during construction and initial
loading. _ Differential settlement between adjacent drilled
shafts is expected to equal the total settlement.
Before a drilled shaft foundation system is constructed,
we recommend that additional borings be drilled at each of
the trickling filters after demolition of the existing
filters. once the actual soil types are -established at
the biotower locations, a determination _of the magnitude
of the expected settlement can be made.. These borings may
indicate soil conditions similar to Boring 3 that will
allow a shallow foundation system.
Effluent Pump --Station
The bottom of the structure of the effluent pump station
will be. approximately 23 feet below existing grade.
Current. plans call for a mat foundation for this
structure. The allowable net bearing pressure for a mat
foundation is 2,000 psf. This bearing value contains a
factor of safety of 3.
feu t..westeeu � ��ne.�n e.re
92-132 -13-
The mat foundation' subgrade should be free of loose or
soft soils when the foundation concrete is poured. Either
a lean concrete seal slab or filter fabric overlain by
-crushed stone can be used to protect the mat subgrade.
The subgrade should be compacted should'the, foundation
soils be loosened by construction activities prior to
placement of the seal slab or filter fabric and rock.
• The maximum settlement of a -mat foundation is expected to
be on the order of one-half inch with up to 60 to 70
percent of this settlement occurring during construction
and initial loading. Differential settlement 'is expected
to be less than 50-percent of the total settlement.
The effluent pump station will also have a bridge crane
with a 21.3 kip load at the crane support. Either
shallow spread footings or reinforced concrete drilled
shafts are recommended. An allowable net bearing pressure
of 1,500 psf for sustained live and dead loads and 2,000
psf for dead and transient live loads are recommended for
a square spread footing' embedded at least 2 feet below
existing grade.
For drilled shafts founded 10 below existing grade, an
allowable net bearing value of 3,000 psf is recommended
92-132 -14-
for dead and sustained live loads and 3,600 psf for dead
plus transientlive loads for shafts with a underream or
shaft diameter equal.to or less than 3 feet. For larger
underream or shaft diameters or greater embedments, the
weaker sandy clays below 17 feet willreducethe allowable
bearing pressures to 1,400 psf.
Hydrostatic Uplift
The pump station complex and effluent pump station will be
subjected to hydrostatic uplift forces. The effluent pump
station floor slab will be designed with pop -off valves to
relieve hydrostatic water pressures. . The pump station
complex floor slab will be designed to- withstand
hydrostatic pressures. These forces can be resisted by
the buoyant weight of the structures and compacted soil
backfill placed on a heel or extension of the foundation
slab around the perimeter provided the floor slabs are
designed to resist the uplift pressures. Buoyant soil
weights should be used below the design -water level.
If the mat foundations cannot be designed to resist the
uplift loads, then tie -downs should be considered to
resist the hydrostatic forces. Tie -downs may be drilled
and underreamed shafts or grouted tendons anchored in the
deeper soil strata. SwL can provide design parameters for
these systems, upon your request.
flu TlA WftTl�u . ��wea�w �.r.
92-132 -15-
Mat Foundation Construction Considerations
Based on information from Borings B-1 and B-2, groundwater
will be, encountered during excavation for the for the pump
station complex and effluent pump station at depths of 8
and 10 feet, respectively. Dewatering of these sites will
be required for the construction excavations. The sites
should be dewatered to 2 feet below the planned excavation
depth.
Temporary cut slopes in the sandy clays should be 2
horizontal to 1 vertical (2H:1V) for.cuts up to 25 feet in
.depth or a braced retention system should be used. Sheet
piling may be used as a retention system. Sheet piling
will generally have less seepage through joints than other
forms of retention systems. Dewatering of the sandy clays
within the sheet piling with sumps and pumps should be
anticipated.
The recommended temporary retention system pressure
envelope for use at this site is presented on Figure 3.
The pressure envelopes are for saturated conditions
without surcharge loads. Hydrostaticpressures should
also be included where' groundwater is encountered and
excavations are not dewatered.
four .awwzvwa. ,anwivn ear•
92-132 -16-
r-
Drilled shaft Construction Considerations
Groundwater seepage will be encountered during the
installation of some of the shafts, particularly if
construction proceeds during a wet period of the year. In
most cases, rapid placement of concrete and steel will
permit shaft installation to proceed; however, the seepage
rates could be sufficient to require the use of temporary
casing. In those instances where casing is required it
should be seated below the zone of seepage with all water
and most loose material removed prior to beginning the
underream operation. Care should then be taken that a
sufficient head of plastic concrete is maintained within
the casing during extraction.
The underreaming of individual shafts should be excavated
in a continuous operation and concrete placed as soon as
practical after completion of drilling. No shaft should
be left open for more than 8 hours. All drilled shaft
installations should be carefully inspected by qualified
personnel to help verify the bearing stratum, underream
clean -out, and perform related duties.
Lateral Earth Pressures
The lateral pressure appropriate for the design of below
grade walls will be a function of the backfill material
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES
92-132 -17-
used and drainage conditions behind the wall. Recommended
lateral earth pressure coefficients for level ground
surface conditions are as follows:
Earth Pressure Coefficients
Backfill Material Active At -Rest Passive
Ka KO KP
On -site clayey sand 0.35 0.50 2.9
On -site sandy clay 0.45 0.70 2.5
Granular backfill conforming to ASTM C 33, fine aggregate - 0.27 0.403.5
Active earth pressures are recommended where the top of
the structure walls are free to deflect, or for single
braced sheet piling walls. Reinforced concrete walls that
are restrained at their top should be designed for at -rest
earth pressures. The wall backfill limits should extend
outward at least 2 feet from the base of the wall and then
upward on a 1H:2V slope or the temporary stable cut
slope. Where the backfill cannot be placed to these
limits due to the earth retention system, the on -site soil
values should be used for design. Surcharge loads should
be included in the wall design.
Recommended soil unit weights in pounds per cubic foot for
the above backfill materials are as follows:
SGUTHWCATEAM LASONATewIES
1
92-132 -is-
Above Design IBelow Design
Groundwater
Groundwater
Backfill Material
Level (pcf)
Level (ncf)
On -site clayey sand
120
58
On -site sandy clay
125
63
Granular backfill
conforming to ASTM C 33,
fine aggregate
125
63
Below the design groundwater level, hydrostatic pressures
should be added to the earth effective or buoyant pres-
sures unless drainage is otherwise provided for. Care
should be taken that backfill is not overcompacted, which,
could increase the ,lateral pressures on the walls. The
top of the backfill should be protected by flatwork,
paving, or a minimum of 2 feet of sandy clay fill to
prevent surface infiltration.
The above values assume a relatively level surface behind
the wall. A sloping ground surface behind the wall can
significantly increase the lateral earth pressures. For
example, a 3H:1V backslope condition would require a 15
percent increase in the above lateral earth pressure
values while a 2H:1V backslope 'condition would require a
30 percent increase in the values.
F
92-132
-19-
Wall backfill materials which will support flatwork or
loads should be placed in loose lifts less than 9 inches
thick and uniformly compacted to a minimum density of 95
percent of ASTM D 698 or a minimum relative density of 75
percent in order to reduce backfill settlement. Moisture
content during placement of the backfill should be within
-2 to +3 percent of the optimum moisture content as
measured in the test method used to develop the compaction
density value.
Even with practical attempts to uniformly compact the wall
backfill, some settlements may occur immediately behind
the wall. These settlements may also impose an additional
load on pipes passing through the fill to the structures.
Potential settlements of well compacted fill may range
from 0.3 to 0.5 percent of the fill thickness.
Wall Drainage
If the on -site sandy clay or clayey sand is used as
backfill and it is desired to reduce the hydrostatic
pressures, a vertical drain would be required immediately
behind the walls. This drain could consist of a clean
sand and gravel vertical drain or a synthetic drain such
as MIRADRAIN by Mirafi.
..... ... . .. .. . ... ... .•..SGIJTYWEiTERY L�RCRITC RIEi
92-132 -20-
The sandandgravel drain should be at least 1'foot wide.
The granular drain should be free draining material with
less than 3 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and meeting
the gradation requirements for concrete aggregates as
specified in ASTM C 33 Coarse Aggregate, size No. 57. The
drain material 'should be separated from the adjacent
fine-grained backfill by- using a suitable geotextile
fabric (such as Mirafi 140N or equal). A perforated drain
pipe which drains by gravity"flow to;a suitable outlet or
sump would be required at -the base of the vertical back -
fill drain.
Design Groundwater Level
Seepage was observed in the borings. Seepage from
rainfall or migration from the near surface rainfall or
irrigation. is expected in the surficial clayey sands and
sandy clays. This seepage could result in a build-up of
hydrostatic pressure behind the walls Therefore, if a
drain is not provided behind the wall, the wall should be
designed -for hydrostatic forces beginning 5 feet below the
top of the walls -or finished grade.
Pipeline Construction Recommendations
A 24 inch diameter pipeline will be constructed as part of
this project. The pipeline will connect to the existing
SOUIrMWESTBAM LAsORATOWIrs
92-132 -21-
24 inch diameter; pipeline and extend from U.S. Highway 84
to FM 400 near the city of -Lubbock.. The pipeline will be
about 29,500 feet in length and range from 8 to 32 feet in
depth.
The proposed pipeline route is shown on Figure 1. The
boring locations were staked by the -firm of Black &
Veatch. The station numbers and elevations shown on the
boring logs were obtained from Black & Veatch, except for
Boring 61. The station and elevation were estimated from
the site plan for this boring.
The soil consists of a very loose to, medium dense clayey
sand in the .area of Borings B-4 and B-5. In addition,
groundwater seepage was encountered in both borings, and a
high groundwater level was measured in Boring B-4. Slopes
of 4 horizontal .to 1 vertical (4H:1V) or flatter may be
necessary to provide stability for temporary cut slopes in
this material, if the slopes are not dewatered. Dewatered
slopes can be excavated on 2H:1V side slopes. Dewatering
will also be required for braced excavations. The
groundwater level should: be lowered to at least 2 feet
below the bottom of the trench excavation.
SOUTMWESTCIIN LACONATONICS
92-132 -22-
r
F
Any excavation which is greater than 5 feet in depth must
be either braced or laid back to a stable slope. OSHA
Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1926), Subpart P, re-
garding safety requirements should be consulted for trench
excavations greater than 5 feet in depth. The soils in
the area of Boring 4 and 5 are classified as Type C by
-OSHA classification.
The soils along the remainder of the pipeline length are
generally very stiff sandy clays to silty clays and clayey
sands (weakly cemented caliche). Temporary cut slopes of
1H:1V will be stable in these soils. The cemented
sandstones encountered in Borings B-45 through B-49 and
B-52 should also be cut to slopes of 1H:1V. These soils
are classified as OSHA Type A soils, unless they are
subject to vibrations from heavy traffic.
Various types of retention systems can be considered for
the excavation of the pipe trenches.- Trench boxes or
shields, cantilevered tangent shafts, soldier pile with
lagging and cross -bracing, or steel sheet piling with
cross bracing could be used at this site. Trench boxes or
shields are anticipated to be used where excavation depths
are less than 15 feet. The other retention systems may be
required where excavations greater than 15 feet are
required.
SOUTHWESTERN LASORATOMIES
92-132
-23-
The steel sheet piling are anticipated to require less
dewatering and accordingly less groundwater. to dispose of
.in an approved manner. Sheet piling can also be used to
reduce the groundwater inflows into the trench
excavations. I The sheet piling should be driven several
feet below the base of the excavation. The -enclosed area
will need to be dewatered 2 feet below excavation grade to
provide a suitable working platform. Hard driving may
split sheet pile interlocks and the intact interlocks may
not be entirely watertight. Provisions to maintain water
levels below the excavation level should be made.
Recommended design parameters, for the above retention
systems are presented on Figure 3. The pressure envelopes
contains a hydrostatic pressure but not surcharge loads
due to traffic, equipment, or adjacent -structures. These
surcharges must be evaluated and included in the design of
the, retention system,. Hydrostatic pressure should be
included for retention systems where groundwater is
present and the excavation is not dewatered. Similar
diagrams can be developed for other systems, if desired.
Dewaterinq
All temporary excavations for the pump station complex
effluent pump .station and a portion of the pipeline will
tau-rwwEfTCNM LANGNAL-MMICS
92-132 -24-
t
t
F
be partially submerged. Therefore, dewatering of the
excavationswillbe required. Dewatering can be
accomplished in various ways, such as sump pumping or
wellpoint systems where sands are present. The drawdown
from wellpoints can result in settlement of structures
and/or pavements in close proximity (within 75 to 100
feet).to the area being dewatered.
The magnitude of any potential settlement of existing
structures due to wellpointing is dependent on the type of
foundation system, foundation depth, foundation loading
conditions, the actual drawdown of the wellpoint system,
the distance of the structure from the wellpoints, and the
compressibility and hydraulic conductivity characteristics
of I the soil profile. Typically, structures overlying the
soft, gray, sandy clays encountered in Boring B-1 could be
suspectable to significant settlements, on the order of 4
inches or more, dependent upon the actual foundation
loading, type, distancefrom the wellpoints, etc. as
mentioned above. The amount of settlement generally
decreases with distance from the wellpoint system.
Lightly loaded structures, with bearing pressures on the
order of 2,000 psf or less and foundation depths less than
10 feet, more than 50 feet from the wellpoints are
expected to have settlements on the order of 1 inch or
92-132
-25-
-less. If the actual soil conditions are similar to those
in Boring ° B-3, settlement due to well pointing is expected
to be much less than one inch.
Methods to mitigate settlement from wellpoint systems
include underpinning foundations, additional deep
foundations, limiting the range of the drawdown by use of
cut-off walls, water injection, etc. The actual method
chosen will depend upon the of dewatering system the
contractor installs.
Excavations
Excavations for the structures at the water reclamation
plant can be accomplished with standard excavation
techniques. Temporary cut slopes should be as recommended
above.
Excavations for the pipeline through the soil encountered
in this excavation can also be accomplished with standard
excavation techniques and equipment. Some difficult
digging should be anticipated in the weakly cemented
caliche .materials, requiring greater effort and possibly
the use of a pavement breaker mounted on a backhoe.
However, excavation by drilling and blasting techniques is
not anticipated.
SOUT14WESTERN LABORATORIES
92-132 -26-
aackfill
The material obtained from the various excavations may be
used as backfill for the project structures and pipeline.
The on -site materials are classified as CH, CL, and SC, in
accordance with ASTM D 2448. Both the areas to receive
fill and the fill materials should be free of any
vegetation or debris. Prior to placing the fill, the
exposed subgrade in areas to receive fill (structure and
trench subgrade) should be scarified to a depth of 6
inches and recompacted to a minimum of 95 percent density
±2 percentage points of the optimum moisture content as
determined by ASTM D 698. Fill materials should be .spread
in 'loose lifts, less than 9 inches thick and uniformly
compacted in a similar manner.
Seismic Design Considerations
The Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1988 edition, places the
project area within seismic Zone 0. Therefore, UBC
seismic coefficients for structural design are not
necessary for this project. Liquefaction will not be a
problem because the seismic zone is zero. There are no
known faults within a 50 .mile radius of the project site
based on The American Association of Petroleum Geologists
Geological Highway Map of Texas.
295UTMWrfrraw LARf5MAtfSYIf.
92-132 -27-
LIMITATIONS AND REPRODUCTIONS
The foregoing recommendations are based on analyses of the
soils from each of the indicated borings with the
assumption of uniform variation in the soil properties
between borings.
Should any conditions at variance with this report be
encountered during construction, this office should be
notified immediately so further investigations can be made
and supplemental recommendations can be given.
The reproduction of this report, or any part thereof,
supplied to persons other than the owner, should indicate
that this study was made for design purposes only and that
verification of the subsurface conditions for purposes of
determining trafficability, etc., are responsibilities of
others.. This report should not be used as a construction
specification but as a guide for developing final
foundation and pavement plans and specifications.
Analysis performed by: Jesse E. Coleman, Jr., P.E.
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES
92-132 -28-
F
I
G
U
R
E
S
soutwwctrcww LASno.*^....
m`i`=_ .
/ SOUTHEAST WATER
I RECLAMATION PLANT
_ � � i N � /1 j•�r1
r
)) Ana �I �. D RANSOM
• CANYON �-
°' VILLAGE
su '
TrTT
f w
7 I eot•
PAIRPORT I
I r • i
e) r•s
_ '1 ���• at a �i�t0,brat Rigirjw
o
r SCALE INP41L€3. �
-�"--fill
I wy .r
L_
FAf 1<1 iOR• `\a CO 011� r o -� 1
)'�=lam°�f tin-ow-1[ ■ -_r_ f �`� __ ���. r. i
PROPOSED DISCHARGES
PIPELINE BELOW-/,74r
e)) LAKE RANSOM CANYON
1 t.
PosEY o
B Al j 71
� Ecce••c '
1
u
-3
BIOTOW E R
FILTERS
EXISTING i
TRICKLING
FILTERS
TO BE
REMOVED
-� -PUMPING
��� a '`�►!� �"'
�t spa� STATION
MN,W`
wil■
NOTE: BORING LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE
PROJECT / TITLE
SOUTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION PLANT
SITE LOCATI(M
BORING LOCATION DIAGRAM LUBBOCK, TEXAS
SWL 92 - 132 1 SCALE: NONE DATE: 615192 DRAWN BY: SmT
Fi¢ure 2
0.25 H
CROSS BRACES
40 H 62.4 Ibs / fi
H (HYDROSTATIC)
w
BOTTOM OF CUT 16
5'
10
SOLDIER PILE OF SHEET PILE
D
150 D
NOTE:
1. SURCHARGE LOADS SHOULD BE ADDED AS REQUIRED.
2. H AND D IN FEET.
3. APPROPRIATE SAFETY FACTORS TO BE APPLIED.
4. GROUNDWATER DEPTH BELOW EXISTING GROUND SURFACE VARIES.
FIGURE 3
PRESSURE DIAGRAM
FOR TEMPORARY
MULTIBRACED RETENTION
SYSTEM
SWL 92 - 132
APPENDIX
SCUTMW[f TKRW LARCMAT45WIrl
r
LOG OF BORING NO. B- 1
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/20/92
SHEET 1 of 1
LOCATION: SEE FIGURE 1
SURFACE ELEV: 3120.00
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Growndwater seepage
H
z
U.
encountered at 10.0'. Water at 8.0' after 20 minutes.
U
o
u
_
z
Water at 8.0' after 2.5 hours.
c
Z
Q
N
N
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
o
E d
o
Ic
U.
U i'
P=3.75
10
Dense, brown CLAYEY SAND (SC)
2 0
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules
FM
P - 2.25
17
108
35
19
16
1.7
5.8
1, 5
t
C 10
15-1 25 89 41 1.4 2.9
N.8
! i 20 N=6 31 30 17 13
r
38 84 1791371421 1 2.7 13.3
25
4
r`
30
35
40
N
N
I
TUBE
AUGER
SPLR-
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
92-132
N
ROCK
CORE
b
THO
Very stiff, reddish brown CLAY (CH)
REMARKS:
NO
RECOVERY
A- 1
25.0
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: SEE FIGURE 1
DATE: 3/20/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3126.00
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
aq
A
°
m
~
Z
>
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Growndwater seepage --
rn
encountered at 11.0'. Water at 10.0' at completion.
�L
Z
zo
H
N
> Y
i CL
yU
tt
S~S
J
CI
rn
0 �_-.
N
Q
a
=
C 7d
r
p 2
?
N
a 2
Lh.
�--
2
0 °d
di
W
d
asr
as:
U
U.
U
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with r-
11
122
3.0
3.0
calcareous nodules 2 ,
FILL- �—
Pa4.0
11
121
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
P E 4.5 +
10
112
calcareous nodules r-
5
N-19
-
15
114
1.9
3.9
10
z
15
17.1
Soft, grey SANDY CLAY (CL)
20
25
100
0.6
4.3
24.b
N - 14
23
1
130
Medium dense, pray SILTY SAND (SM) 25.5 -
25
30
35
-
40
N
N
M H
W I I
REMARKS:
TUBE
SAMPLE
AUGER
SAMPLE
SPLrr-
SPOON
ROCK
CORE
CANE
PEN,
NO
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 2 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN
LOG OF, BORING NO. B- 3
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT
SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
LOCATION: SEE FIGURE 1
DATE:
3/20/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3132.00
HELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
C
"'
>
y
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
y
W
g
encountered at 20.0'. Water at 25.0' at completion.
a
W Y
Water at 16.0' after 5.5 hours.
F =
n O
I
%
N
LL
Z�
0
H
x
F-
u 0
<
U.
0
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
Brown and tan SANDY CLAY (CL)
-FILL- 2.0
P-4.0
9
118
29
18
11
2.0
3.3
Very stiff, brown SILTY CLAY (CL)
r5
1:
P-3.75
11
12
107 156
126
30
1
1 1.0
2.71
1
8.0
Herd to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
10
N-50/3"
7
SAND (SC-CL). (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
N - 64
18
44
15
`
:
20
N = 542
16
21.5
Very dense, reddish brown SILTY SAND ISM)
j
25
N-92
19
18
30
N-91
21
60
30.5 -
.
35
a
40
N
N
W
W
N
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
CCO
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
C92-132
A- 3
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN(
LOG OF BORING NO. B- 4
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 100+21.8, 29'LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21 /92 SURFACE ELEV: 2924.06
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
as
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Growndwater seepage-
0
~
'�
>
¢
encountered at 1.0'. Water at 4.0' at completion.
2
U.
W y
A
W
LU
Z
0
Water at 4.0' after 5 hours.
Y
a. 3=
F"
a
S
> Y
d
a
0
i=
66m
O O to
Y � a
cOi
w
y u
2
-j
1>
o
H=
ti
_'
cc
0
w 0
O
'�
C
V
H
-
Z
V)
¢ C~7
2
d
2
U.
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
a=
o
Q
H
a
o
g
Very loose, brown CLAYEY SAND (SC)
13
37
P= t
34
93
5
0.25 -
T-3
7.0
Medium dense, tan CLAYEY SAND (SC) with clay seams
and gravel
10
Na10
19
20
10.5-•.
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B- 5
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 105+00 20'LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21/92 SURFACE ELEV: 2919.90
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary • i
method.
aq
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: 'Growndwater seepage'
$
z
'�
W
encountered at 1.0'. Boring dry at completion.
N
K'
afz
C
h
g
LA.
N
?
Qj
x
z
W
F"
O
F
t
S
J
$
> Y
qa
N
a
.—.
O
W
afl 4.
O
Q
O
N w y U
J
�
0
0-
z
(NH
2 L7
W
i
Z
y =
o
O O
h
<
?
0:K
a
o
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
o
it
inn
vOi
E.
i
0H
w
�a
Q
12
34
Loose to medium dense, tan CLAYEY SAND (SC) with
organics
13
115
1.7
3.4
3.51
P - 2.5
18
19
17
2
Loose to medium dense, ten CLAYEY SAND (SC)
\
5
\\
N-4
16
30
\\
10
10.5-�
15
TUBE
SAMPLE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THD
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
PEN_
NO
RECOVERY
A- 4
REMARKS:
92-132
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
• LOG OF BORING NO. B- 6
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT LOCATION: STA 110+00 201T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21/92 SURFACE ELEV: 2924.37
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD (S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
V dt GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
i > completion.
0 N H * W 0 U.
O ? Y
W 0 J U Y Z W G Li
e S a G?a 0Z G H > >
d N _ } Q `� ? < - DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
rgi a a z a c g s' v H � �'
Light brown CLAYEY SAND (SC)
9 27 18 9
2.5
Very stiff, light brown and tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with
5
20 105 2.5 3.8 caliche
N=15 9
N-4
10 10-5-
LOG OF BORING NO. B- 7
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT LOCATION: STA 115+00 201T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
r DATE: 3/21/92 SURFACE ELEV: 2933.70
` FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
U GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
as X
completion.
fLLfi H :� W N LLUj
y
LAJ
N Y
g �t Ci
y1
e = C1 2U.
G C G F r N H a
y DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
td C Z 0. 2 G J G7 M U. W
Tan CLAYEY SAND (SC)
9 1 11313.0
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
5 P=2.75 17 calcareous nodules
14 112 32 18 14 1.5 3.2
10 P - 2.5 15 10.0
REMARKS:
t TUBE AUGER sPLR• ROCK BONE NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN, RECOVERY
' 92-132 A. 5 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B- 8
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 120+00 301T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21 /92 SURFACE ELEV: 2949.10
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHODIS): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
W
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at .—
m
i
W
:
completion.
2
7sQ
Q
y
g
V!
2
w
�a
x
:
O O W
v
>- LL
�
~
=
> Y
y
O
LL
F}-
m m
h V
W (/i
i
J
(..1
F}_-
(,
O
=
N=
6W
Lw
ZQZ
Z
H
y
W
j
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
a
Q c' _
La
Y
<
Q
=
6
v0i
o
V N
L
U a
3" Asphalt Paving 1.0
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
\
11
118
3.2
2.9
calcareous noduleE
5
N = 28
10
37
17
20
39
ti •o
Medium dense, brown clayey SILT (ML) i
10
N-13
1
10.5-
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B- 9 -'
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 125+00 251T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21 /92 SURFACE ELEV: 2979.90
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
{yj
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
'�
iR
completion.
y
U.
N
Z
H
7R
a4
Uj
Q
88
y
2
W
Y
oo
W
-' Q-
V
LL'
?
w
~
er
Ci
> Y
y=
w
6.
r=-
a ~= 4
2o
C 2
j
H
w
¢ uZi
O
IL
<
�
o �
Q
LL
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM �
v0,
z � a:
P=4.5+
9
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
\
calcareous nodules
3.0
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish brown SILTY CLAY
\
5
N - 26
TO CLAYEY SAND (CL-SC), (calcareous, weakly
cemented caliche)
N-29
4
10
N-29
1 4
1
1
1
1
1e
15
'
H
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT -
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
W
DOCK
CORE
�j
k{
REMARKS:
NO
THD
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 6
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
o ,
LOG OF BQRING NO., B-10
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 130+00 51T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21 /92 SURFACE ELEV: - 3011.02
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
aR
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring d at
g dry
m
z
yt
�,
completion.
NUj
z
F
c
$
LL
W
C>
Y
N
S
S
p
=
¢
O
Z
O O
O
H
m
¢ Z
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
0
CL
a ad
8
Q
�
f
� w
Q�
o
z�
i
o
>�
�,
3' Asphalt Paving and Base ^UT
27
Stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with calcareous
nodules 3.0
17
81
52
27
25
5.1
3.6
Hard, raddish brown CLAN' (CH)
5
—
P-4.5+
14
P-4.5+
20 1
f
1
10.0
10
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-11
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION:" STA 135+00 41T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21 /92 SURFACE ELEV: 3042.11
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
c
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
1
completion.
U.
Q
LLX
¢
U.
G
'
(A
-j
Y
v
z
e
,
O
CL
W
~ O z
=
y
o
O Z
C
H
N
(A
W
O
<
u
—
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
to
O
to Z F- d
2
1
V N
t&
V
° a
Road Base Material 1.0
Hard, reddish brown SANDY CLAY ICL)
10
113
37
21
16
0.6
2.2
N-37
15
5.0
5
Hardto dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND ICL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
N - 40
5
~\10
N-46
3
10.57
15
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
CONE THO
No
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 7 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-12
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 140+00 51T.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3071.72
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
L
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
i
Ld
W
completion.
0--
ZR
W
to
y
Caf�A
3
Z
v
7R
~c
C
8
y+
a
x
0
2
''
z
F"
N U
r:
i
I-
N
0
>
y
0
m
p
p
¢
Z
�
G
�
Z
�
�
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
0
o
ai z
i
c °
�
�
�
H
�
�
12" Asphalt paving and road base materiel
\\
Herd to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
�!
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
5—NN-50/3-
10
N - 46
20
35
10.5 —
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-13
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 145+00 20'LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/21 /92 SURFACE ELEV: 3079.56
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary i
method.
aR
ul
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
z
aR
�
�
completion.
�n
l
2
0
LL
�R
~SS
C
_W
8y
a
Y
S 2
>
SteS_
N
Cj
> Y
cc
a7 ¢ Cl
0
W
J
S2
Z
LLJ
p
0
c
_ _
SO
<
0
U
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM —`
Tan clayey SAND ISC)
T.5
X x
N - 56
Dense, carbonate cemented SAND AND SILT (Calichel
x
5
N-63
9
81
—1
X
I
�l
<
10
=50l1.5
5
85
1o.5-
15
TUBE
SAMPLE
AUGER
SAMPLE
SPLIT-
SPOON
ROCK
CORE
92-132
N
kj
REMARKS:
NO
THO
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
A• 8
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
LOG OF BORING NO. B-14
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 150 + 00 20*LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3122J92 SURFACE ELEV: 3081.71
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
dt
W
completion.
aq
W
co
LL
(A
z
PC
Uj
Uj
0
> -j 0
z
U,
U)
C
to
Q
C; z
se
Uj
o
Lp
z
H
CIL,
0
c Q
`
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
'Tan clayey SAND (SC) 1.0
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CHI
13
115
3.4
3.0
3.5
N-19
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
5
CLAYEY SAND. (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
caliche)
N - 21
17
34
N-21
36
3710.5
10 -x
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-15
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 155+00 20*LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH I
DATE: 3/22/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3085.79
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary i
method.
U;
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
z
>
completion.
LL
z
0
t
ig
Uj
Up
> 0 0
Uj
>
Ci
Uj
: C;
z
C,
S2
6!
z
0
W
LL
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
§
oc 0
<
9
;i
C'
0
U.
1021
Tan clayey SAND (SC) 1.0
.
19
110
29116
13
41
Vetiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
Very
'04
layers
19
5
5.0
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
CLAYEY SAND, lCL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
x N-14
17
caliche)
N-
<
10—x
N-1S
16
36
10.5:1
15
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT.
ROCK
THO CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SA
SPOON_
con
PEN
RECOVERY
A- 9 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES. INC.
LOG OF BORING NO. B-16
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 160+00 20'LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/22/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3088.84 .-
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring d at
�
�yyy
Z~Z
it
;
¢
0
completion. ry
to
1- LL
~
t7
Z
LL
a
!C
G
C
W 4.
W
r=
j m a
W
0 2O
y x
y
o
inW
y
0o
U
U
Z
W
az
W.
�"
IL
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
0
o
a
y_
o
Q
<
<
c CU
<
o
vi
C
vai
Very stiff, light brown SANDY CLAY (CL).
16
Stiff to medium dense, pinkish ten, SILTY CLAY TO
5
15
112
29
14
15
F26
1.8
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
caliche)
` N-13 I t
\� 10 N-10 15 LL
3.0
15
i
LOG OF
BORING NO. B-17
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION
PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 165+00
CLIENT:
BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE:
3/22/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3090.98
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
a�
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
x
' y
completion.
Y
LL
I'll.
F
~Uj
0y
�
O
LL
!� W
z
a
'a' y�
I
��
F
y
.y
0
m ils
O
z
W N
� 0
J
(�
O vyi
Z U.
rA
W
=
Q
0
i o
0
z
°°
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
y o
z a
�'
N
Very stiff, light brown SANDY CLAY (CL).
8
61
2.5
11
19
17
2
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
N 14
13
39
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
5
caliche)
N-19
13
33
10
10.5
15
1
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
CONE
No
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 10 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
1j
LOG OF BORING NO. B-18
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT C)ISlrF�AROE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 170+00 10'L
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/22192 SURFACE ELEV: 3095.88
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
F
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
=
_
completion.
f
UalS
~
N
1C
2
C) Q d
y p
y (f
g�g
S
j
H
N
?_
Q
H
m O
W
W H
E
J
Y
C)
=
y=
W t7
f~A
W
~
� z
�
v~i
v~i
�
�
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
C
Z H
2
le
�7
f0A
G-
O
J
V f~A
U.
6
10
45
Light brown clayey SAND (SC)
r'
t 5
18
101
27
17
10
1.2
2.3
Stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
"
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented i
�M\
5
caliche) 1
i
10
N-13
13
36
I
10.5—
t a
r
_ I
I
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-19
t
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 175+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/22/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3099.50
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
a�
�
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
z
LU
completion.
LL
L
mus
Uj
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
o
W
o¢
a
LL
g
�—,
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
ttt
17
107
26
17
9
0.0
0.0
calcareous nodules
3.0
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
5
18
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented _
caliche)
P-3.5
14
15
1331
10.0
10
M 15
ry
H
W
W
dal
REMARKS:
e
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN,
RECOVERY,
92-132 A- 11 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES.. INC,
LOG OF BORING NO. B-20
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 182+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3123/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3108.03 —
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
_
>
,
Q
completion.
LL
H
W
Z
F-
a
X
c
to
LL
u
a 3 0uz,
V
��
n>
m
j
W tJ�
V
tj
2
ui
¢
W
�
r
Zp
a i<
Cl
G 2
t~ii
v~i
7
LU
o
0
LL
6
OF STRATUM
c
a z
c
g
ff
LL
y
M.DESCRIPTION
3- Asphalt Paving with 7" of road base material o.i ;
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
11
116
28
16
12
46
calcareous nodules I
5
—f
5.1 j
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY I
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
N - 80
8
20
_
10
N-50
9
i
t0.b
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-21 —;
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 187+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3123192 SURFACE ELEV: 3110.12
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary• -
method.
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
z
IR
,
�
completion.
U.y�'
Uh
2
c
_W
y
LL
W
U
W
Jm a
V
}'
y
S
-•+
LC
tyl� H
w
CL
g
d~LL•..
C
G
rl��
Uj
a 2
-
0
W
a=<
a H `" _
t�A
c
Z
s
g
N
N
7
0�
0 H
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
o
z d
i
s
vw
U.
ua
2" Asphalt Paving with 4- road base material
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules J
12
113
29
17
12
50
9.8
2.6
5
5.0
Very stiff to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
NN.
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche) J
Nw36
10
N-40
11
38
10.5 1
15
J
REMARKS:
FTUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
CANE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN,
RECOVERY
, 92-132 A- 12 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INI':.
t
-
LOG OF
BORING
NO. B-22
,.
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 183+00
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE: 3/23/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3113.68
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
'R
completion.
F LL
LL 9
W
0
LL
�
F
G
O
W LL
4
ygy�1
1[
Q
LL
2
CO m
t,
it
H 6H
USH
y
J
N
O
2
>
y
W
N
"rL2
y _
o
C a
Q
W
<
¢
8
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
o
z� a
2
c
J
�—,
2- Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material e.5
Very CLAY
`
stiff, ten and brown SANDY (CL) with
calcareous nodules
10
119
29
15
14TO.0.0
4.0
5
10
N-21 112
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
caliche)
11.5
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-23
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 187+00 i
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH i
.•
DATE: 3123192 SURFACE ELEV: 3116.51
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
(`
,J
'�
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
s
Z
,
completion.
G
Z
QQ
W y
W
I}iL
C
LL
Z
d
U
y R
¢
o
y
G O
g
S
F
y
L O
S
�'
c
_
S Q
y
M
tp
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
y
C
2 r= CL
G
J
U y
LL
2' Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material -- 6.5-
11
115
27
16
11
45
0.0
0.0
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
3.0
5
C
10
15
TUBE
SAMPLE
' 92-132
15 112 1 i I I I
4.8 I
2.7 I I Very stiff to dense, pinkish ton, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
II III j SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
N-34 12 1 131
N-24
b
N
I W
AUGER
SAMPLE
SPLIT-
SPOON
ROCK
CORE
W , N I
REMARKS:
rN0 NO
ONE RECOVERY
'EN.
A- 13
10.5 -
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC,
LOG OF BORING NO. B-24
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION
PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 192+00
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE:
3/23/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3119.03
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY, DATA
_._
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary'.
method.
Vt
LU
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
z
W
z
completion.
Y
r
M
Z
H
7R
F
O
$
LLUj
0.W
V
~
~
N
W
Y
0.
H
J J 0.
m m O
W
7
iA Chi
W N
J
C7
H
C7
O
2
y=
W�
N
W
�
. -
J
IZ-
0
- a O 4
y =
~
o
0 Z
s
0
O
N
<
.
f~A
<
0
z
00.. W
c
<
�
-
.::
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
H
(ai = a
i
0 a
_5
ad
e.
i
u W
U.
c�
.-
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material /-1114
P 4.5 +
12
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL) 2.5
Very stiff to medium dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
19
103
2.2
3.3
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
5
calicha)
N-17
10
10.c j
I
l
LOG OF
BORING
NO B-25
PROJECT: `SE WATER RECLAMATION
PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: _STA 197 + 00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
-
DATE:
3/23/92
-
SURFACE ELEV: 3120.14
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S)• Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
U
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
ellcr
s
completion.
x
~
~
0
O
3
-j m
�
Q
N
O
aw
N
Z
.Q
HIL
O
_<
O
N
uZi V)
0 2
'j
G
H
f�
N
Z
S C7
a�
C
O
H
h
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
cio
2
u
_LL
QW,P-4.5+
2' Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material
2.0
9
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules
14
104
2.2
2.2
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
SAND, ICL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
r
P-4.5+
IS
101N-341
1
1
1_
_ 10.E
t5
j
j
0
H N
N
M
W
p
N
REMARKS:
TUBE
rs
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
-.
... PEN. ..
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 14
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
•.I>
LOG OF BORING ;NO. B-26
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT I)ISCAARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 202+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/23/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3120.94
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
aR
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boringdry at
m
=
W
Uj
completion.
t{�.r
y
3 Z
z
O
y,�
F
8
Wii
p
►-
O
a)
V
O
to
S
.0
=
C
C Z
I-
W N
O
-r
C
►-
V
2
N
t7
a 2
W
c
z
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ,
t
o
W
Q y_�
6
rn
o
z � o:
o
do
PA.
}
�.
•2* Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material �---e 5—
j1
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CU with
15
113
31
17
14
4.6
5.2
calcareous nodules
r
5
—
N-31
T
10.0
10
i5
LOG OF BORING NO. B-27
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 207+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
r^
DATE: 3/23/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3123.06
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING 'METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
o
m
=
—
,�
completion.
Z
H
7R
f3
rn
W H
N
LL
O uw
m m a
V
mi
O
Z H
t
H
Z
w�
a0
O
C7
'�
g
.e
=
W
2 =
O
�
<
ta
�
<
6 —
- DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
uIr)
u9
J
2' Asphalt Paving with 6' road base material 6.5
P-4.5+
13
30
16
14
{
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CU with
R
calcareous nodules 3.0
14
109
2.6
4.1
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
111
N
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous,. weakly cemented caliche)
r
11
�.
P-4.5+
10
N-42
14
10.5—
L.
�+
15
Fi
II��II
F'i
�`I
REMARKS:
F
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 15 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC,
LOG OF BORING NO. B-28
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 212+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/24/92 SURFACE ELEV:.3126.53.
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boringdry at
o
E
s
completion.
N
Z
Q
H
1L
H
O
yp
8
LL
w Y
a
W
U
CL SO O W
f.1
Y
H O
H
S
y
N
y
L
Q
cc
H
J J a
m M O
W
7
IA �
W y
J
J
U
H
(.1
O
Z
y=
N
t~-r1
2
of
N
7
cc
w
S
:
W
W
a rn =
o
c
y
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2' Asphalt Paving with 6' road base material
fP-.5+
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
.5+
14
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
\-N
I
I
I
I I
I
I
9.0
10
N-31
6
10
Dense, reddish brown SILTY SAND (SM)
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-29
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 217+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH i
DATE: 3/24/92 SURFACE ELEV:-3128.84
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
VZ
W
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
c
m
z
W
completion.
y
H
~VZ
C1
N
u.
�..
p
Z
o cc
tj
Q
H
Hv
F:
�_
d
> Y
9if
w
a
z
�
W C
U
Z
¢ t7
Q
LL
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM L
J
a
H =
<
o
z
<
c—
vQi
G
Z o
G
i
U rn
u
t�
i
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material i
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
\
_
12
111
29
18
11
44
8.0
3.3
calcareous nodules 3.0
\
P=4.5+
13
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
P = 4.0
16
7..
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL) 9 C
10
P=4.0
13
Hard, reddish brown SILTY SAND (SMl 10.0
J
15
u
Ir=1
W
Pi
i-'I
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
r.
_
92.132 A- 16 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INt..
L
LOG OF
BORING NO. B-30
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 222+00
1
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE: 3/24/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3130.09
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
F
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boringdry at
Y
m
LL
Z
W
sz
�
completion.
It
ai
y Vl
yj S~
H
0
LL
i
W
Uj
y
8
W Y
fYYf�77
a
Y
G
LL
7 2
m m a
C�
Y
F
H v
!�I
p
>'
y�
H
s
Li
�
y
¢
[[[
.0
a
i S
<
p
<
<
C ¢
<
m
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
vOi
O
Z F a
O
lir
il:
v H
LL
V a
2' Asphalt Paving with 4' road base materiel ---e.s
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with �—
L
P - 4.5 +
16
calcareous nodules 1
P=4.5+
17
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche) -
12
(
L
10
N=31
10.5-
15
LOG OF
BORING
NO. B-31
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE
LOCATION: STA 227+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: .3/24/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3130.99
j
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
•j
W12"
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
$
z
,completion.
y
LLI
Uj
1
3 i
y1
FLL
'j
F
S
>y
Q
Q
¢
y
j
=
to
Lai
Z
0
o
�
i
o �
�
�
N
�
�
� wDESCRIPTION
OF STRATUM
z � a
Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material --t5-
P-4.0
12
23 13
14 112
5
10
P - 4.25
13
t.
15
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
CONE
SAMPLE
92-132
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
Very stiff, light brown SANDY CLAY (CL).
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
5.0 3.0 layers
N
NO
RECOVERr
A- 17
2.0
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche) 10.0
REMARKS:
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-32
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 232 + 00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/24/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3130.01
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
completion.
U.
Ujai i
r
aR
c
H
LL
z
w
0 O
V
>"
SH
z
g
> Y
q
a
•—
O
rL
F
y J 0.
mCoG
w
4=
y
Z y
S�
b
J
J
H
U
O
Z
y=
W~
r~n
yA
d
o
o.
v' =
y
s
g
0 y
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM i
vo)
o
z a
i
c a
_
2' Asphalt Paving with 4- road base material
\
8
16
14
2
34
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY ICU with
10
calcareous nodules 3.S
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
�\
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
15 1 113
10
6.7 13.4
10.0
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-33
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 237 + 00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/24/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3130.26 r
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
m
completion.
U.
x
H
8
LL
Z
Y
d W
i
V
H?
-:
N
t7
O
2
G
u+
7
N i)
W H
?
J
ri
O
Z
y=
S
to
W
1l:
-�
a
2
h <
fn
G z
Z
G
H
N
H
rn
N
O¢
ayz
d
U.
U.
Z�
o
c
i
o S
ir
w
1
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
r°n
z a
2' Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material
11
10
19
43
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
I
calcareous nodules 3,5
22
3.8
13.0
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
�.: P-4.5+ 18
10
; I —
15
REMARKS:
10.0 1
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
LOG OF BORING'NO. B-34 i
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANTr I$CHAR E bIEEL1NE LOCATION: STA 242+00
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE: 3/25/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3130.62
DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary 1
FIELD
method.
tR
�
W
U
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
y�
completion.
+
iA
y
Q
LL
W
Q
Qy
O
W N
¢
m
C
y
y
t�
g
►— m
Q
Z VI
J
12
(�
Z
W
W
Z
`[
Ila~
~
Q
Q
?LL
¢
Z
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
N
Q
Q 2 F d
�'
Q
-j
e
U W
L6L
U R
1�
2-• Asphalt Paving with 4- road base material
`
P-3.25
10
29
116
13
74
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with !
calcareous nodules 3.5
i
15
Very stiff, reddish tan SILTY CLAY (CL). I
5
—{
14
115
10.8
5.7
r
k
10.0 1
I
10
15
r
LOG OF BORING
NO. B-35 II
i
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE
PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 247+00
CLIENT:
BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE: 3/25/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3131.85
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
UJI¢
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
c
m
aR
W
,
completion.
>
M
ii H
to F
S
t=
yt
aR
H
w
Q
y
LL
W V)
cc
I^
V
O} j
U
IZ 7
t
?NY
H
Q
4
�' Q
u� y
i�
z
�¢yY �7
W
0
a
�' =
o
<
<
L
p
<
y—y
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
tOA
C
J
e.
il-
U to
1i
U 6.
2- Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material--f3-5-
P-4.5+
14
T—
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) withI 2 5
--
calcareous nodules %i
5
\t
r
1
.�.
10
is
TUBE
SAMPLE
92-132
20 104 25 16 9 3.1 3.6
bN
I N
b
t-N I
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
NO
SPOON
CORE
CONSAMPLE
I PEN.
I RECOVERY
A- 19
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
REMARKS:
10.0
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-36
PROJECT:. SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 252+00
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE:
3125192
SURFACE ELEV: 3133.01
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boringdry at
y
o
m
rr
z
>
W
completion.
N
N ~
C
LL
F
8
Y
Q
]L
3 W
(�
Y
H O
N
W
>
Q
CL0
U.
go m O
¢
Z in
~
.
d
a
O Z
x
F
O
O
>
N
N
O
s
a- W
O
U.
qyq
> >
c e
o
<
<
i
=
v
LL
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
v0i
c
ran
vi
2" Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
\
12
31
16
15
51
calcareous nodules 3.5
IS
103
3.3
2.3
Very stiff to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO '—
5
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
caliche)
N-64
_
10
P-3.5
12
1
1
1 1_
10.,
15
LOG OF
BORING
NO. B-37
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE
LOCATION: STA 257+00
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE:
3125192
SURFACE ELEV: 3134.78
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method. i
„l
W
rt
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
$
z
completion.
YN
N
N
I—
2
aR
F
W
pN
W
VJ
x
3 0 IZu
v
J~
y
O
cj
W X
F
a
U.
m 0
a
M
W
J
V
V
cj
Z
2
W
-
c
W
4
a rn =
N
c¢
yZ,�
G z
N
a
y
<?
7
C9
a w
o f
�
Q
LL
o
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
v,
U.
y
C) d
_
-\\2'L Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material j
\
12
29
15
14
I
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules 3..
\\P-4.5+
19
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
16
108
84
5.9
2.6
10.0
\\�
10
15
Ir1
i�l
M
H
k j
REMARKS:
J
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 20 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INL.
LOG OF BORING. NO. B-38
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT IPie ll{41= LOCATION: STA 262+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/25/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3136.08
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(SI: Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
~aq
�
completion.
>
I.-U.5
N
z
H
2R
~
'zy
O
6.
U+
Y
S 3 z
u
�"
>�
a
/�
S
U
W
Y a
m m
W
h V
J
F
Ci
W
O
?
W y
z
W
<
o
ov
OF STRATUM
y
o
cn z 6
U.DESCRIPTION
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material --9 5
P-4.5
10
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules 3.5
5
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
rXx
11
35
20
15
30
_
10
P-4.5+
2
1
1
1
1 15.0
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-39
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 287+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 312 519 2 SURFACE ELEV: 3137.71
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
aR
�
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
K
aR
completion.
f
Y
U.z
�
z
IR
0
8y6.
uS
Y
Z
CL
Cl
Z
N
Y
0
H
C1
H
H
N
.E
i
a
=
o
�o
U.
0
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
N
Uj
z � d
OgU.
2' Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material 0.5
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
P-4.5+
12
21111,11121
P=4.5+
3.5
17
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
P-4.5+
15
10
21
101
4.6
3.5
P-4.5
18
1
15.0
15
FI
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN
RECOVERY
I ' 92-132 A- 21 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-40
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
_CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH - LOCATION: STA 272+00
DATE: 3/26/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3138.47
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
i
W
Uj
U.$
�'
z
c
z
w
completion.
Ul
X
d
O
y+
$
N
,�
y
W Y
^�
c
d
O
Q
0
F.- m CO
U
s
F
h V
O
y
rn
Z
F=-
C
d= Q
,
W Cn
J
C
(�
N
()
yW
Z
W Vi
a: W
W
4
Q
Q
Q:
_
c°�
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material L—
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
P-4.5+
12
32
15
17
4.0
P-4.5+
12
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
10 — 14 102
15 N6 =
5012.5"
20
F- 25
35
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
6.6 2.5
40
H
W
H
REMARKS:
TUBE
SAMPLE
AUGER
SAMPLE
SPLIT-
SPOON
ROCK
CORE
THD
CONE
PEN
NO
RECOVERY
92-13-2
A- 22
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN.
r _ y
` LOG OF BORING NO..:8-41
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 277+00
DATE: 3/26/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3136.63
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Baring advanced using air rotary
method.
°
~
Ld >
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
Uj
_
c
y
U-
completion.
Uf
H:
Q
W y
a
V
0
H
> ° W
J d
V
W
~ m
N
b
J
f}'-
C1
N S
W
N
D:
-a
S
O 2
H
W N
p G
J
D
(,
►-
[f
1-
z
N
d z
W
s
U.
W
So
<
v
Ztt°?
i'
L)
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2' Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material ----0 $—
NI\
9
22
13
9-'
50
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
I
4.5
5
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
xxSAND,
(CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
15
70Xx
_
10
16
74
15
f
\�.
20
N 32
20.5 —f
i
i
25
I
30
35
I
i
40
H
N
M
W
N
REMARKS:
J
M
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THD CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 23 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
LOG OF BORING NO. B-42 -
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 282+00
DATE: 3/26/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3139.43
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
O
>
NCx
completion.
S
o
g�Uj
x
a
LA.m
w
-i -J a
m
W
to
5
6
>a
s
e6
=
Q
H G Z
H
Q Q
G
H
H
N
a;
F-
Q.
2
a
V)
V)
7
t
Q
Q
LL
,
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
uQi
o
uai
G i
7
8'
ii�
i
c� of
cQi a
2" Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material
_
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
12
113
33
16
17
8.9
4.6
4.0 I
5
Very stiff, reddish tan SILTY CLAY (CU.
N-27
14
10
N-21
22
15
i
\
I
N - 66
20
20
20.'.
25
,
�
I
30
35
40
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT.
ROCK
THO
CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN,
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 24 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN
r
` LOG OF,BORtNG NO. B-43
1 PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 287 + 00 `
6 DATE: 3/26/92 SURFACE ELEV:.3140.54
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
as �
m
~ ~ "
z
x
e
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
"'
Uj
completion.
0 0
0-m d
H
-
66
i
an
O
uai 4
y
2 H
LU Cl
z
Q
"'
y
N
Z
N:e
W
W
$
:?
o
z
i
c e
e
�
2
u H
U.
U
v°,
vai n
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
\
2' Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material
10
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY ICL)
5 19 103 36 19 117 4.9 2.4
xN
N-81 7
N 10 -
r
15 N-50
�a 20 N-5011- 11
25
r
30
G,
r
P : 35
r
�40
TUBE AUGER SPLIT.
j SAMPLE 1 SAMPLE SPOON
I 92-132
N
ROCK
CORE
26
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous,, weakly cemented caliche)
W
REMARKS:
THO
NO
'ONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
A- 25
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-44
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 262 + 00
DATE: 3126/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3143.16
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary~
method.
°
~
'�
>
¢
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
N
F
z
o
y
LL
completion.
fLL�
V?
F
$
> x
q¢
y
U
p
►-
Q W
m
h
Ny
z
Q
S
P= 0 Z
p O
O
H
�=
N
Z
J
d '�
ooO
to �' _
O
¢ =p
C)
Q
Q
2
F
Q
O v1
r°n
y
LL
a
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material --o—
P�4.5+
12
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
4.0
S
16
112
30
15
15
5.0
2.6
Very stiff to very dense,
y pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
caliche)
N-27
12
36
10
N-42
20
15
20
N s 50/4"
14
20.0
25
30
35
40
N
W
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
NO
SAMPLE
I SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 26
i
i
L
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
7
r
k
I'
J
C N ~ z 1~L
N O
Cy 0 0 W cOi i
t a = o Z O_ r
4 a
U) o rQA 2
\ P=4.5+ 12
18 106 34 18
r
10 N-34 10
I
15 N-39 6
I
r
20 N-60 16
k
r
l N-68 8
�+ 25
�I
30
r
35
i
I
4
40
TUBE AUGER SPLIT- ROCK
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE
( 92-132
4
LOG,OF BORING NO. , B-45
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/26/92
FIELD DATA. i LABORATORY DATA DRILLING ME
SHEET 1 of 1
LOCATION: STA 287+00
SURFACE ELEV: 3147.23
THOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
IR
NI
W
W
¢
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
c
g
;g
completion.
N
1WC
Z
W C7
S
N
LE
¢
U.
Z
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
u H
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
16
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
25.5 —
W H REMARKS:
THO NO
CONE RECOVERY
PEN. _
A- 27 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES_ wr_
` LOG OF BORING NO. B-46
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 302+00
DATE: 3/27/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3151.95
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD{S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
$
z
'�
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
F
z
aR
c
W
completion.
z
v
� j
~
g
2 Y
a
OC
Q
d
m
W
H U
rHrll
?C
Q
W
-�
rrll
S
N
S
y
Z
z
W C7
W
W
Z
a
c
°� 2<
h=
LAz
i
o
Q
cc
J
u R
v°�
CL
U 0
UU..
DESCRIPTION,OF STRATUM
2" Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
3.0
Very stiff to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
N - 20
14
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented
5
caliche)
I
10
N=50
12.0^
X
X
White to pinkish white, carbonate cemented sandstone
Y
with traces of bioturbation i
• X
x
15
X
x
Y
13
106
as
55.9
0.0
x .
X
x
20
EC-77%
X
x
ROD=0%
I
x
Y
x
25
25.0
30
35
40
M
W
N
REMARKS:
NO
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THD
SAMPLE I
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
,BEN.
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 28 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF.BORING NO. B-47
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/28/92
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
( method.
SHEET 1 of 1
LOCATION: STA 307+00
SURFACE ELEV: 3155.99
10Z
>
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Baring dry at
{
_
aR
c
H
LL
i
completion.
t
Y
V
r►
v�
>
d
u
►=
-j C Wa
m m
W
H
L
-+
C
y=
H
2
,0
o
O
a~ _
i � s
►-
�'
uzi H
O
>
C
►-
S2
�..
a
Z
to
W (�
1 Z
W
U.
"
0a
z a;
o a
�'
r`n
U.
a
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2" Asphah Paving with 4' road base material
N-19
4
5
r
N-50/5'
8
10
N=50
17
15
X
x
X
N=50
10
x
x
20
'x
x
x.
25
x
k
X
16
93
x
x
ECC74%
X
30
ROD —O%
x .
w
x .K
i
35
1,
40
N
�1
TUBE
AUGER
SPUT-
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOOK
92-132
N
ROCK
CORE
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
6.0
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
17.0
82.2 1 0.0 1 1
White to pinkish white, carbonate cemented sandstone
with traces of bioturbation
31.5
Yellowish red to reddish brown, carbonate cemented
sandstone with traces of bioturbation
Wj
N
REMARKS:
No
TMp
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
A- 29 SOUTMWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN(
`
LOG OF BORING NO. B-48
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
LOCATION: STA 312+00 '—
DATE: 3/28/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3180.36
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary --
method.
°
'`
'�
>
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
�; U.
Uj
A
W
a
completion.
Y
Z
C
> LL
~
Q�
Xi
j
C
a
m m
U
►
f
Y
N
r
G
4� y
5?
<
Y
a
=
z
o
<
o
e
g
zc
v
v `a£'
uci
v~i
66
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material --
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL) 2.t
10__M N-75 114
15 -M N-97 112
%
N - 50/5"
9
%
%
20
%
%
. X
N-50/5"
14
%
25
X
Y
%
N-91
8
y
30
%
%
R
v
35
18
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
23
White to pinkish white, carbonate cemented sandstone
with traces of bioturbation
42
5.0 17
0
WI -r
M
I I I
N
I I
W
I I
H
I I
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THD
NO
CONE
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN_
RECOVERY
92.132
-A- 30
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN
LOG OF, BORING NO. B-49
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGEPIPELINESHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK& VEATCH LOCATION: STA 317+00
DATE: 3/28/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3164.37
r
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
°
~
>
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
w w
=
c
w
completion.
Uj
�'
o o a+
= H
N
t~J1
•s
a C a
~
Uj
c z
QO
c
v�
CL_
(�
CL
�
i
o�
�
�
Uj
0
a
z r= a
3'
�'
u y
�
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2' Asphalt Paving with 4' road base material
N 25
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with j
t
t
calcareous nodules !
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
N-23
9
47
SAND, (CL-SC) Icaccareous, weakly cemented caliche) _
N-61
-
N-81
11
10
10
-
}
%
13.0
x
White to pinkish white, carbonate cemented sandstone
tt
X .
x
15
N-50/6'
with traces of bicturbation -
x
r
N - 50/6-
10
40
20
-
ti
X•
'x
z.
X .x
25
N - 50/3'
r-r
x
x
r"'
x-
X x
30
N - 50/4'
13
46
x
j
I
x
x .
x
x
35
N-50/3-
35.0
,I.
j
_ •
40
N
W
rl
REMARKS:
i
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THD CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
pEN.
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 31 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
` LOG OF BORING NO. B•50 --
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 322+00 ~
DATE: 3/28/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3161.51
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
aq
o
La
>
W
w
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
y
Z
O
N
2
0
completion.
Y
a 3 z
v
�"
''
S
LL
>Y
Uj
a
p
GJ OJ a
m Co
w
to
O
y=
VJ
Z
Q
0
N
z N
!
p
V
t~�
�.1
=
w C7
W
E
?
•—
y
CL
a
fA H i
y= d
ii
S
y
LL
Z
_
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road base material --9-�- -
N-21
Very stiff, tan and brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with
calcareous nodules 3.0
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
5
N - 51
9
37
15
12
29
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
N-56
10 N 61
i
15 N-51 20 68
I
\� 20 N - 77 17 44
I
25 N 50/3" 10 68
\�\\\ T : J
.N 30 100/4.5'
�I
35-100/6" I I I I 1 35.0
40
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT.
ROCK
THO
NO
CONE
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132
A. 32
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
f
(
�. LOG OF BORING NO. B-51
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE
C" CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
t
DATE: 3/28/92
SHEET 1 of 1
LOCATION: STA 327+00
SURFACE ELEV: 3156.87
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
g
W
x
W
aR
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
>
�o'
v,
completion.
Z
U
F
H�
M
LZ
8
m
Y
`...FE
LL
W
Jm °'
¢
Z y
~
z
yy
Gy
w°
C
G
YQ C2
z
i
S
H
vs
h
a
v, Z
c
�'
2
u
c°i
DESCRIPTIONDESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
_
2" Asphalt Paving with 4" road bass material _—
Very stiff, reddish brown CLAY (CH)
20 103 63 19 44 2.1 5.3
5
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
29 81 49 26 23 2.1 2.0 layers
N - 50 Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
10 SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
I
N = 29
21
79
40
39
15
r
6
k
T - 100/5"
20
e
s .
r
T
25
100/4.5"
r'
P
l:
10015"
P'
30
i
w
— 100/6"
35
r
i
40
H
REMARKS:
d
TUBE
AUGER
SPLtT-
ROCK
TMO
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
PEN-
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 33
G
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
- LOG OF BORING NO. B-52 --
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK& VEATCH LOCATION: STA' 332+00
DATE: 3/27/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3152.30
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
aR
~
>
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at "
N
LL LL y
z
c
y
completion.
y2
p
0
61.
It
fn
0
a Z
$
C
o
N S
a z
p
Q �,
° `-
a
° `a
a
f
o CL
!
V to
LL
U a.
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
2.0
Very stiff to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO
CLAYEY SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented l
5
N - 19
caliche)
N-25
17
31
10 N-33
15 _M N-35 120
20 - T
50/4.5"
X 25
X
X .
X
X ..z EC-57%
RQD-O%
X 30
X
X .
x
X
X
X 35 T- 14 114
100/1.75"
r--i
25.0
'White to pinkish white carbonate cemented SANDSTONE --
with traces of bicturbation
J
I
31.1 0.0 35.0
40
�j
N
17j
W
REMARKS:
TUBE
NO
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THD
CONE
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132 A- 34 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN(
<f
r
- LOG OF BORING NO. B-53
r
t
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH LOCATION: STA 337+00
DATE: 3/27192 SURFACE ELEV: 3147.90
i`
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
�
aR
$
X
Uj
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
H
i
�
c
Q
completion.
z
o
F
�"
�
i�
W h
>
G
�6
S
I.:O Z�
iaP� H=
1�-
y
p C
Q
►Q-
to
Zp�
H
CL
c
a i
c S
H
J
V
L6
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
�+
Brown CLAYEY SAND ISC)
2.0
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, CLAY (CH) (calcareous,
weakly cemented caliche)
r.
5
N - 39
14
71
38
33
28
N-48
24
73
44
29
_
9.0
x
X
N - 55
17
58
White to pinkish white carbonate cemented SANDSTONE.
b
10
x .
with traces of bioturbation
r
X
.X
l
X ,
X
X
F
.x
x.
X
ZO
N-
20.0
5013.5"
`
25
-
r~
PM
30
r
w
35
r
40
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLrr-
ROCK
TWO CONE
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
r
+ 1. 92-132 A- 35 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-54 .-
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
LOCATION: STA 342+00
DATE: 3127192
SURFACE ELEV: 3144.60
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary —
method.
~
WUj>
s
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Baring dry at _
y
U.
y LL
z
p
y
completion.
Vp
0.V
3 o W
-j
> U.
o
H
~
8
>
d
2
a
m OZ
W
h u
W W
i
J
J
(.�
p
z
N
y
2
ad
=
H O Q
2Lu
0
W
Q N ~=
O
s O
2
f
O
L
H
c
y z ILa
s
J
a
ii'
u
LL
a
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
111
1411Very
stiff. reddish brown SANDY CLAY (C1I —.
5X
N=16
N-23
11
73
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CU with caliche
layers
9.0
10
N - 79
11
59
Hard to very dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY _
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche)
N 75
i
15
20
N - 50
12
1
1
1
1
1
1 20.0
I
i
25
30
J
35
40
H
W
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT.
ROCK
THO
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132
A- 36
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN(
LOG OF BORING NO. B-55
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE
SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
LOCATION: STA 346+00
DATE:
3/27/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3142.20
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
J
41
>
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
w+t
F
a�
c
w
ti
completion.
Y
} Z
0.W
F
r
p
8
> Y
W
g
0.
N
N
s o$
> 7
H
N
y�jLL
2
°w
H i
a
�
Q
N
� 5
B
�
U12
c
1
0
.2
2
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
P - 4.5
15
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
t
`
3.0
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
5
layers
\
20
105
5.6
2.4
-
r
0
\
N o 55
12
35
10
-
t
\
N-24
17
41
39
2
1.
15
20
N
20.0
t
50/4.5"
r
i.
25
_
f..,
�r
30
t
35
r
r
40
0
N
W
N
N
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
THO
COI E
NO
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN.
RECOVERY
i
92-132
A- 37
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, INC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-56
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 352+00
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
• 127/92 1
DATE. 3 SURFACE ELEV. 3 40.80
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
sR
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
Co
=
W
s
completion.
F W.
W
N
N
; _
Z
u.
O
; Y
Q
.HS�
2
.tl
L.:
x
UjO
G 2
H
W G.
O
J
(.L
S2
Z
N
W U
y
G
L
LL
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
x
c
s
<
<
Uj
c
<
—
v0i
c
vai Z i a
i
O a
E!
1S'
2
U rn
LL
U
P2.5
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
15
P-4.5+
14
30
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY _
5
14
113
5.8
4.5
SAND, ICL-SC) (calcareous, weekly cemented caliche)
Ps4.5+
17
10
N-16
t0.t
LOG OF BORING NO. B-57 _
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 356+70
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/27/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3140.20 --.
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
W
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
>
s
completion.
~
c
w
W
K
W
Y
U
3 3p 2
it
g
g
�_
Xr
>
y=
�¢
N
a
ie
Laip
W
N
uz7 m
U
52
C
=
Uj C~7
e
0
x
a zd
x
o
o O
� �
O
�
c'
�
►-
Sy
w
�
a z'
� �
�
o —
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
0
G
Z 0;; a.
2G�
J
6
'2
U 0
U.
U
Brown CLAYEY SAND (SC)
21
5 P-4.5+ 111631
114
10 _M Ne24
' 15
TUBE
AUGER
SPLIT-
ROCK
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
layers
17.6 1 1.9
P
REMARKS:
NO
THO
CONE
PEN.
RECOVERY
92-132
A-38
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN7
i
-
LOG OF BORING NO. B-58
PROJECT: SE WATER
RECLAMATION PLANT
DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 362+00
CLIENT: BLACK &
VEATCH
DATE: 3/29/92
SURFACE ELEV: 3140.90
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHODIS): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
z
c
completion.
IR
CY7
~
W
a.S
v
~ =
Z H
~
!
J
U
Y
►'
e
O
a
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
P • 4.5 +
15I
IVery
stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
�
3.0
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY ICLI with caliche
5
16
110
35
19
17
4.8
5.3
layers
��
18
60
8.0
Hard to dense, pinkish tan, SILTY CLAY TO CLAYEY
10
N-35
SAND, (CL-SC) (calcareous, weakly cemented caliche) 10.5-
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-59
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 366+75
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/27/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3147.20
FIELD DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOO(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Boring dry at
X
completion.
Y
N
~
�
Z
�
i
O
LL
W H
g
Vi
i
V
2 Y
N
S
G
Y
H
C C
Z
y
W C7
=
0
it
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
c
W
a _
N
O
2 IF 6
J
�
fl rA
4.
V
Brown CLAYEY SAND (SC)
\
2.0
P-4.5
14
29
15
14
51
Very, stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
5
15
131
7.0
5.7
10
P-3.75
18
101
15
hi
�{
kj
REMARKS:
TUBE
AUGER
spur.
ROCK
No
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
P
PENNE
RECOVERY
92-132 A138- SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IA
A-39
- LOG OF BORING NO. B-60
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 371 + 70
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/27/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3141.10
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY
DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Growndwater seepage^
mJ°
i
W
encountered at 1.0'. Boring dry at completion.
}
z
aR
~
o
w
8
�
W
V
H µ
>"
C
G
Q
m
¢
Z N
C
J
G
0
V
=
h
W
¢ 2
W
C
a
CL
CL
p
c
p
<
<
`��'
<
—
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
V)
c
(a z d
i
c a
Vary stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
P-3.75
15
31
15
16
3.G
P-4.5+
13
Very stiff, reddish ten SILTY CLAY (CL). 4.5
5
Very stiff, reddish ten SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
layers
1S
104
2.4
3.1
\
P=4.5+
12
1OX
10
15
LOG OF BORING NO. B-61
PROJECT: SE WATER RECLAMATION PLANT DISCHARGE PIPELINE LOCATION: STA 373+00 20'LT.
CLIENT: BLACK & VEATCH
DATE: 3/27/92 SURFACE ELEV: 3141.50
FIELD
DATA
LABORATORY DATA
DRILLING METHOD(S): Boring advanced using air rotary
method.
W
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Baring dry at
?
completion.
0
2
u
St,
�
a
pY
SF
d = `
N 0-=
'�
0-N
<
(
W
o
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
c
0
W
o
o
—
`�
o
z ►- a
i
o
a�
i
c�
c�
Very stiff, reddish brown SANDY CLAY (CL)
\
15
113
6.7
4.7
3.0
Very stiff, reddish tan SILTY CLAY (CL). 4.0
5
15
Very stiff, reddish tan SANDY CLAY (CL) with caliche
layers
N - 24
12
66
`
10
N-28
10.!
15
N
k,{
jZj
r{
kj
REMARKS:
y
TUBE
AUGER
SPLrr•
ROCK
THO
CONE
No
SAMPLE
SAMPLE
SPOON
CORE
PEN,
RECOVERY
92-132 Ae- 39 SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES, IN —
A-40
100
90
s 80
rn
•°' 70
3
60
rn
•� 50
N
a° 40
30
ri 20
10
0
100
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
10 1 0.1 0.01
Grain Size in Millimeters
0
10
20 t
rn
30
40
v
a�
50 .�
0
Gl
60
70
a�
80 a_
90
100
0.001
GRAVEL
I SAND
SILT or CLAY
Coarse
I Fine I
I Coarse
Medium
Fine
SYMBOL BORING DEPTH SOIL DESCRIPTION
!!�!! B-3 24-25' Reddish brown SILTY SAND GSM
CIA B-4 9-10' Brown SILTY SAND. with grovel ISN
•A^^^ B-15 1-2' Reddish brown CLAYEY SANG
SwL 92-132
"J
fi
N
" IIY1�■ilia{■�Yllll�llll��■IYi1l�\■I■SIIIN111�■■�11111■■■�
'
• , I111�■l\■�I111�■■■�1111�■�■�1111�■■■�I111�■■■�
f 111�■���1111�■■■�I111�■■►7�IIIle■■■�Iill�■■■�
'
illy■■1■i
''
71111�■■■�Itll�■■��1111�■■■�I111�■■■�
'
1111�■■■�:111�■■■�1111�■■■
�Ililo■■■�illi�■■■�
-
'
1111�■■■�il��i■■■�flll�■■■a71111�■■■�11111■■■�
'
' I111�■■■�1111��\■�1111�■■■�tlli�■■■�1111�■■■�
'
.
.' 1111�■■■�1111�■��..�Itllt■■■�i�'!e�■■■�ilil�■■■�
,
'
.
II11�■■■�filly■■■�Iliii��1■�ilil�■■■�I111�■■■�
.
'
I111�■■■�1111�■■■�I111�■■\Mill,■■■�1111�■■■�
'
,
,
ilil�■■■�flii�■■■�I111�■■■iii!1111�■■■�I111�■■■�
•
flll�■■■�illl�■■■�Iill�■■■III■1�■■■�III1�■■■�
•
'
''
illi�■■■OII111■■■�l111�■■■�I111�■■■�III11�■■■�
'
'
'
1111�■■■�1111�■■■�1111�■■■�I111�■■■�I111�■■■�
1111�■■■�1111�■■■�f
111�■■■�1111�■■■�1111�■■■�
1111�■■■�1111�■■■�11111■■■�III1�■■■�I111�■■■�
'
.
''
1111�■■■�IIIIO■■■�1111�■■■�III1�■■■�IIII�■■■�
1111�■■■�1111�■■■�Illle■■■�III1�■■■�I111�■■■�
'
•'
1111�■■■�1111�■■■�1111�■■■�II11�■■■�1111�■■■�
I111�■■■�illl�■■■�I111�■■■�1111�■■■�illl�■■■�
, ,
GRAVEL
SAND
SILT or CLAY
Coarse
Fine
Coarse
Medium
Fine
100
90
80
rD 70
60
rn
•N 50
N
a° 40
n 30
V
L
a. 20
10
0
100
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
10 1 0.1 0.01
Grain Size in Millimeters
0
10
20 s
30
40
v
w
50 .�
v
N
60 a
70 a
U
80 o-
90
100
0.001
GRAVEL
SAND
SILT or CLAY
Coarse
Flne
Coarse
Medium
Fine
SYMBOL BORING DEPTH SOIL DESCRIPTION
01"I" B-52 7-8' Reddish Brown SILTY SAND (SM) with Caliche
l•111 vtB-54 9-10' Reddish Brown SANDY CLAY (CL) with Caliche
SwL 92 —132
SOWL SOL"HWESTERN 'LABORATORIES
Materials, enrironmaW and geotechnical engineering, nondestructim autallargica! and analytical services
2575 LONE STAR DRIVE * P.O. BOX 224227, OALLAS,TEXAS 75222 * 214/631-2700
Client GEOTECN
Went No. 92_132
2575 LONE STAR DR.
Report No. 02-05-261
DALLAS, TX 75212
Report Date 08/10/92 14:56
Attn: TIN ABRAMS
Project 92-132/DISCNARGE PIPELINE
Date Sampled
Sampled By UNKNOWN
Semple Type SOIL
Transported by NICK MAGEE
P.O. # PAL10224
Date Received 5 9 92
Lob No.
}ample Identification
02-05-261-01
TB-1/9-10
D2-05-261-02
TB-5/9-10
D2-05-261-03
T8-10/7.8
D2-05-261-04
TB-16/7.8
02-05-261-05
TB-21/7-8
D2.05.261-06
TB-25/9-10
D2-05-261-07
TB-30/9-10
D2-05-261-08
TB-35/7-8
D2-05-261-09
TB-40/7-8
D2.05.261-10
TB-45/7.8
D2-05-261-11
TB-50/7-8
D2-05-261-12
TS-56/9-10
02-05.261-13
TB-61/9.10
SOUTHWESTERN LABORATORIES
R*914ed By
W ILiam J se, Supervisor, EAS
A-44
-4
Order 8 02-05-261
Pape 2
08/10/92 14:56
TEST RESULTS BY SAMPLE
Client: GEMCN
Sample: 01A TB-1/9-10
Collected:
Detection Date
Test Name
Method
Resutt
Units
Limit Started
Anatyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
48
MAW
06/17/92
Nu
Soil/Solid preperation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Coot
NW
Specific Conductance
01125-82 B
235
UKHOS/CN
06/17/92
Nu
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
113
MG/KG
06/17/92
NY
PH
EPA 9045
9.1
pH Units
06/17/92
NY
Sample: 02A TB-5/9-10
Collected:
Detection Date
Test ame
Method
Resutt
Units
Limit Started
Anslrst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
15
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
Soil/Solid preperation
filtration
06/17/92
Date Caw
NY
Specific Conductance
D1125-82 B
125
UMHOS/CN
06/17/92
NY
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
15
NG/KG
06/17/92
NV
PH
EPA 9045
9.2
pH Units
06/17/92
Nu
Sample: 03A TB-10/7-8
Collected:
Detection Date
Test NNW
Method
Resutt
Units
Limit Started
Anatyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
10
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Cow
NY
Specific Conductance
01125-82 B
110
UMHOS/CN
06/17/92
NY
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
16
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
PH
EPA 9045
9.3
pH Units
06/17/92
NY
Sample: 04A . TB-16/7-8
Collected:
etecti Date
Test ame
Method
Resutt
Units
Limit Started
Anstyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
25
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Caw
NY
Specific Conductance
D1125.82 B
212
UlHOS/CN
06/17/92
NY
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
12
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
PH
EPA 9045
9.0
pH units
06/17/92
MY
A-45
A_I /.
Order / 02-05-261 Page 3
08/10/92 14:56 TEST RESULTS BY SAMPLE
Client: GEOTECH
Saapte: OSA TB-21/7-8 ' Collected:
Detectio Date
Test Name _
Meth
Resutt
Units
Lj!jjj Started
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
5
MG/KG
06/17/92
Nu
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Cam
Nu
Specific Conductance
01125.82 8
150
UMHOS/CM
06/17/92
Nv
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
62
NG/KG
06/17/92
IN
PH
EPA 9045
9.3
pH Units
06/17/92
Nu
Saaple: 06A TB-25/9-10 Collected:
Detection Date
-
Test Name
Method
esult
Units
Limit Started
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
130
MG/KG
06/17/92
NY
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Caw
NY
Specific Conductance
01125-82 8
245
UMNOS/CM
06/17/92
w
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
97
MG/KG
06/17/92
MY
PH
EPA 9045
9.2
pH Units
06/17/92
MY
Saapte: 07A TB-30/9-10 Collected:
Detection Date
Test Name
Method
Resutt
Units
Started
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
20
NG/KG
06/17/92
w
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Can
NV
Specific Conductance
01125-92 8
200
UMNOS/CH
06/17/92
w
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
107
KG/KG
06/17/92
My
PH
EPA 9045
9.1
pH Units
06/17/92
MY
Saapte: OBA TB-35/7-8
Cottected:
Detection Date
Test Nam
Method
Resutt
Units
Limit Started
Anstyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
55
NG/KG
06/17/92
w
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Cow
w
Specific Conductance
D1125.82 B
265
UMHOS/CN
06/17/92
w
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
54
KG/KG
06/17/92
w
PH
EPA N45
9.2
pH Units
06/17/92
w
!r-'45
A-h6
Order ! 02-05461
page 4
08/10/92 14:56
TEST RESULTS
BY SAMPLE
Client: GEOTECN
Sample: 09A TB-40/7-8
Collected:
Detecti Date
Test Name
Method
Resutit
Units
Limit Started
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
60
MG/KG
06/17/92
NY
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Cam
NY
Specific Conductance
01125-82 B
200
UMHOS/CM
06/17/92
NY
Sulfate
EPA 375.E
18
NG/KG
06/17/92
NV
PH _
EPA 9045
9.0
pH Units
06/17/92
NY
Saapte: 1DA TB-45/7-8
Collected:
Detecti Date
`
Test Name
Method
Result
Units
Limit Start
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
31
NWKG
06/17/92
MY
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Cam
NY
Specific Conductance
01125-82 B
220
uNHOS/CM
06/17/92
MY
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
48
NG/KG
06/17/92
Nil
pH
EPA 9045
9.1
pH Units
06/17/92
Nil
Sample: 11A TB-50/7-8 Collected:
etecti Date
Test Nww
Nethod
Resutt
Units
Limit Started
Anstyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
10
NG/KG
06/17/92
Nit
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Can
NY
specific Conductance
01125-82 B
250
UNHOS/CM
06/17/92
IN
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
155
NG/KG
06/17/92
MY
PH
EPA 9045
9.2
pH Units
06/17/92
MY
Sampla: 12A TB-56/9-10 Collected:
etecti Date
s No
Method
Result
Units
Limit Started
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
11
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Can
NY
Specific Conductance
01125-82 B
250
UNHOS/CM
06/17/92
NY
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
64
NG/KG
06/17/92
NY
pH
EPA 9045
9.0
pH Units
06/17/92
NN
A-l+6
A-47
Order / 02-05-261 Pape 5
08/10/92 14:56 TEST RESULTS BY SIMPLE
Client: GEOTECM
Sample: 13A TB-61/9.10
Collected:
Detecti Date
Test Name
Method
Resutt
units
LiMi:1 Started
Analyst
Chloride
EPA 325.3
10
MG/KG
06/17/92
MW
Soil/Solid preparation
Filtration
06/17/92
Date Com
MY
Specific Conductance
01125-82 B
170
UMHOS/CM
06/17/92
MY
Sulfate
EPA 375.4
<1
MG/KG
06/17/92
MV
PH
EPA 9045
9.2
pH Units
06/17/92
MY
A- 7
A-48